Home

YAWL User Manual 3.0 version

1. Name Type Scope Initial Value P ssn string Local gt rating double Local 560 gt fault string Local Bankruptcy it Output Data Bindings for Task ReceiveSSN Output To TAUS Net Variable ssn Decomposition Variables x Name Type Scope P ssn string Output Generate Binding From Task Variable ssn X Binding ReceiveSSN ssn text t Av Alb B Cancel Apply Figure 5 7 Parameter definition for task ReceiveSSN Figure 5 8 shows the flow definition at task ReceiveSSN The predicate for the flow leading to task Re 132 CHAPTER 5 HOW TO MANIPULATE DATA IN YAWL portFault is starts with Credit Rating Process ssn text 0 It returns true if the string assigned to variable ssn starts with zero Otherwise the flow leading to task DecideRating will be taken Since the flow evaluation is performed from the top most flow to bottom most flow at run time the bottom most flow will be used as the default The query Credit Rating Process ssn text can be generated by clicking the Generate button in the Update Predicate for Flow dialog 800 Split Predicates for Task ReceiveSSN Target Predicate ReportFault starts with Credit_Rating_Process ssn text 0 DecideRating true aM The bottom most flow is the default OK Figure 5 8 Split Pred
2. Figure 4 46 Resourcing Dialog Secondary Resources tab A category of non human resources provides a similar relation to that of a role to participants it is a grouping of resources Each category may also have listed a number of subcategories Some examples may be 4 8 THE RESOURCE PERSPECTIVE 95 e office machines denotes any non human resource in the office machines category including all those listed in any subcategories e office machines gt copiers denotes those non human resources in the copiers subcategory of the office machines category e office machines gt no category denotes those non human resources in the office machines category that are not further subcategorised If a participant chosen as a secondary resource also becomes the primary resource for a task then their demarcation as primary resource takes precedence 4 8 3 Task Privileges Tab Participant Task privileges i e privileges that apply only for this task may be set on the Task Privileges Tab For example we can specify here whether participants are allowed to suspend the execution of work items of the selected task or to skip them and so on e 00 Resources for Task Surgical_Procedure Primary Resources Secondary Resources Task Privileges Participants Allow work item suspension Allow work item reallocation with Participants reset state Allow work item reall
3. ations N visit Sue 25 01 decide S u e interaction with the register task of the existing MDM 05 02 Proclet instance interaction graph is created for Sue c Interaction graph that has been defined for the entity Sue so far Additionally by the dotted arcs the next interactions that can be nominated are visualized Figure 9 22 Creating an interaction graph for Sue The possible interactions starting from the visit Sue 25 01 decide node are indicated by dotted arcs 268 CHAPTER 9 THE PROCLET SERVICE Proclet class which represents the second visit of Sue Additionally it is decided to have an interaction with the register task of the existing MDM Proclet instance in order to register Sue for the multidis ciplinary meeting Step 2 The new interaction graph can be seen in Figure 9 23 As can be seen there is an arc leading from the visit Sue 25 01 decide node to the MDM 05 02 register node which represents the interaction with the register task of the MDM in stance The arc leading to the visit T1 create node represents the instance of the visit that will be created in order to have the second visit of the patient Note that a temporary instance identifier is used T1 because the instance still needs to be created For the new interaction arcs it can be seen that their current state is unpr
4. visit 64 decide No interactions can be selected for the visit 40 createCondition visit a Updated graph after selecting the creation of an instance for the visit P is registered for the MDO meeting Interaction Definition Editor Model Interaction Point Window Procletinstance Extra Help Mouse Mode select entity Sue PICKING k FRLayout Selection of interactions for the multidisciplinary meeting mdo_meeting 65 register 3 Existing or Temporary Proclet Instance Ultimately the send report task is Internal Interaction performed mdo_meeting 65 send_reports visit 64 decide visit 40 createCondition Finish selection b Possible interactions for the multidisciplinary meeting Figure 9 33 Extending the interaction graph of Sue with an internal interaction 284 CHAPTER 9 THE PROCLET SERVICE MDM MDM D 05 02 Sue 5 05 02 register executed_none send report c ae h BB interaction graph 9 25 for Sue in Figure 52 6 10 S B P Sue 7 T 7 Ti Ho oN unproduced visit T 1 create J receive J l I I aa I Z I ia l a I I l EN fe i N mdo meefing 65 register mdo_meeting 66 send_reports I Io f 7 Z Za Pi f Bee
5. o Allow work item reallocation with pParticipants reset state p O Restrict Privilege Allow work item reallocation with Participants retained state C Restrict Privilege Participants L Allow work item deallocation C Restrict Privilege Participants C Allow work item delegation a Oo Restrict Privilege Participants C Allow work item to be skipped n O Restrict Privilege Participants Sal Tessio st Allow work item to be piled Restrict Privilege cancel Aapoy o Figure 6 13 The Task Privileges tab of the Resourcing Dialog Broadly speaking task privileges grant or deny the ability to affect in various ways how work items are resourced after initial distribution has completed There are seven task privileges e Allow work item suspension When granted allows a participant to suspend the execution of a work item after it has been started e Allow work item reallocation with reset state When granted allows a participant to transfer re 164 CHAPTER 6 THE RUNTIME ENVIRONMENT sponsibility for the execution of a work item from themselves to another participant with the data parameters of the work item reset to the values held when the work item was first started Allow work item reallocation with retained state When granted allows a participant
6. V Launch New Case Cancel Figure 4 6 Specification Upload Options dialog Unload Previous Versions The Engine allows multiple versions a particular specification to co exist in the Engine so that any currently running instances may continue under previous versions of a specification while new instances can be started under new versions When this option is selected all previous versions of the current specification will be removed from the Engine subject to whether the following option is checked Cancel Running Cases If you choose the Unload Previous Versions option above you may also choose to cancel any currently running cases that are instances of those versions If you choose this option all currently running instances of previous versions of the specification will be cancelled before the removal of those previous versions If you do not choose to cancel running cases then only those previous versions that do not have instances of them currently running will be removed because the Engine requires a loaded specification for all currently running instances 4 4 THE CONTROL FLOW PERSPECTIVE 53 Launch New Case When selected the current specification will be loaded into the Engine and a new instance of it will be launched Make the appropriate selections in the dialog then click OK to upload the currently loaded specification into the Engine The specification will first be automatically verified and the u
7. Binding Task Variable Attend_University StudentNumber text StudentNumber Attend_University SubjectCode text SubjectCode Output Bindings Binding Net Variable Enrol StudentNumber text StudentNumber Enrol SubjectCode text SubjectCode Figure 4 27 The Bindings Summary Dialog 4 7 THE DATA PERSPECTIVE 77 The dialog presents a read only view but the toolbar under each list provides two buttons the first for opening the selected binding in the appropriate Bindings dialog for editing the second for removing the binding from the variable which won t be necessary in most cases Now that we have an understanding of net level and task level variables and how to create bindings to map values between them we can revisit the earlier example from Section 4 7 3 where we created two local variables for the sub net Attend University By creating them with Local scope they are actually different variables than those of the same name created in the outer parent net My Career If you wanted to map the values of those variables from the parent net to the sub net then their scope in the sub net will need to be changed from Local to Input Only since they are not to be updated in the sub net s tasks then perform the appropriate mapping between the parent net and the Attend University composite task following one of the methods described above Defining Parameters using External Data Sources As
8. Database YAWL comes preconfigured with a H2 database Mnttp yawlfoundation org forum 2nttp www h2database com 16 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION 2 3 YAWL Control Panel The Control Panel is a small java desktop application that supports starting stopping and updating the installed YAWL environment On Windows it can be accessed via the Start Menu in the YAWL 3 0 folder or for all systems it can be found as Yaw ControlPanel 3 0 jar in the controlpanel sub folder of the YAWL 3 0 installation folder OO _ YAWL 3 0 Control Panel Logon Updates Output Log Preferences J Figure 2 4 YAWL Control Panel The Control Panel consists of a YAWL logo and a status panel which each reflect the current status of the YAWL Fngine i e Starting Running Stopping Stopped and five buttons on Windows platforms the Output Log button is omitted see below as shown in Figure 2 4 e Start Stop When YAWL is stopped this button will be labelled Start Click the button to start the YAWL environment Note that it may take 20 to 60 seconds for the start process to complete When YAWL is running the button s label will change to Stop Click the button to stop the YAWL en vironment When starting and stopping the logo and status panel will update to show the current status Logon Click the Logon button to open the YAWL logon page in your default browser Note that this button is enabled only when YAWL is
9. Study_Privately Look for Easier Book Read a Book Knowledge Feel Smarter Gained Figure 4 14 The Study Privately sub net The Knowledge Gained condition in Figure 4 14 shows an example of a Deferred Choice construct When the condition is reached during execution of the process both of its outgoing flows are activated a condition may have any number of incoming and outgoing flows This results in both the Look for Easier Book and Feel Smarter tasks appearing in the user s work list allowing the user to make a deferred choice between the two As soon as the user chooses the appropriate task for execution the other task is immediately withdrawn and is removed from the work list 4 4 8 Changing the Starting Net At any stage you can change the starting root Net of the specification Every net in a specification has a Root Net property You can use this property to promote a sub net to be the new root net for the specification To do so select the appropriate sub net and tick the property s checkbox Note that you can t demote the current root net directly its property is greyed out since that will leave the specification without a root net but promoting a sub net will automatically demote the current root net to sub net status Notice that the root net has an input condition symbol in its title tab All sub nets have a composite task symbol G in their title tab
10. Analysis The Analysis pane is used to set parameters applicable to the Verification Analysis feature of the Editor explained in detail in Section 4 11 File Paths The File Paths pane is used to set the directories for the location of user defined task icons Section 4 5 4 and the WofYAWL analysis tool Section 4 11 and the files that contain definitions for User Defined Extended Attributes Section 4 18 Save Options The Save Options pane is used to set the various parameters involved when saving a specification to disk file cf Section 4 3 3 It also contains one additional option Reload most recent specification on startup When selected the specification that was opened in the Editor when it last closed will be reopened next time you start the Editor Defaults The Defaults pane is where parameters for default net background colour element fill colour and label font are set This pane also provides the following two preferences Show Description panel in properties pane When checked a description of the selected prop erty appears at the bottom of the Properties Pane Uncheck this option to hide the description panel Check for updates when Editor starts When checked each time the Editor starts it will check to see if there are any new updates available for the Editor and if there are will display the details in a dialog with options for downloading and updating see Section 4 20 for details on checking for updates
11. BookList to BookOrder which is the data type of each item in the book list the variable row is highlighted blue to denote that it is the marked MI variable for this task and the arrowhead icon on the left side of the variable row has changed to an MI Task icon The input and output parameter mappings for MI tasks are a little different to atomic single instance tasks In addition to the mappings to pass the initial and final data values between net level and task level two more queries are required one which defines how to split the list of values into individual components and the other which defines how to join those components back into the composite list Fortunately those additional queries are also generated automatically when you mark a variable as the MI variable for the task Let s review the generated input queries for the formal MI variable With the bookList task level variable selected click the Input Bindings button Notice that the dialog has an additional input field for the MI Splitting Query which shows the generated query Figure 4 37 Notice also that for the Input Binding the entire MasterList value is specified rather than its child content i e there s no at its end The MI Splitter Query is an XQuery expression that is used to take the list variable mapped in and split it into a number of child elements one for each member of the list In natural
12. O Chain Work Item Execution M Manage Cases Password New Order Fulfilment Manage Figure 6 12 User Management The User Mgt Screen consists of four panels top left shows the participant s personal details name pass word userid and so on top right allows the setting of user privileges see below bottom left allows the assigning of the participant to various roles positions and capabilities and bottom right is where the partic ipant s password can be reset There are many similarities between the User Mgt and Org Data Mgt Screens regarding the addition modification and removal of items e To View an existing participant s details select the participant s name from the Participant dropdowm list e To Add a new participant click the New button which will disable the dropdown and activate all other fields For a new participant entries for first name last name userid and password new and confirm are required Userids must begin with a character and may contain the letters digits and un derscores Passwords must be at least 4 characters in length The description note and administrator fields are optional as are privilege settings by default all are unselected and role position capabil ity memberships When you have finished adding participant information click the Add button You may cancel the addition at any time by clicking the Reset button instead
13. down arrow button on the right of the YAWL gadget s title bar then select Edit Settings from the context menu that appears UserID required A valid YAWL user account id Password required The password for the nominated YAWL account Note that the password is re tained as plain text so please ensure you log out of iGoogle before anyone else uses the same computer e YAWL Base URI required The URI of the Tomcat container running the YAWL Resource Service that will recognise the userid and password entered The YAWL URI may be local on the current computer or remote accessible via the internet Name optional Any text entered here will display on the titlebar of the gadget after the YAWL Worklist title Alt Tab Names optional By default the names shown in the worklist s tabs for each queue are Of fered Allocated Started and Suspended Choosing the Alt Tab Names option will instead show them as Available Assigned In Progress and Suspended 6 10 YAWL WORKLIST IGOOGLE GADGET 177 e Show Suspended optional If this option is unselected the Suspended queue will be hidden Note that due to the width limits of iGoogle gadgets when the Suspended queue is shown the number of work items in each queue cannot be displayed with the tab title YAWL Worklist UserlD Ese apple VREE http localhost 8080 Name Alt Tab Names amp Show
14. e A Check for Updates item which allows you to check for any updates to the Editor and if so provides for the downloading and automatic replacement of the current Editor with the latest version Section 4 20 4 2 3 Elements Palette The Elements Palette contains six selectable buttons five YAWL language icons and a selection tool that allow the creation selection and positioning of objects within your specification The palette buttons are also accessible via a popup menu by right clicking on any blank area of the canvas Once a Palette button is selected it is possible to place objects of that type on the canvas by left clicking the mouse button at the desired location Each is briefly described below Atomic Task mi Select this button to create one or more Atomic Tasks each of which represents a single task to be performed usually by a human participant or an external application or service Multiple Instance Atomic Task Select this button to create one or more Multiple Instance Atomic Tasks each of which allows you to run multiple instances of a task concurrently Condition Ol Select this button to create a Condition which is a way to represent state for the Net between the execution of particular tasks 4 2 THE YAWL EDITOR WORKSPACE 47 Composite Task o Select this button to create a Composite Task which is a container for a sub net with its own set of YAWL elements and constrained by the same
15. e gt cD localhost 8080 resourceService faces participantData jsp 2 Cases Admin Queues Org Data Participant Corleone Michael Privileges Choose Which Work Item to Start Michael i Conaone Start Work Items Concurrently me C Administrator Reorder Work items C View All Work Items of Team C View All Work items of Org Group C Chain Work Item Execution C Manage Cases PO Manager Senior Credit Officer Figure 3 6 Defining a Participant 3 4 ADVANCED WORKFLOW CONCEPTS 35 tasks Back in the Editor select a task with your mouse and then in the Properties window on the left click on the Resourcing property in the Task section Clicking on the property s button will show the Resourcing dialog for that task Figure 3 7 shows the dialog with the Enable System Offers interaction strategy selected and the Senior Credit Officer role added This means at runtime the system will offer an instance of the task to all participants who are members of that role from where one of these participants can then choose to allo cate this instance to themselves and later choose to actually start working on it This strategy Offer System Allocation User Start User is a common interaction strategy for tasks to be executed by participants e 0 0 Resources for Task Large _Credit_Approval Primary Resources Secondary Resources Task Privile
16. make trip This query determines the output parameter defini tion for root net variable itinerary Finally an aggregate Query generates an overall result and passes the data to variable itinerary on completion of all instances of task do itinerary segment within a single itinerary 140 CHAPTER 5 HOW TO MANIPULATE DATA IN YAWL lt xs schema xmins xs http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema gt lt xs complexType name itineraryType gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs element name itinerarySegment type itinerarySegT ype maxOccurs unbounded gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs complexType name itinerarySegT ype gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs element name departure_location type xs string gt lt xs element name destination type xs string gt lt xs element name startDate type xs date gt lt xs element name endDate type xs date gt lt xs element name flight type xs string gt lt xs element name hotel type xs string gt lt xs element name car type xs string gt lt xs element name subTotal type xs double gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs complexType name legsType gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs element name leg type leglype maxOccurs unbounded gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs complexType name legType gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs element name departure_location type xs string gt lt xs
17. node to the lab T1 create node has been changed to sent The same can be observed for the arc leading from the visit Sue 25 01 decide node to the visit T2 create node This is due to the fact that a performative has been sent for that interaction That is the sender and receiver of the performative match with the sender and receiver of the associated interaction arc in the graph Also the performative contains the interaction identifier of the arc for which it is sent Step 2 The next step is shown in Figure 9 5 The receival of the two performatives has resulted in the creation of an instance for the lab Proclet class and the visit Proclet class as well Instead of instance identifier T1 the instance of the lab Proclet class now has the identifier lab 25 01 As a consequence in the interaction graph for Sue the interaction nodes referring to the lab instance have been updated with the new instance identifier Moreover the interaction state of the arc leading from the visit Sue 25 01 decide node to the lab 25 01 create node has been changed to consumed That is a performative has been received for that interaction arc which resulted in the creation of an instance of a Proclet class i e the performative can be considered to be consumed as its receival led to a certain action Additionally it can be seen that the interaction state of the arc from t
18. 4 13 TASK TIMERS 103 To associate a codelet with a task decomposition first mark the decomposition as automated by selecting the Decomposition Automated property and checking the box When checked the Codelet property is enabled selecting that property opens the Set Codelet for Automated Decomposition dialog listing the available codelets Figure 4 52 Note that a valid connection to the Resource Service is required for this list to be populated with codelets see Section 4 10 The dialog lists the available codelets together with a description of what each one does and the task variables required to successfully execute it For example if ExampleCodelet is chosen the automated task requires 3 variables to be created input variables a and b and output variable c all of type long These variables are automatically added to the task decomposition when the codelet is selected for a task at runtime if the required variables values are not present the codelet will be unable to successfully complete the task will still complete successfully however The codelet repository has been designed as pluggable so that designers and developers can easily add new codelets to perform various operations which will immediately be available to process designers via the dialog above as long as there is a valid connection to the Resource Service 4 13 Task Timers Any atomic task can be assigned a timer behaviour To
19. 4 5 CHANGING THE APPEARANCE OF YOUR SPECIFICATION 63 The Net Repository The Net menu has three items that allow you to save load and remove nets to and from the repository This means you may save any net root or sub net and all of its contents to the repository Later you can load any saved net from the repository into another specification In this way a saved root net can become a sub net in a different specification and vice versa To add the current net to the repository select Net then Store in Repository from the menu In the dialog that appears give the stored net a name the current net name is provided but may be changed as desired and a meaningful description then click OK to save The net and all its content will be saved to the repository under the name provided To retrieve a previously saved net from the repository select Net then Load from Repository select the name of the desired net from the list then click OK The net will be added to the current specification as a sub net which you can then promote to root net or assign to a composite task as required Finally existing nets can be removed from the repository at any time by selecting Net then Remove from Repository choosing the name for the net to remove from the list of stored nets then clicking OK 4 5 Changing the Appearance of Your Specification At any time you can change the appearance of the specification and its nets and elements o
20. ExceptionService has been abbreviated to ES and WorkletService to WS 234 12 16 31 875 12 16 31 984 12 16 32 093 12 16 32 109 12 16 32 156 12 16 32 281 12 28 17 968 12 28 18 000 12 28 18 015 12 28 18 078 12 28 18 093 12 28 18 093 12 56 08 000 12 56 08 015 12 56 08 140 12 56 08 140 12 56 08 156 12 56 08 171 12 56 08 203 12 56 08 343 12 56 08 546 12 56 08 578 12 56 08 593 12 56 08 593 12 56 08 593 12 56 08 593 12 56 08 609 12 56 08 609 12 56 08 640 12 56 08 656 13 02 48 171 13 02 48 187 13 02 48 234 13 02 48 250 13 02 48 265 13 02 48 265 13 10 10 468 13 10 10 484 13 10 10 500 13 10 10 500 13 10 10 515 13 10 10 515 DEBUG WS INFO ES NFO NFO NFO ES ES ES NFO ES DEBUG WS CHAPTER 8 THE WORKLET SERVICE HANDLE CHECK CASE CONSTRAINT EVENT Checking constraints for start of case 20 of specification OrganiseConcert No pre case constraints defined for spec OrganiseConcert HANDLE CHECK WORKITEM CONSTRAINT EVENT Checking pre constraints for workitem 20 BookStadium_5 No pre task constraints defined for task BookStadium HANDLE CHECK WORKITEM CONSTRAINT EVENT Checking pre constraints for workitem 20 SellTickets_3 No pre task constraints defined for task SellTickets HANDLE CHECK WORKITEM CONSTRAINT EVENT Checking post constraints for workitem 20 1 BookStadium_5 No post task constraints defined for task BookStadium HANDLE CHECK WORKITEM CONST
21. Figure 4 4 An invalid specification Verify specification When selected will run a verification each time the specification is saved to file Checking this option is recommended unless you a doing many interim saves of specifications you know to be incomplete Analyse specification When selected will deeply analyse the specification each time it is saved to file See Section 4 11 for more details of the Analysis process Note analysis may take some time for large and or complex models and should be unchecked for incremental saves of such models Auto increment minor version number When selected the minor part of the specification s version number will increment each time the file is saved Checking this option is recommended Backup previous version When selected the last saved version of the specification will be copied to a file of the same name but with a bak extension Checking this option is recommended Keep all previous versions When selected the previous version of the specification will be copied toa file of the same name but with its version number appended to it so that an archive of each and every version of a specification can be maintained For example if you have a specification called Insur anceClaim yawl and have chosen to auto increment the minor version number each time a version of the file is saved a copy of the previous version will be created called InsuranceClaim 0 1 yawl InsuranceClaim
22. Font Verdana 14 Preview p Icon Join Position West Know Join Type KOR sac Verdana 14 Regular Gair abe ead a Boo Location 212 0 176 0 Font The Font Cancel A D lono aho te sacii on Figure 4 17 Font dialog 4 5 4 Task Icons You can add change or remove an icon to any atomic task to signify or identify its intended action or to aid in readability You are free to assign any icon there are over 400 to choose from Icons have no effect on how the task is instantiated at runtime To add or change a task icon select any single atomic task then select its Icon property Choose the desired icon from the dropdown list To remove an icon select None from the dropdown list Using Custom Icons You may also plug in and use your own icon sets Icons must be of the PNG file format and be a maximum of 24 x 24 pixels to render properly within task boundaries The editor will load user supplied task icons from the location specified for them in the File Pathspane of the Preferences dialog cf Section 4 9 if never specified the location defaults to the directory lt editor_installation_path gt YAWLEditorPlugins TaskIcons All icons found in the specified location are added to the dropdown list of the Icon property for selection If a specification is loaded into the editor that contains a reference to an icon that cannot be found a special broken icon will render in its place as depicte
23. Multiplicity STAR v Finish c Panel for manipulation of a port Figure 9 29 Definition of the interaction points ports and internal interactions of a Proclet class 9 1 INTER WORKFLOW SUPPORT 279 H interaction Definition Editor 10l x Model Interaction Point Window Procletinstance Extra Help External Interactions RRA go Mouse Mode External Interactions PICKING v Add External Interaction Remove External Interaction SpringLayout2 EA lab_visit_in ONE QUEST IN HoResult_visit_outSTAR ONE OUT mdoResult_visit_inONE QUEST IN Adding or removing an internal interaction Figure 9 30 Definition of the external interactions of Proclet classes Interaction Definition Editor The Interaction Definition Editor is distributed as part of the YAWL Proclet Service and can be found in the tomcat webapps procletService directory along with two launchers runEditor bat for Windows based systems and runEditor sh for nix based systems and an editor properties file The editor depends on a number of external libraries which are normally located either in the tomcat 1ib directory of YAWL4Study installations or the tomcat webapps procletService WEB INF 1ib direc tory of Enterprise installations and using the appropriate launcher to start the editor will locate the required libraries assuming the editor is being run on the same machine as the proc
24. Proclet instance had been completed and no performative had been sent from the send report task e g due to a choice in the process then the same procedure as described above would be followed Inbox Interaction Point Another exception that may occur in the context of canceling a Proclet instance is related to an inbox interaction point This is illustrated in Figure 9 20 Here for the first scenario we assume that the visit Proclet instance for the second visit is canceled and that no tasks for it have been executed yet Figure 9 20a Also for the lab Proclet instance we assume that no tasks have been executed Looking at the interaction graph of Sue Figure 9 20b for the arcs that relate to the canceled visit in stance we can see that the arc from the lab Sue 25 01 send report node to the visit Sue 10 02 receive node has the state unproduced So no performative has yet been sent from the send report task to the receive task of the canceled visit Proclet instance Note that the receive task is linked with an inbox interaction point So we have an exceptional situation as the performative which still needs to be sent from the send report task can never be consumed by the received task i e the defined interaction will never occur Subsequently the arc from the lab Sue 25 01 send report node to the visit SSue 10 02 receive node transitio
25. YAWL User Manual Version 3 0 2004 2014 The YAWL Foundation Contents 1 Introduction 9 Tek Whats YAWL eenaa a ee Be OR whe wire ee Wee Oo oe Ae S a 9 1 2 Obtaining the Latest Version of YAWL 2 eee 10 1 3 The YAW Foundation ioes aa 2 8 wad ae we a OOP Rw whe art ea RAS 10 LAs Documentation sse 28 2 24 Ok Pie Ree ite we BOR w oh ht ee eS 10 2 Installation 13 2L JROGUITCIMENES ana nh ane sale gh ah eotah ae apple E E aE brah ad EATE E By a eeah a a Oe ae 13 22s instaliro YAW Li ct srcd 28 ce Sate R ge sea fa ahs agate da gon aD oe ets Galee ah te at oa ke Goon nah de an one do ae St 14 237 YAWE Control Panel odee 6603 2 ek aah a aot ee eee os Oh Bee aie ed Be E 16 2 4 Manual Installation YAWL Enterprise 2 0 0 ee 18 3 Getting Started with YAWL 27 3 1 troduction sas 2 26 7 2s 22 Bw td o Abe ee Pe SB e a ees oe ees 27 3 2 Terminology 42 8 4 3 4 0h to Lae ite AS RS res BAe eRe Pah BAO 28 3 3 Building a Simple Workflow Example 1 0 2 ee 29 3 4 Advanced Workflow Concepts 2 6 ee 32 3 5 Where To Front Herec iata ie ee eS ae ee ae Ge le ea amp ene ee we 40 4 The Editor 41 4 Launching the YAWL Editor 2 62 sce as esd Bake Be ED eae Gee a 41 4 2 The YAWL Editor Workspace gt q oag sea nar dania Dai ee 42 4 3 Working with YAWL Specification files oaa ee 49 44 The Control Flow Perspective is Goca sardaua bon ee 53 4 5 Changing the Appearance of Your Specification 2 0 e
26. distributed with the service as part of the YAWL 2 2 release This icon indicates a hands on method or instruction 8 1 What is a Custom YAWL Service An important point of extensibility of the YAWL system is its support for interconnecting external appli cations and services with the workflow execution engine using a service oriented approach This enables running workflow instances and external applications to interact with each other in order to delegate work to signal the creation of process instances and workitems or to notify a certain event or a change of status of existing workitems Custom YAWL services are external applications that interact with the YAWL engine through XML HTTP messages via certain endpoints some located on the YAWL engine side and others on the service side Custom YAWL services are registered with the YAWL engine by specifying their location in the form of a base URL Once registered a custom service may send and receive XML messages to and from the engine More specifically Custom YAWL services are able to check out and check in workitems from the YAWL engine They receive a message when an item is enabled and therefore can be checked out When the Custom YAWL service is finished with the item it can check it back in in which case the engine will set the work item to be completed and proceed with the execution 8 1 1 What is the YAWL Worklet Service The Worklet Dynamic Process Selection amp Except
27. s organisational model A task with an automated decomposition is a task that is not offered to any resource but is executed by the system This type of task can be used to manipulate the content of net variables from simple data assignments to complex reports generation Alternately it may be associated with a codelet a discrete piece of code that is executed optionally using the input variables of the task and assigning any results to the chosen output variables of the task Both task types are handled by the Resource Service but the behaviour of an automated task differs as follows e on enablement it is automatically checked out of the engine thus having priority over manual tasks in a deferred choice and its input parameters are parsed e if a codelet has been specified it will be executed using the task s variables as required then e it is automatically checked in and its output variables are mapped back to the corresponding net variables A task is designated as manual by default but can be set as automated by selecting the Automated property in the Decomposition section of the Properties Pane When the Automated checkbox is checked the task will display an automated indicator and the Task Resourcing property will be disabled since human resources cannot be assigned to automated tasks Data manipulation can be achieved by using the task s variables and their Input and Output bindings Bindings are genera
28. 1 Select the Data Variables property in the Net section of the Properties Pane then click its Action button to show the Data Variables Dialog for the Net ee We will be adding Net variables in the Attend University net Go to the Attend University net and choose its Data Variables property then open the Data Variables Dialog see Figure 4 22 e090 Data Variables for Net Attend_University Name Type Scope Initial Value gt StudentNumber string Local P subjectCode string Local t aAv cancel aoon ox Figure 4 22 Adding Attend University Net Variables 2 Click the button on the toolbar under the list area to begin adding a new variable Enter a Name for the variable choose the appropriate Type and intended Scope of the variable from those listed then click OK to save the variable and close the dialog Rey Add a new net variable enter StudentNumber for the Name of the variable leave the Type as string the Scope as Local and the Initial Value blank Create another net variable with the Name SubjectCode Type string Scope Local and Initial Value blank scope types will be explained a little later Click OK to save the new variables 70 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR 4 7 2 Creating Task Level Variables Task level variables are not added to a task directly but rather to its decomposition Task Decompositions By choosing the Name property in
29. 236 CHAPTER 8 THE WORKLET SERVICE Chapter 9 The Proclet Service In this chapter we introduce the Inter Workflow Service of YAWL First we provide in Section 9 1 an elab orate introduction to the Proclets framework and how inter workflow support is achieved Afterwards in Section 9 1 4 its discussed how inter workflow support is supported within YAWL by means of the Inter Workflow Service 9 1 Inter Workflow Support 9 1 1 Introduction Classical workflow notations primarily support monolithic processes They are able to describe the life cycle of individual cases and allow for hierarchical decomposition Unfortunately real life processes are fragmented and are often composed of separate but intertwined life cycles running at different speeds and coping with different levels of granularity In order to provide the desired support Proclets are an interest ing means of modeling and executing complex and intertwined real life processes Proclets are lightweight interacting processes that can be used to divide complex entangled processes into simple fragments and in doing so place increased emphasis on interaction related aspects of workflows Proclets aim to address the following problems that existing workflow approaches are currently facing e Models need to be artificially flattened and are unable to account for the mix of different perspectives and granularities that coexist in real life processes e Cases need to be straightj
30. An error message will appear if any file fails verification You may try again later 3 Once verification has completed successfully for each file downloaded if any the Engine will be stopped if it is currently running so that the updates installs and uninstalls can be applied 4 The selected changes will be applied 5 The Engine will be re started 3see Section 2 4 3 for more details of the purpose and use of each component 18 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION e 90 YAWL 3 0 Updates Name Description Current Latest Un Install controlpanel This YAWL Control Panel application 16 17 i yawl The core YAWL Engine 1293 1293 V resourceService Handles the resource perspective 3822 3822 documentStore Stores files as data for processes 50 50 vi digitalSignature Adds secure digital signatures to tasks 178 178 M mailService Send emails from tasks 109 109 M monitorService Provides basic process monitoring 494 494 M twitterService Sends Twitter status messages from tasks 87 87 e workletService Handles flexibility and exception handling 1705 1705 M yawlWSInvoker Invokes external web services from tasks 237 237 M costService Adds cost awareness to processes and tasks 127 procletService Handles inter process communications 395 M schedulingService Schedules resources for future tasks 350 yawlSMSInvoker Sends text messages from tasks 133 e Update Figure 2 6 Control Panel Updates dialog 6 Once the restart has completed the Updates di
31. Checking post constraints for workitem 21 2 Book_Ent_Centre_5 No post task constraints defined for task Book_Ent_Centre 8 8 SAMPLE LOG GENERATED BY WALKTHROUGH C 235 13 13 59 281 13 13 59 281 13 13 59 281 13 13 59 296 13 13 59 437 13 13 59 468 13 13 59 515 13 13 59 531 13 13 59 531 13 13 59 546 13 13 59 750 13 13 59 875 13 13 59 953 13 14 00 046 13 14 00 046 13 14 00 156 13 14 00 171 INFO ES DEBUG ES INFO ES DEBUG ES DEBUG ES m p p p pg DEBUG ES INFO ES INFO ES INFO ES INFO ES INFO ES DEBUG ES HANDLE CHECK CASE CONSTRAINT EVENT Checking constraints for end of case 21 No post case constraints defined for spec ChangeToMid Venue Worklet ran as exception handler for case 20 Exception process step 3 Action continue Target workitem Successful work item unsuspend 20 DoShow 4 HANDLE CHECK WORKITEM CONSTRAINT EVENT Checking post constraints fo workitem 21 3 Tell_Punters_4 No post task constraints defined fortask Tell_Punters Exception monitoring complete for case 21 HANDLE CHECK CASE CONSTRAINT EVENT Checking constraints for end of case 20 No post case constraints defined for spec OrganiseConcert HANDLE CHECK WORKITEM CONSTRAINT EVENT Checking post constraints for workitem 20 3 DoShow 4 No post task constraints defined for task DoShow Exception monitoring complete for case 20
32. Furthermore where an exception occurs for a certain Proclet instance for the entities that are affected by the exception the corresponding interaction graph may be extended Note that an entity is affected by an exception if for one or more interaction arcs in the corresponding interaction graph the resultant state is changed to failed Extension In Figure 9 25 the procedure that is followed for extending an interaction graph is visualized Before starting the procedure it is first identified whether the instance of the configuration interaction point is itself present in the interaction graph If not an interaction node for it is added Afterwards the procedure is started by determining which nodes in the graph are active A node is active if for its Proclet instance identifier a Proclet instance exists with the same instance identifier Also a node is considered to be active if it has a temporary instance identifier i e the Proclet instance still needs to be created Obviously for active interaction nodes interactions that are defined for it may potentially occur at some time in the future Having determined all the active interaction nodes in the interaction graph for each of them it is determined in which subsequent interactions the node can be involved i e the candidate interactions For identifying these candidate interactions for active nodes three different situations can be distinguished which are indi cated by the three
33. Laptop2 M1 13 M3 02 M3 11 Nikon SLR OR 1 OR 2 OR 3 RR1 15 RR3 09 Video 1 Roles Categories administrator AG Anesthesiologist APO Cardiologist Carrier Admin Officer Client Liaison Courier CRO Customer EO ESC Finance Officer Installer Junior Supply Officer Order Fulfilment Manager BO Mananar office machines office machines gt cameras office machines gt copiers office machines gt None office machines gt portable computers rooms rooms gt meeting rooms gt None rooms gt operating theatres rooms gt recovery tools tools gt drill tools gt hammer tools gt None tools gt spanner Figure 6 6 Secondary Resources dialog Clicking on the Secondary button opens the Secondary Resource Administration dialog shown in Figure 6 6 156 CHAPTER 6 THE RUNTIME ENVIRONMENT This dialog has a similar layout to the Secondary Resources panel of the Editor s Resourcing Dialog cf Section 4 8 2 On the left are lists of individual participants and their Roles and individual assets i e non human resources and their categories On the right is the list of selected secondary resources for the chosen work item Selecting an item from a list on the left will move it to the list of selected resources on the right Individual participants and assets can only be added once but roles and categories may be added se
34. OT _ a initi P L a initial zai rf 1 D gt P gt gt prepar sim H gt m gt sea m afons z 4 ations ki a The Proclet instances that need to be performed for Sue and Anne For both the desired interactions are shown MDM MDM D 05 02 Sue 5 05 02 register executed_none send report Ba s 9 E j g D e Qz visit So Sue 25 01 visit decide Sue 7 T1 sent visit T1 create receive MDM MDM gt 05 02 Anne 5 05 02 register executed_none send report a A n e Q gt visit So Anne 26 01 visit decide Anne 7 1 sent visit T2 create receive b Updated interaction graphs for Sue and Anne As a result of sending out performatives the state of interaction arcs in the graphs of Sue and Anne are changed into sent Figure 9 10 As a result of executing the decide task for both Sue and Anne in total four performatives are sent As a consequence both interaction graphs are updated 9 1 INTER WORKFLOW SUPPORT visit Sue 25 01 251 visit Sue 10 02 initi ly aN initial as P re Vm decid broch g
35. The Proclet instances that need to be performed for Sue and Anne For both the desired interactions are shown b Updated interaction graphs for Sue and Anne As a result of executing the register task the state of the incoming interaction arc of the MDM 05 02 register node in both graphs is simultaneously updated to consumed Moreover in both graphs the state of the outgoing interaction arc of the MDM 05 02 register node is simultaneously updated to executed source Figure 9 12 The register task of the multidisciplinary meeting is performed As performatives have been sent earlier which contain either Sue 4 or Anne 4 as interaction identifiers the task may be completed Subsequently the interaction graphs for both are updated 9 1 INTER WORKFLOW SUPPORT 253 visit Sue 25 01 visit Sue 10 02 init re deg bro mm lam AN initial f acei decid _ broch ga P gt r gt i EB TD P gt prepar bh H l gt E ee Mas J S Ee LET ations ve y e ures E E k cy Sue and Anne send MDM 05 02 reports task is executed pearen nsee vy performative is multicast An mni Arep a M send ZN state interaction arcs reports a PAN N E E NE AIA NALE AA EEA NE AAPA simultaneously updated in ans erf
36. To select a net level variable to use for deferred allocation click the Add button on the toolbar under the Net Parameters list A small dialog will appear Figure 4 43 that displays the list of appropriate net level variables from which one may be selected Then specify in the Will refer to panel whether at runtime the variable s value will refer to a Participant s userid or to a Role s name Click OK to save the selection 2A role is essentially a set of participants 4 8 THE RESOURCE PERSPECTIVE 91 O All Participants Filter Brown Alex a Brown Diane Brown Frank Brunelleschi Filippo Carelius Michael Carsle Bob Clemenza Peter Clemenza Stefano Corleone Don Vito Corleone Fredo Corleone Mama Corleone Michael Corleone Sonny Cuneo Carmine Cuneo Don Carmine Davies Frank v Cancel OK Figure 4 42 All Participants selection dialog Add Net Parameter Parameter selected v Will refer to Participant Role Cancel OK Figure 4 43 Add Net Parameter dialog In the Filters section we can filter the distribution set of participants roles and net parameters that have been described above Filtering can be done over capabilities positions and or organisational groups so that for example any participants in the distribution set that do not hold a specified capability will be discarded from the set To s
37. cannot be changed For more information on C YAWL please refer to the Process Configuration book chapter of the YAWL Book 17 and go to www processconfiguration com For technical details you can also read the sci entific paper 16 4 20 Checking for Updates At any time you may check to see if there are any updates of the YAWL Editor for downloading and installing a valid internet connection is required To check for updates select Help then Check for Updates from the menu bar The update server will be contacted and the latest list of components downloaded then compared to the installed components locally i e no information is sent to the upload server If there are updates available the Update Information 4 21 ABOUT DIALOG 123 86080 Update Information A new build of the YAWL Editor is available Current Version 3 0beta build 501 New Version 3 0beta build 506 Cancel Download Download amp Restart Figure 4 71 Update Information dialog dialog will appear Figure 4 71 and display information about the currently installed version and the latest version You have three options e Cancel Close the dialog and take no further action e Download Download the updated components to a directory of your choice a File Save dialog will appear You can later apply the updates manually to your installed version of the Editor e Download amp Restart The updates will be downloaded your install
38. carDetails N LegsType date date string string string a Output Bindings Net Variable to av Decomposition Variables Name gt customer gt startDate date Output gt endDate date Output gt flightDetails string InputOutput ttt gt hotelDetails string InputOutput Hee gt carDetails string InputOutput ser gt subTotal double InputOutput HH t avab Qooga cance apply ox Figure 5 24 Parameter definition of task do itinerary segment a cate for Ss in legs return lt legs_mem gt Ss lt legs_tem gt Figure 5 25 Input and Output dialogs for the multiple instance data of task do itinerary segment ne varale pa Caen do_itinerary_segment legs_Item departure_location do_itinerary_segment legs_item destination do_itinerary_segment startDate do_itinerary_segment endDate do_itinerary_segment flightDetails do_itinerary_segment hotelDetails for Sj in do_tinerary_segment itinerary itinerarySegment return j 143 CHAPTER 5 HOW TO MANIPULATE DATA IN YAWL ineral i114 do_itinerary_segment legs_ltem 000 Data Variables fo Net Variables Name odia customer a Output Bindings gt legs_item LegTyp Net Variable gt startDate date gt endDate date register_initerary endDate text0 endDate P flightDetails string register_initerary serviceRe
39. for the two outgoing ports of the decide task multiple instances of the lab Proclet class and multiple instances of the visit Proclet class may be initiated The multiplicity of the two ports is which means that a performative may optionally be sent in order to create an instance of the lab and visit Proclet class Finally performatives can be sent from the send report task to the receive task modeling that the result of a lab test may be used as input for a patient visit The cardinality 1 and multiplicity of the outgoing port of the send report task indicate that it is optional to send a performative to one visit Proclet instance In a similar fashion the cardinality 1 and multiplicity of the incoming port of the receive task indicate that performatives may optionally be received from the send report task 240 CHAPTER 9 THE PROCLET SERVICE triggers interaction multiplicity creation of Proclet as cardinality instance interaction point 0 0 follows preceding p 1 1 1 1 1 1 O initial fecei _ures_7 E cema gt prepar Tre JT de P interaction visit NZ ations o gt 0 0 port preceding follows a Proclet classes with interaction points ports and internal and external interactions b class diagram containing the two Pr
40. order type BookOrder gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs schema gt The first defines a complex type called BookOrder which is a record with three simple type fields The sec ond defines a complex data type called Booklist which consists of an array of one or more elements called order of BookOrder type unbounded means there is no upper limit on the number of order records we can include in the book list Once this is added we can start populating the data perspective of the specification e Create a net level data variable called MasterList of type BookList and scope Local Tip In the Type dropdown all types are listed alphabetically case insensitive Give the variable this initial value Tip click the Generate button to build the scaffolding for the value lt order gt lt title gt YAWL User Manual lt title gt lt price gt 0 00 lt price gt lt inStock gt false lt inStock gt Edit Value for Variable MasterList lt order gt 9 a a ne ue w Data Variables for Net List_Builder l Name Type Scope Initial Value gt MasterList BookList Local F ej amp 1e A Wil iig lt order gt le lt title gt YAWL User Manual lt title gt g lt price gt 0 00 lt price gt tf lt inStock gt false lt inStock gt iy lt order gt i 4 a Cancel u a 4 JOK a
41. since the internal data sources are only ever updated through the Resource Service The parameter value specifies the number of minutes to wait between refreshes e BlockOnUnavailableSecondaryResources A work item may have zero or more secondary resources i e non human resources and human resources that aren t primarily responsible for the work item s performance allocated to it For each work item that has secondary resources allocated to it setting this parameter to true will prevent the work item from being started if any of its secondary resources are unavailable When set to false the default the missing resource s will be noted in the log only but the work item will be allowed to start 150 CHAPTER 6 THE RUNTIME ENVIRONMENT EnableLogging The Resource Service also records extensive data about running processes to its pro cess log for later analysis and to keep an historical archive Process logging is enabled by default when persistence is enabled If persistence is enabled setting this parameter to false will disable process logging If persistence is disabled the value of this parameter has no effect LogOffers By default all resourcing events offer allocation start reallocate etc are written to a process log If there are large numbers of participants in the organisational model or work items are typically offered to a large number of potential participants the logging of all offers may incur
42. some processing overheads for little return e g there may be instances where a work item is offered to several hundred participants the members of that set can always be derived from design time resourcing parameter settings in any case By setting this parameter to false no offer events will be logged logging of all other events will still occur DropTaskPilingOnLogoff A participant who has been granted the authority to pile a certain task may then explicitly and manually choose to do so which means they will receive all instances of that task across all current and future instances of the process that contains the task When this parameter is set to true piling of tasks for a participant will cease when the affected participant logs out When this parameter is set to false the default piling of tasks for a participant will continue whether the participant is logged on or not until it is explicitly ceased by the affected user or an administrator This setting is ignored i e treated as true if persistence is not enabled This parameter applies globally to all piled task participants GenerateRandomOrgData This parameter allows you to quickly fill the organisational data base with randomly generated data participants roles positions capabilities and org groups which is especially useful for testing purposes or to examine the capabilities of YAWL without first having to manually populate the org database with
43. 0 linux installer bin Installation Start You will first be greeted by a Welcome screen Pressing Next will take you to the License Agreement page shown in figure 2 1 You need to accept the agreement to continue the installation License Agreement Xd Please read the following License Agreement You must accept the terms of this agreement before continuing with the installation GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 1 February 1999 Copyright C 1991 1999 Free Software Foundation Inc 51 Franklin Street Afth Floor Boston MA 02110 1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License version 2 hence X O l accept the agreement Do you accept this license do not accept the agreement 4 Back cancel Figure 2 1 License Agreement The next step is to select the installation directory figure 2 2 The default location is your home directory The installer will inform you if you re allowed to install YAWL in the selected folder In case of Windows or Linux folders like C Program Files or usr local are only writeable by users with administrative rights 2 2 INSTALLING YAWL 15 YAWL directory Xd Please specify the directory where the YAWL environment will be installed home sclemens YAW
44. 2 Name Net Name Name of this net Use the palette toolbar to edit the selected net Figure 3 1 A New Specification and its Starting Net It s time to start modelling the work to be done Typical workflow specifications in YAWL will make signif icant use of atomic tasks An atomic task represented in YAWL as a square models a stand alone piece of work that is either manual or automatic and it s here that workflow designers starts earning their money Just how much work should a single atomic task represent The answer is not always obvious Looking again at Processa s transcript we decide that an initial atomic task is needed for receipting and validating a claim After that two additional pieces of work need to be done but in no particular order We ll add an atomic task each for determining credit requirements and seeking a credit report The next step requires that both credit requirements are determined and that a credit report be ready We need an extra task to run only once they are finished which will decide based on the application amount whether we then send the application on for a large or a small approval process We expect large approvals and small approvals to have differing work requirements so we ll model each type of approval as a separate task In all we ve identified six distinct pieces of work Select the Atomic Task tool on the Palette at the top left of the Edit
45. 2 Multiple Instance Data There are two categories of data associated with multiple instance tasks One is the task attribute data which define the maximum and the minimum number of instances allowed as well as the threshold value The other is the multiple instance data which are specific to individual execution instances of tasks within a single workflow case 26 Below we describe how to handle multiple instance data in YAWL YAWL supports both the designated multiple instance tasks and the isolation of data elements between task instances However the handling of multiple instance data is far from trivial Data at the higher level needs to be split over the instances and after completion of the instances aggregated to data elements at the higher level 5 A set of four XQueries are used to pass multiple instance data between different levels These are the accessor query for manipulating the overall multiple instance data before the unique values are split out to individual execution instances the splitter query for separating the unique values 130 CHAPTER 5 HOW TO MANIPULATE DATA IN YAWL from the overall multiple instance data and passing a unique value to each instance the instance query for transforming the XML document returned on completion of an instance to a form that is suitable for aggregation and the aggregate query for finally generating an overall result and passing the result to the higher level on completion of the multiple i
46. 25 01 gt create executed_source send report lt 9 gt z performative has been sent 2D S L5 but not yet been consumed 50 u ae 7 e O a O visit D Sue 7 Sue 10 02 _ visit consumed create Sue 10 02 J receive c Interaction graph for Sue in which the performative from the lab instance has been produced but has not yet been consumed lab Sue 25 01 send report P S Qo u oop e visit Sue 10 02 receive d State of the interaction graph when the visit Proclet instance is canceled Figure 9 20 Illustration of an exception that may occur if a Proclet instance is canceled For the task instance which relates to an inbox interaction point the required performative has not been received 9 1 INTER WORKFLOW SUPPORT 265 Interaction node is related to an outbox interaction point Interaction Graph A Interaction Graph B a unproduced unproduced i gt Xi gt Xj l interaction graphs after J the exception Interaction Graph A occurs Interaction Graph B failed failed gt Xi Yj gt Xj Proclet instance Y is deleted completed a Proclet instance Y is deleted For the deleted instance all outgoing interaction arcs related to an outbox interaction point which have the state unproduced change to the state failed Interaction node is related to a
47. 29 Starting an Instance of Casualty_Treatment Iva Payne cr Figure 8 29 Launching a Casualty Treatment Case detail Go to the Work Queues page and the first task in the case Admit will be listed as an offered workitem Make a note of the case number Accept amp Start the Admit workitem The Admit workitem simulates an admission to the Casualty department of a hospital where various initial checks are made of the patient You ll see that in addition to the patient name and id specified when the case started there are a number of fields containing some medical data about the patient Each field has some default data to save time but you may edit any fields as you wish Figure 8 30 When done click the Complete button Go back to the Work Queues page and start the next workitem Triage The Triage task simulates that part of the process where a medical practitioner asks a patient to nominate their symptoms You ll see that the patient s name and id have again been displayed for identification purposes in addition to five fields which approximate the medical problem One field should be set to True the others to False Lets assume the patient has a fever Set the Fever field to True the rest to False and then click the Complete button Figure 8 31 There is nothing special about the first two tasks in the process they are standard YAWL tasks and operate as expected However the next task Treat has been associa
48. 3 continue workikern Figure 8 28 A Conclusion Sequence shown as Text detail 8 6 Walkthrough Using the Worklet Service The worklet repository that comes with the Worklet Service release contains a number of example specifi cations with worklet enabled tasks each with an associated rule set and a number of associated worklets This section will step through the execution of several of these examples The first two examples feature the Selection Service the remainder the Exception Service Knowledge of how to use the YAWL system is assumed Before we begin make sure the Worklet Service is correctly installed and operational and then log into the YAWL system A Selection Worklet Enabled Atomic Task Example The Casualty Treatment specification used in the previous sections of this manual is an example of a spec ification that contains an atomic task called Treat that is worklet selection enabled We ll run a complete instance of the example specification to see how worklet selection operates 8 6 WALKTHROUGH USING THE WORKLET SERVICE 213 Log on to YAWL with a user that has administrator or can manage cases privileges Navigate to the Case Mgt page and upload the Casualty Treatment specification from the worklets folder of the worklet repository Then launch a Casualty Treatment case from the same page The case begins by requesting a patient id and name just enter some data into each field then click Submit Figure 8
49. 31a Via the entities data variable data for entities can be filled in In the entity_id field the entity identifier can be filled in Moreover some additional data can be filled in via the name value pair elements As the value of the entities data variable has a complex data type in Figure 9 31a this is represented as XML code However in the Workflow Client Application of the YAWL WfMS a form is automatically created for any complex data type which is more user friendly The corresponding form is shown in Figure 9 31b For both forms we see for Sue that Sue has been filled in as the entity identifier she has age 65 and she is 1 75 m long Remember that the additional data that has been filled in is included in the performatives that are sent from this Proclet instance In this way the data becomes available to the Proclet instances to which the performative is sent Afterwards during the decide task it can be defined what needs to be done next As the decide task is associated with a configuration interaction point the interaction graph for Sue can be extended Below we demonstrate via several screenshots how this is supported in our system Note that we assume that the reader is familiar with how an interaction graph can be extended More details can be found in Chapter 6 of 19 First in the Interaction Definition Editor Sue is selected as the entity see Figure 9 32
50. 35 Enter some data here and then complete it When the Treat Fever workitem is submitted the worklet case is completed The Worklet Service maps the output data from the worklet case to the matching variables of the original Treat workitem then checks that workitem back in effectively completing it and allowing the next workitem in the Casualty Treatment process Discharge to execute Go to the Work Queues page and you ll see that the Discharge workitem is available Figure 8 36 Edit it to see that the data collected by the TreatFever worklet has been mapped back to this workitem Submit it to complete the case B Selection Worklet Enabled Multiple Instance Atomic Task Example This walkthrough takes the List Maker example from the YAWL Editor User Manual and worklet enables the Verify List task to show how multiple instance atomic tasks are handled by the Worklet Selection Service The specification is called wListMaker The only change made to the original List Maker specification was to associate the Verify List task with the Worklet Service using the YAWL Editor Figure 8 37 shows the 8 6 WALKTHROUGH USING THE WORKLET SERVICE 217 Edit Work Item 2 1 Figure 8 34 Test Fever Workitem detail Edit Work Item 2 2 bitten by spider aspirin twice a day anti venene Figure 8 35 Treat Fever Workitem detail specification 2 Go to the Case Mgt page and upload the wListMaker specification from the worklets
51. 9 3 we show the current state of the Proclet instances and the current state of the interaction graph for entity Sue Tasks that are completed are indicated by a check mark Step 1 In Figure 9 3 the decide task of the first visit is currently executing and an interaction graph is created In Figure 9 4 the next step is visualized That is for the decide task that is executing in the interaction graph it can be seen that two interactions need to take place So two performatives need to be sent in order to create an instance of the lab Proclet class and an instance of the visit Proclet class As an example we see the performative that is sent to create an instance of the visit Proclet class The sender of the performative is the Proclet instance that is currently executed Vvisit 25 01 The receiver of the performative is the instance of the visit Proclet class which has temporary identifier T2 as it still needs to be initiated As an interaction identifier we see that Sue 7 is added 244 CHAPTER 9 THE PROCLET SERVICE lab Sue 25 01 P eee eee instance of lab BH _v Proclet has b Th lAN blood send archi EET ya P test report J ve 3 ______ 55 visit Sue 10 02 visit Sue 25 01 aes f a ual E initial _ wy gt recei _ decid broch m ini
52. Cancel OK a Select nne or more net elements to maninulate mT Figure 4 36 Creating the MasterList net level variable 4 7 THE DATA PERSPECTIVE 85 When entered correctly the green OK message is shown to denote that it is a valid complex value to assign to the Masterlist variable of complex type BookList since it defines values for the elements of one BookOrder see Figure 4 36 It is important that an initial value is provided for this variable because our definition of the BookList type specifies that it will contain at least one element that is because it doesn t include a minOccurs 0 clause If there was no initial value specified for this type the specification would fail schema validation at runtime in other words the Engine would reject the specification Add a decomposition to the first atomic task and call it Create Book List Go to the Decomposition s Data Variables property open the Data Variables Dialog and drag the net level MasterList variable to the Decomposition Variables list to create a variable called MasterList of type BookList and scope In putOutput the mappings between the net level and task level variables are automatically generated Rename the task level variable bookList to differentiate it from the net level variable This task will allow a user to add any number of book orders to the master book list Add a decomposition to the
53. Department Head of CD Warehouse Head of FD mega Head of OD minor Head of SD Filter Expression Filter Expression Genko Oil amp ax amp ax Cancel OK Figure 4 45 Org Structure Filter dialog The Org Structure filter works in a similar way except that you may specify expressions based on Org Groups and or Positions that appear in the organisation structure managed by the Resource Service Fig ure 4 45 If both types are specified they both must be true for a participant to be retained in the distribution set Finally if both a Capability and an Org Structure filter is specified then all expressions must be true for a participant to remain in the distribution set The final part in the Offer section of the Primary Resources tab is the Constraints section Here you can e allow the work items of the selected task to be offered only to participants who are members of the 4 8 THE RESOURCE PERSPECTIVE 93 specified distribution set and have previously completed work item s of another task as specified in the current process instance this is referred to as the familiar task pattern To do so select Choose completer s of task then choose the previously completed task from the dropdown list e prevent the work items of the selected task from being offered to participants who are members of the specified distribution set and have previously completed work items of another task as specified in the c
54. Dialog for the Enrol task of the Attend University net Click Apply to save the changes without closing the dialog 2 Now say you want to bind the StudentNumber net level variable to the Enrol task Simply select the net level variable then holding the mouse button down drag and drop the variable onto the task level variable list 3 A task level variable of the same name and data type with InputOutput scope and with all bindings generated is created Do the same for the other net level variable SubjectCode Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog Once you have dropped the net level variable into the task level variable list you are free to change the name and or scope of the new task level variable but changing the data type may mean that any bindings are no longer valid Note that at any time while the Data Variable dialog is open from the Decomposition Data Variables property the net level variables list can also be edited i e new net level variables can be added and existing ones updated or removed The Bindings Summary Dialog You can view a summary of all input and output bindings for a task s variables from the Data Variable Dialog by clicking on the Quick View Bindings button S on the task level variable list toolbar An example of the dialog can be seen in Figure 4 27 e090 Binding Summary for Decomposition Enrol Task Enrol Input Bindings
55. EDITOR Start Interaction If we choose that work items are to be Started by the System by selecting the Enable System Start check box in the Start section of the tab then the work item once it is allocated to a participant will be immediately started If the check box is not selected a user initiated start then the user who has been allocated the work item will choose to manually start working on it at a time of their choosing 4 8 2 Secondary Resources Tab On the Secondary Resources Tab the set of secondary resources that are needed to assist in the successful performance of the task may optionally be specified Resources may be selected in each of the four categories by clicking the Add button on the toolbar under each list Individual participants and or assets non human resources may be chosen at most once while roles and categories i e of non human resources may be selected more than once For example the selected resources in Figure 4 46 include two entries for the role Surgical Nurse meaning that two nurses are required 80 0 Resources for Task Surgical_Procedure Primary Resources Secondary Resources Task Privileges Participants Roles Stefano Clemenza sca Anesthesiologist Don Carmine Cuneo dcc Cardiologist Carmine Marino cm Surgical Nurse Surgical Nurse Non human Resources Non human Resource Categories OR 1 rooms gt recovery
56. Exception Service is configured as disabled To enable the Exception Ser vice a parameter has to be set in its web xml file Open the Worklet Service s web xml file in folder webapps workletService WEB INF Locate the param eter named EnableExceptionHandling to enable the Exception Service change the param value to true see Figure 8 3 Save and close web xml The Exception Service uses extensions or hooks in the YAWL default worklist handler a component of the Resource Service to provide methods for interacting with the Worklet Service so if you have enabled the service as above you also need to enable the extensions in the Resource Service To do so locate and open the Resource Service s web xml file in folder webapps resourceService WEB INF Locate the context parameter named InterfaceX BackEnd By default the entire parameter block is com mented out To enable the Exception Service extensions to the worklist simply remove the comment tags 1 fcatalina base is an environment variable pointing to the path of your Tomcat installation 8 3 USING THE WORKLET SELECTION SERVICE 187 lt context param gt lt param name gt EnableExceptionHandling lt param name gt lt param value gt false lt param value gt lt description gt true to enabl xception handling functionality false to disable lt description gt lt context param gt Figure 8 3 The Worklet Service s web xml fil
57. For arcs referring to external interactions the state transitions from unproduced to sent to consumed The general meaning of each state is as follows unproduced No performative has been produced yet for the interaction represented by the arc Note that an interaction arc corresponds to a performative when the interaction identifier of the arc is contained in the interaction identifiers attribute of the performative sent A performative has been produced for the interaction represented by the arc In particular the in teraction identifier of the arc is contained in the interaction identifiers attribute of the performative that has been produced 256 CHAPTER 9 THE PROCLET SERVICE multiplicity cardinality configuration external interaction Proclet class internal interaction Performative i Sender MDM 05 02 i Receivers visit Sue 10 02 Interaction identifiers Sue 6 interaction point 1 I ies recei M deci ww ations ves ra E 0 preceding x initial 1 1 inbox gt prepar P reports E 0 follows _0 interaction interaction ations visit i MDM point poit P eee ogg OO 0 preceding 0 a visit lab and MDM Proclet clas
58. For example Figure 8 6 shows a simple specification for a Casualty Treatment process In this process we want the Treat task to be substituted at runtime with the appropriate worklet based on the patient data col lected in the Admit and Triage tasks That is depending on each patient s actual physical data and reported symptoms we would like to run the worklet that best handles the patient s condition Worklets may be associated with an atomic task or a multiple instance atomic task Any number of worklets can be associated with i e comprise the repertoire of an individual task and any number of tasks in a particular specification can be associated with the Worklet Service Casualty_Treatment aaa m cc Oe me aa Admit Triage Treat Discharge Figure 8 6 Example Top level Specification Here we want to associate the Treat task with the Worklet Service To do so choose the Custom Service property in the Decomposition section of the Properties Pane then select Worklet Service from the dropdown list The list of task level variables for the Treat task from a section of the Data Variables dialog in the Editor is shown Figure 8 7 This dialog shows the variables defined for the task each one of these maps to a net level variable so that in this example all of the data collected from a patient in the first two tasks are made available to this task The result is that all of the relevant current case data for this process i
59. Launching the YAWL Editor The Editor is installed along with the other YAWL System components using any of the installers described in Chapter 2 It can also be installed manually by downloading the latest version from the YAWL Source Forge website http sourceforge net projects yawl Always ensure that the version of the Editor you are using matches the version of YAWL installed 41 42 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR The YAWL Editor is distributed as a compressed zip archive containing a number of Java Archive jar files Unzip the downloaded zip to any directory then double click on the YAWLEditor3 0 jar file to start the application where supported The YAWL Editor can also be started from a command line or Terminal prompt java jar YAWLEditor3 0 jar 4 2 The YAWL Editor Workspace The first time you start the YAWL Editor you will be presented with a blank canvas and a prompt in the Status Bar advising you to open or create a specification to begin Before you create your first specification let s take a brief tour of the Editor s workspace and the elements within the use of each element is fully described in later sections The workspace is shown in Figure 4 2 Menu Bar File Edk Net Elements Plugins Help bonan va dea Palew Tool Bar N Net olana Element Palett Properties ette f Gl Specifation a Authors adamsimy Data Definito 0 defined types Description Name Chapter3Exa Propertie
60. OF YOUR SPECIFICATION 65 4 5 3 Colours and Fonts For nets the default background colour can be set i e applied to all nets via the Preferences dialog by choosing File Preferences on the top menu bar see Section 4 9 for details To set the background colour of individual nets overriding the default colour choose Net Background Colour from the Net menu or set the net s Fill Colour property For tasks and conditions the default fill colour i e for all newly added tasks and conditions can also be set via the Preferences dialog For individual tasks and conditions select it then set its Fill Colour property Several selected tasks and or conditions can have their fill colour set at the same time by choosing Set Selected Fill Colour from the Elements menu For tasks and conditions the default font family size and colour can also be set via the Preferences dialog The default font settings can be overridden for individual tasks and conditions via their Font property Figure 4 17 ow ey wo u vw x er Palate 8 0 0 Font Picker Family Style O a Q m e Verdana a Regular Properties E Waseem Bold Wawati SC Italic Name Study_Privately a Wawati TC Bold Italic Root Net O Webdings E Task Weibei SC Size no Weibei TC 4 y Documentation A Mae lann a Colour Fill Colour R 252 G Winging vi
61. Org Data Assets Services Client Apps Logout Unfiltered 07 22 2011 9 00 16 00 Nikon SLR unavailable 100 Being repaired 12 00 17 00 All Participants unavailable 100 annual picnic afternoon Figure 6 17 Resource Calendar Management Form All Participants Allows you to add entries that apply to all participants Lists all the All Participants entries for the selected date All Assets Allows you to add entries that apply to all assets i e non human resources Lists all the All Assets entries for the selected date Selected Participant Enables the Resource dropdown list beneath it and allows you to select an in dividual participant from that list Once selected all the existing entries for the participant for the selected date are listed and allows new entries to be added for the participant Selected Asset Enables the Resource dropdown list beneath it and allows you to select an individual asset from that list Once selected all the existing entries for the asset for the selected date are listed and allows new entries to be added for the asset As mentioned above calendar entries may be added that apply to All Resources as a group All Partici pants as a group All Assets as a group an individual participant or an individual asset To add a new entry e Select the group or individual resource using the Filter and if required the Resource dropdowns The name of the selec
62. Parent Node ID fo Condition isNotCompleted this Conclusion 1 suspend workitem 2 run worklet SendReminder 3 complete workitem Description i payment received after timeout Figure 8 52 Rules Editor Showing Single Timeout Rule for Receive Payment Task Condition lisNotCompleted this Conclusion 1 suspend case 2 run worklet CancelOrder 3 remove ancestorCases Figure 8 53 Rule detail for Receive Reply F Rejecting a Worklet and or Raising a New External Exception The processes involved in rejecting a worklet launched either as a result of the Selection or the Exception Service and raising a new external exception that is an external exception which has not yet been defined 8 6 WALKTHROUGH USING THE WORKLET SERVICE 229 formally an unexpected exception are virtually identical and so are discussed together in this section When the Worklet Service launches a worklet it selects the most appropriate one based on the current case context and the current rule set for the parent case As discussed previously in this chapter there may be occasions where the selected worklet does not best handle the current case s context perhaps because of a new business rule or a more efficient method of achieving the goal of a task being found In any event a worker may choose to reject the worklet that was selected IMPORTANT The rejection of a selected worklet is a legitimate and expected occurrence Each rejecti
63. Settings which can be found from the Plugins menu Process Configuration gt Preferences or by clicking the Preferences button Me on the Process Configuration toolbar There are Wendy distributions for Windows 32bit MacOS and Linux available for download from the YAWL SourceForge project The Configuration Correctness Checker can be enabled at any time from the Plugins menu Process Config uration gt Net gt Check Configuration Correctness or by clicking the Check Correctness button on the Process Configuration toolbar This will invoke Wendy to analyse the current model and the output from this tool will appear in a pop up window see Figure 4 69 This process may take some time depending on your machine s characteristics and on the degree of parallelism of your YAWL model i e how many 4 19 CONFIGURABLE YAWL 121 New_Net_1 Approve Travel Form Admin Prepare Travel Form Employer Submit Travel Form for Approval Insurance Reject _tau Travel Form Prepare P3 Travel Form Secretary Figure 4 68 The result of committing a process model configuration combinations of tasks there exist that can be executed in interleaved parallelism However you only have to run this process once once you have completed the design of your process and are ready to configure it You can also interrupt this process at any time by closing th
64. Suspended W Save J Cancel J Figure 6 28 The Worklist Gadget s Settings dialog Click the Save button to save your settings If they are valid you will see a worklist something like the one in Figure 6 29 You can modify these settings at any time by clicking on the dropdown menu on the top right of the gadget s titlebar the small button with the dropdown arrow and choosing Edit Settings YAWL Worklist Available 1 Assigned 0 In Progress 2 362 Triage Figure 6 29 The Worklist Gadget 6 10 2 Using the Worklist Gadget Each queue shows the work items available to the user specified as hyperlinks When you click on a work item link in any queue the data form for the work item will display on a new tab or window depending on browser settings That is when a work item link is clicked 178 CHAPTER 6 THE RUNTIME ENVIRONMENT If the work item is on the Offered Available queue it is immediately allocated to the user and started then its form is displayed e If the work item is on the Allocated Assigned queue it is immediately started then its form is dis played e If the work item is on the Started In Progress queue its form is displayed e If the work item is on the Suspended queue it is immediately unsuspended then its form is displayed Just as it is for the default worklist handler of the Resource Service if the work item was associated with a custom form at design time then the custom form will
65. Uncheck this option to not have this check occur each time the Editor starts 4 10 Connections 4 10 1 Connecting to the YAWL Engine and Resource Service Why connect to the YAWL Engine At design time each atomic task in a YAWL specification must be associated with a service that will be responsible for performing the work of the task at runtime If you do not explicitly specify a service for a task the task will be assigned to the Default Worklist Handler which by default is provided as part of the Resource Service If you want to associate a task with a service other than the Default Worklist Handler you can make the appropriate choice from a list in the Decomposition s Custom Service property see the following section The Editor populates the list of available services by making a call to a running YAWL Engine which returns the list of services currently registered with it Before this can occur the Editor must first establish a valid connection to a running Engine Why connect to the Resource Service To use the organisational data managed by the Resource Service for example to assign tasks to Participants or Roles a connection between the Editor and the Resource Ser vice needs to be established The Editor populates the Resources Dialog with all the necessary organisational data needed On Editor startup a connection to a running Engine and Resource Service is attempted If successful the connection icon at the left of the
66. When it is set to true user authentication is deferred to the currently implemented external organisational data source and passwords are sent to the data source as plain text rather than the default encryption It is up to the external data source to provide valid user authentication in this case A setting of true is only relevant if an external data source is active if the default YAWL org database is in use this setting is ignored e AllowExternalOrgDataMods By default when an external organisational data source is configured for use by the Resource Service that data is not allowed to be modified via the Resource Service s administration web forms i e data from an external data source is considered read only by default When this parameter is set to true modification of data from an external data source via the adminis tration web forms is allowed A setting of true is only relevant if an external data source is active if the default YAWL org database is in use this setting is ignored e OrgDataRefreshRate This parameter provides for the setting of a regular time interval to refresh the organisational data caches in the Resource Service This is particularly important when the org data is sourced externally and that external source is live regularly updated through other systems If an external data source is not being used then the parameter s value should be left at 1 the default interpreted as never refresh
67. XOR split the first listed flow that has an expression that evaluates to true will be executed Since it is possible that all flow expressions may evaluate to false in a given process instance XOR and OR splits must nominate a default flow which will activate if all of the other flow expressions evaluate to false to ensure that the workflow does not deadlock i e is not blocked at that point from proceeding and 4 7 THE DATA PERSPECTIVE 79 eventually completing Default flows are defined by prioritising the order in which the various flows of a split are evaluated the one prioritised last in the order becomes the default flow To update the split predicates of a task that has a split select the task and choose the Task Split Predicates property The Split Conditions dialog appears which lists the targets of the outgoing flows of the split and each flow s corresponding predicate or flow condition The arrowed buttons at the bottom of the list allow you to reorder the evaluation sequence of the predicates so that the default predicate the one you want to have activated when all others fail can be placed at the bottom of the list Carefully ordering the evaluation sequence is especially important when dealing with an XOR split because only the first that evaluates to true will be activated and all subsequent flows will be ignored The currently selected flow in the dialog will be identified by being highlighted green in the Net
68. XQuery expres sions e The validation message pane If you are familiar with XQuery syntax you can add an XQuery expression directly to perform the assignment of values to Output variables When entering an XQuery it is continuously validated for syntactic well formedness and when it meets that criterion further validated to ensure it is assigning a value of the correct data type for its target variable Remember to watch the message pane at the bottom of the dialog for helpful messages Valid expressions will be denoted by a green OK in the message pane Check that the StudentNumber variable is selected in the Output To panel and the StudentNum ber task variable is selected in the Generate Binding From panel then click the Auto Binding button Notice that an appropriate XQuery has been generated that extracts the value of the selected variable from the task level Click OK to save the binding and exit the dialog Notice that in the list of De composition Variables the StudentNumber variable is no longer italicised denoting that it now has valid input and output bindings defined Now select the SubjectCode decomposition variable and add an output binding for it using the same technique as described above Again when done click OK to save the binding and exit the dialog Smart Data Bindings Smart Data Bindings provide an easy way to create data bindings between net level and task level variables
69. YAWL can all be found at Sourceforge via the URL http sourceforge net projects yawl Further explanations of the use of this environment can be found in the remainder of this user manual while there is also a technical manual for those that want to develop more complex applications A number of case studies documenting the use of YAWL are also available Mailing lists and forums around the components of YAWL can also be accessed via this Sourceforge URL And as mentioned earlier YAWL is the product of several years of research into workflow patterns and formal foundations of workflow This research along with other informative material is available via the URL http yawlfoundation org Chapter 4 The Editor Before a workflow model can be executed it must first be defined This chapter describes the YAWL Editor Version 3 0 a tool for creating editing configuring validating and analysing workflow specifications New users are encouraged to read the chapter sequentially experienced users may pick and choose what they need from this chapter Figure 4 1 illustrates the interactions among some of the major components of the YAWL environment YAWL Process Editor XML Dy Workflow API calls specification YAWL Runtime Environment Figure 4 1 Basic YAWL Component Overview In this chapter the icon on the left indicates a hands on method or instruction 4 1
70. a a 9 a Figure 5 18 Parameter definition for task pay 5 5 3 Example 3 Make Trip Process with Multiple Instance Composite Tasks This process provides a booking service for a trip that has several legs For each leg the same simple make trip process from the previous example will be executed as a sub net of the overall process As a result we obtain a more complex Make Trip process by involving a multiple instance composite task for execution of the simple make trip process for each leg Also the customer is provided with a subtotal of the payment for each leg and the subtotals for all the legs in the trip will be calculated into a total payment at the end of the process YAWL Specification Figure 5 19 shows the YAWL nets that comprise the process There are two nets the root net make trip and a subnet that contains details for the composite task do itinerary segment which is basically the same make trip net in the previous example Figure 5 20 lists the data type definitions for the specification There are five new user defined data types The itineraryType contains a list of itinerary segments of itinerarySegType which each comprises informa tion of departure location destination startDate endDate flightDetails hotelDetail carDetails and subtotal The legsType is a set of legs of legType which provides the information of departure location and destination Finally the ser
71. amp a2 for Anne in Figure ls 5o 6 10 o S Q y l visit bo Anne 26 01 a 2 decide Anne 7 ty Vf Pie unproduced a J J VAA l E 1 l ra a oe A ee n x mdo_meetihig 65 register ene eee I 7 7 7 Po multidisciplinary P5 interaction graph meeting J gt for Anne produced visit 41 receive by our system visit 41 createCondition J Figure 9 35 Final graph for Anne Via rectangles it is shown which nodes are related 9 1 INTER WORKFLOW SUPPORT 287 F interaction Definition Editor Model Interaction Point Window Procletinstance Extra Help instances for which an exception at case level occurred F Exception Proclet Instance Proclet Class and Proclet Instance mdo_meeting 65 entities that are Select affected for a selected instance Affected Entities handling of the Anne Sue k exception Handle Exception Ignore Exception interactions that do not take place anymore because of the canceled multidisciplinary meeting a panel for handling an exception at case level B interaction Definition Editor Model Interaction Point Window ProcletInstance Extra Help E Configuration Interaction Point i EE Mouse Mode Message TRANSFORMING w Select node for which you want to define interactions Interaction Nodes mdo_meeting 69 register ndo_meeting 65 send_reports visit 66 receive
72. an entity affected by the exception an interaction with the register task of an existing or future MDM Proclet instance can be defined i e a patient can be registered for another multidisciplinary meeting First we discuss in Section 9 1 4 how a model can be defined in order to allow for inter workflow support Then in Section 9 1 4 it is explained how these models are enacted such that cases can be created and that interactions between Proclet instances can be realized Next in Section 9 1 4 it is elaborated upon how exceptions can be handled Modeling Support In order to make use of the inter workflow support features of the YAWL4Healthcare WfMS first Proclet classes and the external interactions between them need to be defined Note that process definitions are defined at the engine side YAWL and that the extensions on top of these definitions are defined at the Inter Workflow Service side via the Interaction Definition Editor YAWL Editor Figure 9 28 shows how the process definition of the visit Proclet class is defined via the YAWL editor Every task in the process definition is a flow task as they do not need to be scheduled However tasks for which interactions may be necessary are indicated by a plug in icon The execution of the corresponding workitem for them is delegated to the Inter Workflow Service This needs to be defined via the Task Composition Details of the task Flow tasks which need to be perf
73. and DecideRating for providing the credit rating 560 There is also an unlabelled task which has an XOR join this is an example of a routing or empty task that is a task without decomposition and is used here to ensure the net is sound gt Credit_Rating_Process DecideRating ReceiveSSN ReportFault Figure 5 5 The Credit Rating Process net Figure 5 6 shows three net variable definitions for the Credit Rating Process net All are defined as local 5 5 ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES 131 variables in order to avoid any data interaction with the external environment at the net level Also both rating and fault are assigned an initial value Le oo Data Variables for Net Credit_Rating_Process Type Initial Value P ssn string gt rating double 560 gt fault string Bankruptcy Cancel Apply Figure 5 6 Net variable definitions Figure 5 7 shows the parameter definition for the output only variable ssn of task ReceiveSSN This variable requests a social security number from the client and as specified in the output parameter definition it then passes the data to net variable of the same name via the XQuery ReceiveSSN ssn text The Editor automatically generates this query when the net variable is dragged to the decomposition level variable list Data Variables for Decomposition ReceiveSSN Task ReceiveSSN Net Variables
74. and task name On this form e The Process Identifiers panel is where the names of the specification rule type and task name for the new tree are defined The Specification Name input is read only for new rule sets it is the specification chosen via the Specification Location dialog Figure 8 24 for existing rule sets it is the specification for the rule set currently loaded into the Rules Editor The Rule Type drop down list contains all of the available rule types i e all the rule types for which no or incomplete tree sets exist For new rule 8 5 WORKLET RULE SETS AND THE RULES EDITOR 209 sets all rule types are available The Task Name drop down list contains all the available tasks for the selected rule type i e tasks for which no tree exists in the tree set for this rule type The Task Name list is disabled for case level rule types The New Rule Node panel is identical to the panel on the Add New Rule form Here a condition and optional description can be entered and the conclusion for the new rule created or selected from the list depending on the rule type see below The Cornerstone Case Data panel allows a set of cornerstone data for the new rule to be defined Add a variable name to the Attribute input and give it a value in the Value input then click the Add button to add it to the set of Cornerstone Case data Usual naming rules apply to the data attributes the attribute name must begin with an alpha character or un
75. associated with a composite task gets data via the net data in its subnet using an output parameter definition Otherwise output variables are used to supply task data to corresponding net level variables in internal data transfers 3XQuery 1 0 An XML Query Language W3C Working Draft 4 April 2005 128 CHAPTER 5 HOW TO MANIPULATE DATA IN YAWL Input and output variables combine scopes No internal data transfers are allowed to local variables of subnets and no external data transfers are allowed between local variables and the external environment Note In Chapter 4 Section 4 7 3 illustrates how to pass data between variables in the YAWL Editor Three things are worth noting 1 The YAWL Editor enforces correct data transfers between variables in the parameter definition for each task For example it is not possible to define data passing between local variables or to set more than one input output parameter on a single variable associated with a task 2 In the YAWL editor by running specification validation a user can check whether or not required data transfers are missing For example if an input variable Vin of a task T does not have any data mapping specified a validation message will indicate that problem 3 When specifying XQueries in the parameter definitions of a task the YAWL editor may automatically generate a compatible XQuery or indicate whether a user defined XQuery has valid or invalid syntax The seman
76. can be later uploaded into the YAWL Engine or you may choose to upload the specification directly to a connected YAWL Engine bypassing saving it to disk file In the former case it is recommended that you first validate the specification i e check that it is syntactically and semantically correct unless it is an interim save of an incomplete specification In the latter case the verification is done automatically as part of the upload Validating a Specification To validate your specification 1 Click the Validate button on the toolbar or click File on the Menu and choose Validate 2 If problems are detected they will be listed in the Info Pane at the bottom of the Editor with details of any inconsistencies that would prevent the specification from successfully executing in the YAWL Engine The Info Pane tab label also shows the time the last validation was run Figure 4 4 shows an example If a message ends with lt more gt you may click on it to see a popup with more information about the problem and possibly a suggestion on how to fix it Click anywhere to dismiss the more information box Saving a Specification File To save your specification to file to disk click on the Save button B on the toolbar or click File on the Menu and choose Save If set in the Preferences Dialog the File Save Options dialog appears Figure 4 5 The File Save Options Dialog has the following options 4 3 WORKIN
77. case constraints that tree will be queried using the initial case data to determine whether there are any pre constraints not met by the case In this example there are no pre case constraint rules defined so the notification is simply ignored Tip To follow what is happening watch the log output in the Tomcat command window or the contents of the log file catalina out in Tomcat s logs folder both the exception and selection services log all interactions between themselves and the Engine to the Tomcat window and to a log file found in the logs folder of your Tomcat installation See Appendix 8 8 of this manual for a sample log output for this walkthrough Pre case constraints can be used amongst other things to ensure case data is valid or within certain ranges before the case proceeds can be used to run compensatory worklets to correct any invalid data or may even be used to cancel the case as soon as it starts in certain circumstances As a trivial example of the last point 222 CHAPTER 8 THE WORKLET SERVICE launch an instance of the Casualty Treatment specification discussed in Walkthrough A and enter smith for the patient name when the case starts The Casualty Treatment rule set contains a pre case constraint rule to cancel the case if the patient s name is smith presumably smith is a hypochondriac This also serves as an example of exception rules and selection rules being defined within the same rule set D
78. case of an automated task the timer works as a delay i e the automatic execution of the task instance created by an automated task is delayed until the specified expiry time is reached Once the timer expires the task is immediately executed and completed 4 13 2 Activation on starting e In case of a manual task the timer begins only when the task has started Therefore the task will be first offered then allocated and once it is started the timer begins Again there is a risk of the timer expiring while the task is being edited by a user e This option is does not apply for an automated task 4 13 3 Expiry value The expiry value of the timer specifies for how long the timer will live after being activated Expiry values can be expressed in either of two ways e Using a specific date and time which means the timer will expire at the specified moment To set a specific date and time choose the At exactly radio button in the Expires section the Set Timer dialog Figure 4 53 and enter the required values Care should be taken when setting a specific time value for timers if it happens that the specified value is earlier than the moment the task is actually enabled or started depending on when it is set to activate then the YAWL Engine will recognise that the timer has already expired and immediately complete the work item before it has a chance to appear on a worklist Using a Duration value A Duration is one of th
79. click OK The previously saved definition will be inserted at the cursor Finally existing data type definitions can be removed from the repository at any time by clicking the Re move from Repository button 8 selecting the label for the definition to remove then clicking OK 4 7 6 Multiple Instance Queries Now that we have an understanding of data bindings and XQueries we can revisit from a data perspective binding definitions for the particular requirements of Multiple Instance MI Tasks In general terms an MI task will contain a number of variables one of which is an Input or InputOutput variable of complex data type typically a list of some other data type but more complex constructions are of course supported too which is marked at design time as the formal multiple instance input variable When the task is instantiated at runtime that variable s data is split by the YAWL Engine into a number of logically distinct data values The Engine then uses those values to instantiate a number of work items task instances one for each distinct data value assigning that value to the bound task level variable any other task level variables have their data assigned to them in the usual way When the MI task completes it gathers all the individual pieces of data from the formal input variable of each task instance and reconstructs the complex type variable so that it can be mapped back to a net level variable usually but not
80. continuous block from the start date selected at top left of the form and start time until the end date specified in the Until field and end time If it is checked a number of entries will be added each one spanning from the specified start time to the specified end time one entry for each date in the range of dates specified For example in Figure 6 18 the entry for Irene Lewis was added with an until date entered and repeat checked and so she is marked as unavailable from 8 30 16 00 for each day in the date ranged entered while the entry for Frank Davies was added without repeat checked which means he is unavailable for one continuous period from 29 07 2011 at 9 00 until 31 07 2011 at 17 30 Whether Repeat is checked or not is only relevant if an Until date has also been specified Optional Enter a percentage workload amount between 1 100 in the Workload field A workload of less than 100 means the resource will only be partially unavailable for the specified period For 6 7 WORK QUEUES 169 example a value of 75 means that the resource may also be allocated as a secondary resource to a task at the same time if that task only requires 25 of the output of that resource that is the resource can be shared across two or more tasks during the same period an example may be a part time worker or a surgical nurse who can work between two operating theatres at the same time If this field is leaft blank it will d
81. display if not then a dynamically generated form will appear You do not have to be logged on to YAWL before you click on a work item link in the gadget a e3 9 E Xx Bay at fil ie http localhost 8080 resourceService faces dynForm jsp 24 iGoogle X 1h YAWL 2 0 RSS Form Handler xX ee OAKA wW hO Work Item successfully processed Please click the button below to close this window tab Close Window Figure 6 30 The Worklist Gadget s Post Form Display Message When you leave the form whether by a Cancel Save or Complete action a message will appear on the page informing of the success or otherwise of the action taken Figure 6 30 Note that your current logon status is unaffected by actions you take on the gadget if you were already logged on to YAWL in another tab or window that session will remain active after the action completes if you were not already logged on you will automatically be logged on to enable the processing of the work item then logged out again when the processing completes Close this page to return to the iGoogle tab window and refresh the iGoogle page to show any newly available work items or queue changes caused by your actioning of the work item Chapter 7 The Monitor Service The Monitor Service is a basic service that provides a summary view of all currently active cases within the YAWL engine It consists of three screens that are viewed hierarchically the case level th
82. element name GivenName type xs string gt lt xs element name Address type xs string gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs schema gt Figure 10 11 Data Definition for Document type 10 7 Email Sender Service NOTE This service has been superseded by the Mail Service cf Section 10 4 The Email Sender Service allows users to send simple emails from within the workflow process instance 10 7 1 How to use the Service First please make sure that you have the mailSender war file deployed in your tomcat webapps folder The Mail Sender Service uses a YAWL custom form for sending a simple mail notification You just need one task and set the custom form of that task to call the Mail Sender jsp file First create a net that will use the Mail Sender Service Figure 10 12 Note that you don t need to create a variable to use the Mail Sender but the task that uses it will need at least one variable defined so that the YAWL worklist s view edit button will not be available and you will not be able to access the Custom form menu Second define the Custom form for the task by right clicking on the task and selection Set Custom Form from the menu The address of the custom form is http localhost 8080 mailSender WebMail 10 7 EMAIL SENDER SERVICE 301 MailSender Example MailSender Figure 10 12 Example Mail Sender Process jsp remember to replace localhost
83. element name destination type xs string gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs complexType name serviceType gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs element name want_flight type xs boolean gt lt xs element name want_hotel type xs boolean gt lt xs element name want_car type xs boolean gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs schema gt Figure 5 20 Updated data type definition for the make trip net 5 5 ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES Data Variables for Net make_trip a Name Type Scope Initial Value gt customer string Please enter name gt itinerary ItineraryType P legs LegsType Local gt startDate date Local gt endDate date Local gt flightDetails string Local Enter flight gt hotelDetails string Local Enter hotel gt carDetails string Local Enter car gt payAccNumber string Local gt subTotal double Local 0 t aAv Cancel Apply OK Figure 5 21 Net variable definitions for the make trip net Binding Binding Net Variable payAccNumber customer legs 8 0 6 Input Bindings Net Variables make_trip customer text0 Name gt legs Le a gt startDate e gt endDate Output Bindings P flightDetails P hotelDetails register payAccNumber text0 gt carDetails register customer text gt payAccNumber g register legs gt
84. example where an organisation has a standardised set of forms for their business processes and would like their web based forms to match that standard In such cases a Custom Form may be user defined and associated with a task by specifying a URL to the form At runtime for such a task the Resource Service will package up the task data and send it to the custom form for display and or editing depending on how the form has been defined On submission of the form by the user the data is extracted from the form by the Service and passed back to the task in the same manner as dynamic forms Custom forms may be built using any web based technology such as JSF Javascript NET PHP or any other browser based environment that can receive data use it to populate form fields update the data with user inputs and pass control back to the calling service To set a custom form for a task select the Custom Form property in the Task section of the Properties Pane In the dialog that appears enter the absolute URI of the custom form see Figure 4 56 To remove a custom form association open the dialog and enter a blank URI i e remove the URI from the dialog and click OK e800 Set Custom Form URI Please enter a URI for the Custom Form http www myserver com form jsp Cancel Figure 4 56 Custom form dialog See the YAWL Technical Manual for information regarding the creation and configuration of custom forms 4 16 Task Docum
85. filtering over the set The Org Data Screen contains four tab pages one for each of org entities listed above The methods used to maintain the data for each entity is similar on each of these four pages To Add a new entity click the New button which will display an Add New input field Enter a name for the entity and optionally a description and note choose the entity it belongs to and or reports to as required see below then click the Add button You may cancel the addition at any time by clicking the Reset button instead of the Add button To Modify an entity select it from the list then add or change its name description note belongs to and or reports to values then click the Save button To Delete an entity select it from the list and click the Remove button To view the list of participants that own an entity select it from the list The Members dropdown shows all of the participants associated with the selected entity 160 CHAPTER 6 THE RUNTIME ENVIRONMENT With regards to the belongs to and reports to relations e A role may belong to another role you may set this relation using the Belongs To dropdown on the Roles tab page This allows a hierarchy of roles to be created so that when a task is assigned to a role in the Editor and that role has other roles belonging to it those roles are also implicitly included by inheritance You will not be allowed to have a role belong it itself either directl
86. folder of the worklet repository Then launch an instance of wListMaker When the case begins enter three values for the Bob variable as shown in Figure 8 38 you will have to click the add button twice to get three input fields Make sure you enter the values one two and three without the quotes and in any order Complete the form ee 218 CHAPTER 8 THE WORKLET SERVICE Edit Work Item 1 4 Figure 8 36 Discharge Workitem with Data Mapped from TreatFever Worklet Create_list_items Verify_list Show_list Figure 8 37 The wListMaker Specification Start and edit the Create List Items workitem Since the values have already been entered there is no more to do here so click the Complete button to continue The next task is Verify List which has been associated with the Worklet Service Since this task is a multiple instance atomic task three child workitem instances of the task are created one for each of the Bob values entered previously The Worklet Service will determine that it is a multiple instance atomic task and will treat each child workitem instance separately and will launch the appropriate worklet for each based on the data contained in each Since the data in each child instance is different in this example the Worklet Service starts three different worklets called BobOne BobTwo and BobThree Each of these worklets contains only one task Go to the Work Queues page There are three w
87. followed by the execution of the send report task such that a performative is sent from that task to the receive task of the second visit In addition to this for the above mentioned interactions it is important that it is known whether they have already taken place i e the state of them needs to be known For example in order for the receive task of the second visit to take place it is important to know whether the performative from the send report task has already been received Entities and Interaction Graphs In order to be able to precisely specify the interactions that need to take place for Sue and their current state we need to introduce two additional concepts The fist concept is called an entity An entity is an object that exists in conjunction with existing and future Proclet instances Examples of an entity are a patient a claim or a software product that needs to be developed So Sue can be an entity For an entity tasks in multiple Proclet instances need to be performed In order for these tasks to be performed in the desired order specific interactions are required between existing and future Proclet instances Note that this also may also involve a sequence of interactions among multiple Proclet instances 9 1 INTER WORKFLOW SUPPORT 241 In order for an entity to store the interactions that need to take place between existing and future Proclet instances and their state we introduce a s
88. i e components that have been updated since the last formal release please 2 4 MANUAL INSTALLATION YAWL ENTERPRISE 19 follow the instructions on the YAWL Foundation s Latest Builds web page 2 4 1 Installing Tomcat YAWL mainly consists of a number of servlets and so needs a servlet container installed to host them We recommend Apache Tomcat be used it is free stable and fully tested as a YAWL host over a number of years YAWL requires Tomcat version 7 or later The first step is to download the latest Tomcat version from tomcat apache org The simplest way to install Tomcat in a Windows environment is to use the purpose built Windows installer provided For installation on Mac OSX 1 Download the latest Tomcat binary from tomcat apache org 2 Unpack the downloaded file to a destination directory of your choice 3 If necessary change the owner of the tomcat hierarchy to your user sudo chown R lt your_username gt lt your root Tomcat dir gt 4 Make the Tomcat scripts executable sudo chmod x lt your root Tomcat dir gt bin sh Linux installation is similarly straightforward A simple set of instructions for ubuntu can be found at www howtogeek com howto linux installing tomcat 6 on ubuntu In all cases an environment variable called CATALINA HOME needs to be added which points to the tomcat install path Once Tomcat is installed two small configuration changes are required to files foun
89. in Process Aware Information Systems In M Dumas M Reichert and M C Shan editors BPM 2008 volume 5240 of Lecture Notes in Computer Science Springer Verlag Berlin 2008 16 F Gottschalk W M P van der Aalst M H Jansen Vullers and M La Rosa Configurable Workflow Models International Journal of Cooperative Information Systems 17 2 177 221 2008 17 A H M ter Hofstede W M P van der Aalst M Adams and N Russell editors Modern Business Process Automation YAWL and its Support Environment Springer 2010 18 N Lohmann and D Weinberg Wendy A tool to synthesize partners for services In J Lilius and W Penczek editors 31st Int Conference on Applications and Theory of Petri Nets and Other Models of Concurrency volume 6128 of Lecture Notes in Computer Science pages 297 307 Springer Verlag Berlin 2010 19 R S Mans Workflow Support for the Healthcare Domain PhD thesis Eindhoven University of Technology June 2011 See http www processmining org blogs pub2011 workflow_support_for_ the_healthcare_domain 20 T Murata Petri nets Properties Analysis and Applications Proceedings of the IEEE 77 4 541 580 1989 21 M Pesic H Schonenberg and W M P van der Aalst DECLARE Full Support for Loosely Structured Processes In M Spies and M B Blake editors Proceedings of the Eleventh IEEE International Enterprise Distributed Object Computing Conference EDOC 2007 pages 287 298 IEEE Computer Socie
90. in the Decomposition section of the Properties Pane selecting the appropriate task level variable from the Data Variables Dialog that appears then clicking the Extended Attributes toolbar button and setting the desired values in the Extended Attributes dialog Notes about extended attributes Those attributes marked with an asterisk in Table 4 7 mirror XML Schema facets that may be set for values as part of the type definition for a field These facet attributes are only available for simple data types If a extended attribute facet has a value and the type definition also has a value for the facet the extended attribute value takes precedence Note that not all facets make sense for all data types where a value is set for an extended attribute that mirrors a facet and the field in question does not support that facet then the value is ignored Please refer to an XML Schema reference for more infor mation about facets and their application to different data types for example http www w3 org TR xmlschema 2 rf facetsandhttp www w3schools com schema schema_facets asp Values for the text above text below and label attributes may include embedded XQuery XPath ex pressions that reference the work item s data See the Section 4 18 3 for examples The Read Only attribute only applies to fields that would otherwise not be read only That is a variable with usage type Input Only will display as read only regardless of
91. is simply a matter of starting the engine choose Start Engine from the options shown for the YAWL program followed by access the Resource Service in a Web Browser choose YAWL Control Centre from the options shown for the YAWL program When you have logged in you can create new roles by choosing the Org Data Mgt form from the menubar and new participants by choosing the User Mgt form from the menubar This is illustrated in Figure 3 5 where the role Senior Credit Officer is defined and Figure 3 6 where the participant Michael Corleone is defined and assigned that role Once we have defined all the required roles and participants we can specify resourcing requirements for 34 CHAPTER 3 GETTING STARTED WITH YAWL BA YAWL 3 0 Organisational x WL a e gt CD localhost 8080 resourceService faces orgDataMgt jsp Pid C Admin Queues Cases Users Org Data Assets Calendar Services Client Apps Logout Order Fulfilment Manager Can approve loan applications PO Manager involving a Large Amount Senior Claim Manager classification Senior Credit Officer p Senior Finance Officer Senior Supply Officer Notes Shipment Planner site engineer supplier Supply Admin Officer J m i Name Members 0 Reset Remove Senior Credit Officer Figure 3 5 Defining a Role E YAWL 3 0 User Maintenar x ia Pa
92. is system initiated the work item is immediately started and placed on the participant s started queue This action removes the work item from the offered queues of all other participants that had been previously offered the work item Accept amp Start This action works similarly to Accept Offer except that if the work item s start interac tion is user initiated the work item will instead be immediately started and placed on the participant s 6 7 WORK QUEUES 171 started queue Effectively this concatenates two user actions into one simply as a convenience for the user e Chain This action will chain all the eligible work items of the case of which the work item is a member to this participant Chaining means that when a participant chooses to enact it each remaining work item for the case is routed to the participant and immediately started but only if the participant is a member of the distribution set for the work item Chaining is effectively a short circuiting of a resource specification for a task where the participant chooses to automatically and immediately allocate and start any work item offered to him her within the chosen case Chaining of work items for a case continues until the case completes or the participant turns off chaining via the View Profile form A participant must have the Chain Work Item Execution user privilege to enable chaining 6 7 2 The Allocated Queue The Allocated queue lists the work it
93. language the query reads for each child element in the list variable return that element In our example the generated XQuery is for s in MasterList return lt bookList_Item gt s lt bookList_Item gt 86 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR 18 0 0 wa Input Data Bindings for Task Verify_List m Input To Generate Binding From Binding List_Builder MasterList MI Splitting Query feturn lt bookList_Item gt Ss lt bookList_Item gt A Cancel for Ss in MasterList Figure 4 37 Input Binding and Splitting Query generated from the MasterList variable The s part is a query variable all query variables start with a sign followed by one or more charac ters s is a convention for a loop variable but other names are of course allowed The return value for each s in our query would by default start and end with order tags the name of the element in the BookList date definition since our variable is called bookList_Item we have to replace the order tags with bookListItem tags so the return value of our XQuery is the contents of the order s x but surrounded by bookList_Item tags The final result is a number of bookList_Item val ues each corresponding to one order element in MasterList Click OK to close the Input Bindings Dialog Now let s take a look at the generated output queries for the formal
94. live workitem has a status of fired enabled or executing effectively suspending execution of the case Suspend All Cases suspends all live workitems in all of the currently executing instances of the specification in which the workitem is defined effectively suspending all running cases of the specification gt Continue Workitem un suspends or continues execution of the previously suspended workitem gt Continue Case un suspends execution of all previously suspended workitems for the case effectively continuing case execution P Continue All Cases un suspends execution of all previously suspended workitems for all cases of the specification in which the workitem is defined or of which the case is an instance effectively continuing all running cases of the specification m Remove Workitem removes or cancels the workitem execution ends and the workitem is marked with a status of cancelled No further execution occurs on the process path that contains the workitem m Remove Case removes cancels the case Case execution ends m Remove All Cases removes cancels all case instances for the specification in which the workitem is defined or of which the case is an instance 44 Restart Workitem rewinds workitem execution back to start Resets the workitem s data values to those it had when it began execution gt gt Force Complete WorkItem completes a live workitem Execution of th
95. m ns current state receive task is executed a The Proclet instances that need to be performed for Sue together with the desired interactions lab Sue 25 01 Sue 2 lab Sue 25 01 create executed_source send report N C oe a s g at A ao u Se wait longer or not Ew S o gt S visit Sue 25 01 Sue 7 visit decide consumed visit Sue 10 02 create Sue 10 02 receive b Current state of the interaction graph for Sue lab Sue 25 01 Sue 2 lab Sue 25 01 D create executed_source send report g do not wait longer a S 2 Arc has received 9 gt u state failed ae e visit Sue 25 01 Sue 7 visit decide consumed visit Sue 10 02 create Sue 10 02 J receive c State of the interaction graph when it is decided not to wait for the missing performative Figure 9 16 Illustration of an exception that may occur in the context of a task that is executed Here no performative has been sent yet from the lab instance to the Proclet instance for the second visit As a result a problem occurs when executing the receive task for the second visit One solution is to wait longer for the missing performative Another solution is to force complete the task and to mark the corresponding interaction arc as having the state failed 9 1 INTER WORKFLOW SUPPORT 259 requested how to deal with the situation Note that the time out value can be mapped to any unit of time For exampl
96. mdo_meeting 69 send_reports mdo_meeting 65 exception ndo_meeting 65 register ndo_meeting 69 send_reports visit 64 decide ndo_meeting 69 register visit 66 createCondition mdo_meeting 65 exception b extended interaction graph for Sue interactions for the new node for the exception interaction point of the canceled multidisciplinary meeting pathology meeting Figure 9 36 Handling of the exception which involves the cancelation of the pathology meeting with instance identifier 65 288 CHAPTER 9 THE PROCLET SERVICE Interaction Definition Editor 0 x Model Interaction Point Window Proclet instance Extra Help F Exception Interaction Point Be Boas Select Exception instances for which an exception at workitem level occurred Proclet Class and Proclet Instance visit 66 receive Select entities that are affected for a selected Affected Entities workitem Sue Decision handling of the exception Handle Exception Grant More Time Figure 9 37 Handling of the exception which involves a workitem for which not all required performatives are received In Figure 9 36a the panel is presented which shows exceptions that occurred at case level and how they can be handled In the top panel via the drop down box instances are shown for which the cancelation or completion resulted in an exception As a follow up to that for a sele
97. necessarily the same one that the data was mapped from To illustrate the operation of MI tasks with particular emphasis on the data perspective we will use the List Builder specification shown in Figure 4 35 which begins by compiling an order a list of book titles It then creates a number of MI task instances one for each book title in the list of books Once all the MI task instances complete the updated list is recomposed and shown in the final task To prepare this specification place two atomic tasks and one MI task onto the canvas and join then with flows as shown in Figure 4 35 Now we need to define a complex data type to store the entire book or der Select the Data Definitions property in the Specifications section of the Properties Pane and enter the following two complex type definitions lt xs schema xmlns xs http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema gt lt xs complexType name BookOrder gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs element name title type xs string gt lt xs element name price type xs double gt 84 List_Builder CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR O _ gt gt _ gt Create Book Verify List Show List Figure 4 35 Example specification with a Multiple Instance Task lt xs element name inStock type xs boolean gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs complexType name BookList gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs element maxOccurs unbounded name
98. need to be associated with a decomposition Decompositions can have a number of variables or parameters defined for them describing what data must be supplied to a running net or task instance and what data that net or task instance will eventually deliver Each variable has a name it may be referenced by a type dictating valid values it may store a designation or usage indicating how that data may be used and a scope defining the visibility of the parameter Variables can belong to one of two scopes which we ll refer to as net scope and task scope At runtime every net and every task instance with a decomposition will have data stored as a number of variables belonging to it To get data from a net instance to a task instance within the net or visa versa we require a data transfer In YAWL all data is passed this way from net level to task level when a task instance starts and from task level back to net level when the task instance completes data cannot be directly transferred from one task instance to another Valid designations for a task variable are Input Output or both Input amp Output A task variable with an input designation is one where we expect data to be delivered from a net level variable to that variable at run time A task variable with an output designation it expected to have its data output to a containing net level variables once a task instance has completed Just like task variables net variables may hav
99. not used again in this tutorial Timer Predicates Timer predicates are special non XQuery expressions that may be used as flow predicates For each task that has a timer associated with it cf Section 4 13 an implicit net level timer state variable is created and maintained at runtime At any particular time during the execution of the net a timer state variable can have one of four values Table 4 1 A timer predicate can have one of two operators equals or not equals and takes the form timer name_of_task operator timer state For example assuming a task called Enrol has a timer then on any outgoing flow from an OR split or XOR split on any task in the net that also contains the Enrol task the following example timer predicates are valid 80 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR Predicate for Flow Begin _My_Career gt Attend_University Net Variables score number My_Career score text gt 65 OK Cancel Figure 4 30 Predicate Update Dialog dormant Timer has not yet started active Timer is running closed Task completed before timer expired expired Timer expired before task completed Table 4 1 Valid states of timer state variables e timer Enrol dormant e timer Enrol active e timer Enrol expired e timer Enrol expired Notes e Timer predicates are case sensitive including the
100. numbers in Figure 9 25 For each situation we elaborate on the kind of interaction that is possible and how a nominated interaction leads to an extension of the interaction graph e The first situation relates to an external interaction Via this external interaction it is possible to create instances of a given Proclet class That is for active node n1 that is under consideration the fol lowing observations can be made Looking at the corresponding interaction point of node n1 in its Proclet class it can be seen that via an external interaction it is connected with the input condition of Proclet class X As a result multiple instances of Proclet class X may be created For each instance that needs to created an interaction arc is added leading from node n1 to the node that is added for the new instance of Proclet class X Note that the newly added node has a temporary instance identifier which has T as prefix Also the inserted arc has the interaction state anproduced and it has a unique interaction identifier e The second situation relates to an external interaction Via this external interaction it is possible to have an interaction with a task instance of an existing or future Proclet instance That is for active node n2 that is under consideration the following can be observed Note that n2 may relate to an existing or future Proclet instance Looking at the corresponding interac
101. of Petri nets to workflow see e g 2 The subclass of Petri nets introduced by him Workflow nets is a predecessor of YAWL The textbook that he wrote together with Kees van Hee is highly recommended reading 9 A recent textbook on Business Process Management BPM which covers the original control flow patterns and also YAWL was written by Mathias Weske 31 This textbook also covers other approaches such as the modelling standard BPMN note that the BPMN2YAWL tool can convert these specifications to YAWL On the YAWL web site yawl foundation org it can be seen how the original control flow patterns can be realised in YAWL follow the link on Resources and then click patterns For control flow patterns in newYAWL the reader can consult appendix A 1 of Nick Russell s PhD thesis 28 If you would like to know more about how verification of YAWL specifications really works we refer you to 30 and to 33 This work forms the theoretical basis of how the verification mechanisms are realised in the YAWL editor In depth discussion of YAWL s exception handling framework from a conceptual point of view can be found in 28 24 and from an implementation aspect in 12 13 YAWL s worklet approach to dealing with on the fly changes to workflows is discussed in 12 14 The reader that is interested in declarative specification of workflow is referred to 21 On the Declare web site declare sf net the Declare service for Y
102. of entities that can be extended the notion of an interaction point can be further refined Therefore a distinction is made between a configuration an inbox and an outbox interaction point The meaning of these is as follows Inbox Interaction Point For one or more entities performatives may be received In this way an inbox interaction point is only connected to input ports For each input port an arbitrary number of perfor matives may be received An inbox interaction point is either connected to a task or an input condition In Figure 9 15a inbox interaction points are marked with the abbreviation IB For example the re ceive task in the visit Proclet class is an inbox interaction point as for an entity only performatives are received Outbox Interaction Point For one or more entities performatives may be sent to multiple receivers So an outbox interaction point is only connected to output ports For each output port an arbitrary number of performatives may be sent Note that by definition an output port is only connected to a task In Figure 9 15a outbox interaction points are marked with the abbreviation OB For example the send reports task of the MDM Proclet class is an outbox interaction point as for multiple entities a performative may be sent Configuration Interaction Point A configuration interaction point is similar to an outbox interaction point It has the additional requirement
103. other atomic task and call it Show List Add a variable to the decom position similarly to the first task except that its scope should be set to Input and so only an input binding will be generated This task will show the user the results of any data changes done during the execution of the MI task thus its variable is input only meaning that the values are display only for this task Add a decomposition to the MI task and call it Verify List To the decomposition add a variable called MasterList of type BookList and scope Input amp Output by dragging it from the net level list then rename it to bookList like we did earlier Notice that for this task the tool bar at the bottom on the Decomposition Variables list has a Mark as MI button 9 appears This button only shows for MI tasks Each MI task requires one variable to be marked as the formal MI variable that is the variable that will provide a list or set of data values which can be split into individual values for passing to individual multiple instances of the task Our variable of BookList type fits that bill With the bookList Decomposition variable selected click the Mark as MI button Four changes are immediately visible the variable s name has changed from bookList to bookList_Item to signify that each created task instance will handle one item of the overall book list the variable s type has changed from
104. participant must have the task privilege Can Reallocate Stateful and have subordinate staff to successfully reallocate a work item e New Instance This action allows for the creation of a new instance of the selected work item it is enabled only for a work item of a multiple instance atomic task that allows dynamic creation of additional work item instances e Complete Completes the selected work item The work item is posted back to the engine which then progresses the case according to its control flow This action is initially disabled if the work item contains mandatory editable data variables as in Figure 6 22 and becomes enabled after the first view edit of the work item 6 7 4 The Suspended Queue The Suspended queue lists executing work items that have been suspended via the Suspend button on the Started queue Note that suspended work items must have already been started and not yet completed and so this queue may be seen as an extension of the started queue This queue contains one action Unsuspend which resumes the work item removing it from the suspended queue and returning it to the started queue 174 CHAPTER 6 THE RUNTIME ENVIRONMENT CREED sores toe gt Admin Queues Team Queues Cases Users Org Data Assets Calendar Services Client Apps Offered 1 Allocated 1 Started 1 Suspended 2 amp Work Items Specification Task Unsuspend 130853 1 ReceiveSSN_3 CreditRa
105. positions for example bank teller TEL0123 may report to the Bank Manager and may belong to zero or one Org Groups see below Like capabilities a position or positions may be included in a filter defined at design time that is run over the distribution set for a task at runtime Positions are also used at runtime to enable resource patterns such as delegation reallocation and viewing of team work queues see Section 6 7 for more details Org Group An organisational group org group is a functional grouping of positions Common examples might include Marketing Sales Human Resources and so on but may be any grouping relevant to an organisation In the YAWL model each position may belong to zero or one org groups Further like roles an org group may belong to a larger more general org group for example the groups Marketing and Sales may each belong to the more general Production group Org groups are often also based on location Like positions org groups may be included in a filter defined at design time that is run over the distribution set for a task at runtime While the descriptions of the various entities in the YAWL model above discuss the typical uses of each it should be clear that they represent at the most basic level merely various ways to group participants The main point of distinction between them is that only roles can be used to populate a distribution set in the Editor the other three may be used to perform
106. property using coverability L Check for unnecessary cancellation regions _ Check for unnecessary or joins K File Paths me Check for or joins in a cycle K Check for soundness property using reachability results from bounded nets C Show observations in analysis results Save Options Kk Keep Analysis progress dialog open when analysis completes Maximum Markings 5000 Defaults O Y VL nm C Struc f eC E BE ne sem f aj Exter de Cancel A 7 OK Figure 4 50 Preferences Dialog Analysis panel e090 Analyse Specification Analysing Specification Completed Elements in the original YAWL net Net 7 YAWL Reduced net 1 rules FSPY Reduced net size 5 Elements in the original reset net 9 Reset Reduced net 2 rules FSPR FSTR Reduced net size 3 Immediate successors 1 Reachability set size 2 Duration 415 milliseconds V Keep open when analysis completes Stop Figure 4 51 Analysis progress dialog For YAWL the notion of weak soundness was introduced as it can be theoretically proven that soundness is not decidable 33 For a finite state space we can simply try and check all reachable states but this is obviously not possible when this state space is very large or infinite In those cases we can check whether it is possible to reach the final state from the initial state Hence the question becomes does a scenario exist where we reach the fi
107. refer back to the first scenario However now we assume a situation in which the send report task of the lab Proclet instance has not been executed Also we assume that we are currently executing the receive task of the Proclet instance for the second visit Note that the latter task is linked to an inbox interaction point This situation is depicted in Figure 9 16 Time Out Value As no performative has been sent from the send report task of the lab instance to the receive task of the second visit it is not allowed to complete the receive task i e the state of the interaction arc for the respective interaction is still unproduced As a result an exception occurs for the visit Proclet instance We distinguish two different approaches in order to deal with such a situation The first approach is to reserve more time in which to receive the missing performative This can be supported by defining a time out value for an inbox interaction point The value defines how much time needs to be reserved in which to wait for missing performatives Once the waiting time has lapsed a human user is 258 CHAPTER 9 THE PROCLET SERVICE lab Sue 25 01 k blood test task is not executed yet visit Sue 10 02 z initi IB recel 1 1 gt ri r W decid broch ve i e ures
108. requireHotel gt true lt requireHotel gt lt requireFlight gt false lt requireFlight gt lt PerformBooking gt Decide Figure 5 4 XPath expression for choosing the branch of Book Car at task Decide evaluation for a task with XOR or OR split is conducted after completing the execution of the task and therefore the task variables are no longer available 2 Similarly to the XQuery validation the syntax validation of XPath expressions can be performed in the YAWL editor The semantics validation is however a different matter XQuery is very flexible on what is considered to be a valid boolean value e An empty condition will evaluate to false however the editor s Split Predicates dialog doesnt allow empty expressions e A valid XPath expression to any node is treated as true even if the value of the node is a string or integer for example i e testing the node s existence rather than its value e A single boolean value is treated as that value i e true or false e If it is a single string then if it is zero length it is treated as false otherwise it is treated as true For example abc and false will evaluate to true e If it is a single numeric value then if the value is NaN or zero it is treated as false otherwise it is treated as true For example 37 and 432 will evaluate to true So care should be taken when entering split predicate expressions 5 4
109. services The service will supply to the task three variable definitions which will require supplied values when the service is invoked at runtime e YawlWSInvokerWSDLLocation specifies the URI of the WSDL file describing the web service to invoked 291 292 CHAPTER 10 OTHER SERVICES e YawlWSInvokerPortName specifies the port binding that the web service listens on for interaction with external clients and protocols and e YawlWSInvokerOperationName specifies the name of the operation to be executed within the web service In addition any data values that are required for the web service s operation must also be specified within the task level variables these are passed to the specified web service when it is invoked The WSInvoker Service then waits until the external service responds then returns a mapping of the resultant data to the task instance s output data variables Note that when a task is registered with the Invoker Service at design time the Editor automatically populates the task s input variables with the required data attributes above At present the WS Invoker Service supports only SOAP over HTTP and request response and one way interactions out in and out only message exchange patterns 10 3 SMS Service The SMS service can use any third party SMS Gateway web service to send and receive SMS messages and pass the data into and out of the YAWL Engine In this way participants can view update and complete ta
110. state of the interaction graph for Sue As a result of sending out performatives due to the execution of the decide task the state of the outgoing interaction arcs of the visit Sue 25 01 node are changed into sent Figure 9 4 As a result of executing the decide task two performatives are sent As a consequence the interaction graph is updated Next the interaction state of an arc stores the specific state of an interaction for the respective entity For example for an external interaction it can be captured whether a performative has been sent For an inter nal interaction it indicates whether the task that is linked to the interaction point has already executed or not In total for an arc referring to an external interaction we distinguish four different states and for an arc referring to an internal interaction In the example below for the first scenario tasks will be executed for different Proclet instances In this way it can be seen which performatives are exchanged Moreover it explains how the arcs of an interaction graph are updated and which states we distinguish In this way the mechanisms of an interaction graph can be illustrated along with the mechanisms of an interaction point internal interaction and external interaction Executing the First Scenario For the first scenario visualized in Figure 9 1 tasks for the first visit lab test and second visit will be performed In Figure
111. the View Profile form or the participant logs out if so configured A participant must have the Can Pile task privilege to enable piling 6 7 3 The Started Queue The Started queue lists the work items that have been started by or for a participant Each work item on a started queue has begun execution in a system sense but may or may not have had any actual work begun for it by the participant such work is performed by the participant viewing editing and finally completing the work item Edit Profile Logout Admin Queves Team Queues Cases Users Org Data Assets Calendar Services Client Apps J Offered 1 Allocated 1 Started 3 Suspended 0 G Work Items Specification Task View Edit 130852 1 1 Create_Purchase_Order_104 orderfulfilment 1 3 Create Purchase Order 130853 1 ReceiveSSN_3 Suspend 130854 1 Create_Book_List_3 Case Status Reallocate s l 130852 1 1 Executing Reallocate s f nes Age New Instance Jul 19 2011 15 16 51 10 03 50 28 Complete Documentation Figure 6 22 The Started Work Queue A participant may take the following actions on a work item in an started queue e View Edit This action will display the data parameters and their current values for the selected work item either on a dynamically generated form see Figure 6 23 or if specified a custom form allowing the participant to view and or edit the form s
112. the first task in the net is activated No action is taken for Output scopes set for root net variables Input bindings may be created only for variables of scopes Input or InputOutput For task level vari ables all input variables must have a binding that maps a value to it Output bindings may be created only for variables of scopes Output or InputOutput For task level variables all output variables must have a binding that maps a value from it A single task may map some values via XQuery and others via external data gateways That is data can be sourced from either net level variables external data gateways or both for the variables of a single task It is possible to combine several task level output variables into a single complex data type to pass to a net level variable of that data type That is there need not be a 1 1 mapping between task level output variables and net level variables the only requirement is that there is some binding expression s to contain bindings for every task level variable with output scope 4 7 4 Split Predicates When dealing with tasks that have XOR and OR splits we need some way of defining which flow s should be activated at runtime This is achieved by associating a boolean XQuery expression with each flow At runtime the flow expressions are evaluated and e if the split type is an OR split each flow that has an expression that evaluates to true will be executed e if the split type is an
113. the next task in the process Treat becomes enabled Because it is worklet enabled the Worklet Service is notified The Service checks to see if there is a set of rules associated with this workitem and if so the service checks out the workitem When this occurs the YAWL Engine marks the workitem as executing externally to the Engine and waits for the workitem to be checked back in In the meantime the Worklet Service uploads the relevant specifi cation for the worklet chosen as a substitute for the workitem and launches a new case for the specification When the worklet case completes the Worklet Service is notified of the cases completion and the service then checks the original workitem back into the Engine allowing the original process to continue We have completed editing the Triage workitem and clicked the Complete button Go to the Work Queues page Instead of seeing the next workitem listed i e Treat we see that Test Fever the first workitem in the TreatFever process is listed in its place Figure 8 32 The TreatFever process has been chosen by the Worklet Service to replace the Treat workitem based on the data passed to the service Note that the case id for the Test Fever workitem is different to the case id of the parent process Worklets run as completely different cases to the parent process but the Worklet Service keeps track of which worklets are running for which parent cases Go to the Case Mgt page to see that a Casua
114. the operation of the system under normal circumstances In this case we will illustrate the operation of the system where exceptions occur Therefore we first demonstrate how an exception at case level is handled followed by the manner in which an exception at workitem level is handled Exception at Case Level For the demonstration assume that for both Sue and Anne we have just finished defining the interactions as a result of the decide task during the first visit So the interaction graphs shown in Figures 9 34a and 9 35 apply Moreover we assume that the multidisciplinary meeting with instance identifier 65 can not take place anymore because some of the doctors involved need to attend a conference As a result the patients that are discussed during the meeting now need to be discussed during the next multidisciplinary meeting which has instance identifier 69 In the system this is supported in the following way As a result of the cancelation of the multidisciplinary meeting with instance identifier 65 an exception occurred This is because both for Anne and Sue it has been defined that the result of their multidisci plinary examination need to be used as input for the second visit for each of them This is now not possible anymore 286 CHAPTER 9 THE PROCLET SERVICE MDM MDM Di 05 02 Anne 5 05 02 register executed_none send report interaction graph N
115. the same specification loaded at any one time e g if a specification has been updated but there are still cases running against the older version but new cases may only be launched for the latest version uploaded 152 CHAPTER 6 THE RUNTIME ENVIRONMENT A medical treatment to test and simple mr at i perator ering Figure 6 1 Case Management Figure 6 2 Delayed Launch dialog 6 4 ADMINISTRATION 153 The launching of a new case can be queued for a period by clicking the Launch Later button which displays the popup dialog shown in Figure 6 2 The dialog provides three ways to specify a delay 1 A number of seconds allows for the entry of a whole number of seconds When the dialog is closed with the OK button the case will launch when the specified number of seconds has elapsed 2 A Duration allows for the entry of an xsd duration value see Section 4 13 for details on specifying Duration type values When the dialog is closed with the OK button the case will launch when the specified duration has elapsed 3 An exact date and time allows for the entry of a specific future moment as an xsd dateTime value i e of the form CCYY MM DDThh mm ss When the dialog is closed with the OK button the case will launch when the specified moment arrives To unload a specification from the Engine select it and click the Unload Spec button in the Loaded Specifications panel Note that an attempt to unload a specification will f
116. the workitem the rule is testing enabling developers to write methods that test the values in the variable and act on those values accordingly If it is for a case level rule this contains the case data for the instance invoking the rule Both versions of this are passed as a string ified JOOM Element format See the YAWL source code for more details of the WorkItemRecord class if required What the execute methods sub block for the isNotCompleted function looks like is shown in Figure 8 60 The block gets this variable as a String from the args HashMap and then calls the actual isNotCompleted method see Figure 8 61 Notice again that the function has been declared as private static and returns a String value The first line of the function converts the String passed into the function to a JOOM Element and then extracts from that Element a value for status being one of the data attributes contained in the this variable It then calls another method defined in the Implementation section called isFinishedStatus see Figure 8 62 8 8 SAMPLE LOG GENERATED BY WALKTHROUGH C 233 if name equalsIgnoreCase isNotCompleted String taskInfo String args get this return isNotCompleted taskInfo Figure 8 60 Execute method s sub block for isNotCompleted function public static String isNotCompleted String itemInfo Element eItem JDOMConversionTools stringToElement itemInfo String status eItem getChildT
117. their work queues as a live feed along with the information in the other gadgets they may have enabled on their iGoogle page 6 10 1 Setting up the Worklist Gadget The first step in setting up the gadget is to create a personal iGoogle page To do so browse to Google then click the iGoogle link in the top right corner of the page If you have not yet done so you will be asked to create an account When you have your iGoogle page loaded click on the Add gadgets link on the right of the page header You will see a page with a list of popular gadgets to choose for your page you must be connected to the internet to access an iGoogle gadget To load the YAWL Worklist gadget 1 Click the Add feed or gadget link on the bottom of the list of links on the left frame of the page under Sort By and Narrow by Category link lists 2 In the input box that appears Figure 6 27 enter the URL http www yawlfoundation org gadgets igYWorklist xml 3 Click the Add button 4 Click OK on the warning dialog that appears Add feed or gadget 7 Type or paste the URL below Ax i He _w yawlfoundation org gadgets igYWorklist xml Add jp Information for Feed owners Developers hti Figure 6 27 Adding the Worklist Gadget to an iGoogle Page When you go back to the iGoogle home page the YAWL Worklist should appear Figure 6 28 but before it can be used some settings must be entered for it click the
118. timer keyword the name of the task and the state value e Timer predicates are specialised split predicates and are available only for use as split predicates 4 7 5 Data Type Definitions As mentioned above YAWL uses XML Schema to define data documents that are passed from net to task and back during the life of a workflow instance There are over 40 simple XML Schema data types string integer boolean etc all of which are supported by YAWL While the simple data types are often sufficient to support process needs the Editor also provides for the definition of user defined simple and complex data types which may be added to a specification and then used to define variables based on those types To define a new type for a specification 1 Select the Data Definitions property in the Specification section of the Properties pane then click on the Action button at the right of the property to open the Data Definitions Dialog 2 Enter an XML Schema Data Type Definition into the dialog See Figure 4 31 Any valid XML Schema definitions are acceptable 4 7 THE DATA PERSPECTIVE 81 3 G2 eoo Update Data Type Definitions DOD ae o W 6 1 6 lt xs schema xmins xs http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema gt lt xs complexType name Geek gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs element name Name type xs string gt lt xs element name Salary type xs double gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs complexT
119. to our YAWL specification describing which participants should be doing partic ular pieces of the work specified We ll assume that the entire workflow is to be carried out by the Applica tions Department of Loans R Us All employees within this department are capable of performing the role Credit Officer but a subset of these with several years of experience also perform the role Senior Credit Officer Anyone with the Credit Officer role is allowed to approve small credit applications Only those performing the role Senior Credit Officer are allowed to do the final approval of large credit applications We therefore have a modelling requirement where every credit officer is capable of processing a credit application right through from its receipt to approval so long as the application is for a small amount When it comes to the step of approval for large credit applications however only senior staff are allowed to do this approval We first need to establish an organisation model within a running YAWL system where we identify those participants from the Applications Department For each of these we assign the Credit Officer role For the subset of participants recognised as senior we also assign an extra role of Senior Credit Officer To define this organisational model you need to log into the YAWL Resource Service for now we ll use the generic username admin and password YAWL Assuming you used one of the automatic installers this
120. to the flow relation going from the Knowledge Gained condition to the Look for an Easier Book atomic task Drag the labels about to a desired position much like what s been done in Figure 4 15 Line Style There are three line styles available for flows Orthogonal straight edged Bezier curved with sharper corners and Spline curved with smoothed corners A line style can be set for a flow by selecting the flow then choosing the style from the flow s Line Style property dropdown list or right clicking on the flow and choosing the style from the popup menu Additional bend points can also be added via the popup menu Figure 4 16 shows flows using two different line styles The outgoing flow from Look for an Easier Book has been given the spline style while the remaining flows are all orthogonal resulting in sharp edged bends on flows such as the one running from the Knowledge Gained condition to the Look for an Easier Book task 4 5 2 Editing Multiple Objects Palette NI My_Career Co Attend_University Study_Privately O G O Oo ae Properties Background I a Data Gateway None Data Variables Fill Colour FFFFFF Log Entries 0 defined Name Study_Privately Root Net L E Elements gt ss gt gt Documentation 4 i i i j Fill Colour J FCFAE7 Read a Book Knowledge Feel Smarter Font MMM Ve
121. transcript between a process modelling expert Processa Maree Experta and her cousin Domainic Experta who runs the credit application department of a company called Loans R Us Processa So how does a credit application begin Domainic Well an application arrives in our office Once we receive it we validate the claim Processa What happens then Domainic We determine what credit requirements there are for the application then we seek a credit report for the applicant Processa So the credit report is requested after the credit requirements are determined Domainic Mostly Sometimes we request the credit report first Actually the order in which we do them doesn t really matter Processa Ah so both tasks could be done at the same time Domainic Yes I guess they could Processa Then what happens Domainic Once we have both the credit report and credit requirements we can tell whether we need to do a large credit approval or a small approval Only senior staff here are allowed to approve large credit applications Processa So what makes a credit application large Domainic If the application is for 5 000 or more it s considered large Any lesser amount is considered a small application and can be done by anybody in our department Processa takes this transcript dumps it on your desk and tells you to implement a workflow to match What s more she wants you to do it with YAWL In a nutshell a workflow spe
122. via the admin work queues and it will be immediately viewable on the queues of those participants who have that work item listed and vice versa Each work queue may be selected by clicking on the appropriate tab 6 7 1 The Offered Queue The Offered queue lists the work items that have been offered to a participant Each work item in an offered queue may have potentially been offered to a number of participants which means there is no implied obligation to accept the offer rather it is understood that the participant is one of a group any one of who may choose to perform the work item EEE sree ioe 1D Admin Queues Team Queues Cases Users Org Data Assets Calendar Services Client Apps Offered 2 Allocated 0 Started 3 Suspended 0 amp Work Items Specification Task Accept Offer 130856 1 A_3 orderfulfilment 1 3 Create Purchase Order 130857 1 Create_Purchase_Order_104 Accept amp Start Case Status Chain k 130857 1 Enabled Created Age Jul 29 2011 19 04 27 0 00 00 13 Documentation Figure 6 20 The Offered Work Queue A participant may take the following actions on a work item in an offered queue e Accept Offer By accepting an offer a participant takes responsibility for the execution of the work item The work item is moved from the offered queue and if the start interaction is user initiated placed on the participant s allocated queue or if the start interaction
123. will be removed from the Rule Type list That is the rule type now has a tree defined for it and so is no longer available for selection on the New Rule form e If it is an item level tree the task name that the tree represents will be removed from the Task Name list That is the task now has a rule tree defined for it for the selected rule type and so is no longer available e If it is an item level tree and all tasks now have trees defined for them for the selected rule type i e this was the final task of the specification for which a tree has been defined the rule type that the tree represents will be removed from the Rule Type list This approach ensures that rule trees can only be added where there are currently no trees defined for the selected specification Once the tree is added the form resets to allow the addition of another new tree as required by repeating the process above for a new rule type or rule type task name for item level trees After you have completed adding trees click the Save amp Close button to save all the additions to the rule set file The Rules Editor will return to the main form where the additional trees will immediately be able to be browsed 8 5 WORKLET RULE SETS AND THE RULES EDITOR 211 IMPORTANT No additions will be actually saved until the Save amp Close button is clicked this is to allow you the option to discard all additions if you wish by clicking the Cancel button That is c
124. with the specific hostname when the service is not installed locally When invoked at runtime the custom form will look like the example in Figure 10 13 Figure 10 13 Example Mail Sender Custom Form You can see that the form in Figure 10 13 contains two parts The first is to set the SMTP parameters to send email 1 You need to chose in the dropdown list which SMTP you would like to use to send emails 2 You also need to enter login and password to connect to the SMTP server To add another SMTP server you have to edit WebMail jsp and add an option value pair to the dropdown list of servers lt select name SMTP onChange messageValue gt lt option value smtp qut edu au gt QUT WebMail lt option gt 302 lt option val lt option val CHAPTER 10 OTHER SERVICES lue smtp gmail com gt Gmail lt option gt lue smtp mail yahoo com gt Yahoo lt option gt lt option val lt select gt The second part of the lue New SMTP gt Name in the dropdown list lt option gt form is for entering the details of the email In the field Send To enter the email address to send the mail to The Alias will be the name appearing on the receiver s mailbox Then you can add the subject of the mail and the content You can also attach a file if desired The service will then attempt to send the email using the smtp server details provided in the form Chapter 11 Seeking Help Manuals like the so
125. yawlmanual gmail com We encourage forum posts bug reports and enhancement requests Providing these centrally means that others can learn from the answers provided and hopefully people are inspired to respond to other people s requests In this way we can manage progress on YAWL more efficiently 303 304 CHAPTER 11 SEEKING HELP Bibliography 1 2 3 4 10 11 W M P van der Aalst Verification of Workflow Nets In P Az ma and G Balbo editors Application and Theory of Petri Nets 1997 volume 1248 of Lecture Notes in Computer Science pages 407 426 Springer Verlag Berlin 1997 W M P van der Aalst The Application of Petri Nets to Workflow Management Journal of Circuits Systems and Computers 8 1 21 66 1998 W M P van der Aalst Formalization and Verification of Event driven Process Chains Information and Software Technology 41 10 639 650 1999 W M P van der Aalst Business Process Management Demystified A Tutorial on Models Systems and Standards for Workflow Management In J Desel W Reisig and G Rozenberg editors Lectures on Concurrency and Petri Nets volume 3098 of Lecture Notes in Computer Science pages 1 65 Springer Verlag Berlin 2004 W M _P van der Aalst L Aldred M Dumas and A H M ter Hofstede Design and implementation of the YAWL system In A Persson and J Stirna editors Proceedings of the 16th International Conference on Advanced Information Sy
126. 0 2 yawl and so on Show this dialog for each save When selected the dialog is shown whenever a file is saved allow ing you to change the settings as desired Since these settings are usually changed infrequently it is recommended that this option be unchecked All of the settings in this dialog can also be accessed via the Preferences Dialog whenever necessary the dialog is completed click OK to save the file This saved specification file can now be loaded into a running YAWL Engine and executed See Chapter 6 52 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR OO File Save Options 4 Verify specification Analyse specification 4 Auto increment minor version number Backup previous version Keep all previous versions K Show this dialog for each save Cancel OK Figure 4 5 File Save Options dialog Upload to YAWL Engine You may upload a valid specification directly to a connected YAWL Engine As part of the upload you can also choose to remove any previous versions of the specification from the Engine and or to start of new instance of the specification in the Engine To do so e Click on the Upload to Engine button QW on the toolbar or select the File Menu and choose Upload e A small Upload Options dialog will appear that lists the following options Figure 4 6 O Upload Options 4 Unload Previous Versions v Cancel Running Cases
127. 02 Sue 5 05 02 register executed_both send report A S Ss 2 E P 22 20 e amp visit 7 Sue 25 01 visit decide Sue 7 Sue 10 02 consumed visit Sue 10 02 create receive MDM MDM 05 02 Anne 5 05 02 register executed_both send report S Z A 3 v Z n 3 3 i 23 S e visit 7 Anne 26 01 visit decide Anne 7 Anne 12 02 consumed visit Anne 12 02 create receive b Current state of the interaction graphs for Sue and Anne Figure 9 26 Illustration of the attributes of a performative and their content 9 1 INTER WORKFLOW SUPPORT 275 9 1 4 Inter Workflow Service In this section the inter workflow support features of the YAWL4Healthcare WfMS are presented These features are presented in the context of the scenario that is discussed in Section 9 1 Note that the scenario is shown again in Figure 9 27 for convenience reasons Remember that for Sue during the first visit it was decided that a second visit is needed and that she needs to be discussed during a multidisciplinary meeting Moreover the result of the multidisciplinary meeting is required as input for the second visit For Anne the process is the same Note that in comparison to the scenario presented in Chapter 6 of 19 an exception interaction point has now been defined for the MDM Proclet class When an exception occurs for the MDM Proclet class this exception interaction point allows that for
128. 223 Edit Work Item 8 2 Figure 8 44 The Sell Tickets Workitem detail Effective Composite Rule if TicketsSold lt Seating 0 75 then suspend workitem run worklet ChangeT oMidVenue continue workitem except if TicketsSold lt Seating 0 5 then suspend workitem run worklet ChangeT oSmallVenue continue workitem except if TicketsSold lt Seating 0 2 then suspend case run worklet CancelShow remove case Figure 8 45 Effective Composite Rule for Do Shows Pre Item Constraint Tree condition evaluates to false for the case data the rule evaluation is complete and the last true node returns its conclusion The result of all this can be seen in the Work Queues screen of the worklist The Do Show workitem is marked as Suspended and thus is unable to be selected for starting while the ChangeToMid Venue worklet has been launched and its first workitem Cancel Stadium is enabled and may be started By viewing the log file you will see that the ChangeToMid Venue worklet is being treated by the Exception Ser vice as just another case and so receives notifications from the Engine for pre case and pre item constraint events also Start Cancel Stadium accept the default values and complete Notice that the worklet has mapped the data attributes and values from the parent case Next start the Book Ent Centre workitem by default it contains the data values mapped from the parent case Since we are moving the co
129. 250 Clearly the rule needs to be amended to capture all cases where the heart rate exceeds a certain limit say 175 While selecting data items from the Current Case panel is fast and easy it is often the case that the condition needs to be further modified to correctly define the relevant rule The Condition input allows direct editing of the condition Conditions are expressed as strings of operands and operators of any complexity and sub expressions may be parenthesised The supported operators are shown in Figure 8 18 All conditions must finally evaluate to a Boolean value i e true or false 204 CHAPTER 8 THE WORKLET SERVICE Precedence Operators Type Arithmetic Comparison Logical AND Logical OR Logical NOT Figure 8 18 Operators Supported TIP In addition to conditions expressed in the above mentioned format conditional expressions may also take the form of XQuery expressions that evaluate to a boolean value To make the condition for the new rule more appropriate the condition HeartRate 190 should be edited to read HeartRate gt 175 After defining a condition for the new rule the name of the worklet to be executed when this condition eval uates to true must be entered in the read only Conclusion field of the New Rule Node panel refer Figure 8 17 To select or create an appropriate worklet click the New button What happens next depends on whether the rule type for the t
130. 4 Advanced Workflow Concepts A specification capable of only walking a user through a path of a workflow is hardly going to win us any awards in workflow automation We still have at least two major concerns to address before our specifica tion becomes useful Firstly we need to decide which participants should perform which tasks This is discussed in section 3 4 1 3 4 ADVANCED WORKFLOW CONCEPTS 33 eoo YAWL Editor 3 0 File Edit Net Elements Plugins Help BHLR a Palette m Properties E Specification Authors adamsmj Data Definitions 0 defined types Description Name New_Specificat Determine arge Credi Title Version Number 0 1 E Net Background Im Data Gateway None Data Variables None r Fill Colour CR 255 G 2 een ang Name Net Validate Application Credit Requirements Approval Choose Approval Process Obtain Small Credit Credit Report Approval Select a number of net elements to manipulate Figure 3 4 Multiple Flows Between Tasks Secondly we need to figure out what data these participants need from the workflow system what data they need to supply the workflow system and how the workflow system will use data to implement automated choice between alternatives Concerns involving workflow data are covered in section 3 4 2 3 4 1 Modelling Resourcing Requirements It s time now to add detail
131. 5 02 register node the subsequent interactions that can be nominated are visualized by dotted arcs MDM MDM D 05 02 Sue 5 05 02 register executed_none send report ZD S y A gt u D e os 2 visit Sue 7 T1 unproduced visit T1 create receive c resultant interaction graph for entity Sue Figure 9 24 Extending the interaction graph for Sue The possible interactions starting from the MDM 05 02 send report node are indicated by dotted arcs The resultant graph is shown at the bottom 9 1 INTER WORKFLOW SUPPORT 271 into account Now we explain for the general case how an interaction graph is extended Relevant entities When a task instance corresponding to a configuration interaction point is executed the interaction graphs of entities may be extended First it is important to know for which entities the interaction graph may be extended Here we distinguish two different cases e a human actor has provided the names of entities for which a corresponding interaction graph needs to be created and for which interactions can be defined e for the entity an interaction has already been defined for the Proclet instance for which the task in stance is executed So in the graph of the entity a node exists which has the same instance identifier as the Proclet instance for which the task instance is executed In this case we say that the entity is relevant for the Proclet instance
132. 65 a Fracture false SystolicBP 120 Fracture false Age 21 Weight 85 Fever true Rash false Wound false Name Buster Legg had Rash true Wound false Name Gammy Ticker New Rule Node Node ID 10 Parent Node ID E Condition New Conclusion Description Figure 8 17 Add New Rule Form Clicking on the line HeartRate 190 in the Current Case panel copies that line to the Condition input in the New Rule Node panel Thus a condition for the new rule has been easily created based on the differing data attribute and value that has caused the original worklet selection to be invalid for this case Note that it is not necessary to define the rule as Rash True amp HeartRate 190 as might first be expected since this new rule will be added to the true branch of the TreatRash node By doing so it will only be evaluated if the condition of its parent Rash True first evaluates to True Therefore any rule nodes added to the true branch of a parent become exception rules of the parent In other words this particular tree traversal can be interpreted as if Rash is True then return TreatRash except if HeartRate is also 190 then return where whatever worklet we decide to return for this rule see more below Now the new rule is fine if in future cases a patients heart rate will be exactly 190 but what if it is 191 or 189 or
133. 9 Digital Signature Figure 10 4 An overview of the production of a digital signature 10 6 1 Signing a Document 1 The Document is hashed with a hashing algorithm to encrypt it and to reduce its volume 2 The Private Key is extracted from inside the key store certificate p12 To do this we need the pub lisher s password which is only known by him her 3 Combine the private key the Document fingerprint and the X 509 certificate to create the digital sig nature using PKCS 7 encryption 4 The fingerprint and the private key are used to calculate the signature itself and the X 509 certificate gives the publisher details A digest SHA1 of the document is included in the signature Since the Document has a unique fingerprint the digital signature only applies to this document The p12 certificate is protected by a password and is only used to sign the document The public certificate X 509 contains the information about the signer and the public key that can be used to check the validity of the signature It is public because anybody should be able to access the content of the signature to verify it But without the private key it cant be reproduced 10 6 2 Verification of the Digital Signature 1 Calculate the document fingerprint with the same algorithm than the signer used 2 To verify the Digital Signature you need first to extract the certificate X 509 The certificate X 509 contains all the information
134. 9 26 in the context of the second scenario Here we see for both Anne and Sue that a performative is sent from the send reports task of the MDM Proclet instance For both of them the performative has the receive task of the visit Proclet class as its destination However for Sue the performative needs to be received by the Proclet instance which has Sue 10 02 as instance identifier and for Anne the performative needs to be received by the Proclet instance which has Anne 12 02 as its instance identifier Now we explain how the content attribute is used for exchanging data between Proclet instances of an entity in a structured way In order to do so we require that for this attribute a fixed data structure is used For this data structure we may have a list of entity identifiers In turn for each entity identifier we may have a list of name value pairs This is illustrated in Figure 9 26 for the performative that is multicast to the visit Proclet instances of Sue and Anne For the content attribute we can see that there is an entity identifier element which has as its identifier Sue and that has two name value pairs These name value pairs indicate that Sue is 67 years old and that her medical status is ok Similarly for Anne we can see that she is 73 years old and that her medical status is not ok Note that there is a close link between the informati
135. AWL can be downloaded Further documentation about this approach can also be found there YAWL has a close link to the Process Mining environment ProM 8 www processmining org This link is for example exploited in 23 to provide simulation support for YAWL There exists support for exporting YAWL logs to ProM which can subsequently be analysed by one of the many mining plug ins available in this environment Alternative ways of presenting work lists have been addressed in 15 In this framework users can choose a map not just a geographical map but also e g a timeline or a YAWL specification and work items can be positioned on this map and be shown in a colour that reflects their level of urgency a context specific notion which can be defined for the user It is expected that this work becomes part of the YAWL distribution in the near future Finally a textbook on YAWL called Modern Business Process Automation YAWL and its Support Environment has been published by Springer 2010 ISBN 978 3 642 03120 5 12 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION Chapter 2 Installation The YAWL System also referred to as the YAWL Environment comprises a number of web servlets and a java based Editor desktop application It requires a Servlet Container to host the servlets and a back end database system for process data storage and archiving Individual YAWL components may be installed manually see Section 2 4 but there are also a number of automatic YA
136. Automated Set C the execution of the initial preparations task is defninition of the entities variable delegated to the Workflow Client Application Task Decomposition Label fecide Task Decomposition Variables Te Z Create entities entities Type Input Output Update Remove YAWL Registered Service Detail YAWL Se apipclet service External Interactifn the execution of the decide task is delegated to the Inter Workflow Service Automated Set Codelet Figure 9 28 Defining the process definition of a Proclet class in the YAWL editor 278 CHAPTER 9 THE PROCLET SERVICE WN UN O visit_visitC_in 1 9 1 j 1 I visit_visitCexc_in 1 doResult_visit_in 1 lab_visitC_out mdogisitC_out lab_vigitCexc_oht V Adjust Interaction Point Ek A A Aly x apg t el I X Acp broch C ajai o M recei si f deci D Cures E a sie class Fry 1 de D Pty shown in Figure ations S lt 1 q excepti ED 11b 7 E l on 29 1 pa NT t miy T i h toy n N y 1 i i 1 tog Ae OoOo o iaid 1i g a FA inition Edi J x B interaction Definition Editor Name of the Proclet class al xj Model Int r
137. CONTROL FLOW PERSPECTIVE 61 Give the new Net a name We are going to call this new Net Study Privately On the root net right click on your Multiple Instance Composite Task and choose Go to sub net or simply click on the Study Privately tab You will now need to set the parameters of the Multiple Composite Task in the same manner as those set previously for the Multiple Instance Atomic Task via the Task s M I Attributes property Set the Minimum Instances to 5 the Maximum Instances to 100 the Threshold to 50 and leave the Instance Creation type as Static Click OK You can now complete your new Study Privately Net represented by your Multiple Instance Com posite Task Create the following Atomic Tasks in order and then link them and the Input and Output Conditions with Flow Relations e Read a Book e Feel Smarter 4 4 7 Conditions Conditions represent states of the workflow that exist between the completion of a task and the starting of the next and so are always located between two tasks To create a Condition 1 Click on the Condition button in the Palette or right click on an empty part of the canvas and choose Condition Go to the Study Privately Net We are going to place a Condition after the Read a Book atomic task to determine whether we gained any knowledge from the book that is we will query the state of our process at that point Plac
138. Definitions and e Implementation To successfully add a function these rules must be followed 1 Create the function i e a normal Java method definition and add it to the function definitions section of the code Ensure the function e is declared with the access modifier keywords private static and e returns a value of String type 2 Add the function s name added to the array of _functionNames in the header section of the code 3 Add a mapping for the function in the execute method using the examples as a guide Once the function is added it can be used in any rule s conditional expression Let s use the max function as a simple example walkthrough to be read in conjunction with the source code for the class The first thing to do is define the actual function in the function definition section The entire function is shown in Figure 8 57 public static String max int x int y if x gt y return String valueOf x else return String valueOf y Figure 8 57 Max function 232 CHAPTER 8 THE WORKLET SERVICE Notice that the function has been declared as private static and returns a String value Next the name of the function max has to be added as a String value to the functionNames array in the header section of the code see Figure 8 58 public static final String _functionNames max min i isNotCompleted today Figure 8 58 Adding the name Final
139. Fig ure 4 29 My_Career Attend_University C Study_Privately oe Split Conditions for Task Begin_My_Career J gt i Target Condition Begin My Attend Attend_University number My_Career score text __ Career _ University Study_Privately true Study Privately av The bottom most flow is the default OK Figure 4 29 Split Conditions Dialog Predicates typically include chosen net level variables so that their current values can be evaluated thus allowing contextual decisions to be made Because split predicates are evaluated after the completion of the task with the split its variable are no longer available and so can t be included in predicate expressions A predicate for a particular flow can be entered directly into the dialog or you can click the Action button next to a selected predicate to open the Update Predicate dialog Figure 4 30 You can enter a predicate as a boolean XQuery expression directly and or use the Generate Predicate button to help build a data expression using the selected net level variable from the dropdown list Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog then OK again on the Split Conditions dialog Note that a net level local integer variable called score has been introduced to the net in the example for the purposes of showing how to create a boolean XQuery expression for a flow predicate it is
140. G WITH YAWL SPECIFICATION FILES 51 YAWL Editor 3 0 Users adamsmj Documents research YAWLManuals user latest specifications New_Specification yawl File Edit Net Elements Plugins Help Palette BaB g z e 2 aog 2 9 i a a a W a a e Net E ra Lat glon Properties Name Title Mama Dow Comma e Uou ypo Description Version Num 0 2 El Net Background I Data Gateway None Data Variables Local 1 Fill Colour CJR 255 G al Create List Verify List Show List Mat 25 Ay Notes Validation Results 12 06 Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Task Create_List is disconnected lt more gt Task Show_List has no incoming flows lt more gt Task Show_List is disconnected oe Every task and condition must be connected on some path between the input and Task Verify_List has no outgoing output conditions of a net and therefore must have at least one incoming flow Task Verify_List is disconnected except the input condition Add a flow into the task to resolve this issue The Input Condition is disconne The Output Condition is disconn The flow between Task Create_List amp Task Verify List is disconnected lt more gt Use the palette toolbar to edit the selected net Once
141. ING THE WORKLET SERVICE 227 Timer Example Fill Order Receive Archive Payment Figure 8 50 The Timeout Test 3 Specification 800 Set Timer for Task Receive_Payment Begins Expires Never At exactly C On offer After duration oo ool oo oo o0 os On start Cancel OK Figure 8 51 The Set Timer Detail dialog for the Receive Payment task Notice the rules condition isNotCompleted this e isNotCompleted is an example of a defined function that may be used as or as part of conditional expressions in rule nodes e this is a special variable created by the Worklet Service that refers to the workitem that the rule is defined for and contains amongst other things all of the workitem s data attributes and values Tip The Worklet Service provides developers with an easily extendible class where functions can be defined and then used in conditions See Appendix 8 7 for more information about defining functions In this case the condition tests if the workitem Receive Payment has not yet completed i e if it has a status of Fired Enabled Executing or Suspended If it hasn t completed thus payment for the order has not yet been received then the conclusion will be executed as an exception handling process including the launching of the worklet SendReminder The SendReminder worklet consists of two tasks Send Request and timer enabled Rec
142. K 4 14 Document Type passing files as data A YAWL built in complex datatype called YDocumentType can be used to upload store and download files of any description for a process instance To use this feature declare a net level variable of YDocumentType and then map it to and from task level variables of the same type in the usual way cf Section 4 7 2 At runtime users will be able to upload and download files that will be stored as variables in the process instance Figure 4 55 Edit Work Item 131146 1 Upload Download Figure 4 55 Example of a YDocumentType variable rendered on a dynamic form 106 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR At runtime when a process instance completes the file can either be archived or removed from the store de pending on a configuration setting in the DocumentStore service cf Section 6 1 Note that the DocumentStore service needs to be available at runtime to support this feature see Sections 2 4 3 amp 10 1 4 15 Custom Forms When a task is associated with the default worklist handler i e the Resource Service then at runtime the data within the task instance may be selected for viewing and or updating By default the Resource Service uses a built in dynamic forms component which generates appropriate but generic data editing forms designed for maximum flexibility and that can display data parameters of any type However their generic look and feel may not be appropriate in all cases for
143. L4Study 2 0 betal B 4 Back S Eorward cancel Figure 2 2 Select Installation Directory Install YAWL into your home directory if you don t have administrative rights this is particularly important for users of Windows 7 and later After clicking Next the installer will look for a valid Java installation The dialog box in figure 2 3 will only appear if Java has been detected on your system Please select the Java tm Runtime to use sun 1 6 0 fusrbinjjava Figure 2 3 Select Java Version AX If no Java version greater or equal to 1 6 is found and the YAWL Windows installer is executed the supplied Java version will be installed 4 The installation will stop if no Java version greater or equal 1 6 is found Install the latest Java version before executing the YAWL installer The YAWL installer checks the usual installation paths like usr or usr local If you installed Java on your system but the YAWL installer is not able to find it create the following link user host In s path to your java base dir usr local java Keep in mind that you need administration rights to generate the link Afterwards start the YAWL installa tion again You are now ready to proceed with the installation When the installation completes you will see the Installation Completed page If you found a problem and could not complete the installation please post the problem to the YAWL Foundation forum
144. Let s see an example of how they work 1 If your following on from the previous section open up the Data Variables Dialog for the Enrol task of the Attend University net and remove both task level variables Hint Use the button on the tool bar at the bottom of the variable list Click Apply to save the changes without closing the dialog 2 Now re add the two decomposition variables see Section 4 7 3 for a reminder if needed 3 You should now have two task level variables of the same name and data type as the two net level variables Notice that the task level variables are italicised to remind you that they don t yet have the required data bindings defined 4 Click the Smart Data Bindings button on the toolbar under the task level variables list Both the Input and Output bindings for both variables have been automatically generated you can check by looking in the Input and Output Bindings dialogs for each task level variable Smart Data Bindings works by searching for a net level variable of the same name and data type of each decomposition level variable that has missing data binding s If it finds a match it will auto generate the required bindings 76 Adding Task Variables using Drag n Drop CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR The editor provides a third and even easier way to create task level variables the drag n drop method 1 Let s delete our task level variables again from the Data Variables
145. MI variable With the bookList Decomposition variable selected click the Output Bindings button Notice that the dialog has an addition input field for the MI Joining Query which shows the generated query Figure 4 38 In our example the generated query puts all the instance query results into a list in this case a list of order elements ready for mapping back to the net level variable The aggregate query will look exactly like this in most cases j is used simply to differentiate it from s in the splitter query but its name is unimportant Click OK to close the Output Bindings Dialog and OK again to close the Data Variables Dialog The final requirement is to specify the instance attributes for the MI task Select the Verify List task 4 7 THE DATA PERSPECTIVE 87 1 800 Output Data Bindings for Task Verify_List Output To Generate Binding From Binding A liil Verify_List bookList_Item MI Joining Query for j in Verify_List order return j Cancel Figure 4 38 Output Binding and Joining Query generated for the MasterList variable then the Task M I Attributes property Set minimum instances to 1 maximum instances to 20 threshold to 5 and static instance creation type These settings mean that between 1 and 20 task instances will by started from this MI task at runtime depending on the number of book orders in the bo
146. MS Services 4 twitterService war allows status updates to be sent from processes directly to a twitter account 5 schedulingService war allows resources to be scheduled for and allocated to cases 6 procletService war provides inter process communication cf Chapter 9 While all the core web services are pre registered in the Engine when it first starts the optional services are not and so require manual registration after installation before they can be used Please see Chapter 6 Section 6 4 3 for more details Tip If a war file is to be copied into the webapps directory to replace a file of the same name it is advisable to first shutdown Tomcat and delete the unpacked directory for that war before copying in the new war file On restart the new war s contents will be unpacked If the old unpacked directory is not removed on restart the new war file will not unpack If Tomcat is running when the new war is copied to the webapps directory it will unpack and replace the old directory but depending on how it has been configured may run out of resources while doing so resulting in an OutOfMemoryError see Section 2 4 5 2 4 MANUAL INSTALLATION YAWL ENTERPRISE 23 3 apache tomcat 5 5 25 bin docs apache tomcat 6 0 18 L conf gt examples 2 logs gt lib gt host manager E LICENSE images p L logs I manager i E RELEASE NOTES monitorService war RUNNING txt orderfulfilment Bs _resourceServic
147. OK Figure 5 23 Parameter definition for task pay do_itinerary_segment carDetails do_itinerary_segment subTotal lt itinerarySegment gt This is an example of a more advanced use of multiple instance task variables where the input variable legs is used to create individual task instances based on the number of value elements its data contains while the net level output or target variable itinerary is a different variable whose data value is a composite of most of the other output variables of the task The subnet of task do itinerary segment specifies the simple make trip process Thus we do not go into every detail but provide the parameter definitions for tasks register itinerary book flight and prepare pay in Figure 5 26 to Figure 5 28 respectively The parameters for the other two tasks book hotel and book car are defined in a similar way to those of task book flight Note Since the variable subTotal is of double type the XQuery function number is used to extract data from the variable 5 5 ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES Input Bindings make_trip legs make_trip flightDetails text0 make_trip hotelDetails text make_trip carDetails text0 make_trip subTotal text0 legs_Item flightDetails hote Details carDetails subTotal gt itinerary gt legs gt startDate gt endDate gt flightDetails gt hotelDetails gt
148. RAINT EVENT Checking pre constraints for workitem 20 DoShow 4 Workitem 20 DoShow 4 failed pre task constraints Invoking exception handling process for item 20 DoShow 4 Exception process step 1 Action suspend Target workitem Successful work item suspend 20 DoShow_4 Exception process step 2 Action compensate Target ChangeToMidVenue Worklet specification ChangeToMid Venue is already loaded in Engine Launched case for worklet ChangeToMidVenue with ID 21 HANDLE CHECK WORKITEM CONSTRAINT EVENT Checking post constraints for workitem 20 2 SellTickets_3 No post task constraints defined for task SellTickets HANDLE CHECK CASE CONSTRAINT EVENT Checking constraints for start of case 21 of specification ChangeToMidVenue No pre case constraints defined for spec ChangeToMid Venue HANDLE CHECK WORKITEM CONSTRAINT EVENT Checking pre constraints for workitem 21 CancelStadium_3 No pre task constraints defined fortask CancelStadium HANDLE CHECK WORKITEM CONSTRAINT EVENT Checking pre constraints for workitem 21 Book_Ent_Centre_5 No pre task constraints defined for task Book_Ent_Centre HANDLE CHECK WORKITEM CONSTRAINT EVENT Checking post constraints for workitem 21 1 CancelStadium_3 No post task constraints defined for task CancelStadium HANDLE CHECK WORKITEM CONSTRAINT EVENT Checking pre constraints for workitem 21 Tell_Punters_4 No pre task constraints defined for task Tell_Punters HANDLE CHECK WORKITEM CONSTRAINT EVENT
149. Study and from Do Private Study to Get A Job as per Figure 4 12 My_Career Attend_University OE Begin My Career qm m m Attend Get a Job Career University Started Do Private Study Figure 4 12 Adding a Multiple Atomic Task 3 You will now need to set the parameters of the Multiple Instance Task which because it will create multiple instances of the task at runtime needs a few more values set than for a simple atomic task Select the task and choose the Task s M I Attributes property Click the action button of the property the small button to the right of the property s input field to show the M I Attributes dialog Figure 4 13 80 0 Multiple Instance Attributes for Task Do_Private_Study_1 Minimum Maximum Threshold Exactly S Exactly 100 44 Exactly 50 4 No limit No limit C Allow dynamic instance creation Cancel J OK Figure 4 13 M I Attributes dialog a Choose the Instance Creation mode Notice the Allow dynamic instance creation checkbox at the bottom of the dialog When this checkbox is unselected the instance creation mode is set to Static which means the number of task instances to be started cannot vary once the task begins execu tion at runtime When the checkbox is selected the instance creation mode is set to Dynamic which means the same number of task instances as static mode are started initially but new in
150. The name of the d Feel_ Smarter Get_A_Degree Look_for_Easier_Bo Pass_All_ Subjects Figure 4 23 Select Task Decomposition detail example Get a Job task You can add variables to a task decomposition referred to as task level variables to store specific information relating to the task s associated with it in a similar way to adding variables to a net Task level variables have several uses One use is for transferring information between users and the process instance A second use is for passing data between web services and or external code and or applications that the YAWL Engine invokes and the net the task resides in For example if your task is called Purchase a Book you may want to store the name and or ISBN of the book being ordered so that information can be sent to a book store s web service To add a task level variable to a decomposition 1 First select the task that will require the variable ee We will be setting up variables for the Enrol task Go to the Attend University Net and select the Enrol task We have already created an empty decomposition for this task earlier in this chapter 2 Select the Decomposition s Data Variables property then click the Action button to show the Data 4 7 THE DATA PERSPECTIVE 71 Variables Dialog When the dialog is invoked for a decomposition it shows both the net level and task level variable lists Figure 4 24 e900 Dat
151. W M P van der Aalst and A H M ter Hofstede Achieving a general formal and decidable approach to the OR join in workflow using Reset nets In G Ciardo and P Darondeau editors Proceedings of the 26th International Conference on Application and Theory of Petri nets and Other Models of Concurrency Petri Nets 2005 volume 3536 of Lecture Notes in Computer Science pages 423 443 Miami USA 2005 Springer Verlag Berlin
152. WL environment and so is included in each of the various installer packages and the YAWL2 2_CoreWebServices zip file used for manual installa tions Specifically the service is contained in the file workletService war this is the worklet web application component When unpacked workletService war also contains the worklet repository a required set of di rectories where worklets and rules files are stored logs are written to and so on and a number of sample worklets and rule sets including all those discussed in this manual are located The structure of the repository is shown in Figure 8 1 a B repository D logs 9 rules 2 rulesEditor 2 selected 5 worklets Figure 8 1 Worklet Repository Folder Structure The logs folder is where the Service writes certain log files during its operation In particular the eventLog csv file logs the key events of the service when database persistence is disabled All are plain text files The rules folder contains the sets of rules used during the selection and exception handling processes Rules files have an XML format Each YAWL specification that uses the service will have a correspond ing rules file of the same name except with an extension of xrs XML rule set The rulesEditor folder contains a tool that is used to manage and modify rule sets see Section 8 5 2 for a complete description of the Rules Editor The selected folder contains a set of files in XML format that are es
153. WL installation packages that install all the required components and allow you to be up and running with YAWL quickly and easily e YAWL has installers available for Windows Linux and Mac OSX platforms You should choose an installer if YAWL is to be used within a single platform environment i e all components are installed on the same machine A YAWL installer is also the right choice if you intend to learn about or to ex periment with YAWL The resulting pre configured installation has the complete YAWL functionality and contains the same YAWL components as a YAWL Enterprise installation e YAWL Enterprise is how YAWL is described when installed manually on production server s Re quired third party components such as Apache Tomcat and PostgreSQL are installed separately pos sibly on different platforms so that YAWL can be used as a long running server for production pur poses See Section 2 4 for instructions on how to install an enterprise version of YAWL for multi user production environments The complete YAWL environment is installed whichever installer is chosen Official and stable versions of the YAWL installation files are found on the YAWL project web page on sourceforge under Download release package YAWL Complete 2 1 Requirements All installers and YAWL itself require the Java SE Runtime Environment JRE 1 6 or greater java sun com For Linux installs xdg utils port land freedesktop org is required to fi
154. YAWL engine and then the selected worklet is launched as a separate case The data inputs of the original workitem are mapped to the inputs of the worklet When the worklet has completed its output data is mapped back to the original workitem which is then checked back into the engine allowing the original process to continue Worklets can be substituted for atomic tasks and multiple instance atomic tasks In the case of multiple instance tasks a worklet is launched for each child workitem Because each child workitem may contain different data the worklets that substitute for them are individually selected and so may all be different The repertoire of worklets can be added to at any time as can the rules base used for the selection process Thus the service provides for dynamic ad hoc change and process evolution without having to resort to off system intervention and or system downtime or modification of the original process specification 8 1 3 The Exception Service During every instance of a workflow process certain things happen off plan That is it doesn t matter how much detail has been built into the process model certain events occur during execution that affect the work being carried out but were not defined as part of the process model Typically these events are handled off system so that processing may continue In some cases the process model will be modified to capture this unforeseen event which involves an
155. YAWL specification Notes and Info Pane This panel consists of two tabs e On the Notes pane you can add free form text to accompany a selected task or condition Any text entered is accessible only at design time e The Info pane will list problems or messages that may occur while you are building your model when you validate it and when you analyse it Status Bar The Status Bar consists of three parts e On the left are two Connection Status Indicators which indicate whether there are currently valid connections to a running YAWL Engine and Resource Service respectively required for certain design activities discussed later in this chapter A valid connection will show a green indicator a disconnec tion as a red indicator 4 3 WORKING WITH YAWL SPECIFICATION FILES 49 e Next there is a status message area that provides useful contextual hints while using the Editor e On the right is a progress bar which shows the progress of file open and save events and so is only visible during those events 4 3 Working with YAWL Specification files The YAWL Editor is a tool that allows you to graphically design a process specification that may be saved to file and later loaded into the YAWL Engine for execution This section explains how to create open and save YAWL specification files 4 3 1 Creating a Specification A YAWL workflow specification consists of exactly one starting net also known as the root net and zero or
156. a Afterwards the panel shown in Figure 9 32b is presented At the left side the interaction graph that has been defined so far is shown In particular for nodes that have been colored white new interactions can be selected For nodes that have been colored black this is not possible Following on at the right side one of these white colored nodes can be selected in order to define new interactions For example for Sue we see at the left side a node in the graph for the decide workitem At the left this node can be chosen for selecting new interactions Note that for the arc states in an interaction graph abbreviations will be used So for the arc states unproduced consumed sent executed none executed single executed both and failed the abbreviations U C S EN ES EB and F will be used respectively For a node that is selected a new screen is presented which is shown in Figure 9 32c At the left side the interaction graph that has been defined so far is shown In particular the node that has been selected for defining new interactions is colored white The other ones are colored black At the right side for the se 9 1 INTER WORKFLOW SUPPORT 281 amp visit 64 initial_preparations_10 Allocated work File Edit view Insert Tools Actions Help Workitem ID visit 64 initial _preparations_10 Inpu
157. a Bindings forTiaskshooks fight gt flightDetails string Input To gt z F hotelDetails JOU Task Variable startDate v gt carDetails string Lo SO rGenerate Binding From Net Variable customer ri Data Gateway SimpleExternalDBGatewaylm me 7 rBinding Decomposition Variables Name Type Make_Trip_Process registerinfo startDate gt customer string gt startDate dateType gt endDate dateType P flightDetails string t avji OB Cance Figure 5 17 Parameter definition for task book flight Figure 5 18 shows the parameter definition of task pay with five task variables These are all input only variables and they get data correspondingly from those net variables with the same names 138 CHAPTER 5 HOW TO MANIPULATE DATA IN YAWL Data Variables for Decomposition pay Task pay Net Variables Name Type Scope Initial Value gt customer strin Pe z 2 3 8 0 0 Input Data Bindings for Task pay gt registerinfo tripRegisterType P flightDetails string Input To gt hotelDetails string Task Variable payAccNumber v gt carDetails string Generate Binding From Net Variable customer X Data Gateway Binding Decomposition Variables z Name Ty Make_Trip_Process registerinfo payAccNumber text0 gt customer string gt flightDetails string P hotelDetails string gt carDetails string gt payAccNumber string
158. a Variables for Decomposition Enrol Task Enrol Net Variables Name Type Scope Initial Value gt StudentNumber string Local gt SubjectCode string Local teav Decomposition Variables Name Type Scope Default Value P studentNumber string InputOutput gt subjectCode string InputOutput id t avuik oOo Cancel Apply OK Figure 4 24 Adding Task Level Variables 3 Enter the Name of your variable choose the Type of the variable and its Scope from those listed then click OK to save the new variable and close the dialog Rey l Enter StudentNumber for the name of the variable leave the type as string and the scope as Input amp Output Create another variable for the same task called SubjectCode with type string and scope of Input amp Output Click OK to save and close The Enrol task now has two variables StudentNumber and SubjectCode Figure 4 24 The Decomposition Repository The Elements menu has a Decomposition item which provides three sub menu items that allow you to save load and remove decompositions to and from the repository This means you may save any decomposition and all of its variables to the repository Later you can load any saved decomposition from the repository into another specification In this way a stored decomposition can be reused in other specifications To add the currently selected deco
159. a Wohed Michael Adams Moe Wynn and Marcello La Rosa This formed the basis for Chapter 2 Its introduction formed the basis for Chapter 1 Chapter 1 Introduction This chapter provides a brief background introduction to YAWL and the YAWL Foundation 1 1 What is YAWL Based on a rigourous analysis of existing workflow management systems and workflow languages a new workflow language called YAWL Yet Another Workflow Language was developed by Wil van der Aalst Eindhoven University of Technology the Netherlands and Arthur ter Hofstede Queensland University of Technology Australia in 2002 This language was based on the one hand on Petri nets a well established concurrency theory with a graphical representation and on the other hand on the well known Workflow Patterns www workflowpatterns com The Workflow Patterns form a generally accepted benchmark for the suitability of a process specification language Petri nets can capture quite a few of the identified control flow patterns but they lack support for the multiple instance patterns the cancellation patterns and the generalised OR join YAWL therefore extends Petri nets with dedicated constructs to deal with these patterns YAWL offers the following distinctive features e YAWL offers comprehensive support for the control flow patterns It is the most powerful process specification language for capturing control flow dependencies The data perspective in YAWL is captured thro
160. a to the corresponding net vari able via the XQuery register registrInfo The task s other variable input amp output variable customer gets the customer s name and then passes it to the net Data Variables for Decomposition register Task register Net Variables t Av Hbo G B Name Type Scope Initial Value P customer string Local Please type name P registerinfo tripRegister Type a Output Data Bindings for Task register gt flightDetails string gt hotelDetails string Output To gt carDetails string Net Variable registerinfo Data Gateway SimpleExte Generate Binding From NEN Task Variable registerinfo Decomposition Variables Binding Name gt customer string register registerinfo gt registerinfo tripRegiste ox Figure 5 15 Parameter definition for task register Figure 5 16 shows the Split Predicates for task register The predicate for the flow leading to task book flight is Make_Trip_Process registrInfo want_flight text true The predicates associated with the flows leading to task book hotel and book car follow the same pattern Each predicate is used to determine whether the variables included have a boolean value of true or false Note that these split predicates are defined for an OR split so that o
161. ach ticket Enter a price of 100 per ticket and 12600 as the number of tickets sold and then complete the workitem Figure 8 44 Notice that the entered number of tickets sold 12600 is slightly more than 50 of the venue s seating capacity 25000 The next workitem Do Show does have a pre item constraint rule tree and so when it becomes enabled the rule tree is queried The effective composite rule for Do Shows pre item tree as viewed in the Rules Editor is In other words when Do Show is enabled and the value of the case data attribute TicketsSold is less than 75 of the seating capacity of the venue we would like to suspend the workitem run the compen satory worklet ChangeToMidVenue and then once the worklet has completed continue or unsuspend the workitem Following the logic of the ripple down rule if the tickets sold are also less than 50 of the capacity then we want instead to suspend the workitem run the ChangeToSmallVenue worklet and then unsuspend the workitem Finally if there has been less than 20 of the tickets sold we want instead to suspend the entire case run a worklet to cancel the show and then remove i e cancel the case In this example the first rule s condition evaluates to true for a Tickets Sold value of 12600 and a seating capacity of 25000 so the child rule node on the true branch of the parent is tested Since this child node s 8 6 WALKTHROUGH USING THE WORKLET SERVICE
162. acketed into a monolithic workflow while it is more natural to see processes as intertwined loosely coupled processes e One to many and many to many relationships that exist between entities in a workflow cannot be cap tured e Itis difficult to model interactions between processes Proclets were one of the first modeling languages to acknowledge above mentioned problems and are part of the Proclet framework which has been described in detail by van der Aalst et al 6 7 In this chapter the original Proclet framework and an extension to it will be presented In the original framework the concept of a Proclet a performative a port which has a cardinality and multiplicity and a channel have already been introduced Here additional concepts such as an interaction point an internal interaction an external interaction and an interaction graph will be introduced Via interaction points at design time possible interactions between Proclet classes can be modeled without the need to define complex pre and post conditions Subsequently at run time they allow users to nominate interactions between Proclet instances Furthermore via an interaction graph interactions between Proclet instances and their state are recorded 237 238 CHAPTER 9 THE PROCLET SERVICE instance that needs l l lab blood send archi to be created for the T1 g
163. acti n Phint Window Propletinstance Extra Help La Ejmovet 1 i j LL ee ooo Bd Mouse Mde m i a General l l ny ptwNG I y 1 l Name Model visit i a an si i 1 Layout Vt 1 I f vi BS y y Interaction Points i Somat 7 i i SDM avout 4 N i Add Interaction Point i 1 L A I i 4 l l ve i 5 Remove Interaction Point 1 i i I l i l i j Add Port Remove Port il Adjust Port Add Internal Interaction t_visitCexc_out Remove Internal Interaction 4 Interaction point Exception interaction point Adding removing or adjusting an interaction Adding removing or adjusting a port Adding or removing an internal interaction a GUI for defining the interaction points ports and internal interactions of a Proclet class Edit Interaction Point Interaction Point ID Interaction Point Type Instantiate Proclet Instance Time Out Value recelve 12 000 H Finish b Panel for manipulation of an interaction point xl Edit Internal Interaction Source Interaction Point receive nA Destination Interaction Point request e d Finish d Panel for defining an internal interaction 4 xl Edit Port Port Identifier llab visiti Attached Interaction Point receive z Direction IN z Cardinality ONE Z
164. action nodes may exist in multiple interaction graphs For these interaction nodes illustrated by nodes Yi and Yj in Figure 9 21a if there is at least one outgoing arc with the state unproduced then an exception occurs for Proclet instance Y i e for such an arc a defined interaction can never occur 9 1 INTER WORKFLOW SUPPORT lab Sue 25 01 263 lab Proclet instance is canceled performative has not been sent yet from the send report outbox interaction point p visit Sue 10 02 visit Sue 25 01 J IB initial P E oD prepar lat cel decid broch E bro T w ations ve e ures E W a The Proclet instances that need to be performed for Sue together with the desired interactions lab Sue 25 01 Sue 2 lab Sue 25 01 a create executed_source send report D S u g Y e oO o ioi isit visit visit Sue 25 01 Sue 7 Sue 10 02 decide consumed visit Sue 10 02 create receive J b Current state of the interaction graph for Sue lab Sue 25 01 Sue 2 lab Sue 25 01 create executed_source send report T S NS Ze e isi isit visit visit Sue 25 01 Sue 7 Sue 10 02 decide consumed visit Sue 10 02 create receive c State of the interaction graph when the lab Proclet instance is cance
165. ail if there are any cases still executing against it The Get Info button in the Loaded Specifications panel will display some meta data about the selected specifi cation an example can be seen in Figure 6 3 Information Specification Meta Data URI orderfulfilment Q VERSION 1 3 DESCRIPTION Order Fulfilment Workflow Model IDENTIFIER UID_eac946f9 e1d0 4f09 a4b2 7f19cb4e0ffe META TITLE Order Fulfilment SCHEMA VERSION 2 0 AUTHOR S Stephan Clemens Marcello La Rosa and Arthur ter Hofstede ROOT NET Overall ENGINE STATUS loaded Figure 6 3 Specification meta data dialog The fifth button in the Loaded Specifications panel is the Download Log button which will generate and down load a file containing the complete process log for the selected specification in OpenXES format The log file produced can be read directly into the process mining tool ProM Note that the generation of a process log file may take some time especially if there has been a large number of cases executed for the selected specification The Running Cases panel shows a list of all the cases currently executing in the Engine in the form case number specification name version While the list is refreshed whenever the page is loaded you may also refresh the list contents by clicking on the refresh icon located at the top right of the Running Cases panel A case can be cancelled at any time by selecting it from the list of running cases and
166. alog will be refreshed to show the results of the process Finally if the Control Panel has been updated it will automatically restart to the latest version At any time you can click on the YAWL logo in the Control Panel to view the current build version Click the box displayed to close it Why is there no Output Log button for Windows installs The Window OS will automatically create and display a command window when you click the Start but ton in the Control Panel and will close it when the Stop button is clicked and stopping completes This window will display exactly the same content as the Output Log window does for other operating system installations Important The Windows command window must remain open for the YAWL Environment to continue running although it may be minimised If the command window is closed while the Engine is running YAWL will shutdown The Control Panel may be closed without affecting the command window 2 4 Manual Installation YAWL Enterprise If you already have installed a servlet container such as Apache Tomcat version 7 or greater and or a preferred database such as PostgreSQL MySQL or Oracle version 8 1 or greater you may prefer to install YAWL components manually Manual installation is also required if you want a multi user multi platform production level installation of YAWL This section details how to install YAWL 3 0 on a component by component basis ASIDE To install latest builds
167. also works when you activate ports that were previously blocked Try now to activate the input port of task Prepare Travel Form Secretary Since the input port of Check and Update Travel 122 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR gt New_Net_1 Approve P1 tau Prepare Travel Form Travel Form Admin Employer EX Arrange a Submit Travel Travel Form Insurance for Approval Li r i Reject Prepare P Check and Travel Form Update Travel Form Secretary Travel Form Request for change 1 Figure 4 70 Preview of the configuration after blocking the input port of task Check and Update Travel Form Form is blocked a token may again get stuck in P3 so the Editor will also activate the latter port The following parameters related to C YAWL models can be customized from the Plugins menu Process Configuration gt Preferences or by clicking the Preferences button ie on the toolbar e Set new elements configurable new tasks are set as configurable automatically manually default option e Preview process automatically the preview of configured processes is always switched on the cor responding button on the tool bar becomes inactive the preview can be switched on or off manually default e Deny blocking input ports input ports cannot be blocked can be blocked default Allow changing default configurations default configuration values can be changed default
168. alue of the variable if any The value of the named extended attribute Table 4 4 Available embedded values for variable level log predicates 4 17 CONFIGURABLE LOGGING 109 participant name participant userid participant offeredQueueSize participant allocatedQueueSize participant startedQueueSize participant suspendedQueueSize resource initiator offer resource initiator allocate resource initiator start resource offerset resource piler resource deallocators resource allocator resource roles resource dynParams resource filters resource constraints Name of the participant handling the work item Userid of the participant handling the work item Number of items in the handling participants offered queue Number of items in the handling participants allocated queue Number of items in the handling participants started queue Number of items in the handling participants suspended queue Whether the workitem s offer interaction was initiated by the system or by a user Whether the workitem s allocate interaction was initiated by the system or by a user Whether the workitem s start interaction was initiated by the system or by a user A comma separated list of the names of all participants the workitem was offered to The name of the participant piling the workitem if any A comma separated list of the names of all participants who have deallo
169. ame and yMonitor password Note that in Figure 6 8 the generic admin user id is also listed in the registered accounts Its listing here allows administrators to change the password on the generic admin if desired To change the password or description of a registered client application account select it from the list then click the Edit button the details of that account will populate fields on the lower half of the form allowing you to modify and save them To remove an account from the Engine select it in the list then click the Remove button Note that the generic admin account cannot be removed in this way but may be disabled via an Engine configuration setting see Section 6 1 ASIDE The reason why the monitor service is listed as a client application and not as a custom service is simply because the monitor service does not qualify as a custom service To qualify as a custom service a service must be able to take responsibility for the execution of a task That is the service must be able to be assignable to a task at design time via the Editor s Task Decomposition dialog as are all those services mentioned in Section 6 4 3 The monitor service can t be assigned tasks for execution since it is designed to display information about current processes and so rightly belongs in the list of client applications as do all such services 158 CHAPTER 6 THE RUNTIME ENVIRONMENT Oika ee me Admin Queues Cases Users Org Data A
170. ame as a decomposition level attribute exists the variable level attribute takes prece dence 4 18 EXTENDED ATTRIBUTES 111 Attribute Sets Default Background Alt Colour The background colour of alternating form panels light blue D3E0FC Background Colour The main background colour of the form blue 97CBFD Font Font family size style amp colour for labels browser default 12 plain black Header Font Font family size style amp colour for headings browser default 14 Bold dark teal 3277BA Hide Banner Suppress display of the YAWL banner if true false Justify Justify text in text fields left Label Label text for form header task name Page Background Colour The background color of the page white Page Background Image The background image url for the page none Read Only Field values can t be modified if true false Title Title of form Edit Work Item item id Table 4 6 Default decomposition level extended attributes Decomposition Extended Attributes can be updated by selecting the Extended Attributes property in the Decomposition section of the Properties Pane then setting the desired values in the dialog that appears see Figure 4 59 for an example Table 4 7 lists the default variable level extended attributes For the most part the attributes affect a single variable field on the dynamic form displayed Variable Extended Attributes can be updated by selecting the Data Variables property
171. ample of data transfer from net PerformBooking to task Decide External data transfer does not apply to any local variable or any variable of a composite task This is because the local variables cannot be observed externally and the variables of composite tasks serve as intermediate variables for passing data from the higher level to the lower level of a process and vice versa e g between a net and the tasks in its subnets When data are required from the external environment at run time either a web form will be generated requesting the data from the user or a custom service will be invoked that can provide the required data 5 3 2 Valid and Invalid Data Transfers To ensure correct data transfer YAWL defines a set of transfer rules for variables of different data scope Each input variable except those associated with the top level net root net must have data supplied from the corresponding net variables which could be a single net variable or an aggregation of any number of net variables via an input parameter definition An input variable of the top level net gets data supplied from the environment e g a user input once an execution of the net is started a local variable of the top level net may be assigned an initial value at design time data assignment Each output variable except those associated with composite tasks requests data from the environment once the corresponding net or task is executed An output variable
172. an alternative to mapping parameter values from net level to task level and back again task and net variables may be assigned values directly from an external data source on starting and be directly mapped back on completion External data sources are accessed via a specific External Data Gateway For task data bindings the list of available external data gateways shown in the Input and Output Bindings dialogs from where one can be chosen as an alternate source and or target of task variable values For the net level gateways can be selected via the Net s Data Gateway property dropdown list SimpleExternalDBGateway is an example gateway that ships with YAWL Any other gateways imple mented by developers will also be listed see Note below LOOO Input Data Bindings for Task Enrol Input To Task Variable StudentNumber v Generate Binding From Net Variable Data Gateway SimpleExternalDBGatewaylmp v Binding external SimpleExternalDBGatewaylmpl StudentNumber _ Ok Cancel Figure 4 28 Task input bindings with external data gateway mapping A net level external data gateway may also be chosen so that each time a net is started for a specification 78 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR the chosen data gateway will be called to populate its net level variables and when each net completes the data gateway will be called to update output values from the case back to the sp
173. ancelling returns to the main Editor form and discards ALL additions for the session Save amp Close returns to the main form and saves all additions 8 5 8 Drawing a Conclusion Sequence As mentioned in the Adding a New Rule section adding a conclusion to a Selection rule is simply a matter of choosing a worklet from the list or creating a new worklet in the YAWL editor However when adding a conclusion for a rule type other than Selection i e an exception rule type an exception handling sequence needs to be defined that will manage the handling process invoked by the rule The earlier section on the Exception Service detailed the various actions that make up the available set of exception handling primitives or tasks that may be sequenced to form an entire handling process The Draw Conclusion dialog makes the process of defining an exception handling sequence easier by allow ing you to create the sequence graphically Simply select the appropriate primitive from the toolbox on the left and then click on the drawing canvas to place the selected primitive Figure 8 27 shows an example of the Draw Conclusion dialog Toolbox Canvas Siz Worklet Rules Editor lt New Conclusion gt BAX o m Primitves H 44 E Select Arc Start End Tool Tool Node Node Figure 8 27 The Draw Conclusion Dialog Use the Arc Tool to define the sequence order First select the Arc Tool in the toolbox then click
174. and hold on the first node drag the mouse pointer until it is over the next node in the sequence then release the mouse For a conclusion to be valid and thus allowed to be saved there must be a direct unbroken path from the start node to the end node the start and end nodes are always displayed on the canvas Also the conclusion will be considered invalid if there are any nodes on the canvas that are not attached to the sequence when Save is attempted Use the Select Tool to move placed primitives around the canvas First select the Select Tool in the toolbox then click and drag a primitive to a new location The Align button will immediately align the nodes horizontally and equidistantly between the start and end 212 CHAPTER 8 THE WORKLET SERVICE nodes as in Figure 8 27 The Clear button will remove all added nodes to allow a restart of the drawing process The Cancel button discards all work and returns to the previous form The Save button will save the conclusion and return to the previous form as long as the sequence is valid To delete a primitive from the canvas right click on the primitive and select Delete from the popup menu The Compensate primitive will when invoked at runtime execute a worklet as a compensation process as part of the handling process To specify which worklet to run for this sequence right click on the Compensate primitive and select Define Worklet from the popup menu The Choose Worklet dialog wi
175. ap the net level variable to another previous task in the process which will be used to capture the required values from a user at runtime Those values will be used to set the timer parameters on the task selected in Step 2 The values requested are e Trigger when should the timer start There are two valid trigger values OnEnabled and OnExe cuting e Expiry when should the timer expire This value can be either a date time string for example 12 12 08 which will be interpreted as a specific moment or as a Duration value which will be interpreted as a period of time A Duration value is expressed in the following form 4 14 DOCUMENT TYPE PASSING FILES AS DATA 105 PnYnMnDTnHnMnsS All values start with P for Period followed by a non negative number of years months days then T for time followed by a non negative number of hours minutes and seconds The seconds value can have a decimal point and as many digits following the point as required e g to specify fractions of a second Any zero value parts can be omitted Valid examples P1Y4M3DT23H55M1 5S P2M3D PT10S An example of how a variable of YTimerType appears in a dynamic form at runtime can be seen in Fig ure 4 54 Edit Work Item 6 1 Figure 4 54 Example of a YTimerType variable rendered on a dynamic form To remove a timer from a task select the task s Timer property select the Never option in the Begins section of the dialog then click O
176. as been edited and completed and so the third Verify List workitem is checked back into the Engine by the Worklet Service the Engine determines that all the child items of the Verify List workitem has completed and so the original process continues to its final workitem Show List Start and edit the Show List workitem to show the changes made in each of the Get_Bob worklets have been mapped back to the original case Figure 8 41 C Exception Constraints Example This walkthrough uses a specification called OrganiseConcert to demonstrate a few features of the Worklet Exception Service The OrganiseConcert specification is a very simple process modelling the planning and execution of a rock concert Figure 8 42 shows the specification as it appears in the YAWL Editor First ensure the Exception Service is enabled see Section 8 1 3 for details Navigate to the YAWL Case Met page and upload the OrganiseConcert specification from the worklets folder of the worklet repository Then launch an OrganiseConcert case As soon as the Engine launches the case it notifies the Exception Service via a PreCaseConstraint event If 8 6 WALKTHROUGH USING THE WORKLET SERVICE 221 Edit Work Item 3 5 Figure 8 41 The Show List Workitem Showing the Changes to the Data Values EO organiseConcert BookStadium SellTickets DoShow Figure 8 42 The OrganiseConcert Specification the rule set for OrganiseConcert contains a rule tree for pre
177. ass and an instance of the visit Proclet class may be created in case an exception occurs for an instance of the visit Proclet class Subsequently in Figure 9 17c it is illustrated for the entity Sue how the interaction graph is extended using the exception interaction point of the visit Proclet class That is starting from the visit Sue 10 02 Proclet instance for which the exception occurred it is decided to start an instance of the visit Proclet class Next the result of the send report task of the lab Proclet instance is used as input for the receive task of the new visit Proclet instance The resulting interaction graph for Sue can be seen in Figure 9 17c As can be seen the visit Sue 10 02 exception node has been added representing the exception that has occurred Starting from that node the next instance of the visit Proclet class is created node visit T3 create Finally the result of the lab test is used as input for the third patient visit node visit T3 receive General The approach for executing a task instance for which not all performatives have been received can be gen eralized as follows This is schematically visualized in Figure 9 18 where two interaction graphs are shown Remember that a task instance for which only performatives can be received is always linked to an inbox interaction point For a task instance B a correspondin
178. at was deemed an inappropriate choice for the current case So when a new rule is added you are given the choice of replacing the executing inappropriate worklet instance with an instance of the worklet defined in the new rule After the Save button is clicked a message similar to the Figure 8 21 is shown providing the option to replace the executing worklet using the new rule The message also lists the specification and case ids of the original work item and the name and case id of the running worklet instance 206 CHAPTER 8 THE WORKLET SERVICE Replace running worklet Eg Do you wish to immediately replace the running worklet case for workitem 12 3 3_Treat using the new rule Workitem Spec ID Casualty_Treatment Workitem Case ID 12 3 Workitem Task ID Treat Running Worklet TreatFever Worklet Case ID 13 Figure 8 21 Message Dialog Offering to Replace the Running Worklet If the Yes button is clicked then in addition to adding the new rule to the rule set the Rules Editor will contact the Worklet Service and request the change For this process to succeed the following must apply e Tomcat is currently running and the Worklet Service is correctly installed e The Service URI specified in the Rules Editor configuration dialog is valid and e The worklet originally chosen is currently running A message dialog will be shown soon after with the results of the replacement process sent from the Worklet Serv
179. ate the state of a net at that moment Expressions that evaluate to true indicate that a flow is to be taken In the case of an XOR Split the flows have an ordered priority specified The first flow in order whose XPath expression evaluates to true will be the only flow taken from a completed task The only task we need to consider in this regard is Choose approval process Consulting our transcript again approval amounts of less than 5000 are to be routed to the Small Credit Approval task Anything more workflow can continue even when all other flow conditions evaluate to false 3 4 ADVANCED WORKFLOW CONCEPTS 39 O Input Data Bindings for Task Determine_Credit_Requ _ 8 OO Out t Data Bindings for Task Determine_Credit_Re rInput To Output To Task Variable _ ApplicationID Net Variable ApplicationAmount X Generate Binding From Data Gateway SimpleExternalDBGatewayimp v Cy iable icati Net Variable Application Generate Binding From Data Gateway SimpleExternalDBGatewayimp X Task Variable ApplicationAmount v Binding Binding E Net ApplicationiD text0 Determine_Credit_Requirements ApplicationAmount text Cancel OK Cancel OK a Input Binding Dialog b Output Binding Dialog Figure 3 12 Data Mappings for Determine Cred
180. ates to the entity itself and of which the second value relates to a unique identifier for the interaction These interaction identifiers allow for keeping track of the state of external interactions for entities i e performatives that are exchanged Additionally in order to realize the latter an additional attribute is added to a performative called the set of interaction identifiers For the interaction arcs for which a performative is sent the associated interaction identifier is added to this set More details on this will be provided later 242 CHAPTER 9 THE PROCLET SERVICE for Sue the creation of eee ee eee the lab instance needs blood send archi _ ga test teport ve WwW to be followed by the send report step ee visit T2 T i gt i initial recei decid broch A4 M D p gt repar p Lt L Ay NF ations yE ures i current state decide task is executed a eee eee ee Hee eee eae eee ne ee eae ret eee Interaction Graph interaction identifier i interaction interaction arc state i abT1 Sue 2 5 create executed_none ew lt 7 lab T1 9 interaction send report 3 3 o node S a visit visit Sue 25 01 Sue 7 T2 decide unproduced es T2 2 create rec
181. available build version The column on the right will show a tick for each component currently installed For each available update that is where there is a currently installed component with a build version less than the latest available version its row be coloured blue e g controlpanel in Figure 2 6 to install a component not currently installed click on its Un Install checkbox to select it Its row will be coloured green to denote the addition to uninstall a component that is currently installed click on its Un Install checkbox to unselect it Its row will be coloured red to denote the deletion the first four rows i e controlpanel yawl resourceService and documentStore are mandatory components that cannot be uninstalled but may be updated Absolutely no information is sent from your YAWL installation to the updates server Rather the Con trol Panel downloads a file containing the latest build data for all YAWL components then compares that to what is currently installed When the Update button is clicked in the Updates dialog all components denoted blue will be updated all denoted green will be installed and all denoted red will be uninstalled via this process 1 Files for updates and installs will be downloaded An error message will appear if the download server is unavailable You may try again later 2 Once the file downloading has completed each file is verified for correctness
182. ay P gt r 1 gt gt prepar j L E alns ations e ures VW Sue MDM 05 02 AAAS aa Pa i e aes peat a ene dedet eak iB ienee are S UECI i Te DEEE initial r Ne T instance for second visit is created A prepar ster de PU reports 7 graph is updated with the instance cenuneror pals mio Ereciet ations identifier of the second visit Proclet E SR lt instance caig aaan oe Bedale in K i state interaction arcs updated in graph sue L graph Anne visit Anne 26 01 E E visit Anne 12 02 es re broch fa AAL in ates decid broch _ a gt gt gt Le D D gt gt repar T 2 a s Z Na a Lures ws T We a ui 3 Ki ve id e ures PE a The Proclet instances that need to be performed for Sue and Anne For both the desired interactions are shown MDM MDM D 05 02 Sue 5 05 02 2 performatives are register executed_none send report not consumed yet e A S aa S os ae u 7 2 o a 2 visit 2 sn Sue 25 01 visit decide Sue 7 Sue 10 02 consumed visit Sue 10 02 create receive J MDM MDM gt 05 02 Anne 5 05 02 register executed_none send report 33 4 g 33 n S O aD n gs a el e visit Anne 26 01 OO Vf visit decide Anne 7 Anne 12 02 consumed visit Anne 12 02 create receive a b Updated interaction graphs for Sue and Anne For both an instance of the visit Proclet class has been cr
183. ays the name of each task that has a rules tree associated with it for the rule type selected in the Rule Type list Selecting a task name will display the rules tree for that task in the Tree View This drop down list is disabled for case level rules types Tree View This area displays the currently selected rules tree in a graphical tree structure Selecting a node in the tree will display the details of that node in the Selected Node and Cornerstone Case panels Nodes are colour coded for easier identification Blue nodes represent the root node of the tree Green nodes are true exception nodes i e they are on a true branch from their parent node Red nodes are false else nodes i e they are on a false branch from their parent node Selected Node Displays the details of the node currently selected in the Tree View Cornerstone Case displays the complete set of case data that in effect caused the creation of the currently selected rule see Adding a new rule below for more details In Figure 8 15 the Cornerstone Case data shows that amongst other things the variable Fever had a value of true while the variables Rash Wound and Fracture each have value of false 202 CHAPTER 8 THE WORKLET SERVICE 8 5 4 Adding a New Rule There are occasions when the worklet returned for a particular case while the correct choice based on the current rule set is an inappropriate choice for the case For example if a patient in a Cas
184. b will trigger The actual number of task instances started at runtime for a process will depend on the data supplied to it more on this later and on the use of variables for M I values in Section 4 7 6 after the basics of the data perspective have been introduced 4 4 6 Multiple Instance Composite Tasks Multiple Instance Composite Tasks allow you to execute multiple instances of a sub net represented by the multiple instance composite task concurrently at runtime based on the parameters set for the task and the data available to it To create a Multiple Composite Task 1 Click on the Multiple Composite Task button E in the Palette or right click in an empty part of the canvas and choose Multiple Composite Task Go to the My Career Net We are going to replace our existing Do Private Study Multiple Instance Task with a Multiple Composite task so click on the Do Private Study Task and delete it We will add in the new Multiple Composite task next 2 Place your Multiple Composite Task in your Net Reconnect the Flow Relations from Begin My Career to the new Multiple Composite Task and from the new Multiple Composite Task to Get a Job 3 Next create a new Net by clicking on the New Net button on the tool bar or click on Net in the Menu and choose Create Net or by creating a new decomposition for the task as we did for the Multiple Instance Atomic Task previously 4 4 THE
185. bility a language_en Choose completer s of task Org Structure C Do not choose completer s of task OrgGroup Genko Oil Allocate v Enable System Allocation Allocation Strategy Round Robin by experience z Start v Enable System Start Cancel Apply OK Figure 4 41 Resourcing Dialog Primary Resources tab A task may be allocated both human i e a person and non human e g rooms vehicles equipment materi als etc resources Further resources are divided into primary and secondary resources Primary resources are human resources that own a work list so that allocating a task to a primary resource means that a work item i e a runtime instantiation of the task will potentially appear on that resource s work list Secondary resources consist of both human and non human resources and are those resources that are required to as sist in performing the work of the task but do not manage the task directly as the primary resource does Thus each manually resourced task when executed will have exactly one primary resource and zero or more secondary resources 90 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR To summarise e Human secondary resources don t see the work item on their work list e Non human secondary resources don t have a worklist e A human resource may be a primary resource for some work items and a secondary resource for others
186. btotal text number Order tax text 4 19 CONFIGURABLE YAWL 117 e You if number Exam score text gt 50 then passed else failed the exam e if boolean Question response text then Correct else Sorry try again assumes the re sponse variable has a value of true or false 0009 YAWL 2 1 Edit Work Item THE ANSWER TO THE MEANING OF LIFE THE UNIVERSE AND EVERYTHING IS 42 Figure 4 64 The dynamic form for the Answer task with certain extended attributes set 4 19 Configurable YAWL A configurable process model is an integrated representation of multiple variants of a same business process ina given domain such as multiple variants of an insurance business process operating in different markets A configurable process model offers the following benefits over traditional process models e eliminates redundancies in a process family e fosters standardization and reuse of proven practices e enables a clear distinction between commonalities those parts that are shared by all process variants and variants those parts that are specific to certain process variants in a process family e can be configured to meet specific requirements such as those of a new organization product or brand The YAWL Editor supports the definition of configurable YAWL C YAWL models via an Editor plugin A C YAWL model is a YAWL model where some tasks are annotated as co
187. bug fixes and improvements can be downloaded between major releases The YAWL Foundation is a non profit organisation that acts as custo dian of all intellectual property IP related to YAWL and its support environment 1 4 Documentation Apart from this user manual there is a technical manual on YAWL and a number of case studies These studies provide detailed examples that you may wish to consult in order to obtain a deeper understanding of the application of YAWL This manual does not really cover the control flow concepts of YAWL in detail One reason for this is that there are quite a few papers out there that do provide this information We refer the reader to e g 10 for a justification of the extensions of Petri nets introduced for YAWL on the basis of the original control flow patterns The main paper on YAWL from a language point of view is 11 In this paper you find a formalisation of the control flow concepts of YAWL More recently a CPN formalisation of newYAWL control flow data and resource perspectives was presented in 28 For a formalisation of the OR join a complex synchronisation concept in YAWL we refer to 34 This definition supersedes the definition provided in 11 As mentioned above YAWL extends Petri nets There are a number of general introductions to Petri nets in the literature We refer the interested reader to 22 20 1 4 DOCUMENTATION 11 Wil van der Aalst has written much about the application
188. c task to the canvas 54 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR 1 Click on the Atomic Task button Ol in the Palette or right click in an empty area of the canvas and choose Atomic Task from the popup menu e TIP When you move the mouse pointer over the canvas it will change to signify which palette element currently chosen Position your mouse just to the right of the Input Condition the symbol which signifies the starting point of your process on the canvas and click the left mouse button once to place an Atomic Task Every task that will perform work at runtime must be associated with a decomposition To set the decomposition of this task first click inside it to select it Then go to the Decomposition section of the Properties Pane you may have to scroll to the bottom and click the Name property Select New from the dropdown list to display a dialog for you to enter a name for the new decomposition Set the decomposition name to Begin My Career then click the OK button e The decomposition Name property s dropdown list will show all the current decompositions in the specification along with entries to create a new decomposition rename an exist one or remove a decomposition from a task by choosing None By default a new task takes on the label of the decomposition that it is associated with several tasks are allowed to share the same decomposition Once you ve created your task you are free to r
189. c types such as boolean string double decimal long integer date in the format of yyyy mm dd and time hh mm ss Based on the above users may also provide their own XML Schema to define more complex data types Figure 5 2 shows the XML schema of a user defined data type for element CustInfo which consists of both customer name and target start date for the booking trip process depicted in 11 Data usage or scope is also part of a variable definition There are input and output variables input only or output only variables and local variables In general data are written to input variables and read from output variables Local data usage is applicable to net variables only The local net variables are used to store data that can be manipulated only internally within the scope of the corresponding net Finally a local variable may be assigned an initial value at design time while an output only variable may be assigned a default value at design time Further details will be given in the next section 5 3 1XML Path Language XPath 1 0 W3C Recommendation 16 November 1999 XQuery 1 0 An XML Query Language W3C Working Draft 4 April 2005 125 126 CHAPTER 5 HOW TO MANIPULATE DATA IN YAWL lt PerformBooking gt lt custinfol gt lt requireCar gt true lt requireCar gt srequireF light false lt requireF light gt stotalPricef lt PerformBooking gt Net PerformBooking Figure 5 1 A YAWL net Pe
190. cated the workitem Name of the system based allocation algorithm used to allocate the workitem A comma separated list of the names of all roles the workitem was Offered to A comma separated list of the names of all dynamic parameters used in the offer set evaluation for the workitem A comma separated list of the names of all filters used in the offer set evaluation for the workitem A comma separated list of the names of all constraints used in the offer set evaluation for the workitem Table 4 5 Additional resourcing embedded values for work item level log predicates 110 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR via the Log Entries property in the Net section of the Properties Pane while task level log predicates can be added via the Log Entries property in the Decomposition section of the Properties Pane To add a task level variable log predicate open the Data Variables dialog from the Decomposition properties select the variable then click the Log Entries toolbar button E In each case the Log Entries dialog appears where you can enter log predicates that will be logged when the relevant net task or variable begins and ends Figure 4 58 shows an example at the variable level indicating that correctly entered embedded keywords appear green while incorrect ones appear red if not corrected they will not be parsed at runtime but will appear as literal strings in the logs 90 Log Entries for bookList On Start The extended attribu
191. cation version and the data time the case began A single click on any Active Case table row will show the work item detail for that case instance on the following form 179 180 CHAPTER 7 THE MONITOR SERVICE rey zs Se oT oa JIN Laj amp rer et http localhost 8080 monitorservice Oia w hO Active Cases x Last Engine Start 2010 06 18 12 00 10 Spec Name Start Time orderfulfilment A 2010 06 22 15 05 16 orderfulfilment 2010 06 22 15 05 21 ProcessGiveMoney 2010 06 22 15 05 22 PurchaseOrder 2010 06 22 15 05 25 PurchaseOrder 5 2010 06 22 15 05 28 FilmProcess_YAWL2_0_noResource 2010 06 22 15 05 34 orderfulfilment 2010 06 22 15 05 40 Casualty_Treatment 2010 06 22 15 06 24 Figure 7 2 The Monitor Service Active Cases form 7 3 Work Items Figure 7 3 shows an example of the Work Items of Selected Case form The structure is similar to the Active Cases Form but with the additional detail e a button on the left of the header bar for returning to the Active Cases form 7 4 PARAMETERS 181 e the information bar containing the data time of the case start the service that started the workitem in this example the DefaultWorklist that is the Resource Service the participant who started the workitem and the current case level data as XML e atable of workitems created by the case instance with columns case id task id current status starting service enabled time sta
192. ce is related to an outbox interaction point This is illustrated in Figure 9 19 Here for the first scenario we assume that the lab Proclet instance is canceled and that no tasks for it have yet been executed Figure 9 19a Also for the second visit no tasks have yet been performed If in the interaction graph of entity Sue we look at the arcs that relate to the canceled lab Proclet in stance Figure 9 19b then we see that the arc from the lab Sue 25 01 send report node to the visit Sue 10 02 receive node has the state unproduced This means that no performative has been sent yet from the send report task to the receive task of the second visit Note that the send report task is linked with an outbox interaction point As a consequence we have an exceptional situation as the respective performative will never be sent at any time in the future i e the defined interaction will never occur Subsequently the arc from the lab Sue 25 01 send report node to the visit SSue 10 02 receive node transitions to the state failed Figure 9 19c Moreover similar to the previous exception a human actor may extend the interaction graph for Sue As the exception occurred for the lab Proclet instance due to its cancelation the graph may be extended by using the exception interaction point of the lab Proclet class not shown in Figure 9 19a Note that if the lab
193. ce Extra Help E Configuration Interaction Point Mouse Mode Message Select node for which you want to define interactions Interaction Nodes visit 64 decide Nodes for which interactions can be selected visit 64 decide Node for the decide workitem b Initial graph Model Interaction Point Window Procletinstance Extra Help E Configuration Interaction Point Mouse Mode select entity Node for the decide workitem KKLayout Instantiate Proclet Instance Proclet instances that lab can be instantiated visit 64 decide External interactions for existing instances Existing or Temporary Proclet Instance mdo_meeting 65 register Internal Interaction i r Internal interactions Finish selection c Possible interactions for the decide node Figure 9 32 Extending the interaction graph for Sue 9 1 INTER WORKFLOW SUPPORT 283 interaction Definition Editor Model Interaction Point Window Procletinstance Extra Help Interactions can be selected for the first visit and PICKING v multidisciplinary Select node for which you want to define interactjgas k meeting 6 Configuration Interaction Point Mouse Mode Message Interactiog e visit 64 decide mdo_meeting 65 register S mdo_meeting 65 register
194. ce an XOR split allows only one flow to be chosen when the engine reaches the first flow predicate that evaluates to true the corresponding flow will be chosen and the rest of the list will be not be evaluated However if the engine reaches the bottom of the list the bottom most flow will always be chosen as the default and it is not necessary to evaluate the predicate associated with that flow Therefore the default flow of a task with XOR split is similar to the concept of an otherwise clause defined in most programming languages For a task with an OR split e g the task Decide in Figure 5 4 all flows with their predicates are also presented in a list However an OR split requires that all flows whose predicates evaluate to true are taken Therefore the engine will evaluate all flow predicates and only if none of them evaluate to true will the bottom most flow be taken as the default despite the false evaluation result of its predicate Note In Chapter 4 Section 4 7 4 illustrates how to specify flow predicates for tasks with XOR or OR splits in the YAWL Editor Two things are worth noting 1 Only net variables are allowed to be used in specifying flow predicates This is because the flow 4XML Path Language XPath 1 0 W3C Recommendation 16 November 1999 5 4 DATA RELATED ISSUES 129 XPath boolean PerformBooking requireCar text true lt PerformBooking gt lt requireCar gt trues requireCar gt lt
195. ce has been added in order to use the outcome of the multidisciplinary meeting as input for the second visit Note that the associated arc has a unique identifier and that its state is executed none as nothing has happened yet There are three active nodes in the interaction graph of which only for the MDM 05 02 send reports node the new possible interactions are visualized That is the MDM 05 02 send report node matches with the send reports interaction point of the MDM Proclet class see Figure 9 24a For that outbox interaction point there is one outgoing port which is linked with the receive interaction point of the visit Proclet class As this is an inbox interaction point an interaction is possible with the existing visit Proclet class which has the instance identifier 25 01 node visit Sue 25 01 receive However in the graph of entity Sue we see an interaction node for a visit Proclet instance with the temporary instance identifier T1 which represents the second visit As it will exist at some time in the future interactions may also be defined for it As a consequence an interaction with the receive task of this future instance is possible node visit T1 receive The resultant interaction graph is shown in Figure 9 24c As can be seen an interaction has been added such that the result of the multidisciplinary meeting is used as input for the sec
196. cheduling Service e DocStore_BackEnd The URI of the DocumentStore service which supports the passing of binary files as task data values see Section 10 1 for more information This parameter should be changed only when the document store is located remotely 6 3 Logging On To log on to YAWL 1 Start the YAWL engine by choosing the option Start Engine from the YAWL program menu or by starting Tomcat directly 2 Navigate to the Resource Service s web UI either by choosing YAWL Control Centre or by pointing your browser at http localhost 8080 resourceService 3 Login with an existing userid and password First time logons i e where there are no participants defined in the organisational database should use the generic userid admin and password YAWL Note that a participant with administration privileges will have available the full menu of actions Fig ure 6 4 shows an example ordinary participants and participants with some extra privileges will see a subset of those actions when they log on The admin userid is a special logon which can be used for administrative tasks only but because it is not a formal participant i e it is not a logon associated with a unique person it has no access to an individual work queue so the menu options for Work Queues Team Queues and Edit Profile are not available for the admin logon 6 4 Administration A workflow a
197. cification in YAWL describes what work needs to be done when and by whom Each YAWL specification is composed of one or more YAWL nets exactly one starting net also known as the root or parent or top level net and zero or more sub nets In this tutorial we ll keep things simple and we will only consider the case of a YAWL specification composed of one net the starting net A net has two mandatory elements an input condition which acts as the starting point graphically represented like this and an output condition which signals the end the symbol Figure 3 1 depicts the YAWL Editor 3This chapter is more an overview of YAWL than an examination of its tool support The assumed knowledge at this point is that you have installed and can begin using the YAWL toolset by following the instructions provided in Chapter 2 30 CHAPTER 3 GETTING STARTED WITH YAWL with a brand new specification open and with the specification s starting net visible Don t worry too much at this stage about the various components of the Editor it is described in detail in Chapter 4 eoo YAWL Editor 3 0 File Edit Net Elements Plugins Help B B aag e Palette 4 net Odo aE Properties Specification Authors adamsmj Data Definitions 0 defined types Description Name New_Specificat Title Version Number 0 1 El Net Background Im Data Gateway None gt Data Variables None Fill Colour C R 255 G
198. clicking the Cancel Case button 2nttp processmining org 154 CHAPTER 6 THE RUNTIME ENVIRONMENT 6 4 2 Admin Queues An administrator can view all of the various work items that are currently active and their statuses in the Admin Queues Screen see Figure 6 4 There are two Admin queues each of which can be selected by clicking on the appropriate tab Worklisted which lists all the work items on participants work queues and Unoffered which lists the active work items that do not currently reside on any participant s queues From the Unoffered queue an administrator can assign unoffered work items to the offered allocated or started work lists of selected participant s via the buttons Offer Allocate and Start respectively Work Queues Edit Profile Logout D Team Queues Cases Users l Org Data l Assets Calendar Services Client Apps gt Unoffered 2 Worklisted 1 O amp Work Items Specification Task Offer 130853 ReceiveSSN_3 ME2 yawl 0 7 Create Book List 130854 Create_Book_List_3 Allocate Case Status 130854 Enabled Start es noe i Directly to me Jul 19 2011 15 55 58 0 00 02 40 Documentation Secondary Figure 6 4 Administration Queues From the Worklisted queue an administrator can change the participant and or the status of the work item through the Reoffer Reallocate and Restart buttons Reverting to a previous state is allowed
199. complete the user is then asked to make payment for the trip and the process ends YAWL Specification Figure 5 12 shows the YAWL net specifying the above simple make trip process There are five labelled tasks register for registering for the trip pay for making payment and the other three tasks for making the corresponding bookings The task register has an OR split decorator and the task pay has an OR join decorator Figure 5 13 shows the data type definitions in this process There are two new data types tripRegistra tionType comprising information of trip start date startDate trip end date endDate whether to book a 5 5 ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES 135 Make_Trip_Process book flight book hotel book car register Figure 5 12 The simple Make Trip Process net flight want_flight hotel want_hotel and or car want_car the customer s payment account number pay AccNumber and dateType comprising information of year month and day e g both startDate and endDate are of dateType eoo Update Data Type Definitions fh lt xs schema xmins xs http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema gt lt xs complexType name dateType gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs element name year type xs integer gt lt xs element name month type xs integer gt lt xs element name day type xs integer gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs com
200. cted case the affected entities are shown in the middle panel Finally in the bottom panel it can be decided how the exception needs to be handled Either the exception is ignored Ignore Exception button or for the affected entities the interaction graphs may be extended Handle Exception button For the canceled multidisciplinary meeting we see that both Sue and Anne are affected For them we decide to click on the Handle Exception button As an example in Figure 9 36b it is shown how the interaction graph for Sue is extended That is using the exception interaction point of the canceled multidisciplinary meeting node mdo_meeting 65 exception Sue is registered for the multidisciplinary meeting which has 69 as its instance identifier node mdo_meeting 69 register Moreover the result of the meeting is used as input for the second visit Note that for the interactions that relate to the canceled multidisciplinary meeting it is indicated that they do not take place anymore i e the arcs have state failed The interaction graph of Anne is extended in a similar way Therefore it is not shown here Exception at Workitem Level In this section we demonstrate how an exception at workitem level is han dled by the system For the demonstration assume that for both Sue and Anne we have just finished defining the interactions as a result of the decide task during t
201. d in Figure 4 18 66 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR gt B Figure 4 18 A task specifying an icon that the editor cannot locate 4 5 5 Task Indicators Task indicators are mini icons that appear across the top of a task to provide a visual cue regarding certain settings that have been applied to the task An example of a task with all three possible indicators is shown in Figure 4 19 Figure 4 19 Task Indicators The three task indicators left to right in Figure 4 19 are e Timer This task has had a timer set see Section 4 13 e Automated This task has been set as automated see Section 4 12 If this automated task also has a codelet specified it will be filled green see Section 4 12 1 e Cancellation Set This task has had a cancellation set defined see Section 4 6 These task indicators are rendered on top of any icons set for the task 4 6 Cancellation Sets Cancellation Sets allow you to nominate any number of tasks conditions and or flow relations which when they join two tasks directly contain an implicit condition that is not visible on the net for cancellation upon the completion of a specified task That is once a specified task has completed execution in a workflow instance all other net elements within that task s nominated cancellation set if any are deactivated To create a Cancellation Set for a task 1 First select the task to create the Cancellation Set for 2 Choose View Cancellation Set
202. d in the lt your tomcat dir gt conf directory un 1 context xml Locate the commented line containing lt Manager pathname gt and uncomment it 2 server xml Locate the entry that begins lt Connector port 8080 protocol HTTP 1 1 and modify it so that it looks like this i e the fifth attribute URIEncoding UTF 8 has been added lt Connector port 8080 protocol HTTP 1 1 connectionTimeout 20000 redirectPort 8443 URIEncoding UTF 8 gt 2 4 2 Installing PostgreSQL As a default YAWL is configured to use PostgreSQL for database support and this section describes how to manually install and configure PostgreSQL for YAWL however it is easy to configure YAWL for other database back ends see Section 2 4 4 for details Download the latest version of PostgreSQL from www postgresql org download there is a one click installer available for each operating system The following is a walkthrough for a Windows installation but it is a similar process for other platforms Except where otherwise mentioned simply accept the default setting for each setup screen For the Service Configuration screen choose the Install as a Service option see Figure 2 7 Leave the account name as postgres and enter any password of at least 6 characters This will be the account the PostgreSQL 20 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION icii Service configuration Y 2 a JV Install as a service Service name Post
203. d web services Data may also be assigned to and from net and or task variables directly from an external data source more later in this section Defining Bindings with XQuery Bindings may be defined using XQuery expressions Input Bindings use an XQuery expression to specify a value generally drawing on one or more net level variable and or static values that can be passed to a single selected task level variable Output bindings use an XQuery expression to specify a value generally drawing on one or more task level variable and or static values that can be passed to a single selected net variable For example if a task is called Lookup Book then an Input binding could pass the name of the book from a net level to a task level variable whereas the Output binding of that task may produce the corresponding ISBN for that book back to a net level variable To add an Input binding 1 Select the task to add the binding to We will be setting up Input bindings for the variables that we created in the Creating Task Level Variables section above Go to the Attend University Net and select the Enrol task 2 Select the task s Decomposition Data Variables property an open its dialog If you haven t set up Task variables for this task yet please return to Section 4 7 3 to do so In the Data Variables Dialog notice that the decomposition variables are currently shown italicised this indicates that we are yet to
204. dards like XPath and XQuery for data manip ulation This document provides some insights into data manipulation in YAWL in terms of data visibility defining data elements data transfer passing data between workflow components and exchanging in formation with the environment data related issues such as data based conditional routing and handling of multiple instance data Readers are assumed to have knowledge of YAWL and its supporting tools the YAWL engine see Chapter 6 and the YAWL editor see Chapter 4 5 2 Data Visibility In YAWL all data are represented as XML documents Figure 5 1 depicts an example of a YAWL net speci fying a simple trip booking process The data at the net level are written in an XML document with a root element named PerformBooking i e the name of the net while the data at the task level are written in an XML document for each task Next data elements are stored in variables There are net variables for storing data that need to be accessed and or updated by tasks in a net and task variables for storing data that needs to be accessed and or updated only within the context of individual execution instances of a task Note that the task variables of a composite task are conceptually the net variables of the corresponding subnet YAWL applies strong data typing Data types are defined using XML Schema The YAWL Editor provides all XML Schema simple data types for variable definition These include some basi
205. data and resource perspectives are discussed in the sections following this one Designing the control flow of a specification begins with choosing the required components from the Palette and laying them out on the canvas The scenario that we will follow throughout this section involves designing and implementing a workflow for a student who has just completed their secondary study and is now looking to start their career The sce nario will present the student with two choices to either enrol in a University and begin tertiary education or undertake private study that will eventually lead to getting a job Look for the hands on icon to the left of instructions for specific details of practical examples 4 4 1 Create a New Specification Create a new specification in the Editor as described in the previous section then 1 In the Specification section of the Properties Pane edit the various properties as you feel appropriate optional For the moment you can ignore the Data Definitions property 2 Rename the Net by editing the Name property in the Net section of the Properties Pane Change the name of the Net to My Career This Net will be the root net for our scenario 3 You are now ready to start constructing your specification 4 4 2 Atomic Tasks An atomic task represents a single unit of work which may involve interaction with a user via a worklist or with an external application or web service To add an Atomi
206. ddition to its properties being shown the properties of its decomposition if any are also shown in the Decomposition section A new task will have a single decomposition property Name with a value None denoting it is not yet associated with a decomposition You can set the decomposition for the selected task by making a selection from the dropdown list of the Name property All of the current task decompositions in the specification will be listed any one of which can be chosen for the task Also listed is the value New which should be chosen to create a new decomposition A decomposition can be renamed by choosing Rename from the dropdown list and providing a new name Once a decomposition has been added to a task you can choose which Custom Service the task will be allocated to at runtime via a dropdown list whether it is Automated and if so which Codelet to associate with it if any and the decompositions Data Variables and Extended Attributes see Section 4 7 2 Condition The properties available for a condition are a subset of those shown for a task i e only those net element properties relevant to a condition Flow When a flow is selected all of its properties are shown as read only since they are set via other dialogs except one the Line Style which can be set via a selection from the dropdown list 4 2 5 Other Components The Canvas The Canvas is where elements objects are placed to create and modify a
207. dentifiers a list of interaction identifiers In particular for the interaction arcs for which the performative is sent the associated interaction identifier is added to this set The role of the action attribute deserves some special attention This attribute can be used to specify the illocutionary point of the performative The five illocutionary points identified by Searle 29 assertive di rective commissive declarative expressive can be used to specify the intent of the performative Examples of typed performatives identified by Winograd and Flores are request offer acknowledge promise decline counter offer and commit to commit 32 which each represents a change in the state of a conversation In the model no restriction is made as to any single classification of performatives i e a fixed set of types It is important to use the experience and results reported by researchers working on the language action perspective 32 as these give an insight into the broader requirements in this area Of course it is possible to add more attributes to a performative For entities the content field of a performative can be used for exchanging data between Proclet instances in a structured way However first we need to remember that a performative may be multicast to multiple receivers That is for different Proclet instances of the same Proclet class the performative has the same task as its destination This is illustrated in Figure
208. derscore and contain no spaces or special characters The Effective Composite Rule panel displays a properly indented text equivalent of the composite con dition comprising the conditions of the selected node and all ancestor nodes back to the root node in other words the entire composite condition that must evaluate to true for the conclusion of the selected node to be returned The RDR Tree panel dynamically displays graphically the new rule tree as it is being created New rule nodes can be added wherever there is a node on the tree that does not have a child node on both its true and false branches except the root node which can have a true branch only To identify possible locations to add a rule node special potential nodes can be seen in the RDR Tree panel called New True Node or New False Node These potential nodes are coloured yellow for easy identification To add a new rule select the yellow new rule node where you would like the rule to be added When you select a new rule node the various inputs for the new rule become enabled Refer to the Adding a New Rule section above for details of the types of operands and operators you can add as the condition of the new rule To add a conclusion to the new rule click the New button If the currently selected rule type is Selection a worklet can be added as a conclusion in the way described in the Adding a New Rule section If it is one of the exception rule types
209. di vidual performative is followed by the subsequent sending of a performative later in the process e g the creation of a lab test needs to be followed by the execution of a task in the same process which sends the result of the test to the desired Proclet instance Therefore an interaction point with only incoming ports may be connected with an interaction point which has only outgoing ports Such a connection is called an internal interaction The above mentioned concepts are illustrated in Figure 9 2 Based on the first scenario in Figure 9 2a two Proclet classes are shown together with their interaction points ports and external interactions In Figure 9 2b a class diagram is shown containing the two Proclet classes First as can be seen in Figure 9 2a the visit Proclet class models all the tasks related to a visit of the patient whereas the lab Proclet class does the same for a lab test The decide step of the visit Proclet class has an interaction point with two outgoing ports One outgoing port leads to the interaction point that belongs to the input condition of the lab Proclet class Sending a performative to the incoming port of this interaction point results in the creation of an instance of the lab Proclet class Similarly sending a performative via the second outgoing port of the decide task results in the creation of an instance of the visit Proclet class As indicated by cardinality
210. ditor folder of the worklet repository It can be executed directly from there no further installation is required For more details on the Rules Editor and how to use it refer to Section 8 5 2 8 3 Using the Worklet Selection Service Fundamentally a worklet is nothing more than a workflow specification that has been designed to perform one part of larger or parent specification However it differs from a decomposition or sub net in that it 188 CHAPTER 8 THE WORKLET SERVICE Piel x oe Worklet Rules Editor lt Browse gt Casualty_Treatment File Rule Options Help 4 Q Bila Rule Type Selection Task Name Treat RDR Tree Cornerstone Case Rule 0 PatientID 2375493 i i DiastolicBP 95 ae Height 1 65 Rule 2 HeartRate 80 Rule 3 SystolicBP 140 L Rule 4 Fracture false 7 i Age 35 H Rule 5 Weight 72 0 Rule 3 Fever false Rash false Wound true Name Ben Dover bd Selected Node Node ID 2 Parent Node ID f Condition Wound true Conclusion 11 select Treatw ound Description i worklet for a wound Figure 8 5 The Worklet Rules Editor is dynamically assigned to perform a particular task at runtime while sub nets are statically assigned at design time Also worklets can be added to the repertoire at any time during the life of a specification even while instances are running So rather than being forced to define all possible b
211. dministrator can load new workflow specifications can start cases for them can manage all active work items can register or remove custom services and client applications and add manage and remove participants roles positions non human resources and organisational groupings In this section we will explore how these functions are achieved 6 4 1 Case Management To upload a new workflow specification first click Case Mgt in the top menu which displays in the screen shown in Figure 6 1 Upload the specification by browsing to the particular file and clicking the Upload File button in the Upload Specification panel Only valid specification files with a yawl or xml extension can be uploaded When a specification is uploaded it is validated against the YAWL specification schema for validity If there is a problem with the upload an appropriate error message is displayed in a popup dialog Cases can be launched for a specification by selecting it from the list of loaded specifications then clicking the Launch Case button in the Loaded Specifications panel If the specification has input parameters a form will appear asking for values for these parameters to be provided before the case is launched Note that attempting to upload a specification that has already been uploaded i e same specification id and version is not possible and will result in an error message to this effect being displayed It is possible to have different versions of
212. do so select the Timer property in the Task section of the Properties Pane The dialog in Figure 4 53 will appear Le oo Set Timer for Task Create_List Begins Expires DO Never O At exactly C On offer After duration 00 o0 o0 H oa o0 00 O On start Cancel OK Figure 4 53 Timer Dialog From this dialog it is possible to set an activation type when the timer should begin and an expiration value for the timer The timer can be activated either when a task is enabled i e is offered or allocated or when it starts These have different meanings according to the type of task manual vs automated 4 13 1 Activation on enablement e In the case of a manual task as soon as the task is enabled the timer begins and it remains live so long as the specified expiry time is not reached During this time frame the task will follow the normal resource assignment policy In other words it will be offered and can be allocated and started Once the timer expires the task instance will complete no matter what its current status is offered allocated started A possible danger of this behaviour is that a work item might expire while being edited by a user in which case any modifications the user makes after that time are lost The default YAWL worklist shows a time until expiry value for each timed task 104 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR e In the
213. done via the exception interaction point of the Proclet class for which the exception occurred Instance Cancelation or Completion A Proclet instance may be canceled or completed before all desired interactions have occurred for it First we illustrate this kind of exception and the handling of it in the 260 CHAPTER 9 THE PROCLET SERVICE exception interaction visit F a initial i P prepar yh ations we NL de A MDM ial pra E OB Hiatal regi deci send aa gt gt se KLster de P reports gt ations lt gt visit Sue 17 02 Ne Pee OTT ATT TTT IB HH ve recei decid broch ures b The Proclet instances that need to be performed for Sue together with the desired interactions lab Sue 25 01 Sue 2 lab Sue 25 01 create executed_source send report gt T Sg V S a S visit visit Sue 25 01 Sue 7 Sue 10 02 decide consumed visit Sue 10 02 create receive visit visit T3 receive Sue 10 02 S exception Sue 8 visit T3 create unproduced node representing the instance fo
214. e interaction has not unique interaction occurred yet identifier active node b Interaction graph that has been defined for the entity Sue so far Additionally for the MDM 05 02 register node the next interactions that can be nominated are visualized by dotted arcs Figure 9 23 Extending the interaction graph for Sue The possible interactions starting from the MDM 05 02 register node and the visit T1 create node are indicated by dotted arcs 270 CHAPTER 9 THE PROCLET SERVICE OB send report visit B __ IB X 4cp broch initial E o gt eee recei deci N m ures ve de lt ations WE MDM Fa initial mB deci f send ge regi eci sen P gt prepar ster de ERRO ations A e a visit lab and MDM Proclat classes MDM Me w MDM 05 02 Sue 5 5 05 02 register execut d_none send reports interaction with the receive task of the existing visit 25 01 VN Proclet instance AON ae a VOAN 3 S NAN Si u visit E EREN E Sue 25 01 mS a Sue 7 visit T1 create visit Wisit unproduced T1 recgive Sue 25 01 TE s s receive interaction with the receive task of the future visit T1 Proclet instance b Interaction graph defined for the entity Sue so far Additionally for the MDM 0
215. e a value of 5 may correspond to 5 minutes Another approach to dealing with the situation is to force complete the task and thus not to wait for missing performatives This situation is illustrated in Figure 9 16c As the interaction with the send report task will not take place the arc from the lab Sue 25 01 send report node to the visitSue 10 02 receive node has received the state failed in order to indicate that the interaction will not take place anymore Exception Interaction Point As a follow up on the approach to force complete the task instance it may be desirable to use the result of the lab test as input for a third patient visit This requires for the entity that is affected by the exception that it is possible to extend an interaction graph as part of the latter exception handling strategy For the entity Sue this is illustrated in Figure 9 17 In order to be able to extend an interaction graph in case an exception occurs for a certain Proclet instance a so called exception interaction point may be defined for a Proclet class An exception interaction point is similar to a configuration interaction point However only for the entities that are affected by the exception may the interaction graph be extended In Figure 9 17a an exception interaction point has been defined for the visit Proclet class By following the outgoing arcs it can be seen that an instance of the lab Proclet cl
216. e detail the lt and gt surrounding the context param block see Figure 8 4 below Save and close web xml 8 P 8 lt This param when available enables the worklet exception service add ins to the worklist If the exception service is enabled in th ngine then this param should also be made available If it is disabled in th ngine th entire param should be commented out gt sles lt context param gt lt param name gt InterfaceX_BackEnd lt param name gt lt param value gt http localhost 8080 workletService lt param value gt lt description gt The URL location of the worklet exception service lt description gt lt context param gt gt Figure 8 4 The Resource Service s web xml file detail The Exception Service is now fully enabled and operational For information on how the Exception Service works and how to use it see Sections 8 3 and 8 6 Installing the Rules Editor The Worklet Rules Editor allows you to browse the rule sets of specifications add new rules to existing rule sets and add complete new rules trees to rule sets It is a NET based application so has the following requirements e Operating System Windows OSs 98SE or better e The Microsoft NET framework any version If you don t have the framework installed it can be downloaded for free from Microsoft http www microsoft com downloads The Rules Editor tool is found in the rulesE
217. e A non human resource can never be a primary resource At runtime when a work item is started all of its allocated secondary resources if any are marked busy When a work item is completed or cancelled all of its busy secondary resources are released All busy and release events are stored in the process logs If a secondary resource is not available when a work item start is actioned the work item may start anyway or may be blocked from starting depending on a configuration setting see Chapter 6 for more details The following sections describe how to specify resourcing requirements for a task using the Resourcing dialog 4 8 1 Primary Resources Tab For the majority of tasks the Primary Resources tab of the Resourcing Dialog will be the only tab that needs to be populated The first decision to be made is to determine the interaction strategy for work items of the selected task There are three interaction points offer allocation and start and each interaction point requires a decision to be made on whether it will be User or System processed The Primary Resources tab comprises three sections one for each interaction point Offer Interaction If we choose that work items are to be Offered by the System by selecting the Enable System Offer check box in the Offer section of the tab then we can specify the primary resources that will automatically be offered work items of the task at runtime If the check box is not select
218. e Input Output or both Input amp Output designations A net level input variable requires its data value provided to it when the net begins A net level output variable passes its value out when the net completes In addition to these two options net variables may have a Local designation They are used to store intermediate data during the execution of a process instance Data transfer from a net to a task is achieved via inbound mappings An inbound mapping is a statement that says how to transfer data from the net variable to a task input variable Inbound mappings are evaluated when the task starts Conversely once the task is completed data is moved from the task s scope to the net scope by means of outbound mappings An outbound mapping is a statement that says how to move data from a task s output variable to a variable in its containing net XPath expressions are used to describe inbound and outbound mappings Accordingly the parameters of nets and tasks in YAWL are all encoded as XML documents Net Instance Task Instance Outbound Inbound Mappings Mappings Figure 3 8 Overview of Data Transfer between a Net and Task Figure 3 8 depicts example data transfers over the lifetime of a task instance The task s decomposition defines two input variables and three output variables When the task instance starts values for its input variables are populated by evaluating the input mappings for the task which are then passed on
219. e built in simple XML Schema data types and is used to represent a period of time When a Duration type is used as a timer expiry value the timer will expire exactly when that period of time has passed since the work item was enabled or started depending on when it is set to activate To set a specific duration choose the After duration radio button in the Expires section the Set Timer dialog Figure 4 53 and enter the required value in the six spin fields representing from right to left seconds minutes hours days months and years Tip hover the mouse over each field to see the unit of time it represents Care should be taken when specifying a duration that includes a months value since for example 2 months may mean a different number of days depending on what month it is started in In addition to the methods described above timer parameters may also be set at runtime via a declared net level variable of type YTimerType a YAWL built in complex type so that values can be supplied and late bound to a task s timer settings To use this deferred approach 1 Create a net level variable of type YTimerType 2 Click on a task then select its Timer property Choose the Via variable option and select the net level variable created in Step 1 when Via Variable is selected all the options in the Begins section are disabled because those options will now be set within the YTimerType variable 3 M
220. e ee 63 4 6 gt Cancellation Sets e ratre erate Tepa ea ae ee OE BSP OR amp OW a Oe ES 66 4 7 Vhe Data P tspective racit Gs eee a a ae eee Ba en A lee RR 68 4 8 The Resource Perspective 6 ti a a e o aa i e a ai A E a a 89 49 The Pret renices Dialog 3 0 2 ha o onei a a ee ke Ra r E A Se EN 96 410 Connections 4 cee ek A ee eae OE Rea a a a O E a oE a 97 4 11 Specification Analysis o ee 99 4 12 Automated Tasks miris sortni i we wae oO aa Re A ee a A ee E 101 4 13 Vask Timers a arimen eB reg ee ee A ee Sd EH es BR 103 4 14 Document Type passing files as data ooa aaa ee ee 105 415 Custom Forms e saw e Se a eeo A ee ee ee 4 16 Task Documentation 0 000000 eee eee 4 17 Configurable Logging 0 0 0 0 0 000 eee eee 4 18 Extended Attributes 2 2 0 0000200004 4 19 Configurable YAWL 1 20 00 0000 cece eee es 4 20 Checking for Updates 2 0 0000000000 000 4 4 21 About Dialog segoa tocar eek BEd ee SERS RE eG How to Manipulate Data in YAWL 5 1 Introduction sei 206 fab he ec A ew a a 5 2 Data Visibility lt 2 20 the Be Sn a Swe Ae Ae E a e 5 gt Data lransfer seisu shiek darya EEE ee ev EE ee pee 5 4 Data related Issues 2 2 2 20 02 00 eee ee ee 5 5 Illustrative Examples 2 aaa ee The Runtime Environment 6 1 Engine Configuration Settings 0 0 0 0 00 000 6 2 Resource Service Configuration 2 2 ee eee 6 3 Logging One csc
221. e ex ample in Figure 6 7 three services are already registered the SMS Service the Worklet Service and the Web Service Invoker Service A new service can be added by providing a name a password and confirmation a URI and a Description The password and confirmation password must match each other and name and password must also ex actly match the credentials that will be used by the service to log onto the Engine see Table 6 1 for a list of credentials for each of the standard YAWL custom services The URI is validated by contacting it and waiting for an appropriate response so care should be taken that the URI provided exactly matches that of the specified service Name Password URI workletService yWorklet http localhost 8080 workletService ib wsInvokerService yWSInvoker http localhost 8080 yawlWSInvoker smsService ySMS http localhost 8080 yawlSMSInvoker mailService yMail http localhost 8080 mailService ib twitterService y Twitter http localhost 8080 twitterService ib digitalSignatureService yDigitalSignature http localhost 8080 digitalSignature ib Table 6 1 Logon Credentials and URIs for the Standard Custom Services Although the Resource Service itself is a custom service it is not registered using this form because it is pre registered with the Engine as the Default Worklist Handler via a configuration setting The Editor when connected to the Engine will retrieve the set of registered s
222. e may belong to a larger more general role for example the roles junior teller and senior teller may both belong to a more general role called teller A role may be included in the distribution set for a task at design time meaning that all of the participants performing that role or any of its sub roles are to be considered as potential recipients of a work item created from the task at runtime Capability A capability is some desired skill or ability that a participant may possess For example first aid skills health and safety training a forklift license or a second language may all be considered as capabilities that a participant may possess that may be useful to an organisation There may be several participants within an organisation possessing the same capability and a certain participant may possess a number of capabilities A capability or capabilities may be included in a filter defined at design time that is run over the distribution set for a task at runtime so that only those participants within the distribution set that possess the specified capability or capabilities are potential recipients of a work item created from the task Position A position typically refers to a unique job within an organisation for the purposes of defining lines of reporting within the organisational model Examples might include CEO or Bank Manager or may be internal job codes such as TEL0123 A position may report to zero or one other
223. e node except the first has a parent and may have two child nodes a true child and a false child To summarise the hierarchy of a rule set from the bottom up Rule Node contains the details condition conclusion id parent and so on of one discrete ripple down rule Rule Tree consists of a number of rule nodes in a binary tree structure Tree Set a set of one or more rule trees Each tree set is specific to a particular rule type timeout selection etc The tree set of a case level exception rule type will contain exactly one tree The tree set of an item level rule type will contain one rule tree for each task of the specification that has rules defined for it not all tasks in the specification need to have a rule tree defined Rule Set a set of one or more tree sets representing the entire set of rules defined for a specification Each rule set is specific to a particular specification A rule set will contain one or more tree sets one for each rule type for which rules have been defined Of course to maintain a rule set of any complexity by directly editing the XML in a rule set file would be daunting to say the least To make things much easier a Rules Editor tool has been developed and can be found in the rulesEditor folder of the worklet repository It can be run directly from there no further installation is required depending on the requirements below 8 5 2 The Rules Editor The Worklet Rules Editor allow
224. e selecting the File Menu and choosing Open Recent The eight most recently opened files will be listed in a sub menu from which you may choose the file to reopen File Drag n Drop A specification file may be loaded into the Editor by selecting the file in a file management tool such as Windows File Manager or Finder on OSX a dragging it directly onto the empty canvas of the Editor 50 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR Download from YAWL Engine If you have a current connection to a running YAWL Engine see Section 4 10 you may download any specification it currently has stored directly into the Editor i e without accessing its disk file To do so e Click on the Download from Engine button W on the toolbar or select the File Menu and choose Download e A small dialog will appear that lists all of the available specification files currently loaded in the con nected YAWL Engine Figure 4 3 Make a selection from the list and click OK to download and open the specification in the Editor 800 Available Specifications CancellationExample version 0 2 E Casualty_Treatment version 0 1 i ChSExample3 version 0 31 Chapter3Example version 0 1 i DeferredChoiceExample version 0 15 EditorMiTutorial version 0 3 i 1 Cancel Figure 4 3 Available Specifications dialog 4 3 3 Saving and Validating a Specification At any stage you can save your specification to a YAWL disk file yawl that
225. e the default net background colour For a specification with multiple nets you can choose to change which net is the Root Net here Note that the current root net cannot be unset directly rather you must choose a sub net to promote to root net in which case the former root net will be automatically demoted Task A Fill Colour set here will override the default element background colour A Font set here will override the default label font allowing you to set the font family size and colour for individual net elements An Icon for the selected task can be chosen from a dropdown list and there are more than 400 standard icons to choose from you can add your own icons to the list by placing them in a folder and providing its path via the Preferences dialog Split and Join Type and Position can all be set via the corresponding dropdown lists 48 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR The coordinates of a task can be set directly in the Location property Resourcing for a task can be specified via its corresponding property which opens the Resourcing dialog for the task Section 4 8 This section of the Properties Pane also provides for how to set Split Predicates via the Split Predicates dialog Section 4 7 4 how to set a Timer for a task via the Timer dialog Section 4 13 and how to set multiple instance attributes via the Multiple Instance Attributes dialog for Multiple Instance tasks only Section 4 4 5 Decomposition When a task is selected in a
226. e war I work ROOT L schema gt visualiserApplet VisualizationRepository y workletService war WOrK er C yawl y yawl war awl4film gt yawlWSInvoker 5 yawlWSInvoker war a v an Figure 2 10 YAWL Core Services deployed in webapps directory OSX Example 2 4 4 Configuring YAWL for other Databases YAWL uses Hibernate hibernate org as a database framework which provides a transparency layer between YAWL and the back end database used to support it While the Enterprise version of YAWL is pre configured to use PostgreSQL it is a relatively simple process to reconfigure for other databases Be sides PostgreSQL YAWL has been successfully tested with MySQL HypersonicSQL Oracle Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL Apache Derby and H2 used by YAWL4Study Other database platforms are known to work well with Hibernate see www hibernate org 80 html for the complete list and so should have no trouble working with YAWL too Each YAWL service that communicates with the database i e the Engine and the Resource Worklet Doc umentStore Scheduling and Proclet Services has a configuration file called hibernate properties located in its WEB INF classes directory The properties file contains a Platforms section with default settings for a number of different database platforms all except one PostgreSQL commented out see Listing 2 1 for an excerpt of the properties file To configure for a different databa
227. e window r S Check Configuration Correctness Analysing Net Completed wendy 4300000 inner markings aj wendy LoLA is done 324 sec wendy closed and deleted temporary file Wwendy a08116 wendy stored 4325128 inner markings 9480 final 1323456 bad 2879275 inevitable deadlocks wendy 7578 knowledges 100000 edges wendy stored 12408 knowledges 164198 edges 4 sec wendy 11073 knowledges reachable wendy net is controllable YES wendy writing service automaton to file temp sa wendy closed file temp sa v Keep open when analysis completes Figure 4 69 Output from Wendy Now launch the Configuration Correctness Checker for the travel requisition process Once the analysis has been completed the YAWL Editor will be able to automatically block or activate further ports in an interactive way i e as you configure your model Let s now block the input port of task Check and Update Travel Form which was previously just hidden The Editor will react to that configuration by also blocking the input port of task Prepare Travel Form Secretary to avoid possible deadlocks in the individualized model This is notified to the user via a dialog window Figure 4 70 shows the preview of the resulting individualized model You can see that condition P3 will also be removed from the net now as a result of applying this configuration Automatic completion
228. e workitem ends and the workitem is marked with a status of ForcedComplete which is regarded as a successful completion rather than a cancellation or failure Execution proceeds to the next workitem on the process path mp Force Fail Workitem fails a live workitem Execution of the workitem ends and the workitem is marked with a status of Failed which is regarded as an unsuccessful completion but not a cancellation execution proceeds to the next workitem on the process path 8 5 WORKLET RULE SETS AND THE RULES EDITOR 195 Compensate run a compensatory process i e a worklet Depending on previous primitives the worklet may execute simultaneously to the parent case or execute while the parent is suspended or even removed The primitives Suspend All Cases Continue All Cases and Remove All Cases may be edited so that their action is restricted to ancestor cases only Ancestor cases are those in a hierarchy of worklets back to the parent case that is where a case invokes a worklet which invokes another worklet and so on Note that the remove restart force complete force fail suspend and continue primitives cannot be applied to a PostConstraint trigger because such triggers only occur when a case or work item has completed and therefore no longer exists Thus for PostConstraint triggers only the compensate primitive is applicable An example of a definition of an exception handing process in the Rul
229. e workitem level and the parameter level 7 1 Installation and Logging On To install the Monitor Service 1 Copy the file monitorService war to your tomcat webapps directory and wait for it to fully unpack 2 Go to the Client Applications web form and register an account for the Monitor Service with these credentials e username monitorService e password yMonitor e description The YAWL Monitor Service To log onto the Monitor Service browse to http localhost 8080 monitorService see Figure 7 1 The logon form has a green background to differentiate it from the Resource Service logon form Any par ticipant registered via the resource service that has administration privileges or the generic admin account if enabled can be used to logon to the Monitor Service 7 2 Active Cases The Active Cases form lists all of the currently executing case instances Figure 7 2 shows an example In common with the other Monitor Service forms the Active Cases form consists of a header an information bar and a table Inside the header are buttons reading from the right to refresh the page contents and to immediately logoff In the table clicking on a column heading will sort the contents on that column alternating between ascending and descending order The information bar for the Active Cases form shows a date and time of the last Engine re start The Active Cases table has columns for the case id specification name specifi
230. e your Condition in your Net and set its Label property Call this Condition Knowledge Gained Now link the Condition to the tasks of the net using flow relations Select the flow relation between the Read a Book atomic task and the Feel Smarter Atomic Task and delete it Create a flow relation from the Read A Book task to the Knowledge Gained condition Create a flow relation from your condition to a task Set the flow relation from the Knowledge Gained condition to Feel Smarter atomic task 62 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR 5 Create another flow relation from your condition to another task to signify the two possible flows from the condition ee conte Before we create our second flow relation from our condition first create another atomic task and call it Look for Easier Book Add an XOR join decoration to the Read a Book task with a West position Then create a Flow Relation from the Knowledge Gained condition to the Look for Easier Book task and another Flow Relation from that task back to the XOR join of the Read A Book atomic task as shown in Figure 4 14 Hint to curve a Flow Relation select it and set its Line Style property to either Bezier or Spline then move the drag point which appears on the Flow Relation to create the desired curve You can add more drag points by right clicking on the Flow Relation My_Career Attend_University
231. eas at the left side they are visualized In order to illustrate the definition of these details Figure 9 30 shows a part of the external interactions that are defined for the example in Figure 9 27b At the left side ports are visualized by a green dot together with the associated identifier Moreover the direction of the arc between two ports indicates the source tail and the destination head of the external interaction For example the lab_visit_out output port is connected with the lab_visit_in input port Via this connection the result of a lab test is sent to the receive task of a visit Proclet Enactment Support In this section we demonstrate how Proclet classes can be enacted in the YAWL4Healthcare Wf MS This is done in the context of the running example that is discussed at the beginning of Section 9 1 4 For the demonstration we assume that all the Proclet classes of Figure 9 27b and their relationships have been con figured in the system The demonstration is started by Sue for whom a visit to the outpatient clinic is required So for Sue an instance of the visit Proclet class exists which has 64 as instance identifier However in order to be able to have interactions with other Proclets first an entity identifier should be created As discussed before this can be done during the initial preparations task The corresponding form in the Outlook client is shown in Figure 9
232. eated representing the second visit Also for both the state of an interaction arc has been updated to consumed Figure 9 11 Both for Sue and Anne an instance of the visit Proclet class is created For the receive task of the MDM proclet instance the relevant performatives are not consumed yet 252 initial gt m gt Aiae PY ve e ures gt N MDM 05 02 Sue and Anne tegister J 22022 ODO OUUU y task is executed E gt i send Am state interaction arcs reports W simultaneously updated in P both graphs visit Anne 26 01 GA A visit Anne 12 02 eR 7 T P Z a af Pa ENA T 2 decid broch g Na Mrs s gt Ks ations ve e ures m CHAPTER 9 THE PROCLET SERVICE visit Sue 25 01 visit Sue 10 02 MDM MDM 05 02 Sue 5 05 02 register executed_source send report visit Sue 25 01 visit decide Sue 7 Sue 10 02 consumed visit Sue 10 02 create receive MDM MDM 05 02 Anne 5 05 02 register executed_source send report SA A S 43 ES 33 x co go visit O 7 Anne 26 01 visit decide Anne 7 Anne 12 02 consumed visit Anne 12 02 create receive Os53 gt a
233. ecified external data source Note Specific data gateways must be created for each specification that wishes to access an external data source directly How to create a data gateway is outside the scope of this manual Please refer to the YAWL Technical Manual for more details Notes about bindings For simple assignments such as those in Figures 4 25 and 4 26 the XQuery expressions for input bindings follow the form name_of_net name of_variable text and are bound to a task variable while those for output bindings follow the form name_of_task name_of_variable text and are bound to a net variable An Input Scope mode means that the variable requires a value from a net level variable or external data gateway or a literal to be mapped into it when its task starts via an input binding An Output Scope means that the variable is required to map a value from it to a net level variable or external data gateway when its task completes via an output binding An InputOutput Scope combines both requirements In addition to Input Output and InputOutput net level variables may have Local Scope which signifies accessibility within the net but not external to it Thus sub nets require net level variables with modes other than Local to support data passing to and from their parent nets A root or top level net with variables of type Input or InputOutput will when started request values for those variables from a user via a form before
234. ed a user initiated offer at runtime an Administrator will need to manually choose the resource s to offer the work item to For a System offer we can specify an initial set of primary resources called the distribution set that will be offered work items of the selected task at runtime by the System The distribution set may consist of any number of participants and or roles To add participants click the Add button on the toolbar under the Participants list A dialog showing the complete list of all participants known to the Resource Service is displayed from which selections may be made Figure 4 42 Multiple participants may be selected concurrently Also you can quickly filter the list be typing characters into the Filter field at the top of the dialog only those names that contain the same sequence of letters as those typed will be shown in the list Click OK to add the selections to the Participants list on the underlying tab Roles may be added in the same way To remove selections select one or more from the list then click the remove button on the toolbar In the Net Parameters section you may nominate one or more net level variables that at runtime will contain a value of either the userid of a participant or the name of a role to be added to the distribution set This is known as deferred allocation All net level variables that are of string type will be available for addition to the Net Parameters list
235. ed this privilege allows a participant to chain work items for a case When denied the default the participant may not chain cases see Section 6 7 for details regarding the chaining of tasks Manage Cases When granted this privilege gives a participant access to the Case Mgt form provid ing the ability to load process specifications and start and cancel case instances When denied the default the Case Mgt form is not available to the participant A participant with default user privileges i e all unselected have access to their own work queues and may view edit their own profile A participant with Manage Cases privilege can also access the Case Mgt screen A participant with View All Work Items of Team or View All Work Items of Org Group privilege can also access the Team Queues screen All other screens can only be accessed by participants with administrator access 6 4 ADMINISTRATION 163 6 4 7 Task Privileges Task privileges or more precisely User Task privileges unlike the User privileges described above are set at design time via the Editor see Chapter 4 Section 4 8 3 on an individual task basis The relevant dialog tab is re shown in Figure 6 13 and a description of each task privilege is included here for completeness Resources for Task Surgical_Procedure Primary Resources Secondary Resources Task Privileges Participants LI Allow work item suspension O Restrict Privilege
236. ed an exercise of determining what data must be passed out of YAWL at the starting of each task of our specification and what data must be returned back into the system when each task completes We note through the exercise that even though the tasks Large Credit Approval and Small Credit Approval are done by different parts of the organisation they have the same data requirements and can both use the same decomposition which we ll call Credit Approval We have a resulting variable re quirement per decomposition as per figure 3 9 Decomposition Param Name Type Designation Receive and Validate Application ApplicationID string output Determine Credit Requirements Applicat LontD SEPINg input ApplicationAmount double output Obtain Credit Report ApplicationID string input CreditReportRef string output ApplicationID string input Credit Approval CreditReportRef string input ApplicationAmount double input Figure 3 9 Variables Required for Task Decompositions To give you some idea of how this might look figure 3 10 is a screenshot of the Editor showing the de composition for the task Determine Credit Requirements with an input variable ApplicationID and an output variable AppplicationAmount When running our specification a participant will be offered a work item for an instance of this task They will be given an application identifier and will work outside of the sys tem eventually gene
237. ed in the Input To panel and the Stu dentNumber net level variable is selected in the Generate Binding From panel then click the Auto Binding button Notice that an appropriate XQuery has been generated that extracts the value of the selected variable from the net level Click OK to save the binding and exit the dialog Now select the SubjectCode decomposition variable and add an input binding for it using the same technique as described above Again when done click OK to save the binding and exit the dia log 74 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR To add an Output Binding 1 Select the task to add the binding to NE We will now be adding the Output bindings for the variables that we created in the Creating Task Level Variables section previously If you haven t already done so go to the Attend University Net and select the Enrol task Le OoOO Output Data Bindings for Task Enrol Output To Net Variable StudentNumber O Data Gateway Generate Binding From Task Variable StudentNumber Binding Enrol StudentNumber text Cancel Figure 4 26 The Output Bindings Dialog with auto generated binding 2 Select the task s Decomposition Data Variables property an open its dialog If you haven t set up Task variables for this task yet please return to Section 4 7 3 to do so In the Data Variables Dialog select the StudentNumber
238. ed version will be automatically updated then restarted to pick up the changes When either of the Download options are chosen the downloads will begin and you will see a progress bar in the update dialog Note that only the components that are newer than the ones installed are downloaded After the restart if chosen a message will display regarding the new version If there has been a major version update the entire Editor package will need to be downloaded and the option to install and restart will be disabled Instructions will be shown on how to install the new major release version If there are no updates available for your installed version a message to that effect will appear 4 21 About Dialog To view information about the currently installed Editor version select Help then About from the menu bar The build major version build number and build data and time will be displayed The dialog also provides two web links one which will take you to the YAWL forum to read or participate in discussion about YAWL and the other which will take you to the YAWL issues list where you can report any issues or problems with the Editor Click anywhere on the About dialog to close it 124 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR Chapter 5 How to Manipulate Data in YAWL 5 1 Introduction Compared to most of the existing workflow management systems which use a propriety language for deal ing with data YAWL completely relies on XML based stan
239. ed_both send report 8a s 3D 25 i a2 e 2 isi isit visit visit Sue 25 01 Sue 7 Sue 10 02 decide consumed visit Sue 10 02 create receive b Updated interaction graph for Sue As a result of the receival of a performative for the receive task of the second visit the state of the incoming interaction arc of the visit Sue 10 02 receive node is changed into consumed Figure 9 7 The receive task of the visit Proclet instance is executed As a performative has been sent which contains Sue 3 as interaction identifier the task may be completed Subsequently the interaction graph is updated interaction point is executed Step 4 The last step of the first scenario is to start executing steps for the second visit As can be seen in Figure 9 7 the receive task is currently executing For this task we find in the interaction graph the arc leading from the lab Sue 25 01 send report node to the visit Sue 10 02 receive node This indicates that for completing this task it is necessary that a performative is received which contains Sue 3 as an interaction identifier As this performative has been sent as result of executing the send report task the receive task may be completed Consequently the interaction state of the arc is updated to consumed indicating that the required performative was available and that it has been cons
240. efault to 100 e Optional Enter a comment which explains why the group or resource is unavailable for the period To edit an entry select it from those listed and click the Edit button The entry s values will be copied to the relevant fields in the bottom panel Edit the values as desired then click the Save button the save the changes or the Clear button to reject the changes and return to view mode If an entry spans more than one day you must select the first day of the span before you can edit it a warning message will be displayed if there is an attempt to edit a multi date entry that is not positioned on its start date Finally to remove an entry select it from the list then click the Remove button 6 7 Work Queues Work items have an associated life cycle and when interacting with the Resource Service it is important to understand the various stages that a work item can go through An overview not complete but sufficient for our purposes of the life cycle of a work item is shown in Figure 6 19 The labels of the arcs correspond to the names of buttons that users of the Resource Service can click on to effect the state change Suspended Accept amp Start Deaffocate Reaffocate Allocated Complete Completed Figure 6 19 Part of the Life cycle of a Work Item Each participant has access to their own work queues which are collectively known as a worklist a graph ical representation of t
241. efaults Figure 4 49 Preferences Dialog Connections panel For convenience a Test Connections button is provided which will allow you to test the connection using the supplied parameters before you commit them Click OK to finalise the connection settings 4 10 2 Connecting a Decomposition to a registered YAWL Service Each task decomposition within a workflow must be associated with a custom YAWL service that has been registered with the YAWL Engine By associating a task decomposition with a custom service all task instances based on that decomposition will be passed to that custom service at runtime for processing that is the custom service is responsible for performing the work of the task instance For example a decomposition may be set up to place an order with an external company Upon execution of any task using this decomposition data could be transmitted via a Web Service invocation to this company To have a decomposition invoke custom YAWL service click on a task with the decomposition then select the Custom Service property in the Decomposition section of the Properties Pane From the dropdown list choose the desired custom service for this decomposition If the Editor is connected to a valid running YAWL Engine instance the Custom Service dropdown list will contain entries for all custom YAWL services the engine has registered The Resource Service is listed as the Default Worklist Handler and is the ser
242. efined undefined undefined undefined false undefined false false undefined undefined auto generated tooltip undefined undefined Table 4 7 Default variable level extended attributes 4 18 EXTENDED ATTRIBUTES 113 4 18 2 User Defined Extended Attributes Attributes for Decomposition Create_List i Bahe BOG Background Alt Colour C FFFFFF Background Colour FFFFFF Font MMM Dialog 14 Heading Font MMM Dialog 14 Hide Banner Highlight E Justify left Label Page Background Colour FFFFFF Page Background Image Read Only q Label Set the label for the default prompt on the dynamically aenerated form OK Figure 4 59 Decomposition level extended attributes dialog User defined extended attributes are specified in property files one for decomposition level attributes and one for variable level attributes By default the Editor will look for attribute property files in the folder lt editor_install_path gt attributes In that folder the Editor will look for a file named decomposition properties for decomposition level properties and a file named variable properties for variable level attributes However the property files can be placed in any folder and use any filename in which case the location of the particular property file must be set in the File Paths section of the Preferences dialog File Preferences The Editor will alway
243. eive Proclet n Proclet instance interaction point identifier identifier identifier b Interaction graph defined during execution of the decide task The graph saves the Proclet instances that need to be performed for Sue together with the desired interactions Figure 9 3 For entity Sue using the Proclet terminology introduced so far it is shown how the existing and future Proclet instances need to interact Figure a Additionally for entity Sue the associated interaction graph is shown Figure b 9 1 INTER WORKFLOW SUPPORT 243 Performative Wee eet eee ged vy SERTE l ofp blood sond N archi Re Sender visit Sue 25 01 4 LA test report j ve S Interaction identifiers Sue 7 l 1 JI Receivers visit T2 visit T2 visit Sue 25 01 y i wp ay recel decid broch g l P e Am z f deci broch aa i gt eee ve e ures E F de ures WY o 52272 OO i at ns current state decide task is executed a The Proclet instances that need to be performed for Sue together with the desired interactions lab T1 Sue 2 lab T1 N create executed_none send report D S A i aS e Ss visit T2 Sue 25 01 Sue 7 gt decide sent visit T2 create receive J b Current
244. eive Reply again for the purposes of the example this task waits for 5 seconds before timing out When the task times out the Exception Service is notified There is a single timeout rule for the Receive Reply task its condition is again isNotCompleted this but this time the rules conclusion can be seen in Figure 8 53 File Cancellation is the first task of the Cancel Order worklet What we now have is a hierarchy of worklets case TimeoutTest3 is suspended pending completion of worklet case Send Reminder which itself is sus pended pending completion of worklet case Cancel Order Worklets can invoke child worklets to any depth Notice the third part of the handling process remove ancestorCases Ancestor Cases are all cases from the current worklet case back up the hierarchy to the original parent case that began the exception chain as opposed to allCases which refers to all currently executing cases of the same specification as the case which generates the exception So when the Cancel Order worklet completes the Send Reminder case and the original parent Timeout Test 3 are both cancelled by the Exception Service 228 CHAPTER 8 THE WORKLET SERVICE J Ev p Worklet Rules Editor lt Browse gt TimeoutTest3 J m File Rule Options Help Q a Rule Type TimeOut Task Name Receive_Payment CRDA Tree m Cornerstone Case I Cost 200 Paid False M Selected Node Node ID f
245. elabel the task to whatever you like This can be done by entering a new label for the task via the Label property in the Task section of the Properties Pane or by double clicking on the task an entering a new label in the dialog that appears This will not change the name of the decomposition with which the task is associated Begin My Career Figure 4 7 An established flow relation 4 Connect the Input Condition to your Atomic Task with a Flow Relation as shown in Figure 4 7 A flow relation most often referred to simply as a flow is a directed arc arrow from one net object to another it signifies the flow of execution between objects To draw a flow first locate a flow connector they appear as small crosses as you hover your mouse over the sides of net objects on the Input Condition Hold the left mouse button down over the flow connector and draw a flow by dragging the mouse to a flow connector on the edge of the Atomic Task which will appear when the mouse hovers over the edges of the task Release the mouse to complete the flow e Tip A flow connector is only shown when it is valid to draw a flow connection between the objects Invalid connection attempts include those between two conditions or multiple flow to from tasks without the appropriate split and or join see the next section for more details That s it Your Atomic Task is set Repeat the process to insert the following Atomic Tasks in order Go
246. ellation sets for all three intermediate tasks the net would represent an example of an unsound net which basically means the net may complete while there were still active tasks within it Great care needs to be taken when mixing split and join types and when defining cancellation sets so that the execution of the net behaves precisely as intended A Cancellation Set that has been created will remain in the specification regardless of whether you have the View Cancellation Set option ticked 68 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR gt Purchase_Book Order from Amazon Order from Booktopia Get Book Details Order from Bookfinder Figure 4 21 A Cancellation Set specified for the Order from Amazon task e You can create multiple Cancellation Sets in your workflow by selecting another task and choosing the View Cancellation Set option Only one cancellation set may be viewed at any one time e All flows leading to or from explicit conditions are not valid cancellation set members Neither are the Input and Output conditions The editor will ignore them if you select them for inclusion in a task s cancellation set e A task may be included as a member of its own cancellation set e The reason for including preceding flows of a task in a cancellation set is this If a flow relation connects two tasks directly then it is said to contain an implicit condition If there is a condition object in the model between tw
247. ement for or alternative to the Mail Sender Service The new Mail Service allows a task to be designated as an email task which can then be easily configured to send an email to a recipient using SMTP The Mail Service has several parameters that are required to be configured to successfully send an email Most of the parameters can have default values set for them in the service s web xml file so that at runtime a user only has to supply values for those remaining parameters that haven t had default values set The full list of parameters are e host The URL of the SMTP mail host In the service s web xml a sample host value of smtp gmail com has been supplied but should of course be changed to whatever host you use to send mail 10 4 MAIL SERVICE 293 e port The port number that the host listens on for SMTP traffic Again a default value is supplied for the gmail host but should be changed to the correct port for your host e mailUserName The username of a registered account on the host that is capable of sending mail e mailUserPassword The corresponding password for the supplied username e senderName the actual name to associate with the email sender e sendAddress the email address of the sender that is the address of the email account corresponding to the mailUserName account on the given host Decomposition Variables Name Type Scope Default Value gt senderName string Input Hee gt result string Ou
248. ems that have been allocated to a participant Unlike an offer a work item on an allocated queue means that it has been allocated to that participant alone and comes with the understanding that the participant will at some time start the work item and perform its work Edit Profile Admin Queues Team Queues Cases Users Org Data Assets Calendar Services Client Apps D Offered 1 Allocated 1 Started 3 Suspended 0 amp Work Items Specification Task Start 130856 1 A_3 enumtest 0 1 A Deallocate Case Status Delegate 130856 1 Executing aa ae Skip crested a Pile Jul 27 2011 16 16 39 2 02 49 24 Documentation Figure 6 21 The Allocated Work Queue A participant may take the following actions on a work item in an allocated queue e Start The work item is started i e begins executing and moved to the participant s started queue e Deallocate This action provides an authorised participant with a means of rejecting a work item that has been allocated to them The work item is removed from the participant s allocated queue the participant is removed from the original distribution set and the work item is redistributed as per the resourcing specification for the task A participant must have the task privilege Can Deallocate to enable deallocation e Delegate This action allows a participant to delegate responsibility for a work item to anoth
249. entID string string inputOnly Casualty_Treatment Patient D text Sex string string inputOutput Casualty_Treatment Sex text Admit Sex text M SystolicBP long long inputOutput number Casualty_Treatment SystolicBP text number Admit SystolicBP text 120 Weight long long inputOutput number Casualty_Treatment Weight text number Admit Weight text 85 Figure 7 4 The Monitor Service Parameters of Selected Work Items form Chapter 8 The Worklet Service This chapter contains instructions for installing and using the Worklet Dynamic Process Selection amp Exception Handling Custom Service for YAWL Each section describes one part in the process of setting up and using the Worklet Service It is probably best to work through the manual from start to finish the first time it is read This manual focuses on the practical use of the Worklet Service For those interested a more technical description of the inner operations of worklets and the rule sets that support them can be found in the technical manual A more concise version of the worklets approach can be found in 14 while a more concise version of the exlets approach can be found in 13 The ultimate reference on worklets and exlets is Michael Adams PhD thesis 12 All these publications can be downloaded from www yawlfoundation org All of the example specifications rule sets and so on referred to in this manual can be found in the worklet repository
250. entation A task may be annotated with descriptive text that will be viewable on a user s worklist at runtime This text or documentation can be used to describe details about each instance of a task To add documentation to a task select the Documentation property from the Task section of the Properties Pane A dialog will appear into which the text can be added Figure 4 57 XQueries that reference net level variables can be embedded in the text and are evaluated at runtime when the task is enabled For example the text in Figure 4 57 will resolve to This claim has high priority at runtime assuming there is a net level variable called priority that has a value of high when the task is enabled At runtime the task documentation can be annotated on the fly so that for example messages can be passed between administrators and users work lists regarding the task 4 17 CONFIGURABLE LOGGING 107 60 0 Update text This claim has Net priority text priority Cancel OK Figure 4 57 Set Task Documentation dialog 4 17 Configurable Logging The YAWL process logging framework keeps a record of all aspects of each process execution including all control flow resourcing and data aspects which can later be analysed As part of the logging framework provision is made for configurable logging that is the ability to log messages known as Log Predicates along with process da
251. eprint for a software application that co ordinates monitors and controls some or all of the tasks that make up these business processes Such software applications are called workflows An example of a business process is an order to cash process one that goes from the moment a purchase order for a product or service is received by an organisation to the moment the customer pays for the products including aspects such as invoicing and shipment After capturing this process from beginning to end an organisation may choose to add further details about the people legacy applications messages and documents involved and to deploy a workflow application to co ordinate this process You can build a workflow application using general purpose software programming platforms e g as a bunch of Web applications Enterprise Java Beans and legacy applications connected together but this defeats the purpose of aligning the models produced by business people with the resulting IT systems This is why one should consider an alternative approach to develop workflow applications on top of a dedicated workflow management system Many years ago workflow was a bit of a dark art practised by deep pocketed companies that were able to afford expensive workflow management systems and highly specialised consultants Today workflow technology is widely available and its benefits and pitfalls are more widely understood A word of warning though while workflow doesn
252. er par ticipant The receiving participant must be subordinate to the delegating participant by Position The work item is moved from the allocated queue of the delegator to the allocated queue of the receiver 172 CHAPTER 6 THE RUNTIME ENVIRONMENT A participant must have the task privilege Can Delegate and have subordinate staff to successfully deallocate a work item e Skip This action skips the execution of the work item that is the work item is immediately started and then completed allowing the process to continue according to its subsequent control flow A participant must have the task privilege Can Skip to enable the skipping of a work item e Pile When a work item is piled the work item is immediately started and placed in the participant s started queue Furthermore each and every future instance of the work item across all cases of the same spec ification is automatically allocated to the participant and started completely ignoring any resourcing specification for the task from which the work item is created To put it another way by piling a work item a participant is entering into a contract with the Resource Service asking that this work item and all future occurrences of such work items created from the same task description as the original work item was created from be immediately allocated and started to him her Piling of such work items continues until the participant turns off piling for the task via
253. era Anne the register S W initial f regi deci ee step needs to be gt prepar ster de pe followed by the send current state ations lt reports step decide task is KR J executed for Anne visit Anne 26 0 A E Pia 2 niia A l m Z fre deci broch ay L _ Initial recer decid broch aN Ja r gt PE de P ures E m prepar ve Fl e P ures gt I Ji aons ations I 0o55 gt feos Se eee J a The Proclet instances that need to be performed for Sue and Anne For both the desired interactions are shown MDM 05 02 Sue 5 05 02 register executed_none send report Ss g visit Sue 25 01 decide Sue 7 visit T1 create receive nodes and arcs for the unproduced MDM Proclet instance MDM MDM appear in both graphs 05 02 Anne 5 05 02 register executed_none send report x c A o g a Z n es 23 n ye a2 Ys aD e at S B visit a Anne 26 01 visit decide Anne 7 T2 unproduced visit T2 create receive b Interaction graphs showing the Proclet instances that need to be performed for Sue and Anne together with the desired interactions Figure 9 9 For both Sue and Anne it is shown how existing and future Proclet instances need to interact Figure a Additiona
254. ereSQL Database Server 83 rcl Account name posteres s i SOSSCSCSCi sS Account domain HP22720319230 Account password Pete Verily password Pete The service account is the account that runs the PostgreSQL database server If you have not already created an account the installer can do so for you Enter an account name and a password or leave the password blank to have one auto generated caresi Figure 2 7 Choose Install as a Service and enter any password service uses to run and allow connections to the database Note The Install as a Service option is only available on Windows systems On the next screen Initialise Database Cluster Figure 2 8 leave all values as they are but enter yawl no quotes all lower case as the password This is the user account that YAWL uses to connect to the database but see Section 2 4 4 for details on how to modify the password YAWL uses Leave the settings for all other screens at their defaults and click through to completion Next run the administration tool pgAdmin which was installed along with the PostgreSQL installation In the Object Browser panel on the left cf Figure 2 9 double click on the Postgres server and when prompted enter yawl as the password you should only be asked for this password the first time you connect Then right click on Databases under Postgres and choose New Database from the popup menu In the next dialog enter
255. ervices and make them avail able for assigning to tasks by displaying the description entered for each service in the drop down list of the Task Decomposition dialog see Section 4 10 2 To deregister a service from the Engine select it in the list then click the Remove button 6 4 ADMINISTRATION 157 Ohka w aO a Admin Queves Cases Users Client Apps Logout p Registered Services http ocalhost 8080 yawlSMSinvoker sms service workletService http ocalhost 8080 workletService ib the worklet service wsinvokerService _http localhost 8080 yawlWSInvoker web service invoker Confirm Password Figure 6 7 Service Management 6 4 4 Client Application Management Similar to the Service Management Screen the Client Application Management Screen provides for the registration of logon credentials for external applications and services i e non custom services that wish to connect to the Engine via its interfaces Figure 6 8 shows and example of the Client Management Screen To add a new client application provide a name a password and confirmation and a Description The password and confirmation password must match each other and name and password must also exactly match the credentials that will be used by the application to log onto the Engine The credentials for the Editor are editor username and yEditor password and for the monitor service they are monitorService usern
256. ery powerful flexibility support YAWL s architecture is Service oriented and hence one can replace existing components with one s own or extend the environment with newly developed components The YAWL environments supports the automated generation of forms This is particularly useful for rapid prototyping purposes Tasks in YAWL can be mapped to human participants Web Services external applications or to Java classes Through the C YAWL approach a theory has been developed for the configuration of YAWL models For more information on process configuration visit www processconfiguration com Simulation support is offered through a link with the ProM www processmining org environ ment Through this environment it is also possible to conduct post execution analysis of YAWL pro cesses e g in order to identify bottlenecks 1 2 Obtaining the Latest Version of YAWL As new versions of the YAWL Environment are released to the public they will be available for download at the YAWL Sourceforge website sourceforge net projects yawl From this site it is also possible to access the source code of all components for development purposes 1 3 The YAWL Foundation For up to the minute information on any aspect of the YAWL Initiative visit the YAWL Foundation Home page yawlfoundation org The site also hosts a Latest Builds pages under the Resources menu where the most recent builds of various components incorporating
257. es Editor is below Sp Worklet Rules Editor lt New Conclusion gt Joie Save Clear Cancel Figure 8 10 Example Handler Process in the Rules Editor When invoked this handler will suspend the current case then run a compensating worklet then continue execution of the case In the same manner as the Selection Service the Exception Service also supports data mapping from a case to a compensatory worklet and back again For example if a certain variable has a value that prevents a case instance from continuing a worklet can be run as a compensation during which a new value can be assigned to the variable and that new value mapped back to the parent case so that it may continue execution The full capabilities of the Exception Service are better described in the walkthroughs in Section 8 6 But before we consider the walkthroughs we must first look at exactly how the rule sets are formed and how they operate and how to use the Worklet Rules Editor to manage rule sets for specifications These topics are discussed in the next section 8 5 Worklet Rule Sets and the Rules Editor This section describes the structure and operation of worklet rule sets A tool has been designed to manage the creation and modification of rule sets for specifications called the Worklet Rules Editor The structure and operation of rule sets is best described by using the Rules Editor to display and manipulate them So a d
258. escription of how to use the Rules Editor is interspersed in this section with the description of the rule sets themselves Again the Worklet Selection and Exception Services work in very similar ways but with some necessary 196 CHAPTER 8 THE WORKLET SERVICE differences In this section the discussion of rule sets applies to both services except where indicated 8 5 1 Worklet Rule Sets Any YAWL specification may have an associated rule set The rule set for each specification is stored as XML data in a disk file that has the same name as the specification but with an xrs extension XML Rule Set All rule set files are stored in the rules folder of the worklet repository For example the file Casu alty_Treatment xrs contains the worklet rule set for the Casualty_Treatment yawl YAWL process specification Figure 8 11 shows an excerpt from that file lt ruleNode gt lt pre gt lt case gt lt constraints gt lt selection gt lt task name Treat gt lt ruleNode gt lt id gt O lt id gt lt parent gt 1 lt parent gt lt trueChild gt 1 lt trueChild gt lt falseChild gt 1 lt falseChild gt lt condition gt True lt condition gt lt conclusion gt null lt concelusion gt lt cornerstone gt lt cornerstone gt lt description gt root level default node lt description gt lt f ruleNode gt lt ruleNode gt lt id gt 1 lt id gt lt parent gt O lt parent gt lt trueChild gt 8 lt trueChild gt lt fa
259. esult string Output gt recipientName string Input P recipientAddress string Input P subject string Input gt content string Input t Av bq B Figure 10 2 Task level variables for a Mail Service task default variables removed Generally a Send Email task associated with the Mail Service will be preceded by another task the will collect the required non default values from a user at runtime An example of a dynamic form for such a task is 294 CHAPTER 10 OTHER SERVICES shown in Figure 10 3 of course a custom form may also be used if desired The content field in figure 10 3 uses a textarea extended attribute to provide ample space to input the required email content Edit Work Item 130860 1 YAWL Admin yawladmin example com Task completed Figure 10 3 A dynamic form for a typical compose email task 10 5 Twitter Service The Twitter Service is a simple service that provides for the posting of status updates i e tweets to Twitter When a task is associated with Twitter Service in the Editor s Task Decomposition dialog the service will supply two required variables e status Input Only The message text to send to Twitter e result Output Only A response message received from Twitter that indicates the success or failure of the status update When invoked at runtime the Twitter Service will connect to Twitter and through its API using the config ured userid and password pos
260. et a capability filter click the Edit button on the top right of the Capability Filter panel The Ad d Edit Filter dialog is shown which consists of two panels a list of all the Capabilities known to the Resource Service and a panel for composing Filter Expressions Figure 4 44 A filter expression may be composed by first double clicking on a Capability from the list which will copy it to the expression panel Composite expressions can be formed using the buttons on the bottom toolbar e Logical AND amp both sides must be true Logical OR at least one side must be true e Undo 4 delete the last entered capability or logical operator e Remove X clear the entire expression For example the expression in Figure 4 44 will match only those participants in the distribution set that have a Bachelor s degree in SCLM and English language skills specified in their capability set 92 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR O O Add Edit Filter Capabilities Bachelor s in SCLM Master Master s in SCLM a capability language_en language_sv language_zh tukl Filter Expression Bachelor s in SCLM amp language_en amp ax Cancel Figure 4 44 Capability Filter dialog 8 0 0 Add Edit Filter Org Groups Positions Carrier Department Assistant head of OD Finance Department CD clerk Genko Oil CEO Order Management Department FD clerk Supply
261. ex example of MI Task which involves mapping the resulting data from the task back to a different net level variable than the one that supplied the MI data to the task can be found at the end of Chapter 5 4 8 THE RESOURCE PERSPECTIVE 89 4 8 The Resource Perspective The resource perspective allows you to allocate available resources to tasks specify rules that should be used for those allocations place certain constraints on who may or may not start a task assign certain task privileges to resources and much more To enable the resource perspective in the Editor a valid connection to the YAWL Resource Service must first be established see Section 4 10 for more details Once a connection with the Resource Service has been established any manual atomic task with a decom position a task is manual by default and only becomes automated when explicitly checked as automated in the Properties Pane can be allocated resources via the Resourcing property in the Task section of the Properties Pane Selecting this property will launch the Resourcing Dialog Figure 4 41 60 0 Resources for Task Create _List Primary Resources Secondary Resources Task Privileges Offer v Enable System Offer Participants Roles Net Parameters Captain McCluskey cmc Senior Claim Manager selected participant Connie Corleone Rizzi ccr Billy Van Arsdale bva Momo Barone mb Filters Constraints Capa
262. ex string Input P DiastolicBP long Input gt Notes string InputOutput gt Height double Input gt HeartRate long Input gt Pharmacy string InputOutput gt systolicBP long Input gt Fracture boolean Input gt Age long Input gt Treatment string InputOutput gt Weight double Input gt Fever boolean Input gt Rash boolean Input gt Wound boolean Input gt Name string Input gt AbdominalPain boolean Input t AVAKQOOE Figure 8 7 Decomposition variables for the Treat task 8 3 2 Worklet Specifications When the Casualty Treatment top level specification is executed the YAWL Engine will notify the Worklet Service when the worklet enabled Treat task becomes enabled The Worklet Service will then examine the data in the task and use it to determine which worklet to execute as a substitute for the task Any or all of the data in the task may also be mapped to the selected worklet case as input data Once the worklet instance has completed any or all of the available output data of the worklet case may be mapped back to the Treat task to become its output data and the top level process will continue A worklet specification is a standard YAWL process specification and as such is created in the YAWL Editor in the usual manner Each of the data variables that are required to be passed from the parent task to the worklet specification need to be defined as net level variables in the worklet specification Figure 8 8 shows a si
263. ext status return String valueOf isFinishedStatus status Figure 8 61 Calling the actual isNotCompleted method private static boolean isFinishedStatus String status return status equals WorkItemRecord statusComplete status equals WorkItemRecord statusForcedComplete status equals WorkItemRecord statusFailed Figure 8 62 Definition of method isFinishedStatus All methods defined in the Implementation section must also be declared as private static methods how ever they can have any return type so long as the value returned from the execute method back to the Worklet Service has been converted to a String value Of course you are not restricted to querying the this variable as a WorkItemRecord it is passed simply as a JDOM Element that has been converted to a String and so can be queried via a number of different methods The objective of the RdrConditionFunctions class is to allow developers to easily extend the capabilities of the Worklet Service by providing the means to test for other things in the conditional expressions of rule nodes other than the process instance s data attributes and values It is envisaged that the class s functions can be extended into areas such as process mining querying resource logs and external data sets 8 8 Sample Log generated by Walkthrough C In the following every line started with the date which has been omitted for readabilty reasons Similary
264. f any of the rules evaluate to true using the contextual data of the case or workitem If the rule set finds a matching rule for the exception type and data an exception process is invoked Note that for each of the constraint events an exception process is invoked for a rule when that rules con dition evaluates to true So for example if the condition of an ItemPreConstraint rule for a Triage task was PrivateInsurance false and that value of that attribute in the workitem was also false then the exception process for that rule would be invoked Externally Triggered Types Externally triggered exceptions occur not through the case s data values but because something has hap pened outside of the process execution that has an affect on the continuing execution of the process Thus these events are triggered by a user depending on the actual event a particular handler will be invoked There are two types of external exceptions CaseExternalTrigger for case level events and ItemExternal Trigger for item level events See later in this section for examples of each and how they are invoked TimeOut A timeout event occurs when a workitem has an associated timer or is linked to the deprecated Time Service and the deadline set for that workitem is reached In this case the Engine notifies the Worklet Service of the timeout event and passes to the service a reference to itself and each of the other workitems that were running in pa
265. f available types when creating a task or net variable Net variables with a usage of Local can have initial values specified for them as depicted in the same figure As with the data type definition dialog validation errors will appear when the initial value text is invalid for its data type schema The Data Type Definition Repository As mentioned above the Data Type Definition dialog provides three buttons on the dialog tool bar that allow you to save complete or partial data type definitions to the repository and later retrieve them for other specifications To add a data type definition to the repository first select it in the dialog s editor then click the Add to Repository button 8 Add a label and meaningful description for the definition to the dialog that appears then click OK to save 4 7 THE DATA PERSPECTIVE 83 Name Type Scope Initial Value gt localGeek Geek Local PiN 800 Edit Value for Variable localGeek lt Name gt Mac Genius lt Name gt Salary gt 50000 lt Salary gt Cancel OK Data Variables Cancel OK Figure 4 34 A Geek net variable with a valid initial value To retrieve previously saved data type definitions from the repository first place the cursor at the desired insertion point then click the Load from Repository button Select the label for the desired definition from the list then
266. f having a first visit fragment Visit Sue 25 01 As indicated by the outgoing arcs from the decide task the doctor decides during the decide task that a subsequent visit is necessary fragment visit T2 and that a lab test needs to be taken fragment lab T1 As the last two fragments need to be created in the future the fragments for them are visualized with a dotted rectangle around them Also their instance identifier starts with a T As a subsequent action when creating an instance for the lab test the result of the lab test needs to be used as input for the second visit This is indicated by the arc leading from the input condition of the lab fragment to the send report task and the arc leading from the send report task to the receive task of the second visit Based on the scenario discussed above we start our introduction of the Proclet framework More specifically a framework that is centered around the notion of Proclets There is a distinction between a Proclet class and a Proclet instance A Proclet class can best be seen as a process definition which describes which tasks need to be executed and in which order For a Proclet class instances can be created and destroyed One instance is called a Proclet instance For the definition of a Proclet class a choice can be made between multiple graphical languages Here we use a graphical language based on the YAWL language 11 however
267. fined between interaction nodes in the graph might be limited by the cardinality and multiplicity values of the involved input and output ports After a human actor is done with defining the interactions that need to take place it is checked whether the new interactions are in line with the cardinality and multiplicity values of the ports For that the interaction graph of the entity itself needs to be considered together with the interaction graphs of other entities If this is not consistent then the extended graph for the entity is rejected and the human actor has the option to define the interactions again 9 1 INTER WORKFLOW SUPPORT 273 Performatives Performatives are sent between Proclet instances For such a performative we have already indicated that it contains three different attributes However more attributes are relevant for an entity Therefore we present the attributes and their meaning below that are most relevant to a performative Note that these attributes are based on the ones that are presented in 6 7 e Time the moment the performative was created e Channel the medium used to exchange the performative e Sender the identifier of the Proclet instance creating the performative e Set of receivers the identifiers of the Proclet instances receiving the performative i e a list of recipients e Action the type of the performative e Content the actual information that is being exchanged Set of interaction i
268. form allows administrators to add mod ify and remove non human resources and their categories The form consists of two tabs Resources and Categories as can be seen in Figure 6 14 Oika w aO a Admin Queves Cases Users Calendar Services Client Apps Logout amp Resources Categories E Description Category Xerox on floor 1 near the fire office machines stairs Subcategory copiers g Notes Save New Name Reset Remove COP 1 Figure 6 14 Non Human Resource Management Resources tab 6 5 MANAGING NON HUMAN RESOURCES 165 e Resources A non human resource or asset is any organisational resource that isn t a person Exam ples may include vehicles meeting rooms tools raw materials computers and other office equipment and so on Zero or more non human resources may be allocated to a task at design time and or at runtime before the task is started as so called secondary resources The set of allocated non human re sources represents those additional organisational resources that are required to perform the work of the work item However unlike the primary resource they do not directly interact with the work list that the work item appears on For example in a hospital surgery setting the primary resource for a Schedule Surgery task may be a participant that belongs to the Schedulers role only a participant can be a primary reso
269. from the Elements menu or click the View Cancellation Set toolbar button amp The task will fill with a grey colour to indicate that this is the task that owns the cancellation set currently on view G2 Eon _ Create anew Purchase Book specification as shown in Figure 4 20 noting that the Get Book Details task has an AND split and the Pay task has an XOR join In this example we are going to purchase a book by placing an order with three different sellers As soon as the first seller fills the order we want to cancel the other two orders To achieve this we create a cancellation set for each Order task that includes the other two Order tasks We will step through creating a cancellation set for the Order from Amazon task the other two are created in a similar manner 4 6 CANCELLATION SETS 67 3 G2 4 G2 5 gt Purchase_Book Order from Amazon Order from Booktopia Get Book Details Order from Bookfinder Figure 4 20 The Purchase Book specification Select the Order from Amazon task and view its Cancellation Set using either method described above Next choose a task condition or flow and thus an implicit condition to add to the Cancellation Set Hold down the shift key to select more than one object for cancellation Select the Order from Booktopia and Order from Bookfinder tasks and the flow relation preced ing eac
270. ftware they describe can never be considered to be complete It is quite possible that you run into an issue for which the documentation is lacking or find a problem with the YAWL environment that constitutes a bug Alternately you may come up with a new idea on how to enhance the system Here we briefly address the questions of how and where to seek help For queries about the YAWL software we recommend that people use the help and discussion forums at the YAWL Foundation http www yawlfoundation org forum or alternately the YAWL User Group site http yaug org In posting a question request or comment please help us as much as possible in answering you by explicitly stating which versions of various software components you are using providing the specification that is causing a problem if applicable listing messages produced in the console window and or log files providing a backup of the database and so on Allow up to a few days for someone to respond to your request The YAWL Issues Tracker code google com p yawl1 can be used for reporting bugs or proposing en hancements As attachments can be easily provided this is the preferred method for reporting bugs or requesting enhancements Again please provide as much relevant information as possible Also before reporting an issue thoroughly search the list to ensure that the issue has not already been reported Any feedback regarding this manual is most welcome and may be sent to
271. g None ideRating Split Type None ReceiveSSN pieg Synch ID amp La v I et aie ReportFault Automated Custom Service Default Worklist Data Variables In 1 Ext Attributes None Lan Entrine N dafinad ay Notes ReportFault Validation Results 16 39 Error Task ReportFault has a variable without a data binding expression lt more gt Error The data binding expression for variable fault of Task ReportFault is missing lt more gt Select one or more net elements to manipulate Figure 5 10 An invalid specification with missing data parameter for an input variable Error 2 XQuery with Invalid Semantics Suppose that we use XQuery ReceiveSSN ssn but not ReceiveSSN ssn text in the output param eter definition for task ReceiveSSN This modified query is a valid XQuery but the mapping is incorrect in this case because it passes the entire XML element lt ssn gt some social security number lt ssn gt from 134 CHAPTER 5 HOW TO MANIPULATE DATA IN YAWL task variable ssn to net variable ssn rather than only its content as required The mapping has a valid syntax because the result of both expressions is a string and thus passes syntax validation in the YAWL Editor But at run time after the user submits his her social security number via task ReceiveSSN an bad process definition error page as shown in Figure 5 11 will appea
272. g aa te eG Gel wee dow Pade be ek 64 Administration 0 000002 ee eee eee 6 5 Managing Non Human Resources 200004 6 6 Resource Calendar Management 06 6 7 Work Queues asiasia 3 ary ee ee Ste ee ESS it le 6 8 User Profiles aeia aiae eles amp ee ce A t 6 9 Tean Oiewes vi od bee ate Co eel ena Ao eet akg a eed 6 10 YAWL Worklist iGoogle Gadget 2 0 0 0 000 The Monitor Service 7 1 Installation and Logging On 0 0 0 00 0000 7d AACHIVEG CASES ease a anaa Wade i Dawe Gost parte bd ee e s 7 3 Work Items 25 5 6 4 26 soe OS So oe eR Bw re OR A 7A Patatieters e dec 20 be ee e ee ee ee Pe eee a The Worklet Service 8 1 What is a Custom YAWL Service 2 0 0 0 0 eee 82 Installation gc ek eR Ok Seo ae we oR aia a 8 3 Using the Worklet Selection Service 2 0 0 2 20 0004 8 4 Using the Worklet Exception Service 000 8 5 Worklet Rule Sets and the Rules Editor 8 6 Walkthrough Using the Worklet Service 8 7 Defining New Functions for Rule Node Conditions 8 8 Sample Log generated by Walkthrough C The Proclet Service CONTENTS CONTENTS 9 1 Inter Workflow Support ss c e ecra ei a ee 10 Other Services 10 1 Document Store 10 2 Web Service Invoker Service 2 a a 10 3 SMS Service 10 4 Mail Service 10 5 Twitter Service 10 6 Digital Si
273. g interaction point Bi may be found in multiple interaction graphs In case not all performatives have been received for task instance B i e not all incoming arcs for the interaction nodes named Bi have the state sent then an exception occurs for the Proclet instance in which the task instance occurs in the figure for entity A there is one incoming arc having the state anproduced and for entity B there are two incoming arcs having the state unproduced Now two options are possible According to the time out value defined for the interaction point that belongs to task instance B a human actor may decide to reserve more time in which to receive missing performatives Another option is to force complete the task instance thereby ignoring the performatives that still need to be received In that case for all incoming interaction arcs for the interaction nodes named Bi which have state unproduced the state is changed to failed in Figure 9 18 for entity A there is now one incoming arc having state failed and for entity B there are two incoming arcs having state failed Additionally for all affected entities the exception graph may be extended An entity is affected by the exception if for one or more interaction arcs in the corresponding interaction graph the state had to be changed to failed Finally the extension of the interaction graphs may be
274. gain on the Preview toolbar button To commit a configuration you need to press the Apply Process Configuration button JE from the toolbar or from the Plugins menu Process Configuration gt Net gt Apply Process Configuration This operation generates an individualized YAWL model i e a regular YAWL model where e all blocked tasks and cancelation regions are removed e tasks attached to a hidden input port are replaced by a silent task bearing label _tau e the parameters of all configurable multiple instance tasks are restricted according to the configuration settings e all configurable tasks are turned into normal tasks 120 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR F New_Net_1 Approve Travel Form ae Admin f A Prepare Travel Form Employer Arrange Travel Insurance Travel Form for Approval Reject Prepare Travel Form Check and Travel Form Update Secretary Travel Form Request for change 7 Figure 4 67 The preview of a process model configuration Note that since a task can have multiple input ports e g in the case of an XOR join those input ports that are not hidden will not be replaced with a silent task For more information on how the configuration of hidden ports work please refer to the Process Configuration book chapter of the YAWL Book 17 Figure 4 68 shows the individualized YAWL model for the travel requisition examp
275. ges Offer v Enable System Offer Participants Roles Net Parameters Senior Credit Officer Filters Constraints Capability r C Choose completer s of task Org Structure C Do not choose completer s of task Allocate C Enable System Allocation Start C Enable System Start Cancel Apply OK Figure 3 7 Specifying Resourcing Requirements Resourcing requirements can become quite complex and the YAWL environment offers comprehensive support for the vast majority of workflow resource patterns but for the moment we will simply assign roles to the various tasks and apply the System User User interaction strategy 3 4 2 Modelling Data Requirements We now need to specify what data will be passed about during the execution of an instance of this specifi cation Specifically we need to describe what data participants will need in each work item and what data they must return to the Engine once the work item is complete We also need to have a way of moving data about in the running workflow including how we can use that data to automatically choose between flows in a running workflow 36 CHAPTER 3 GETTING STARTED WITH YAWL We stated before that task decompositions are used to define how a running workflow interacts with the external environment In fact all tasks of a YAWL specification that require interaction with the external environment
276. gh the completion of the task at the other end of the flow e OR join The task may have one or more incoming flows and will activate only after each and every incoming flow that can possibly be activated has activated Basically this means the completion of each and every task at the other end of a flow leading into the OR join that has started or may possibly start at some future time More on the OR join in later sections 56 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR For more detailed information on join and split types please consult the YAWL Book or the technical papers on the YAWL website To create a split or join 1 Select a task 2 In the Task section of the Properties Pane select the Split Type property and choose the required split type and or the Join Type property and choose the required join type from the property s dropdown list You can use the Split Position and Join Position properties to set the orientation of the decorator i e which edge of the task to attach the decorator to e TIP A decorator toolbar can be displayed via Plugins gt Toolbars Task Decorators from the main menu This toolbar has buttons to set the split and join type s and their position s for the se lected task as a convenient alternative to setting them via the Properties Pane gt My_Career Go to University Career Started Begin My Career Do Private Study Figure 4 9 Adding an XOR Split and Join In our exa
277. gnature Service oaoa aa a 10 7 Email Sender Service 11 Seeking Help 237 291 291 291 292 292 294 295 300 303 CONTENTS Document Control Arthur ter Hofstede version 1 9 September 2008 Consolidation of previous documents conversion to ATEX of some of them general cleaning and extensions e g new chapter on engine Arthur ter Hofstede version 1 99 October 2008 First version of chapter on resource perspective Michael Adams version 2 0 July 2009 Major rewrite and additional sections to align the manual with v2 0 Public release version for YAWL 2 0 Michael Adams version 2 0f September 2009 Updates for several minor Editor enhancements and addition of the Twitter Service amp iGoogle Gadget Michael Adams version 2 1b June 2010 Updates for version 2 1 Marcello La Rosa version 2 1c February 2011 Update for C YAWL Michael Adams version 2 2 August 2011 Revision of entire manual and additions for YAWL 2 2 Michael Adams version 2 3 April 2012 Updates for version 2 3 Michael Adams version 3 0 July 2014 Major rewrites and updates for version 3 0 Michael Adams version 3 0a September 2014 Updated installation chapter Feedback Any feedback regarding this manual is very much appreciated If you find there is a topic that is miss ing or may not have been clearly explained please send your feedback to yawlmanual gmail com All suggested improvements wi
278. h of them Click on the Add Selected Items to Visible Cancellation Set button on the toolbar or choose Elements Add to Cancellation Set from the menu Items will be given a red border to indicate they belong to the cancellation set of the grey filled task see Figure 4 21 Add the selected tasks and flow relations to the cancellation set Once you have established the cancellation set you can again choose View Cancellation Set from the Elements menu or click the View Cancellation Set toolbar button to toggle off the cancellation set view The selected elements will return to their original colours and a cancellation set task indicator will appear a red dot in the top right in the cancelling task to indicate that the task has a cancellation set defined Notes about Cancellation Sets We gave the Get Book Details task an AND split and the Pay task an XOR join because we know that when one of the Order tasks completes the other two will be cancelled so in every case only one incoming flow to the Pay task will activate Since we want the process to complete we must add the join type that will activate the task when a single incoming flow activates the XOR join If an AND join had been used here it would wait until all three incoming flows were activated which in this case is never going to happen and would result in a deadlock of the workflow instance However without the careful setting of canc
279. he lab 25 01 create node to the lab 25 01 send report node has been changed to executed source As an instance of the lab Proclet class has been 9 1 INTER WORKFLOW SUPPORT 245 Performative Sender lab Sue 25 01 Receivers visit Sue 10 02 Interaction identifiers Sue 3 current state performative is lab Sue 25 01 current state send report task is executed _visit Sue 10 02 visit Sue 25 01 AL A wr A initial recei decid _ broch gm z 1 1 E FZE TO C e E ans SE a The Proclet instances that need to be performed for Sue together with the desired interactions lab Sue 25 01 Sue 2 lab Sue 25 01 D create executed_both send report S D s SF 5 u Sg 2 cS z isi isit visit visit Sue 25 01 Sue 7 Sue 10 02 decide consumed visit Sue 10 02 create receive J b Updated interaction graph for Sue As a result of executing the send reports task the state of the incoming interaction arc of the MDM 05 02 register node is changed into executed both Moreover a performative is sent from the lab Proclet instance to the Proclet instance for the second visit Figure 9 6 The send report task of the lab Proclet instance is executed This results into a performative that i
280. he first visit So the interaction graphs shown in Figures 9 34b and 9 35 apply Moreover assume that now for Sue the second visit takes place As a result the initial preparations task is performed Next the result of the multidisciplinary meeting needs to be received at the receive task However as the multidisciplinary meeting has not been performed yet an exception is raised In Figure 9 37 the panel is presented which shows exceptions that occurred on workitem level and how they can be handled In the top panel via the drop down box workitems are shown for which the required interactions have not taken place in time As a follow up to that for a selected workitem the affected entities are shown in the middle panel Finally in the bottom panel it can be decided how the exception needs to be handled Either more time is granted for receiving missing performatives Grant More Time button or 9 1 INTER WORKFLOW SUPPORT 289 Event Log Case Data YAWL YAWL ProM 4E Workflow Ba Engine A B X j y M y Inter Workflow Service RI R W eee Resource Custom Worklet gt js Editor 6 Service Service Service Inter Worktiow extensions i Interaction Ad Work E Sel oa ist X ption tion Defin
281. he participants who are subordinate to them by Position For example in Figure 6 26 the participant listed holds the position CD clerk which reports to the position of the currently logged on participant Head of CD 6 9 TEAM QUEUES 175 TomHagen lt lt Roles Supply Admin Officer gt Positions Assistanthead of OD v Capabilities Masters inSCLM v V administrator Emergency Assess_affected_area_3 Change Password New ListBuilder J Create Book List Case Status Team 51 J Enabled O OrgGroup Created Age Jul 23 2009 13 27 13 0 00 06 53 Assigned To 1 Resource State Van Arsdale Billy y Offered Figure 6 26 The Team Queues Screen e A participant who has been granted the user privilege View All Work Items of Org Group may view a list of all the active work items that appear on the work queues of all the participants that are members of the same Org Group as the logged on participant All of the information displayed on this screen is read only A participant who has been granted both privileges may switch between views using the radio buttons to the right of the form if they have been granted one of the two privileges the other choice is disabled 176 CHAPTER 6 THE RUNTIME ENVIRONMENT 6 10 YAWL Worklist iGoogle Gadget A simplified version of the YAWL worklist is offered as an iGoogle Gadget so that users can see the workitems currently in
282. he process The section discusses the YAWL Data Perspective 4 7 THE DATA PERSPECTIVE 69 In general terms each net in a YAWL specification defines and controls a set of data variables that have values assigned to them during its life cycle Certain net variable values are passed to task level variables using a binding expression or parameter when the task instance begins with values passed backed from task level to net level using another binding expression when the task instance completes Net level variable values are also used at runtime to determine the choice of flow s to take from an XOR split or OR split through the evaluation of a Split Predicate associated with each flow All data is defined and stored as XML Schema That is all net level and task level variables store XML Schema data type values and all binding and split predicate expressions use a combination of XQuery and XPath expressions to evaluate the data A great deal of effort has gone into designing the Editor to make it as easy as possible to create the variables and expressions required for a specification In many cases you don t need to be exposed to the underlying XML at all but of course the Editor allows you to also get your hands dirty in XML whenever you need to 4 7 1 Creating Net Level Variables You can add variables to a net to store information relating to that net that tasks within the net may need to read or update To add a variable to a Net
283. heir work queues via a series of web forms Each worklist consists of four work queues Offered Allocated Started and Suspended Depending on a participant s privileges there are a num ber of actions that can be performed on a work item in each queue Some are concerned with processing the work item while others provide for changes to the work item s resourcing The layout of each work queue is similar see for example Figure 6 20 e On the left is a list of the work items currently held in that queue e Inthe centre are some fields that describe the currently selected work item The Age field which shows how long it is since the work item was first created changes to an Expires In field for timed work items i e how long the work item has before its timer expires e On the right are a set of buttons representing the actions that may or may not be taken depending on privileges on that queue for the currently selected work item 170 CHAPTER 6 THE RUNTIME ENVIRONMENT e At the bottom of each work queue is a Documentation field If documentation was assigned to the task at design time it will appear here at runtime Additionally the field is editable so that documentation may be added at runtime The following macros may be embedded in the documentation now insert the current date and time date insert the current date time insert the current time An administrator may add documentation for a work item
284. here on the data perspective we will choose to not specify any resourcing details for those tasks in doing so each of those tasks will be assigned the default settings the administrator will allocate the tasks to resources manually at run time Finally we save the Credit Rating Process to file which can be deployed uploaded in the engine and executed by launching a case Examples of Design time Run time Errors The above YAWL specification is both syntactically and semantically well formed and can be executed without any problem in the Engine Now we will introduce some errors into the above specification to see what we will encounter via design time or run time validation These errors are considered to be common when designing YAWL specifications especially as they become increasingly complex Error 1 Missing Data Assignment for Input Variable Suppose that we forget to specify the mapping from net variable fault to task variable fault in the input parameter definition for task ReportFault This results in two syntax errors after validating the specification in the Editor as shown in Figure 5 10 809 YAWL Editor 3 0 Edit File Net Elements Plugins Help BAB aega vz aa ees l Ea 0s Credit_Rating_ Process Palette DO 0 0 0 a Properties Location 311 0 138 0 a Resourcin
285. his an interaction graph needs to be created Step 1 At the moment the decide task is executed no interaction graph exists for Sue Therefore as part of the decide task we indicate that for the entity Sue an interaction graph needs to be created The result of this action can be seen in Figure 9 22c Here we see that there is an interaction node with name visit Sue 25 01 decide which refers to the decide task that is currently executing Moreover it is indicated that the node is active This means that for the node a Proclet instance currently exists which has the same instance identifier In this way for the node interactions may be nominated which will potentially occur in the future The interactions that may be nominated can be seen by looking at the Proclet classes and their interconnections in Figure 9 22b In particular if we look at the decide task in the visit Proclet class we see that it has three outgoing ports For these the following can be observed which are indicated by the dotted arcs between the Proclet classes and the interaction graph of Sue e An outgoing port is connected with an inbox interaction point which is then linked with the input condition of the lab Proclet class As a result for the lab Proclet class multiple instances may be created Note however that this may be constrained by the cardinalities and multiplicities of the associated ports e An o
286. icast to the visit Sue 10 02 Proclet instance and the visit Anne 12 02 Proclet instance Subsequently the interaction graphs for both are updated is due to the fact that the meaning of an internal interaction is that first the task which corresponds to the source interaction node is executed and then the task which belongs to the destination interaction node is executed In the interaction graphs of both Anne and Sue the MDM 05 02 send report node has exactly one outgoing arc Both arcs point to the receive task of the visit Proclet class So as can be seen in Figure 9 8 this means that both interaction arcs refer to the same port However the instance identifiers are different So for Sue there needs to be a performative which is sent to the visitSsue 10 02 receive Proclet instance with Sue 6 as interaction identifier and for Anne there needs to be a performative which is sent to the visit Anne 12 02 receive Proclet instance with Anne 6 as its interaction identifier However as the two potential performatives have the same sender and the receive task of the visit Proclet class as their destination only one performative will be 254 CHAPTER 9 THE PROCLET SERVICE visit Sue 25 01 visit Sue 10 02 gt mi Z de bro gt DA init recei decid _ br
287. icates for task ReceiveSSN Figure 5 9 shows the parameter definition for task ReportFault The variable fault is used to carry the fault information Bankruptcy It is defined as input only because the fault information is only used for client notification upon execution of the task Input Data Bindings for Task ReportFault Input To Task Variable fault X Generate Binding From Net Variable fault X Binding a Ml Credit_Rating_Process fault text p Cancel OK Figure 5 9 Input Parameter definition for task ReportFault Similarly task DecideRating has an input only variable rating defined to convey the credit rating 560 that is only used for client notification upon execution of the task 5starts with string string is an inbuilt XPath boolean function It returns true if the first argument string starts with the second argument string and otherwise returns false 5 5 ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES 133 Now we have completed the control flow and the data definition of the credit rating process The specifica tion will pass the syntax check in the YAWL editor and show the message No problems reported The last step before deployment is to specify the resource details for each of the manual tasks i e ReceiveSSN De cideRating and ReportFault Chapter 4 Section 4 8 illustrates how to allocate resources to a manual task Since we are concentrating
288. icationID_RuleType_WorkItemID xws For example 12_CasualtyTreatment_Selection_Treat xws xws for Xml Worklet Selection The identifiers in each part of the filename refer to the parent specification instance not the worklet case instance Also the WorkItemID identifier will not appear for case level rule types So to add a new rule after an inappropriate worklet choice the particular selected log file for the case that was the catalyst for the rule addition must be located and loaded into the Rules Editor From the Add Rule screen click the Open button to load the selection information from the relevant selected log file The File Open dialog that displays will open in the selected folder of the repository Select the appropriate file for the case in question then click OK Note that the selected file chosen must be for an instance of the specification that matches the specification rule set loaded on the main screen in other words you cant attempt to add a new rule to a rule set that has no relation to the xws file opened here If the specifications dont match an error message will display Figure 8 17 shows the Add Rule form with the selected file 12_CasualtyTreatment_Selection_Treat xws loaded The Cornerstone Case panel shows the case data that existed for the creation of the original rule that resulted in the selection The Current Case panel shows the case data for the current case that is the case that is the catalyst for the addi
289. ice back to the Rules Editor similar to Figure 8 22 If the No button is clicked then the new rule is simply added to the rule set Result of replace request Locating workitem 4 3 3_Treat in the set of currently handled workitems found Cancelling running worklet case with case id 5 for workitem done Launching new replacement worklet case based on revised ruleset done The worklet TreatHighHeartRate has been launched For workitem 4 3 3_Treat and has case id 6 Figure 8 22 Result of Replace Request Dialog Figure 8 23 shows the main Rules Editor screen with the new rule added in the correct place in the tree with the current case data becoming the Cornerstone Case for the new rule 8 5 7 Creating a New Rule Set and or Tree Set As mentioned previously it is not necessary to create tree sets for all of the rule types nor a rule tree for an item level rule type encompassing every task in a specification So most typically rule sets will have rules defined for a few rule types with some tasks left undefined remember that any events that don t have associated rules for that type of event are simply ignored It follows that there will be occasions where you will want to add a new tree set to a rule set for a previously undefined rule type or add a new tree for a previously undefined task to an existing tree set Also when a new specification has been created a corresponding base rule set will also need to be created
290. identifier visit Sue 25 01 the decide task is currently executed As a result the initial preparations and receive tasks are already executed which is indicated by the ticks As a result of executing the decide task for the first visit which necessitates interactions with existing and future Proclet instances an interaction graph is created for entity Sue The graph is shown in Figure 9 3b There are five interaction nodes and four interaction arcs Note that by using dotted arcs nodes of the interaction graph are linked with their corresponding interaction points in a Proclet instance Addition ally via dotted arcs arcs of the interaction graph are linked with their corresponding internal or external interactions The meaning of each arc for the entity Sue is as follows e visit Sue 25 01 decide lab T1 create from the decide task of the visit Proclet class with in stance identifier Sue 25 01 a performative is sent in order to create an instance of the lab Proclet class As the lab instance still needs to be created a temporary instance identifier is used for it i e T1 Note that the arc refers to an external interaction For presentation reasons input and output ports are not shown in an interaction graph Instead for an external interaction the respective interaction nodes are immediately connected via an arc e visit Sue 25 01 decide visit T2 create similar
291. ier Ti In that case the nomination of the interaction and the subsequent extension of the graph is done in a similar way to that for an existing Proclet instance e The third situation relates to an internal interaction That is for active node n3 that is under con sideration the following can be observed Note that n3 may relate to an existing or future Proclet instance Looking at the corresponding interaction point of node n3 in its Proclet class X it can be seen that via an internal interaction it is connected with task T of the same Proclet class As we are dealing with an internal interaction task T occurs in the same Proclet instance as that to which node n3 refers say temporary instance identifier i Consequently for node n3 an internal interaction with node X i T may be nominated for extension in the graph If selected an interaction arc is added leading from node n3 to the new node X i T Also the inserted arc has interaction state executed none and it has a unique interaction identifier Subsequently the graph is extended in the manner described above the procedure is repeated That is a new set of active nodes is identified and for each of them it is determined in which interactions the node can be involved in In this way a human actor can select new interactions or can indicate that he is finished Note that the interactions that are de
292. ier of the arc for which it is sent Sue 3 Furthermore it can be seen that the interaction state of the arc from the lab Sue 25 01 create node to the lab Sue 25 01 send report node has been changed to executed both Due to the execution of the send report task both the source and destination interaction node of this internal interaction have now been executed Consequently the interaction state is updated to executed both In the case where the arc did not have the state executed source i e the interaction point which is con nected to the input condition was not executed the send report task could not be executed This is due to the fact that the meaning of an internal interaction is that first the source interaction point is executed which is linked with either a task or an input condition and then the task which belongs to the destination 246 CHAPTER 9 THE PROCLET SERVICE lab Sue 25 01 EEE current state receive task is 1 1 On YL S A Za executed visit Sue 10 02 visit Sue 25 01 A e 1 1 l tl initi pna recel decid broch 5 we initi rec degi bro Aa we ve e P ures gt p Ea Wns R UE at ns N a The Proclet instances that need to be performed for Sue together with the desired interactions lab Sue 25 01 Sue 2 lab Sue 25 01 create execut
293. if you want to handle selections and exceptions for the new specification 8 5 WORKLET RULE SETS AND THE RULES EDITOR 207 op Worklet Rules Editor lt Browse gt Casualty_Treatment m O File Rule Options Help Q Ble Rule Type Selection Task Name Treat RDA Tree Cormerstone Case Rule 0 PatientID 98769067 Sex F oo ie 8 DiastolicBP 110 a ba Height 1 57 Rule 10 HeartRate 190 Rule 2 SystolicBP 165 Rule 3 false Rule 4 Rule 5 0 Rule 9 Rash true Wound false Name Gammy Ticker Selected Node Node ID fio Parent Node ID E Condition HeartRate gt 175 Conclusion 1 select TreatHighHeartR ate Description worklet is used to treat patients with very high heart rates Figure 8 23 Main Screen after Addition of New Rule For each of these situations the Rules Editor provides a New Rule form which allows the definition of new rule trees with any number of rule nodes for existing tree sets where there is a task of the specification that has not yet had a tree defined for it within the tree set the definition of new tree sets for specifications that have not yet had a tree set defined for a particular rule type and entirely new rule sets for specifications that have not yet had a rule set created for them The use of the New Rule form varies slightly depending on whether it is working with a new rule set or an existing rule set This section will describe the featu
294. igure 3 12 shows an example of the queries needed for the Determine Credit Requirements task A similar exercise can then be conducted for the variables of the remaining tasks The only thing remaining to do with data in our specification is to deal with the XOR Split in our model XOR splits need a boolean XPath expression to be associated with each outgoing flow of the split These 5These default mappings can be modified or replaced as required by advanced users 6Each XOR split and OR split has one flow specified as the default and is assumed to always have true value to ensure that the 38 CHAPTER 3 GETTING STARTED WITH YAWL O Data Variables for Decomposition Determine_Credit_Requirements Task Determine Net Variables Name Type Initial Value gt ApplicationID string gt ApplicationAmount double t Av Decomposition Variables Name Type Default Value gt ApplicationID string eH gt ApplicationAmount double t avuibkh Figure 3 10 Establishing Variables for a Task Decomposition f 0 0 NewTab x BYAWL 3 0 Edit Work Item x gt N localhost 8080 resourceService faces userWorkQueues jsp w Edit Work Item 1210 3 Cancel Save Complete Figure 3 11 A Determine Credit Requirements work item shown on a dynamic form expressions are evaluated once a task instance completes and so can only interrog
295. ing from an interaction point to a port then we are dealing with an output port whereas for an input port this is exactly the opposite Note that an internal interaction has not been defined for the visit Proclet class Internal interactions are visualized via a dotted arc that leads from the source to the destination interaction point Interaction points ports and internal interactions can be manipulated via the Interaction Points Ports and Internal Interactions panels respectively The associated panels for editing the details of an interac tion point a port and an internal interaction are shown in Figures 9 29b to 9 29d respectively In particular 280 CHAPTER 9 THE PROCLET SERVICE in Figure 9 29b it is defined that the receive interaction point is an inbox interaction point that no instance of the Proclet class needs to be created once it is triggered and that the timeout value is 12 000 milliseconds In Figure 9 29c it is defined that the lab_visitin port is an input port and attached to the receive inter action point Moreover it has cardinality 1 and multiplicity Finally in Figure 9 29d the source and destination interaction point of an internal interaction can be selected Once Proclet classes have been defined external interactions can be defined The corresponding GUI is shown in Figure 9 30 At the right side of the GUI external interactions can be specified or removed wher
296. ing our hands dirty with a real workflow example let s briefly agree on some basic terms Business Process A set of interdependent activities that need to be performed in response to a business event to achieve a business objective Typical examples of business processes are complaint han mow dling order to cash or credit card approval Workflow Application A software application that co ordinates the tasks data and resources that compose a business process in whole or part Sometimes the term workflow is used as a shorthand for workflow application Workflow Specification Also known as Workflow Model A description of a business process to the level of detail required for its deployment into a workflow engine A workflow specification defines which tasks should be performed under which conditions and in which order which data documents and resources are required in performing each task etc Workflow System A system that can be used to develop and to run a workflow application A workflow system usually includes a process editor to support the design of workflow models a workflow engine to support the execution of workflow models and at least one worklist handler Workflow Engine The runtime component of a workflow system responsible for determining which tasks need to be performed and when for maintaining execution logs and for delegating the performance of tasks to software applications se
297. interaction graph Gp Se for Sue produced Aisit 64 decid visit 40 receive by our system a visit 40 createCondition at a resultant graph for Sue YAWL 2 0 Admin Worklist Mozilla Firefox File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help e E x A TB http flocalhost 8080 resourceService faces adminQueues isp x D WA YawL 2 0 Admin Worklist i ie a a work queues Edit Profile team queues Cases l Users Org Data Services l Logout D z Unoffered 3 Worklisted 0 O amp Work Items Specification Task Offer al visit 66 initial_p initial preparations 64 brachures_7 Allocate Case Status 66 Enabled Start Conai Age I Directly to me 0 00 01 05 Done Aka new workitems b workitem that is created as a result of the graph that has been defined Figure 9 34 Final graph for Sue Moreover as a result of the graph the workitems that need to be performed are shown 9 1 INTER WORKFLOW SUPPORT 285 lected node the possible interactions are presented via three different panels In the Instantiate Proclet Instance panel the interactions are shown which lead to the instantiation of a Proclet class For each of them it can be indicated how many instances need to be instantiated In the Existing or Temporary Pro clet Instance panel interactions with existing or future Proclet instances can be selected b
298. ion Handling Service for YAWL comprises two distinct but complementary services a Selection Service which enables dynamic flexibility for YAWL process instances and an Exception Handling Service which provides facilities to handle both expected and unexpected pro 183 184 CHAPTER 8 THE WORKLET SERVICE cess exceptions i e events and occurrences that may happen during the life of a process instance that are not explicitly modelled within the process at runtime A brief introduction to each Service follows 8 1 2 The Selection Service The Worklet Dynamic Process Selection Service or Selection Service enables flexibility by providing a pro cess designer with the ability to substitute a workitem in a YAWL process at runtime with a dynamically selected worklet a discrete YAWL process that acts as a sub net for the workitem and so handles one specific task in a larger composite process activity The worklet is dynamically selected and invoked and may be created at any time unlike a static sub process that must be defined at the same time as and remains a Static part of the main process model An extensible repertoire or catalogue of worklets is maintained by the Service Each time the Service is invoked for a workitem a choice is made from the repertoire based on the contextual data values within the workitem using an extensible set of rules to determine the most appropriate substitution The workitem is checked out of the
299. ion types occur for every process instance executed by the YAWL Engine by various means The Exception Service maintains a set of rules described in detail in Section 8 5 2 that are used to determine which exception handling process if any to invoke If there are no rules defined for a certain exception type for a specification the exception event is simply ignored by the service Thus you only need to define rules for those exception events that you actually want to handle for a particular specification 8 4 USING THE WORKLET EXCEPTION SERVICE 193 Constraint Types Constraints are rules which are applied to a workitem or case immediately before or after execution of that workitem or case begins Thus there are four types of constraint exception e CasePreConstraint case level pre constraint rules are checked when each case i e instance begins execution e ItemPreConstraint item level pre constraint rules are checked when each workitem in a case be comes enabled i e ready to be checked out e ItemPostConstraint item level post constraint rules are checked when each workitem moves to a completed status and e CasePostConstraint case level post constraint rules are checked when a case completes The Exception Service receives notification from the YAWL Engine when each of these events occur then checks the rule set for the case to determine firstly if there are any rules of that type defined for the case and if so i
300. ions see below Search for text 82 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR e090 Update Data Type Definitions D ee il w 6 fe 1 lt xs schema xmins xs http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema gt lt xs complexType name Geek gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs element name Name type xs string gt lt xs element name Salary type xs double gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs complexType name Book gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs element name Title type xs string gt lt xs element name Author type xs string gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs complexType name Booklist gt lt xs sequence maxOccurs 5 gt lt xs element name Book type Boof gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs schema gt Error 19 45 src resolve Cannot resolve the name Boo to a n type definition component Cancel Figure 4 32 Example of an invalid data type definition sO 3 C ih o amp o E Figure 4 33 The data type definition dialog toolbar The example in Figure 4 31 creates a complex data type called Geek that has two separate sub components Name and Salary of type string and double respectively Types called Book and Booklist are cre ated in the same way As depicted in Figure 4 34 the new data type Geek is available to choose from the list o
301. irectly following the pre case event the Engine notifies the Service of a PreltemConstraint for the first workitem in the case in this case Book Stadium The pre item constraint event occurs immediately the workitem becomes enabled i e ready to be checked out or executed Like pre case constraint rules pre item rules can be used to ensure workitems have valid data before they are executed The entire set of case data is made available to the Exception Service thus the values of any case variables may be queried in the ripple down rules for any exception type rule While there are pre item constraint rule trees defined in the rule set there are none for the Book Stadium task so this event is also ignored by the service The Book Stadium workitem may be started in the normal fashion This workitem captures the seating capacity cost and location of the proposed rock concert These may be changed to any valid values but for the purposes of this example just accept the default values as given Figure 8 43 Edit Work Item 8 1 Cancel Save Complete Figure 8 43 The Book Stadium Workitem detail When the workitem is submitted a PostItemConstraint event is generated for it by the Engine There are no post item constraint rules for this workitem so again the event is just ignored Then a pre item constraint notification is received for the next workitem Sell Tickets This workitem records the number of tickets sold and the price of e
302. is is because each task variable is local to the task that the variable belongs to i e it is not accessible by other tasks Assume task A and task B in net N To pass data from task A e g variable V to task B e g variable V an appropriate net variable of N e g Vn must be available to convey data from V to Vp In the YAWL editor each task can be assigned an input parameter and or an output parameter depending on the specified Scope type which define internal data transfer associated with that task Input Parameters use an XQuery to extract the required information from a net variable and pass such information to the corresponding task variable while output parameters define data passing in the opposite direction With reference to the process depicted in Figure 5 1 Figure 5 3 shows an example of passing the customer information from the net level to the task level task Decide lt PerformBooking gt lt custName gt M Twein lt custN ame gt lt departure gt 2005 12 07 lt departure gt Custlnfo lt Custinfo gt WantFlight lt CustName gt M Twain lt CustName gt l lt TargetStartDate gt 2005 12 07 lt T arge lt Custinto gt lt wantC ar gt lt wantF light gt lt wantHotel gt lt Decide gt lt requireC ar gt lt requireF light gt lt totalPrice gt lt Decide gt lt P erformBooking gt WantHotel Decide Figure 5 3 An ex
303. is made will be explained a little later Get a Job will become available after the completion of the task selected via the XOR split 4 4 4 Composite Tasks Composite tasks are placeholders for sub nets That is you can create another workflow in a separate net which is represented in the first or parent net by the composite task When a composite task is activated in the parent net control branches to the sub net when the sub net completes control passes back to the parent net via the completion of the composite task To create a Composite Task 1 Click on the Composite Task button E in the Palette or right click on an empty part of the canvas and choose Composite Task We are going to replace our existing Go to University Atomic Task with a Composite Task Click on the Go to University Atomic Task and click the trash bin on the toolbar or press the Delete key on the keyboard to remove it from the net when you delete a task any flows connected to it are also removed We will add in the new composite task next 2 Place your Composite Task in your Net Tip use the arrow keys on your keyboard to move adjust the task to the desired location Reconnect the flows from Begin My Career to the new Composite Task and from new Composite Task to Get a Job 3 Create a new sub net for the composite task by selecting the task then go to the Name property in the Decomposition section
304. isfied Pregnant Tue TreatLabour 5 TreatRash HeatRate gt 190 TreatHighHeartR ate Figure 8 12 Example Rule Tree Casualty Treatment spec Effectively each rule node on the true branch of its parent node is an exception rule to the more general one of its parent that is a refinement of the parent rule while each rule node on the false branch of its parent node is an else rule to its parent or an alternate to the parent rule For example see the selection rule tree for the Casualty Treatment specification Figure 8 12 The condition part is the rule that is evaluated and the conclusion is the name of the worklet selected by that rule if the condition evaluates to true For example if the condition fever true evaluates to true then the TreatFever worklet is selected via node 1 if it is false then the next false node is tested node 2 If node 2 is also false then node 3 is tested If node 3 evaluates to true then the TreatAbPain worklet is selected except if the condition in its next true node node 7 also evaluates to true in which case the TreatLabour worklet is selected 198 CHAPTER 8 THE WORKLET SERVICE One worklet rule set file is associated with each specification and may contain up to eleven sets of rule trees or tree sets one for selection rules and one for each of the ten exception types Three of the eleven relate to case level exceptions i e CasePreC
305. isplays the New Rule form to allow the addition of new tree sets to the opened rule set file for rule types that have not 8 5 WORKLET RULE SETS AND THE RULES EDITOR 201 Open Rules Add New Config File Rule Node Form Figure 8 16 Toolbar yet been defined for that specification See the Creating a New Rule Set and or Tree Set section below for more details Open Rules File Opens an existing rules file for browsing and or editing The title bar shows the name of the specification associated with the currently loaded rule set Close Rules File Closes the currently opened rules file Only one rules file may be open at any one time Add New Rule Node Displays the Add Rule form to allow the addition of a new rule node to an existing tree to refine a worklet selection See the section below on the Adding a New Rule for more details Tree Viewer Displays the Tree Viewer form which provides the ability to view large trees in full screen mode Config Form Displays the configuration form discussed above About Box Displays some information about the rules editor version number date and so on Other Features Current Rule Type This drop down list displays each rule type that has a tree set defined in the opened rules file Selecting a rule type from the list displays in the Tree View an associated rules tree from the tree set Works in conjunction with the Task Name drop down list Current Task Name This drop down list displ
306. it Requirements Variables requires Large Credit Approval to be run The XPath expressions needed to capture this choice are shown in Figure 3 13 Once this is specified we are done We have a workflow specification that ensures the right work and data gets routed to the right participants at the right time 0 0 YAWL Editor 3 0 File Edit Net Elements Plugins Help BHOARB w eseaeavr GA OGF Sttibacd MH BeA Palette Net 0a Oa a Properties Split Conditions for Task Choose_Approval_Process Condition _ number Net ApplicationAmo EnO Rpp Custom Form Documentation Fill Colour E R 252 G Font Verdana 14 Small_Credit_Approval true Icon Join Position West Join Type AND Label Choose Appr Location 428 0 203 0 Resourcing None Split Position East Split Predicates 2 flows Split Type XOR Synch ID amp La V number Net ApplicationAmount text gt 5 000 Timer None E Decompo Name None Obtain Split Predicates Credit Report Specify expressions for each outaoina flow to prioritise av Select a number of net elements to manipulate Figure 3 13 XPath predicates to choose between flows of an XOR Split task 40 CHAPTER 3 GETTING STARTED WITH YAWL 3 5 Where To From Here You ve now seen how we can construct a simple workf
307. it has the identifier Anne 26 01 and the instance for the second visit has the temporary identifier T2 As a result of executing the de cide task for Sue which necessitates interactions with existing and future Proclet instances an entity is created called Sue for which subsequently an interaction graph is created For Anne exactly the same is done during the execution of the decide task but now an entity called Anne is created and a separate interaction graph For both entities the corresponding interaction graphs are shown in Figure 9 9 These interaction graphs are very similar to the first scenario However instead of a lab test now for both patients an interaction with the register task of the MDM 05 02 Proclet instance is required This is followed by the execution of the send reports task after which a performative is sent to the receive task of the second visit for both Sue and Anne Note that as no performatives have yet been sent each arc in 248 CHAPTER 9 THE PROCLET SERVICE visit Sue 25 01 visit T1 x Po ea Ss a ee initi a initial recei decid _ broch 4a gt gt r bm 1 194 gt prepar p gt H j aad p ah A 2 EZ ations ve e ures SA l l A S current state for both Sue and ake Peg or ince De a
308. ition HC Interaction Bye Editor Service i Event Log Process Org Model Event Log gt lt Repository T Worklet Repository Interfaces A Administration B Processes E Logging O Org Data R Resourcing W Work Queue X Exception Figure 9 38 Architecture outlining which components of the YAWL WfMS have been used for the Workflow Engine of our system for the affected entities the interaction graphs may be extended Handle Exception button For example for the workitem exception of the receive task of the second visit for Sue we see that indeed only Sue is affected and not Anne In case it is decided to extend their interaction graphs this would proceed in a similar way as for the exception at case level Therefore it is not shown here Architecture In Figure 9 38c it is shown how the Inter Workflow Service is connected to the YAWL WfMS As can be seen in the figure the service consists of a Interaction Service and an Interaction Definition Editor The Interaction Service component is responsible for storing and taking care of the interactions that take place between Proclet instances More specifically for tasks for which interactions are necessary a corresponding interaction point is defined at the service side which means that the execution of these tasks is deployed to the Inter Workflow Service In this way for such a task instance the service identifies which i
309. k has no split decorator and so will have exactly one outgoing flow e AND split The task may have one or more outgoing flows When the task completes it will activate each and every outgoing flow e XOR split The task may have one or more outgoing flows each with an associated boolean condition When the task completes it will activate exactly one outgoing flow the first that has its condition evaluate to true or the designated default flow if none of the other flow conditions evaluate to true e OR split The task may have one or more outgoing flows each with an associated boolean condition When the task completes it will activate each outgoing flow that has its condition evaluate to true or the designated default flow if none of the other flow conditions evaluate to true By adding a join to a task you are specifying at what point the task will become available for execution through the completion of one or more preceding tasks flowing into it depending on the type of join Here are the choices for a task s join decorator e No join The task has no join decorator and so will have exactly one incoming flow e AND join The task may have one or more incoming flows and will activate only after each and every incoming flow is activated through the completion of the task at the other end of each flow e XOR join The task may have one or more incoming flows and will activate as soon as one incoming flow is activated throu
310. later Section 9 1 3 e A Proclet class has ports Performatives are sent and received via these ports in order for a Proclet instance to be able to interact with other Proclet instances A port is either an incoming or an outgoing port Each outgoing port is connected with exactly one incoming port We call such a connection an external interaction Furthermore every port is connected to one interaction point An interaction point represents a specific point in the Proclet class at which interactions with other Proclet classes may take place i e via the associated ports performatives may be sent and received An interaction point may be linked to an input condition and a task e Moreover a port has two attributes First the cardinality specifies the number of recipients of performatives exchanged via the port An denotes an arbitrary number of recipients at least one recipient 1 precisely one recipient and denotes no or just one recipient Note that by definition an input port has cardinality 1 Second the multiplicity specifies the number of performatives exchanged via the port during the life time of an instance of the class In a similar fashion to the cardinality an x denotes that an arbitrary number of performatives are exchanged at least one 1 precisely one and denotes that either one or no performatives are exchanged e For an interaction point having only incoming ports it may be desirable that the receipt of an in
311. le Task Request for change and its connecting flows have been removed whereas task Check and Update Travel Form has been replaced by a silent task labelled _tau If you inspect this task you will see that it is no longer associated with a decomposition Let s undo the commitment of this configuration to revert its effects This can be done simply by pressing again the toggle button Apply Process Configuration on the toolbar While hiding a port is a safe operation blocking a port may lead to behavioural anomalies such as deadlocks If we now blocked the input port of the task Check and Update Travel Form we could cause a deadlock in condition P3 because if task Prepare Travel Form Secretary fired a token would remain stuck in that condition So it would be wise to also block the input port of task Prepare Travel Form Secretary so that P3 could never get control The YAWL Editor provides a Configuration Correctness Checker which can be used to prevent possible behavioral issues already during configuration by excluding those combinations of blocked ports that will lead to an unsound individualized YAWL model In this way you don t need to individualize a process model to find out only later that the configuration you used led to an unsound model The Configuration Correctness Checker needs an external tool namely Wendy 18 which must be located at the path specified in the Process Configuration
312. led Figure 9 19 Illustration of an exception that may occur if a certain Proclet instance is canceled For a task instance which relates to an outbox interaction point the required performative has not been sent 264 CHAPTER 9 THE PROCLET SERVICE lab Sue 25 01 for the receive task the performative from the send report task has not been consumed yet ie blood archi report ve gt i test visit Proclet instance is canceled visit Sue 10 02 a visit Sue 25 01 A A a gt nit A Fop gt oe recei decid broch e initi f Ti ans a The Proclet instances that need to be performed for Sue together with the desired interactions lab Sue 25 01 create Sue 2 executed source send report S s o Zo performative has not EE z z De SL 8 2 visit visit Sue 25 01 Sue 7 T 10 02 _ visit decide consumed create Sue 10 02 J receive b Interaction graph for Sue in which the performative from the lab instance has not been produced yet lab Sue 25 01 create Sue 2 executed_ source Ss arc has changed to Lg the state failed S O visit Sue 25 01 Sue 7 decide consumed visit Sue 10 02 create lab Sue 25 01 gt lab Sue 25 01 Sue 2 lab Sue
313. led for specific architectures The current version of the Editor needs version 0 4 of the utility 4 11 1 Verification Analysis Explained This section provides a brief overview of verification analysis in YAWL Verification is concerned with the design time detection of certain undesirable characteristics in process models Extensive research has been conducted in the area of workflow verification One of the pioneers of this work is Wil van der Aalst He formally defined the notion of soundness as a correctness notion for workflow nets This class of Petri nets which does not support OR splits joins Multiple Instance Tasks and cancellation regions forms a predecessor of YAWL Informally speaking a workflow is sound iff 9 e The net has the option to complete That means that from every reachable state the final state where there is a single token in the output condition can be reached e The net has proper completion This means that when the output condition is marked i e has a token there are no other tokens anywhere else in the net e The net has no dead tasks These are tasks that cannot be executed in any scenario 3WofYAWL is currently only available for Windows environments 100 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR v Use the reset net analysis algorithm lt Use YAWL reduction rules before analysis for optimisation lt v Use Reset reduction rules before analysis for optimisation C Check for weak soundness
314. let file called MyCodelet class and it has a package com example yawl codelets since its a codelet it must end in codelets then its full file path is expected to be C yawlplugins com example yawl codelets MyCodelet class If there are no external plug ins then this parameter can be commented out or the param value can be left blank EnableVisualizer When set to true an extra button will appear on user work queues to show work items via the Visualizer applet assumes the visualizer is available The default setting is false VisualizerViewSize When the Visualizer applet is enabled this parameter configures the size of the Visualizer applet s view window The value must be two comma separated positive integers width height If no value is given or the value is invalid a default of 800 600 will be used When the visualizer is disabled this parameter is ignored InterfaceX_BackEnd This parameter is commented out by default When the commenting is re moved the extensions to the work queues required for the Worklet Service are enabled When en abled the value of this parameter must equal the valid URI of the Worklet Service 6 3 LOGGING ON 151 e InterfaceS_BackEnd This parameter is commented out by default When the commenting is removed scheduling event announcements to a scheduling service listening on Interface S are enabled When enabled the value of this parameter must equal the valid URI of a running S
315. let service is installed If that is not the case download a copy of the proclet service from the YAWL download pages unzip it and copy all of the jar files from its tomcat webapps procletService WEB INF 1ib directory to a directory on the local classpath Figure 9 29a shows the GUI of the Interaction Definition Editor that allows for the definition of interaction points ports and internal interactions for an existing process definition More specifically at the right side of the GUI these details are defined whereas at the left side they are visualized In order to illustrate the definition of these details Figure 9 29a shows the interaction points ports and internal interactions that are defined for the visit Proclet class this is defined in the Name Model field at the top right Note that at the top of Figure 9 29a the visit Proclet class is shown Via dotted arcs interaction points and ports are linked with the associated interaction points and ports that are shown in the GUI At the left side interaction points are visualized by a black dot together with the type of the interaction point and its identifier As a special case of this an exception interaction point is visualized as a grey dot Ports are visualized by a white dot together with its identifier and the associated cardinality and multiplicity Moreover via an arc it is indicated to which interaction point a port belongs to If an arc is lead
316. lets chosen will be launched concurrently and the process will continue only after all the worklets launched have completed When the new worklet is saved and the YAWL Editor is closed the name of the newly created worklet will be displayed and selected in the worklet drop down list Click the OK button to confirm the selection and close the dialog Figure 8 20 shows the New Rule Node panel after the definition of the example new rule has been completed A value in the Description field is optional but recommended Once all the fields for the new rule are complete and valid click the Save button to add the new rule to the 8 5 WORKLET RULE SETS AND THE RULES EDITOR rule tree on Choose Worklet Worklet BobFive BobF our BobOne BobThree BobT wo BobZero CancelOrder CancelShow CancelT est Casualty Treatment Casualty Treatment v1 ChangeT oLargervenue ChangeT oMidVenue ChangeT oS mallenue MultiT est OrganiseConcert New Gt Cancel Figure 8 19 The Choose Worklet dialog New Rule Node Node ID fio Parent Node ID E Condition HeartRate gt 175 Conclusion 7 select TreatHighHeartRate Description worklet is used to treat patients with very high heart rates Figure 8 20 The New Rule Node Panel after a New Rule has been Defined 8 5 6 Dynamic Replacement of an Executing Worklet 205 Remember that the creation of this new rule was triggered by the selection and execution of a worklet th
317. ll appear identically to the Selection conclusion process allowing the selection of an existing worklet or the definition of a new worklet to run as a compensatory process Select the appropriate worklet to add it to the compensatory primitive Note that a sequence will be considered invalid if it contains a Compensate primitive for which a worklet has not yet been defined The primitives SuspendAllCases RemoveAllCases and ContinueAllCases may be limited to ancestor cases only by right clicking on primitives of those kinds and selecting Ancestor Cases Only from the popup menu Ancestor hierarchies occur where a worklet is invoked for a case which in turn invokes a worklet and so on When a primitive is limited to ancestor cases it applies the primitives action to all cases in the hierarchy from the current case back to the original parent case rather than all running cases of the specification IMPORTANT No validation is done for the defined sequence besides that described above It is up to the designer of the sequence to ensure it makes sense for example that it doesnt try to continue a case it has previously removed When a valid sequence is saved you will be returned to the previous form i e either the Add Rule or New Rule form depending on where you are in the Editor The conclusion will be displayed textually as a sequential list of tasks Figure 8 28 for example Conclusion 1 suspend workitern 2 run worklet SendReminder
318. ll be considered for incorporation into future versions of the manual Sources The first version of this document 1 9 combined the following documents 7 CONTENTS A New Features document produced by Lachlan Aldred A Getting Started with YAWL document by Lindsay Bradford and Marlon Dumas This formed the basis for Chapter 3 A Editor 2 0 User Manual document of which first versions were produced by Sean Kneipp and subsequent versions by Lindsay Bradford Jessica Prestedge Marcello La Rosa and Michael Adams This document was the original Chapter 4 which has since been heavily revised and rewritten A Data Manipulation in YAWL document by Chun Ouyang with some of the figures on the use of XML technology in YAWL taken from a presentation by Lachlan Aldred This forms the basis for Chapter 5 A YAWL Engine User Manual Beta 8 release document created by Sean Kneipp with subsequent additions updates by Guy Redding Lachlan Aldred and Michael Adams This document provided inspiration for Chapter 6 A The Worklet Custom Service for YAWL Installation and User Manual document created and later revised by Michael Adams Lachlan Aldred merged the installation manual This document became the original Chapter 8 An Installation Manual Engine Beta 8 2 Editor 1 5 first created by Sean Kneipp and with sub sequent changes corrections extensions by Guy Redding Lachlan Aldred Peti
319. llows e At the decomposition level Background Colour white FFFFFF 116 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR _ gt _ gt Question Answer Figure 4 62 The EternalQuestion specification 000 MALADERA Aesi haj Gl o Ph http localhost 8080 resourceService faces userWorkQueues jsp e Help us improve YAWL Edit Work Item 1136 2 Cancel Save Complete Figure 4 63 The default dynamic form for the Answer task Page Background Image http localhost 8080 images guide2 jpeg Hide Banner true Title a space to suppress the title display Label a space to suppress the task name label display e At the variable level the answer variable Font Capitals 20 plain dark green 009900 Image Above http localhost 8080 images guide jpeg Image Above Align center Hide true to suppress display of the text field Text Below The answer to the meaning of life the universe and everything is Answer answer text The effects of setting the attribute values listed can be seen in Figure 4 64 Remember that nothing has changed in the specification except for the setting of the extended attributes listed Notice that we have hidden the display of the field itself because we have embedded the variable s value in the text below attribute via an XPath expression This is a quite powerful construct allowing usages like e Total charge number Order su
320. lly for both the interaction graph that is created during the execution of the decide task is shown Figure b 9 1 INTER WORKFLOW SUPPORT 249 the interaction graph has either the interaction state unproduced or executed none It is important to mention that as both patients are discussed during the multidisciplinary meeting similar interaction nodes and similar interaction arcs for the MDM 05 02 Proclet instance appear in the graphs of both Sue and Anne Below for both patients tasks will be executed for different Proclet instances In this way the impact of having the same interaction node in multiple graphs can be illustrated Step 1 In Figure 9 10 the result of executing the decide task for both Sue and Anne is shown Performatives are sent in order to create for both of them an instance of the visit Proclet class Additionally performatives are sent in order to register both of them for the multidisciplinary meeting Note that as for Sue and Anne their decide task is executed in different Proclet instances the sending of performatives and updating the interaction graph for them occurs completely independently from each other Subsequently both interaction graphs are updated as expected So all the outgoing arcs of an interaction node that refer to a decide task that has been executed have received the sent state Step 2 The next step is
321. lly used to copy the content of a net variable to a task variable and back again but they 102 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR may also contain an XQuery expression that uses static values or the values of other variables to copy data between net variables and task variables 4 12 1 Codelets Essentially a codelet is a discrete Java class managed by the Resource Service that may be enacted by an automated task at runtime When an automated task is enabled during process execution and it has a codelet associated with it the input parameters of the task are passed to the codelet it is executed and any results are passed back to the task via its output parameters There are currently six codelets available by default in the Editor additional codelets can be added using a pluggable interface see the YAWL Technical Manual for directions on how to add user defined codelets e ExampleCodelet a simple example designed to demonstrate the usage of codelets e XQueryEvaluator accepts an XQuery as an input parameter evaluates it using other input parame ters as required by the XQuery and produces the result to an output parameter e RandomWait accepts a time unit parameter H M or S and a maximum value type long and waits for a random amount of time units between zero and the maximum value e ShellExecution accepts an input parameter containing a command line of an external program and runs it waiting for it to c
322. lock the cancellation region assigned to a task this means that the task s region will be removed altogether and restrict the parameters of a multiple instance task Specifically you can reduce the maximum number of allowed instances increase the minimal number of allowed instances and the continuation threshold and change the dynamic creation of instances to static The configuration of input ports output ports cancellation regions and multiple instance parameters can be accessed from the Plugins and then selecting Process Configuration gt Task gt Input Ports Output Ports etc or via the corresponding toolbar buttons Figure 4 66 shows the dialog window for the output ports configuration of task Submit Travel Form for Approval You can select a single port or multiple ports by using the Shift or Ctrl keys and then press the Hide or Block button to configure the selected ports or Activate to rollback a configuration It is also possible to set default configuration values for each port by pressing the button Set Defaults Once default configuration values have been assigned to a port the button Use Default will become available when selecting that port and you can configure that port by using its default value All configuration settings including default values are stored in the YAWL specification upon saving so this information will be preserved after closing the model BE Output Ports Configuration Co
323. low specification for YAWL We ve used atomic tasks with various types of splits and joins along with resourcing and data requirements to implement a simple credit application processing workflow specification But we have so far only scratched the surface of what can be achieved with YAWL What you haven t seen yet is how larger workflows can be constructed by binding a number of nets together with composite tasks We are also capable of iterating through a number of instances of a single task using Multiple Instance Task constructs A single task can also be used to trigger the cancellation of current work in other parts of the workflow which might be used for modelling a customer calling and cancelling an order that is currently being processed Finally we haven t described conditions which represent the state a workflow is in after one task is finished but before another starts Conditions allow us to model two or more participants competing for the same work or a user making a decision on things that workflow systems cannot not automatically determine An example of this would be asking a participant to decide on whether the aesthetics of some partially assembled work are appealing or not and having the workflow coordinate further work based on that choice What we ve also glossed over here is how to actually use YAWL s toolset We have used version 3 0 of the Editor and of the Engine for the screenshots in this chapter The components of
324. lows you to set the maximum number of seconds the engine will spend trying to deliver the event to each registered service before giving up The specified value should cover the period between the moment the Engine has fully initialised and the moment the server hosting a custom service is ready to accept HTTP connections The value can be any positive integer and defaults to 5 seconds if the value is missing or invalid InterfaceXListener The fully qualified URI of a custom service that wishes to receive event notifica tions on Interface X the exception handling interface Multiple URIs can be specified separated by semi colons Note that services can also register themselves as Interface X Listeners programmati cally See the Technical Manual for more details 6 2 RESOURCE SERVICE CONFIGURATION 149 e ObserverGateway The fully qualified class name of an ObserverGateway implementation Multiple implementations may be specified separated with semi colons See the Technical Manual for more information about Observer Gateways 6 2 Resource Service Configuration The Resource Service has a number of configuration parameters that may be set in the service s web xml file which is located in the folder webapps resourceService WEB INF Below is the list of available parameters that are specific to the Resource Service what they are used for and what values may be assigned to them e EnablePersistence When set to true defau
325. lseChild gt 2 lt falseChild gt lt condition gt Fever true lt condition gt lt conclusion gt lt _1 gt lt action gt select lt action gt lt target gt TreatFever lt target gt lt _1 gt lt concelusion gt lt cornerstone gt Figure 8 11 Excerpt of Rule Set file Casualty_Treatment xrs A rule set for a specification consists of a collection of rule trees Each rule tree represents a set of modified Ripple Down Rules RDR which maintains a rule node hierarchy in a binary tree structure When a rule tree is queried it is traversed from the root node of the tree along the branches each node having its condition evaluated along the way If a node s condition evaluates to True and it has a true child then that child nodes condition is also evaluated If a nodes condition evaluates to False and there is a false child then that child nodes condition is evaluated When a terminal node is reached i e a node without any child nodes if its condition evaluates to True then that conclusion is returned as the result of the tree traversal if it evaluates to False then the last node in the traversal that evaluated to True is returned as the result The root node Rule 0 of the tree is always a default node with a default True condition and conclusion and so can only 8 5 WORKLET RULE SETS AND THE RULES EDITOR 197 have a true branch 2 3 Abdominal Pan Tue Condition not satisfied Condition sat
326. lt allows the service to persist backup current work queue data to a database so that in the event of the Engine being restarted the work in progress can be restored There is rarely any need to disable persistence and in any case this setting should match the EnablePersistence settings of the Engine and the Worklet Service e OrgDataSource While the Resource Service offers an internal organisational database by default it also supports organisational data being used that is stored in existing external data sources This is especially beneficial for sites that want to use org data already stored in HR Systems and so on External data sources may be mapped to YAWL by implementing a java class to take care of the necessary mappings see the technical manual for details This parameter allows for the specification of that mapping class name The default setting is Hibernatelmpl the internal Resource Service mapping class e ExternalUserAuthentication When an external organisational data source is configured for use by the Resource Service a choice can be made regarding the logon authentication of users which spec ifies whether the Resource Service will take responsibility or if authentication will be handled by the mapping class configured above When this parameter is set to false the default user passwords are encrypted and stored within each user record and authentication is handled within the Resource Service
327. lty Treatment case is still running and that the TreatFever specification has been loaded and it also has a case running Figure 8 33 8 6 WALKTHROUGH USING THE WORKLET SERVICE 215 Edit Work Item 1 2 Figure 8 31 Editing the Triage Workitem detail Specification Task Accept Offer TreatFever Test Fever Case Status E Created Age Jul 02 2009 13 04 10 0 00 00 04 Figure 8 32 New Case Launched by the Worklet Service F oe Go back to the Work Queues page and start the Test Fever workitem The Test Fever workitem has mapped the patient name and id values and the particular symptom fever from the Treat workitem checked out by the Worklet Service In addition it has a Notes field where a medical practitioner can enter observations about the patient s condition Figure 8 34 Enter some information into the Notes field and then complete it 216 CHAPTER 8 THE WORKLET SERVICE Loaded Specifications Asimple medical treatment process designed to test and Casualty_ Treatment demonstrate the Worklet Dynamic Process Selection Service within the YAWL engine Worklet to treat a fever Running Cases 1 Casualty_ Treatment 0 1 2 TreatFever 0 1 Figure 8 33 TreatFever Specification Uploaded and Launched Start the next workitem Treat Fever and then edit it This workitem has two additional fields Treatment and Pharmacy where details about how to treat the condition can be entered Figure 8
328. ly we need to map the function name to the execute method which acts as the interface between the class s functions and the Worklet Service The execute method receives as arguments the name of the function to execute and a HashMap containing the functions parameters all are passed as String values The execute method is essentially an if else if block the sub blocks of which call the actual functions defined The section of the execute method for the max function is shown in Figure 8 59 else if name equalsIgnoreCase max int x getArgAsInt args x int y getArgAsInt args y return max x y Figure 8 59 Execute method for the max function The first line checks to see if the name of the function passed to the execute method is max If it is the parameters passed with the function as String values in the HashMap args are converted to integer values and finally the max function is called its return value is passed back from the execute method to the calling Worklet Service The getArgsAsInt method called in the snippet above is defined in the Implementation section of the class s code It is here that you can create private methods that carry out the external work of the any functions defined as required The definition of isNotCompleted is slightly different since the parameter passed is the special variable this The this variable is essentially a WorkItemRecord that contains descriptors of
329. mbedded values it recognises with actual values before passing the log predicate to the engine for final parsing of the workitem level embedded values described above The available embedded values for tasks handled by the resource service can be found in Table 4 5 Other custom services may also provide their own custom embedded values for log predicates consult the documentation of custom services in the Technical Manual for details Log predicates are optional and so may be left empty if desired Net level log predicates can be added 108 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR now date time spec name spec version spec key task id task name task doco task decomposition name item id item handlingservice name item handlingservice uri item handlingservice doco item codelet item customform item enabledtime item firedtime item startedtime item status item timer status item timer expiry item attribute attribute name expression xquery expression Current date and time Current date Current time Name of the specification containing this task Version of the specification containing this task Internal identifier of the specification containing this task Runtime identifier of the task Name of the task Documentation supplied for the task Name of the net that contains the task Runtime identifier of the work item Name of the service respo
330. more sub nets The root net is where execution of a specification begins while sub nets allow you to design larger specifications in a modular hierarchy to aid readability and re use Each net will contain two mandatory components an input condition and an output condition A net must always contain exactly one of each and they cannot be removed from the net Net elements tasks and conditions are arranged between the input and output conditions and connected by directed arcs called flow relations to define control flow or order dependencies between them To create a new specification e Click on the Create New Specification button L at the top left of the toolbar or select the File Menu and choose New This will create a blank Net called Net which will be by default the starting or root net of the workflow For details on changing the starting net see Section 4 4 8 4 3 2 Opening a Specification There are three ways to load a specification into the Editor Opening a Specification File To open a specification file from disk e Click on the Open Specification button second from left on the toolbar or select the File Menu and choose Open An Open Specification File dialog appears from which you may select the file to open All YAWL specification files end with a yawl extension and only files with that extension will be shown in the dialog Alternately you may choose to reopen a recently opened fil
331. mple select the Begin My Career task and set its Split Type property to XOR split Its position will default to the eastern edge of the task as per Figure 4 9 Create a new Atomic task called Do Private Study This task will represent those students that choose not to go to University Finally select the Get A Job task and decorate it with an XOR join Its position will default to the western edge of this task 3 Split and Join decorators allow you to connect several Flow Relations from and to your task respec tively Create a flow relation from Begin My Career to Do Private Study then create another flow rela tion from Do Private Study to Get A Job as per Figure 4 9 Notice how the decorators allow more than one flow to be created to from tasks Also note that decorators provide multiple flow connec tion points along their edges which are provided so that you can position flows as desired it is also permissible to have several flows connect to the same connection point on a decorator 4 Don t forget to check the validity of your specification Hint If you are having trouble with positioning your tasks the alignment tools are a big help 4 4 THE CONTROL FLOW PERSPECTIVE 57 Now when the Begin My Career task has been completed a choice must be made on which of the two tasks Go To University or Do Private Study will be followed via the XOR Split How that choice
332. mple example worklet to be substituted for the Treat top level task when a patient complains of a fever TreatFever O _ gt _ Test_Fever Treat_Fever Figure 8 8 The TreatFever Worklet In itself there is nothing special about the TreatFever specification Even though it will be considered by 8 3 USING THE WORKLET SELECTION SERVICE 191 the Worklet Service as a member of the worklet repertoire and may thus be considered a worklet it is a standard YAWL specification and as such may be executed directly by the YAWL engine without any reference to the Worklet Service As mentioned previously those data values that are required to be mapped from the parent task to the worklet need to be defined as net level variables in the worklet specification Figure 8 9 shows the net level variables for the TreatFever task e090 Data Variables for Net TreatFever Name Type Scope Initial Value gt Name string Input gt PatientiD string Input gt Fever boolean Input gt Notes string InputOutput gt Pharmacy string InputOutput gt Treatment string InputOutput t Av Cancel OK Figure 8 9 Net level Variables for the TreatFever Specification Note the following e Only a sub set of the variables defined in the parent Treat task see Figure 8 7 are defined here It is only necessary to map from the parent task those variables that contain values to be displayed to the user and
333. mposition to the repository select Elements Decomposition then Store in Repository from the menu In the dialog that appears give the stored decomposition a name the current decomposition name is provided but may be changed as desired and a meaningful description then click OK to save The decomposition and its content will be saved to the repository under the name provided To retrieve a previously saved decomposition from the repository select Elements Decomposition then Load from Repository select the name of the desired decomposition from the list then click OK The decomposition will be added to the current specification and will appear in the Decomposition Name prop erty s dropdown list from where it can be assigned to any task as required 72 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR Finally existing decompositions can be removed from the repository at any time by selecting select Elements Decomposition then Remove from Repository choosing the name for the decomposition to remove from the list of stored decompositions then clicking OK 4 7 3 Data Bindings A data binding also called a data parameter or mapping defines how a value is assigned to a variable and how a value is passed between net level and task level variables and vice versa Both Input and Output Parameters can be assigned to any tasks depending on their scope to allow the passing of data between nets and their tasks and between tasks and YAWL Engine users an
334. n BPM environments typically lacks sufficient support for the resource perspective consult the Workflow Patterns Home Page at www workflowpatterns com for more details The realisation of the resource perspective in YAWL 2 0 is based on the analysis work reported in a technical report on new YAWL 27 and Nick Russell s PhD thesis 28 The Resource Service is a large custom service that contains a number of components primarily a Resource Manager that is responsible for the allocation of tasks to human users referred to as participants a Work list that comprise a series of web forms that provide a user interface to processes and process management Administration Tools that comprise a series of web forms to administer the Engine processes and organisa tional data a Dynamic Forms Generator which creates web forms on the fly for the presentation of work item data to participants so they can be performed and completed and a Codelet Coordinator that manages the execution of codelets for automated tasks ASIDE The Resource Service provides functionality to support the identified resource patterns 25 and associated activities However as a custom service it is completely removed from the operation of the Engine This means that developers are free to develop other custom services that communicate directly with the Engine and thus bypassing the Resource Service although support for the resource perspective would also be lost Alte
335. n allocated to However there may be other reasons why a resource is not available even if it is not currently engaged in the performance of a work item For example a participant may be on annual leave or away sick or a particular machine may be offline for maintenance and so on To allow these periods of unavailability to be recorded and taken into account a resource calendar is maintained by the Resource Service The Resource Calendar Management form is shown in Figure 6 17 On this form calendar entries for resources may be viewed added modified and removed An entry in the calendar denotes that the specified resource is unavailable for the specified period At the top left of the form there is a date selector choose a particular date to view entries for that date Click ing the calendar button will display a calendar component from which a particular date may be selected Clicking the left arrow button will go to the previous day while the right arrow button will go to the next day On the top right there is a dropdown list called Filter with the following selections e Unfiltered All entries for all resources are listed for the selected date as in Figure 6 17 Entries cannot be added in this mode see below e All Resources Allows you to add entries that apply to all resources both human and non human Lists all the All Resources entries for the selected date 6 6 RESOURCE CALENDAR MANAGEMENT 167 Admin Queues Cases Users
336. n inbox interaction point Interaction Graph A Interaction Graph B unproduced interaction graphs after the exception Interaction Graph A occurs Interaction Graph B failed failed xi X Proclet instance Y is deleted completed b Proclet instance Y is deleted For that instance all incoming interaction arcs related to an inbox interaction point which have the state unproduced or sent change to the state failed Figure 9 21 For the general case it is illustrated how an exception is handled in the interaction graphs if a Proclet instance is canceled or completed Consequently the latter mentioned arcs change to the state failed illustrated at the bottom of Figure 9 21a Furthermore for the affected entities the opportunity is offered to extend the interaction graph 266 CHAPTER 9 THE PROCLET SERVICE The second situation is depicted in Figure 9 21b where Proclet instance Y is canceled completed For Proclet instance Y multiple inbox interaction nodes may exist in multiple interaction graphs For these interaction nodes illustrated by nodes Yi and Yj in Figure 9 21b if there is at least one incoming arc having the state unproduced or sent then an exception occurs for Proclet instance Y i e for such an arc the defined interaction can never occur Consequently the latter mentioned arcs change to the sta
337. n of a specification The screen shot shown in Figure 4 50 shows the options one can choose for the analysis based on Reset nets This form of analysis supports the use of reduction rules YAWL reduction rules can be applied to the net and Reset net reduction rules can be applied to the Reset net that results from the mapping of a YAWL net The application of these reduction strategies may significantly reduce the workflow that needs to be analysed hence it may significantly reduce the time that verification takes Note that there is overhead associated with performing the reductions themselves Also worth mentioning is that the soundness check is supported for workflows with a finite state space The editor caps the state space at a certain number of states via the Maximum Markings setting by default 5000 and tries to construct the reachability graph for the workflow If the upper bound is not exceeded the soundness of the workflow can be determined with certainty Refer to 30 for a detailed explanation of the concepts behind the wofYAWL approach to verification 4 12 Automated Tasks Any atomic task in YAWL that is associated with the Resource Service i e the default association if the task is not explicitly associated with another service can have its decomposition defined as manual or automated A task with a manual decomposition is a task that is intended to be executed by a human resource e g a participant in the Resource Service
338. n terms of workflow processes is much broader exceptions are merely events or occurrences that for one reason or another were not defined in the process model It may be that these events are known to occur in a small number of cases but not enough to warrant their inclusion in the process model or they may be things that were never expected to occur or may be never even imagined could occur In any case when they do happen if they are not part of the process model they must either be handled off line before the process continues and the way they are handled is rarely recorded or in some instances the entire process must be aborted Alternately an attempt might be made to include every possible twist and turn into the process model so that when such events occur there is a branch in the process to take care of it This approach may lead to very complex models where much of the original business logic is obscured and doesn t avoid the same problems when the next unexpected exception occurs The Exception Service addresses these problems by allowing you to define exception handling processes that may include worklets as compensation handlers for parent workflow instances when certain events occur Rules are defined in much the same way as for the Selection Service but with added features that enable you to pause resume cancel or restart the task case or all cases of a specification that triggered the exception Because the se
339. n the canvas to aid in readability This section discusses those features 4 5 1 Flow Relations Relocation You can reconnect flow relations to other elements of a net or different points on the same element by selecting the flow and dragging one of its connecting ends from one net element or position to another If a connection is possible to some other element connection points will become visible as described earlier Release the mouse button to attach the flow to its new home Select the Flow Relation between Look for Easier Book and Read a Book and move its point end from the top of the task s XOR join to its side as depicted in Figure 4 15 My_Career FJ Attend_University L Study_Privately Look for Easier Book Read a Book Knowledge Feel Smarter Gained Figure 4 15 Adding bends and labels to Flow Relations 64 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR Adding Labels As well as tasks and conditions it is also possible to add labels to flows To do so double click on a flow A small text input box will appear over the flow Type your desired text and commit the flow label by pressing the ENTER key You may then drag that flow label around to position it as desired Place labels on the two outgoing flow relations from the Knowledge Gained condition Attach the label yes to the flow relation going from the Knowledge Gained condition to the Feel Smarter atomic task Attach the label no
340. nable developers to plug in existing applications and to extend and customise the system in many ways It also provides a graphical editor with built in verification functionality which helps solution architects and developers to capture workflow models and to automatically detect subtle but potentially nasty errors early on in the piece Finally YAWL is arguably the most mature open source workflow management system around From its beginnings as an academic prototype YAWL has evolved into an enterprise grade workflow engine thanks to contributions from the YAWL Foundation members and from the organisations and individuals who have used it This demonstrated commitment from its users and community of developers also ensures the continuity of the system If you think YAWL might be for you you may be wondering how to learn more This chapter provides a gentle introduction to the YAWL workflow system The aim of the chapter is to help people to get YAWL up and running with a minimum of fuss The chapter doesn t cover all possible features and components of YAWL Instead it focuses on some essential aspects that will help you to become familiar enough with YAWL that you feel comfortable designing and executing at least simple workflows For more information you may refer to other chapters in this manual the technical manual or the various academic papers and case studies available at the YAWL web site 3 2 Terminology Before jumping in and gett
341. nal state The richer concepts offered by YAWL also introduce additional correctness notions For example an analyst may have used an OR join where an XOR join or an AND join could have been used This is not desirable for computational reasons but also because it makes the process model harder to understand Hence the 4 12 AUTOMATED TASKS 101 YAWL environment will check whether all OR joins are immutable Another correctness notion is that of irreducible cancellation regions Here it is checked whether certain conditions or tasks can be removed from a cancellation region as they will never contain a token or will never be active when the associated cancellation task executes The YAWL editor offers two different approaches to automated verification One approach 33 is based on the theory of Reset nets this is built into the Editor The other approach 30 uses Petri net theory and in particular the concept of transition invariants For this latter approach the program wofYAWL is to be used These approaches are different in that there are workflow specifications where one of them can pick up an error which the other approach cannot In the Analysis panel of the Preferences Dialog you can choose what type of verification the YAWL editor needs to perform As some forms of verification may require quite a bit of time it is important to choose the right approach and generally speaking it is probably best not to verify every intermediate versio
342. ncert to a smaller venue change the values to match those in Figure 8 46 then complete the workitem The third workitem in the worklet Tell Punters is designed for the marketing department to advise fans and existing ticket holders of the change in venue Start the workitem Notice that the values here are read only since this item is meant to be a notification only the person assigned does not need to change any values This is the last workitem in the worklet so when that is completed the engine completes the case and notifies the Exception Service of the completion at which time the service completes the third and final part of the exception handling process i e continuing or unsuspending the Do Show workitem so that the parent case can continue Back at the Work Queues page the Do Show workitem is now shown as enabled and thus is able to be started Check it out now and notice that the data values entered in the worklet s Book Ent Centre workitem have been mapped back to the parent case 224 CHAPTER 8 THE WORKLET SERVICE Edit Work Item 9 2 Figure 8 46 The Book Ent Centre Workitem detail D Exception External Trigger Example It has been stated that every case instance involves some deviation from the standard process model Some times events occur completely removed from the actual process model itself but affect the way the process instance proceeds Typically these kinds of events are handled off system
343. ndar l Services Client Apps Logout p Resources Categories Cy Description Subcategories cameras copiers None US portable computers Notes Save New Name Members 8 Reset Remove office machines Laptop2 gi Figure 6 15 Non Human Resource Management Categories tab Of course an organisation would include in its organisational model only those non human resources that are limited in some way and are required exclusively to complete some activity Also how non human resources are categorised is entirely subjective The Resources tab of the Non human Resources Management form Figure 6 14 is where individual non human resources can be added modified or removed e To Add a new non human resource first click the New button Enter a name for the resource and op tionally a description and note then choose the category it belongs to and optionally its sub category and finally click the Add button You may cancel the addition at any time by clicking the Reset but ton instead of the Add button Changing the selected category also changes the list of related sub categories If the resource does not have a sub category leave it set as None 166 CHAPTER 6 THE RUNTIME ENVIRONMENT e To Modify an non human resource select it from the list then add or change its name description note category and or sub category values then click the Save button e T
344. ne two or three of the flows to booking tasks can be taken at runtime 5 5 ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES 137 8 0 0 Split Predicates for Task register Target Predicate book_hotel Make_Trip_Process registerInfo want_hotel text t book_car Make_Trip_Process registerinfo want_car text true book_flight Make_Trip_Process registerinfo want_flight text t The bottom most flow is the default Figure 5 16 Flow definition at task register Figure 5 17 shows the parameter definition of task book flight with four task variables The first three are input only variables that get data from the net via appropriate XQueries Both startDate and endDate get data from a part of the net variable registrInfo There is one output only variable flightDetails which re quires information from the customer such as his her preferable airlines or a flight number The parameter definitions of tasks book hotel and book car are specified in a similar way except that the output only variable in each case is hotelDetails or carDetails respectively Data Variables for Decomposition book_flight Task book_flight Net Variables Name Type Scope Initial Value gt customer string 0 0 Laral P _ ainga gt registerinfo tripRegisterType 8 0 C doputyDat
345. ne New External Exception for Case ERA EE ie http localhost 8080 workletService newCaseException caselID 35 as Ge Google Oika w hO Define New Case Level Exception Case ID Specification ID 35 OrganiseConcert Please complete each of the fields below Proposed Title Equipment Lost in Transit Scenario We were expecting to receive all of the band s equipment after the end of the Japan leg of the tour but it hasn t arrived and the shipper has not yet located it We will have to hire equipment for the Brisbane and Sydney concerts at this stage Process Description Work out what s needed get a couple of quotes hire the equipment get it delivered to the Brisbane venue Cancel Submit YAWL is distributed under the LGPL Figure 8 55 Example of a New Case Level Exception Definition Back at the Case Mgt form if the exception service is enabled you will notice an extra button in the Running Cases panel called Worklet Admin for example Figure 8 47 This button allows administrators to view the current list of outstanding worklet rejections and requests for new exception handlers It also allows admin istrators to view the details of each outstanding rejection and exception request and to mark it as completed removing them from the list after it has been actioned Figure 8 56 8 7 Defining New Functions for Rule Node Conditions In Section 8 5 we saw how rule conditio
346. needed to identify a user It is not encrypted and can be seen freely We use the public key contained in this certificate to decrypt the signature using the same algorithm 3 If the signature matches the digest message of the document then the signature is considered valid 296 CHAPTER 10 OTHER SERVICES Document Document D ti FingerPrint a J lt tr match Figure 10 5 An overview of the verification of a digital signature Anybody can verify the signature since the public key is contained in the X 509 certificate It is hard to reproduce this signature as the private key is only contained in the certificate PKCS 12 and it needs the owners password to be extracted Also if the signature is slightly modified the digest function won t match the signature anymore 10 6 3 Interaction between a YAWL custom form and the service Before you can use the digital signature function the user will need to create a digital certificate These certificates are provided by a CA certificate authority for example Thawte Consulting for X 509 certificates It is advisable to use a certificate provided by a trusted third party like CA but you can also create your own certificates using some open source tools 10 6 4 Creating a New Certificate New certificates can be easily created using Key tool IUI which can be downloaded from www softpedia com get Security Security Related KeyTool IUI shtml The first
347. nfigurable These configurable tasks represent the variable parts of the process model and are distinguished by a thicker border from the remaining tasks representing commonalities Let s have a look at the example C YAWL model in Figure 4 65 This model depicts a travel requisition process you can find it in the YAWL distribution under the folder C YAWL models In this example all tasks but the task labeled tau are configurable 118 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR Configuration is achieved by restricting the behavior of a C YAWL model Configurable tasks can be re stricted via the notion of ports A configurable task s joining behavior is identified by one or more input ports whereas its splitting behavior is identified by one or more output ports The number of ports for a configurable task depends on the task s routing behavior e AND split AND join and OR join are each identified by a single port e XOR split and XOR join are identified by one port for each outgoing incoming flow e an OR split is identified by a port for each combination of its outgoing flows For example task Submit Travel Form for Approval has two input ports one from task tau the other from task Check and Update Travel Form and three output ports one towards task Approve Travel Form Admin one towards task Reject Travel Form and one towards task Request for Change while the latter task only has one input port and one o
348. nfiguration activated Port ID Target Nodes 0 Request for change 1 2 Reject Travel Form Approve Travel Form Admin activated activated Activate Block L Use Default Set Defaults Figure 4 66 Configuring the input ports of a task Let s block the output port of task Submit Travel Form for Approval towards task Request for change and let s make task Check and Update Travel Form silent by hiding its input port With the first operation we deny requests for changes after a travel form has been submitted by blocking the flow into the loop path while with the second operation we deny the possibility of checking and updating a travel form although in this case we don t block the flow through the hidden task The YAWL Editor can show a preview of the resulting configured net by greying out all model fragments which have been removed You can do this from the Plugins menu via Process Configuration gt Net gt Preview Process Configuration or by clicking the Preview Process Configuration button from the tool bar Figure 4 67 shows the preview of the configuration in our running example Task Request for change and its input and output arcs have been greyed out whereas task Check and Update Travel form is still in the model this task will actually be replaced with a silent task once the configuration has been committed To remove a preview simply click a
349. ns Help B B g aeg vyz G Palette Properties Custom Form Documentation pre RSS Fill Colour CR 252 G L i ge iea rova rom Verdana 14 Determine pp Credit 1 i 1 Join Type None Requirements Label Determine Cr Location 196 0 116 0 A Resourcing None A 3 Choose d A Approval S a Process E Timer None 4 Receive and Obtain E Decompo A Validate Credit Report Small Credit Name None M Application Approval Ay Left click on the selected net to create a new atomic task Figure 3 2 Atomic Tasks Added to the Starting Net wait for all of them Should it wait for only one of them Or something in the middle This disambiguation is done by decorating the task with a join A similar situation holds when a task has multiple outgoing flows In this case we need to decorate the task with a split Figure 3 3 lists the available joins and splits that can be used on tasks along with a brief description of the behaviour to expect from tasks when using them Returning to our example the tasks Receive and Validate Application and Choose Approval Process both require decoration The first of these two tasks requires an AND Split because the subsequent tasks can be done in parallel The second task should have an AND join so that it waits for both preceding tasks to complete be fore continuing and XOR split decorator to signal that either of the subsequent tasks should be performed but not both With these
350. ns could be defined using a combination of arithmetic operators and operands consisting of data attributes and values found in workitems and at the case level of process instances In Walkthrough D an example of a defined function was given isNotCompleted using the special variable this The Worklet Service provides a discrete class that enables developers to extend the availability of such defined functions That is a developer may define new functions that can then be used as or as part of composite conditional expressions in rule nodes That class is called RdrConditionFunctions the source code for the class can be found in the au edu qut yawl worklet support package Currently this class contains a small number of examples to give developers an indication of the kinds of things you can do with the class and how to create your own functions The class code is split into four sections e Header e Execute Method 8 7 DEFINING NEW FUNCTIONS FOR RULE NODE CONDITIONS 231 e098 Worklet Service Administration Tasks 4 gt gy 2 x a amp ie http localhost 8080 workletService wsAdminTasks sH 3774572081313148935 s Ge Google eg Worklet Service Administration Tasks Title Case ID Task Type a Equipment Lost in Transit 35 New Case Level External Exception Back View Details Completed YAWL is distributed under the LGPL Figure 8 56 Administration Tasks Screen detail e Function
351. ns to the state failed Figure 9 20d Also here the interaction graph of Sue is offered for exten sion However as the exception occurred for the visit Proclet instance as a consequence of its cancelation the graph may be extended by using the exception interaction point of the visit Proclet class In Figure 9 20c a comparable situation is shown Here the corresponding interaction graph is presented when a performative is sent from the send report task that has not yet been consumed by the receive task of the canceled visit Proclet instance Here also due to the cancelation of the Proclet instance for the second visit the defined interaction will never occur So the respective interaction arc will change to the state failed Figure 9 20d and for the entity Sue the interaction graph may be extended Note that a similar procedure is followed if a Proclet instance is completed and for a task instance corre sponding to an inbox interaction point all performatives have not yet been received General The approach for canceling completing a Proclet instance where all desired interactions have not yet taken place can be generalized as follows This is schematically visualized in Figure 9 21a and b where both interaction graphs are shown The first situation is depicted in Figure 9 21a where Proclet instance Y is canceled completed For Proclet instance Y multiple outbox inter
352. nsible for the work item URI of the service responsible for the work item Documentation supplied for the service responsible for the work item Name of the codelet to be executed for the work item if any URI of the custom form to be displayed for the work item if any Date and time the work item was enabled Date and time the work item was fired Date and time the work item was started Current status of the work item Current status of timer set for the work item if any Expiration time of timer set for the work item if any The value of the named extended attribute The evaluated value of the XQuery expression specified The expression may reference work item variable data values Table 4 3 Available embedded values for work item level log predicates now date time parameter name parameter datatype parameter namespace parameter doco parameter usage parameter ordering parameter decomposition parameter initialvalue parameter defaultvalue parameter attribute attribute name Current date and time Current date Current time Name of the variable Data type of the variable Data schema namespace of the variable Documentation supplied for the variable Whether the variable is input output or both Index of the variable s order compared to the other task variables Name of the decomposition that contains the variable Initial value of the variable if any Default v
353. nstance can be used by the Worklet Service to enable a contextual decision to be made Note that it is not necessary to map all available case data to a worklet enabled task only that data required by the Service to make an appropriate decision How this data is used will be discussed later in this manual The list of task variables in Figure 8 7 also show that most variables are defined as Input Only this is because those values will not be changed by any of the worklets that may be executed for this task they will only be used in the selection process Three variables are defined as InputOutput so that the worklet can return or map back to these variables data values that are captured during the worklet s execution The dialog has a section at the bottom called YAWL Registered Service Detail It is here that the task is associ ated with the Worklet Service by choosing the Worklet Service from the list of available services Note that list of services will only be seen if the Engine is currently running and it has services installed Select the Worklet Service from the list That s all that is required to make the top level specification worklet enabled Next we need to create one or more worklet specifications to execute as substitutes for the worklet enabled task 190 CHAPTER 8 THE WORKLET SERVICE Decomposition Variables Name Type Scope Default Value gt PatientiID string Input P S
354. nstance task In Chapter 4 Section 4 7 6 illustrates how to specify multiple instance data manipulation e g the four types of XQueries in the YAWL Editor The XQueries automatically generated by the Editor are sufficient in the vast majority of cases 5 5 Illustrative Examples Below are three illustrative examples which cover the data perspective of YAWL The first example is a revised version of the Credit Rating Process taken from the Oracle BPEL Process Manager Quick Start Guide 10g Release 2 May 2005 The next two examples are the first two Make Trip Processes that can be found in 5 5 5 1 Example 1 Credit Rating Process This is a simple process that provides a credit rating service When running this process the client user is asked to provide his her social security number The process takes the number and returns credit rating There are two situations If the client s social security number starts with 0 a fault reporting Bankruptcy will occur Otherwise a credit rating e g 560 will be given From the above the data associated with this process are 1 client s social security number ssn 2 credit rating 560 and 3 fault Bankruptcy YAWL Specification Figure 5 5 shows the YAWL net specifying the above credit rating process There are three labelled tasks Re ceiveSSN for requesting a social security number from the client ReportFault for reporting a Bankruptcy fault
355. nteractions are necessary i e whether the sending and receiving of performatives is necessary If it is then these interactions are taken care of which also may involve the instantiation of Proclet classes In addition to this the Interaction Service takes care of identifying whether exceptions occur e g the cancelation or completion of a Proclet instance Based on the decision of a human actor an exception is handled Finally based on previously defined interactions for an entity subsequent interactions that are possible are determined in case the opportunity is offered to extend an interaction graph A human actor will only have contact with the Inter Workflow Service via the Interaction Definition Editor In this way the component offers the ability to define interactions for an entity i e extending the correspond 290 CHAPTER 9 THE PROCLET SERVICE ing interaction graph both in normal and exceptional situations Here it should be noted that possible interactions for an entity which are determined by the Interaction Service are offered to a human actor via the editor From these possible interactions a selection is made and send to the Interaction Service such that new possible interactions are calculated and offered again In addition to this identified exceptions are presented such that a human actor can decide how they need to be handled e g take no action or extend the interaction graph for an entity Furthermore for the se
356. nv bat To set the Tomcat memory allocation in a nix or OSX environment 1 Ina text editor create a new file and enter the line export JAVA_OPTS server Xmx256m 2 Save the file as your tomcat dir bin setenv sh 2 4 MANUAL INSTALLATION YAWL ENTERPRISE 25 These instructions use 256m as an example please replace it as necessary with the actual amount of memory you d like to have allocated to Tomcat when it starts 26 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION Chapter 3 Getting Started with YAWL 3 1 Introduction Nowadays organisations are challenged to continuously improve their efficiency and to respond quickly to changes in their environment such as new business opportunities competition threats and evolving customer expectations It is not surprising then that organisations are paying more attention to capturing analysing and improving their work practices in a systematic manner The methods techniques and tools to do this are collectively known as Business Process Management BPM For IT departments BPM provides an opportunity to align IT systems with business requirements and to re organise existing application infrastructure to better support the day to day operations of the organisation BPM initiatives often translate into requirements for IT systems Here is where workflow technology comes into play Business process models produced by business experts are taken as a starting point by software architects to produce a blu
357. o Delete an entity select it from the list and click the Remove button On the Categories tab of the Non human Resources Management form Figure 6 15 categories and sub categories can be added or removed and member resources of each category can be viewed Categories can be added updated and removed in the same way as non human resources on the Resources tab To add a sub category for the selected category first click on the Add Sub category button the button to the right of the sub categories list enter the name of the new sub category in the input field that appears at the bottom of the list then click the accept tick button to save it to the list or the cancel cross button to cancel the addition Figure 6 16 To remove a sub category for the selected category first select it then click on the Remove Sub category button the button to the right of the sub categories list Note that the sub category None cannot be removed Subcategories barcode reade Lv x Save Naw Figure 6 16 Non Human Resource Management Categories tab detail 6 6 Resource Calendar Management As mentioned in the previous section all of the resources human and non human primary and secondary allocated to a work item are marked as in use while the work item is executing and are released when it completes This means that while a resource is in use it is unavailable to other work items that it may also have bee
358. o called interaction graph An interaction graph belongs to a specific entity and consists of interaction nodes and interaction arcs An interaction node refers to an interaction point of a Proclet instance for which one or more internal or external interactions will take place i e an instance of an interaction point So an interaction node is a triple in which the first value refers to the identifier of the Proclet class the second value refers to the identifier of the Proclet instance and the third value refers to the identifier of the interaction point for which one or more interactions take place In turn an interaction arc refers to an interaction either internal or external that needs to occur between two interaction points of a Proclet instance In this way the direction of the arc in the graph is the same as the direction of the arc for the associated internal or external interaction In Figure 9 3 for the first scenario the corresponding interaction graph is given for entity Sue First in Figure 9 3a the instances for the first visit second visit and lab test are shown However they are now modeled using the terminology of the Proclet framework i e using interaction points ports and so on For example the decide task of the first visit has two outgoing ports illustrating the performatives that will be sent in order to create an instance for the lab and the second visit Also for the first visit Proclet instance with
359. o tasks so that the connection is task flow condition flow task for example the Knowledge Gained condition in Figure 4 15 it is said to be an explicit condition In either case when a task completes it passes control to the condition preceding the next task in the flow When the next task is started it takes control from its preceding condition whether implicit or explicit If there is a chance that the tasks in a cancellation set may not have started when the owner task of the set completes then cancelling those tasks will have no effect it is their preceding conditions that have control and so they are the elements that must be cancelled By including both tasks and their preceding conditions we are ensuring that the desired cancellation will occur regardless of whether the tasks in the set are currently executing To remove an element from a task s Cancellation Set 1 First make sure you have the View Cancellation Set option selected for the task 2 Select the element s for removal 3 Click on the Remove Selected Items from Visible Cancellation Set button on the toolbar or choose Elements Remove from Cancellation Set from the menu 4 7 The Data Perspective A workflow process that describes the control flow perspective only is of limited use To get any real work done data must be created manipulated transformed and passed to various users applications and ser vices throughout t
360. ocation with Participants retained state Restrict Privilege d Participants Allow work item deallocation Participants Allow work item delegation Participants Allow work item to be skipped Participants Sal Tessio st v Restrict Privilege Allow work item to be piled Figure 4 47 Resourcing Dialog Task Privileges tab Individual privileges may be set by selecting them i e checking their check box You may further restrict a privilege to individual participants and or roles by first checking the Restrict Privilege box for the relevant 96 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR privilege then adding participants and or roles as desired If a privilege is allowed but not restricted it means that all participants and roles are granted that privilege for the selected task For example Figure 4 47 shows that the Allow work item reallocation with retained state privilege is granted to any participant who performs an instance of this task while the Allow work item to be piled privilege is also granted but restricted to an individual participant and to members of a particular role Piling means that if a participant chooses to pile an instance of the task at runtime that participant will be automatically allocated that instance and all future instances of the task fo
361. och ga p gt r gt D 1D P gt prfpar H gt gt E J Mas J s Se n ve e ures W G3 w MDM 05 02 Sue receive task is qoeestscrnenttctensttstaers executed state interaction arc updated in graph Sue Anne receive task is de se N executed f state interaction arc updated in graph Anne visit Anne 26 01 visit Anne 12 02 amp initi recei decid _ broch 1D gt regen gt EC G Ws ve e ures wi initi P 4a a The Proclet instances that need to be performed for Sue and Anne For both the desired interactions are shown MDM MDM D 05 02 Sue 5 05 02 register executed_both send report ND Qa S Sg 20 Su NS 3o e a O Z visit ma a Sue 25 01 visit decide Sue 7 Sue 10 02 consumed visit Sue 10 02 create receive J MDM MDM gt 05 02 Anne 5 05 02 register executed_both send report a Z A 33 n N Ep n D E ZF e visit _ Anne 26 01 visit decide Anne 7 Anne 12 02 consumed visit Anne 12 02 create receive b Current state of the interaction graphs for Sue and Anne Figure 9 14 For both Sue and Anne the receive task is performed As a performative has been sent which contains both Sue 6 and Anne 6 as it
362. oclet classes Figure 9 2 Based on the first scenario the concepts of the Proclet framework introduced so far are illustrated That is two Proclet classes are modeled For both of them interaction points channels ports and performatives are indicated However although performatives can be sent to multiple receivers there is still the issue that it needs to be controlled which specific Proclet instance or instances a performative is sent to For example in Figure 9 2 where an instance exists of the lab Proclet class and the send report task is executed it is questionable to which visit Proclet instance a performative is sent In particular if we want to achieve the behavior for Sue which is defined during the execution of the decide task in the first scenario which is visualized in Figure 9 1 the following is required for the two Proclet models shown in Figure 9 2 e One Proclet instance exists for the first visit which has Vvisit Sue 25 01 as its instance identifier e A performative is sent from the decide task of the first visit to the initial condition of the visit Proclet such that one instance is created for the second visit of Sue e A performative is sent from the decide task of the first visit to the initial condition of the lab Proclet such that one instance is created for the desired lab test for Sue e The creation of an instance of the lab test should be
363. oclet instance e g the second visit of the patient Obviously the MDM Proclet class operates at a different level of granularity That is for the MDM Proclet class a group of patients is taken as the basis of an individual case whereas for the other Proclet classes this does not hold For example for the visit Proclet class an individual patient is taken as the basis for a case This can also be seen in the Figure 9 8b which shows a class diagram containing the Proclet classes The scenario that will be executed is visualized in Figure 9 9 and deals with two different patients Here for both Sue and Anne tasks from multiple Proclet instances will be performed In particular for Sue during execution of the decide task at the first visit Proclet instance visit Sue 25 01 it is decided that a subsequent visit is required Proclet class visit with temporary instance identifier visit T1 Moreover Sue needs to be discussed during the multidisciplinary meeting for which an instance already exists with the identifier MDM 05 02 Afterwards the report needs to be used as input for the second visit For Anne exactly the same outcome is decided during execution of the decide task So she is also discussed during the multidisciplinary meeting for which an instance already exists with the identifier MDM 05 02 However for her the instance that exists for the first vis
364. oduced as no performatives have yet been sent Also each arc has a unique instance identifier Additionally in Figure 9 23a we can see two nodes which are active For the visit SSue 25 01 decide node the possible interactions are not shown in order to not clutter the graph However for example it is still possible to create an additional instance of the visit Proclet class The other active node is the MDM 05 02 register node for which the new interactions that can be nominated are indicated via dotted arcs That is the MDM 05 02 register node matches with the register task interaction point of the MDM Proclet class For that interaction point an internal interaction is defined that has the send report interaction point as its destination So an internal interaction with the send report task of the MDM Proclet instance is possible As can be seen in the figure the visit T1 create node is not active The node matches with the interaction point that corresponds to the input condition of the visit Proclet class Figure 9 23a However for that interaction point no outgoing external and internal interactions have been defined So no interactions are possible starting from the visit T1 create node and consequently the node is not active Step 3 The new interaction graph can be seen in Figure 9 24b The internal interaction for the MDM Proclet instan
365. of the Add button 162 CHAPTER 6 THE RUNTIME ENVIRONMENT e To Modify a participant select them from the list then add or change the desired fields then click the Save button e To Delete an participant select them from the list and click the Remove button User Privileges Primarily each participant may be designated a user the default or an administrator To grant admin istrator privileges for a participant select the participant from the dropdown list tick the Administrator checkbox then click the Save button Administrator privilege overrides all other user privileges Partici pant s without administrator privileges may be granted specific privileges by selecting the participant from the dropdown list then ticking the desired privileges then clicking the Save button The privileges that may be assigned to participants on an individual basis are e Choose Which Work Item to Start When granted this privilege allows a participant to choose any work item listed on their allocated queue to start When denied the default only the first listed work item may be chosen Work items are listed in order of age with the oldest work item at the top of the list Start Work Items Concurrently When granted this privilege allows a participant to have a number of work items executing concurrently on their started queue or more accurately may choose to start additional work items from their allocated queue while other previ
366. of the Properties Pane and provide a name for the new sub net by selecting New from the dropdown list A new sub net will be created a separate tab will appear for it on the canvas and associated with the composite task We are going to call this new Net Attend University My_Career DJ Attend_University Begin My Career Career Started University Do Private Study Figure 4 10 Root net with Attend University Composite Task 58 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR e A sub net is a particular type of decomposition for a Composite Task and so shares a number of the same kinds of properties with decompositions of Atomic Tasks e An alternative method to create a sub net is by clicking on the Create a New Net button 4 on the tool bar or by clicking on the Net Menu and choosing Add Net You should set the new sub net s Name property to something more meaningful then return to your original root Net click on its tab click on your Composite Task and choose the newly created sub net from the dropdown list in the Decomposition s Name property Choose the Attend University net by clicking on its tab or right clicking on the Composite Task and selecting Go to sub net from the popup menu You can now design the content of your new Attend University sub net Create the following Atomic Tasks in order and then link them with flows and don t forget to check for validit
367. of the repository selected Select the file you wish to open and then click OK Figure 8 15 shows the main screen with the rule set for the Casualty Treatment specification loaded On this screen you may browse through each node of a rule tree set and view the various parts of each node The main features of the screen are explained below iz Worklet Rules Editor lt Browse gt Casualty_Treatment m o File Rule Options Help le 212 Blo Rule Type Selection Task Name Treat a ao ask Name Rule Tyee RDA Tree Cornerstone Case Rule 0 PatientID 3457687 Sex M amp ae ine DiastolicBP 80 Height 1 8 Node s nues Heatine 72 Cornerstone Rule 3 SystolicBP 120 Rule 4 Fracture false Case Data Age 21 Rule 5 Weight 85 0 Rule 3 Fever true Rash false Wound false Name Buster Legg bd Selected Node Node ID fi Parent Node ID fo Condition Fever tue q Conclusion 1 select TreatFever Details Description H worklet for a fever Figure 8 15 Rules Editor Main Screen The Toolbar The toolbar buttons replicate the functions available from the main menu see Figure 8 16 e New Tree or Rule Set If there is no rules file currently open in the Editor this button displays the New Rule form to allow the creation of an entirely new rule set file for a specification i e one that does not yet have a rule set file defined If there is a rules file currently open in the Editor d
368. ok list the MI task will complete when 5 instances complete or when all complete if less than 5 were started and new instances may not be dynamically started after task execution begins When this specification is executed it will first allow the user to specify a number of book orders then will split the details of each into a corresponding number of MI task instances one for each order The price and availability of each order can be updated within its own task instance When all or the threshold of MI task instances have completed their data will be aggregated back into the list for display in the third and final task For a second example consider a process that raises a purchase order to purchase a particular product The business rules for this process require that at least three quotes are needed for any purchase from which one is chosen to fill the order A multiple instance task called Get Quotes is used to gather the product quotes from suppliers The Data Variable dialog for the Get Quotes task can be seen in Figure 4 39 The task has two variables defined PONumber the purchase order number and Suppliers Item the details of a single supplier Notice that PONumber is defined as Input Only and is mapped from the net level variable of the same name this means that the purchase order number will be displayed within each of the work items created from the MI task Notice also that while a list of Suppliers is ma
369. ol Input To Task Variable StudentNumber Generate Binding From Net Variable StudentNumber v 4 Data Gateway SimpleExternalDBGatewaylmpl Binding a Mil Attend_University StudentNumber text a Cancel OK Figure 4 25 The Input Bindings Dialog with auto generated binding e The Binding panel where the XQuery expression for the binding is entered There are three toolbar buttons in this panel The Auto Binding button click this button to generate and insert a valid binding from the selected Generate Binding From source The Reset button click this button to revert back to the XQuery that existed when the dialog was opened if any The Auto Format button to reformat the layout and indentations of large XQuery expres sions e The validation message pane If you are familiar with XQuery syntax then you can add an XQuery expression directly to perform the assignment of values to Input variables When entering an XQuery it is continuously validated for syntactic well formedness and when it meets that criterion further validated to ensure it is assigning a value of the correct data type for its target variable Remember to watch the message pane at the bottom of the dialog for helpful messages Valid expressions will be denoted by a green OK in the message pane Check that the StudentNumber task level variable is select
370. ollows _0 Y fx a4 a a visit g preceding 0 MDM A initial 7 regi deci f send gt gt ah T 0 0 prepar eas ations SS eer oe preceding follows a visit lab and MDM Proclet classes b class diagram containing the three Proclet classes Figure 9 8 The Proclet classes that are used for the second scenario In Figure 9 8 we can see three Proclet classes The visit and lab Proclet classes have already been discussed in the first scenario The MDM Proclet class is concerned with a weekly meeting in which gynecological oncology doctors discuss the medical status of multiple patients For this meeting multiple patients may be registered task register This can be seen by the multiplicity of the associated incoming port which indicates that multiple performatives may be received During the decide task the patients that are registered are discussed Finally for each patient that is discussed a report may be sent out task send reports This is also represented by cardinality of the associated outgoing port which indicates that a performative may be multicast to multiple visit Proclet instances Note that there is an internal interaction defined from the register task to the send reports task This internal interaction has the meaning that for every patient that is registered it can be decided that the subsequent report needs to be sent to a specific Pr
371. om 10 6 DIGITAL SIGNATURE SERVICE 297 1 The Yawl Worklist redirects the user to 2 The User uses a Custom form to give the custom form of the Digital signature the Public certificate the key store and the password to open the key store OEY uo we USER Public Certificate A Password Document M M Signed fingerprint S Digital Signature P12 Certificate 4 The custom form ends the task and redirects the user back to the Pannes Worklist Items x509 Certificate Parcourir submi Clear Key Store Public Certificate Password Document Signed I Digital Signature Service 3 The Web Service computes the Digital fingerprint and returns it to the Custom Form URI for the task by selecting the task s Custom Form property in the Properties Pane of the Editor and entering the URI of the form in the dialog shown You also have to define the task data that will be used by the custom form In this example their names should be Document and Signature Note that scope of the Signature variable is InputOutput You may also have to change the paths in the upload jsp file where the default values are localhost they may have to be changed to the actual address where the service runs if it is not running locally String Path http localhost 8080 DigitalSignature files String redirectURL http localhost 8080 resourceService faces userWorkQueues jsp workitem _
372. omplete and returning the result if any via an output parameter e SupervisorInfo accepts the userid of a user and returns the userid of that user s supervisor based on the installed organisational data model see Chapter 6 for more information e TaskCompleterInfo Gets the name and userid of the participant who completed a specified atomic task in the current case eoo Set Codelet for Automated Decomposition Name Description None Remove a previously selected codelet zj This codelet is a simple example of codelet construction and usage It adds two integers Required parameters Inputs a b both long types Output c also a long ExampleCodelet This codelet is a simple example of codelet construction and usage It waits for a random amount of time before completing Required parameters Input interval type String H M or S for hour minute or second Input max type long maximum wait time Output waitTime type long the time waited RandomWait This codelet executes an external program Required parameters Inputs command type String required ShellExecution env attrib value pairs optional dir type String optional Output result type String This codelet gets the userid of the participant who is the supervisor of the participant with the userid specified sane 0K Supervisorinfo Figure 4 52 The Set Codelet dialog
373. on allows for the addition of a new exception rule or a rule on the true branch of its parent thus creating a learning system where all events are handled online When the new rule is added as a result of the rejection it will return the correct worklet for every subsequent case that has a similar context Thus rejecting a worklet actually refines the rule set for a specification To reject a selected worklet go to the Case Mgt screen and select in the list of running cases the worklet you wish to reject Then click the Reject Worklet button see Figure 8 47 You will be redirected to the Reject Worklet Selection screen another Worklet Service add in screen Figure 8 54 This screen displays the Specification and Case ID for the selected worklet Enter a proposed title or name for the new worklet and an explanation of reason for the rejection in plain text and then submit the form 8 e e Worklet Service Reject Worklet Selection F KEZA EE T ie http localhost 8080 workletService rejectWorklet caselID 34 es Ge Google amp amp Reject Worklet Selection Case ID Specification ID 34 TreatWound Please complete each of the fields below Proposed Title Reason for Rejection Cancel Submit YAWL is distributed under the LGPL Done af Figure 8 54 Reject Worklet Selection Screen To raise an unexpected exception at the case level follow a similar process at the Case Mg
374. on that is contained in the content attribute and the information contained in the set of interaction identifiers attribute That is for every interaction identifier in the Interaction identifiers field a corresponding data element may be found in the content attribute which has the same entity identifier 274 CHAPTER 9 THE PROCLET SERVICE Performative Time 10 00 Channel Order system Sender MDM 05 02 Receivers visit Sue 10 02 visit Anne 12 02 Action input Interaction identifiers Sue 6 Anne 6 Content Sue age 67 medical status ok Anne age 73 medical status not ok visit Sue 25 01 visit Sue 10 02 initi Bf initial IB s P are re de i wm prepar recei decid broch gt E Ms V ations ve e ures MDM 05 02 ae acumen we initi re e de send 0B performative is gt rogar Aria reports multicast ans visit Anne 26 01 e visit Anne 12 02 gt a initi re de ic a B initial recei E decid _ broch _ a gt gt X a E ie Y Le m Cr ae Y ve J e Pures PUE a The Proclet instances that need to be performed for Sue and Anne Currently a performative is sent from the send reports task of the MDM instance S MDM MDM 05
375. ond visit Note that a unique interaction identifier is used and that the state is unproduced When during the second visit the decide task is executed the interaction graph can be extended again However here it is not necessary to provide Sue as the entity identifier in order to extend the graph That is in the interaction graph for Sue we can already find the create and receive node for the second visit In this way it is now denoted that the entity is relevant for the second visit and the graph for it may be extended when required General In the scenario we have seen how an interaction graph is extended by taking into account current and future Proclet instances External and internal interactions that are defined for Proclet classes are also taken 9 1 INTER WORKFLOW SUPPORT 269 ETB 11 blood send archi On test report ve gt ations IB dh initial recei N gt prepar ve iagi A MDM IB _ __ OB deci send O initial f P prepar i de reports Latins OO O a visit lab and MDM Proclet classes MDM MDM DOA ee 05 02 send reports S active No node S soe u visit e Sue 25 01 decide Sue 7 visit T4 create f temporary identifer unproduced for the future visit instanc
376. onstraint CasePostConstraint and CaseExternalTrigger and so each of these will have only one rule tree in the tree set The other eight tree sets relate to the workitem level seven exception types plus selection and so may have one rule tree for each workitem in the specification that is the tree sets for these eight rule types may consist of a number of rule trees It is not necessary to define rules for all eleven types for each specification You only need to define rules for those types that you want to handle any exception types that arent defined in the rule set file are simply ignored So for example if you are only interested in capturing pre and post constraints at the workitem level then only the femPreConstraint and ItemPostConstraint tree sets need to be defined i e rules defined within those tree sets In this example any Timeout exception events that occur during the execution of the specification would be ignored by the Exception Service Of course rules for a Timeout event could be added later if required as could any of the other types not yet defined in the rule set Referring back to Figure 8 11 notice that the file specifies a Selection rule tree for the Treat task The second ruleNode contains a condition Fever True and a conclusion of TreatFever Thus when the condition Fever True evaluates to true the worklet TreatFever is chosen as a substitute for the Treat task Notice also that each rul
377. or then place six atomic tasks onto the starting net and give each a meaningful label You should have the skeleton of a workflow that looks something like figure 3 2 We re now ready to begin describing how the tasks in our starting net are to be ordered in their execution known as its control flow The transfer of work between two tasks is done through a flow Flows are depicted within YAWL as unidirectional arrows For a YAWL specification to be valid every task must be tied into a net via flows that can be traced back to the net s input condition and which will eventually lead to the net s output condition We ll need a flow from the input condition to the Receive and Validate Application task then two flows from that task to the tasks Determine Credit Requirements and Obtain Credit Report respectively From each of these a flow must go to the task Choose Approval Process From this task we need a flow going to the tasks Large Credit Approval and Small Credit Approval respectively From these last two tasks we need flows to the final output condition By default a YAWL task can only have one incoming flow and one outgoing flow When we need more incoming flows to a task we must unambiguously state how the task should handle its inflows should it 3 3 BUILDING A SIMPLE WORKFLOW EXAMPLE 31 e800 YAWL Editor 3 0 File Edit Net Elements Plugi
378. or the receival of the performative which contains interaction identifier Sue 4 the associated interaction arc with the same identifier is updated to consumed in the interaction graph of Sue For the performative which contains interaction identifier AnneA the same is done for the interaction graph of Anne For the register task both for Sue and Anne there is an internal interaction defined for which the MDM 05 02 register interaction node is the source node As this task will be completed both for the interaction graphs of entities Sue and Rose the state of the corresponding outgoing interaction arc of the node is set to executed source Obviously in order to perform a task it may be necessary to inspect and update multiple interaction graphs Note that if we abstract from the interaction identifier of an arc then the internal interaction arc from the MDM 05 02 register node to the MDM 05 02 send report node is the same in both the interaction graphs of Sue and Anne For these arcs it is important to see that the state is always the same and always changes simultaneously This is due to the fact that both the head and the tail of these arcs refer to the same interaction node Step 4 As the next step the send reports task of the MDM Proclet instance is executed First of all as can be seen in Figure 9 13 for the send re
379. or those variables that the user will supply values for to be passed back to the parent task when the worklet completes e The definition of variables is not restricted to those defined in the parent task Any additional variables required for the operation of the worklet may also be defined here e Only those variables that have been defined with an identical name and data type to variables in the parent task and with a Usage of Input Only or Input amp Output will have data passed into them from the parent task when the worklet is launched e Only those variables that have been defined with an identical name and data type to variables in the parent task and with a Usage of Output Only or Input amp Output will pass their data values back to the parent task when the worklet completes In Figure 8 9 it can be seen that the values for the PatientID Name and Fever variables will be used by the TreatFever worklet as display only values the Notes Pharmacy and Treatment variables will receive values during the execution of the worklet and will map those values back to the top level Treat task when the worklet completes The association of tasks with the Worklet Service is not restricted to top level specifications Worklet spec ifications also may contain tasks that are associated with the Worklet Service and so may have worklets substituted for them so that a hierarchy of executing worklets may sometimes exist It is also
380. organisational cost downtime remodelling testing and so on The Worklet Dynamic Exception Handling Service or Exception Service provides the ability to handle these events in a number of ways and have the process continue unhindered Additionally once an unexpected exception is handled a certain way that method automatically becomes an implicit part of the process spec ification for all future instances of the process which provides for continuous evolution of the process but avoiding the need to modify the original process definition The Exception Service uses the same repertoire of worklets and dynamic rules approach as the Selection Service The difference is that while the Selection Service is invoked for certain tasks in a YAWL process the Exception Service when enabled is invoked for every case and task executed by the YAWL engine and will detect and handle up to ten different kinds of process exception As part of the handling process a process designer may choose from various actions such as cancelling suspending restarting and so on and apply them at a workitem case and or specification level The Exception Service is extremely flexible and multi faceted and allows a designer to provide tailor made solutions to runtime process exceptions as described in the following pages 8 2 INSTALLATION 185 8 2 Installation 8 2 1 Worklet Installation Package The Worklet Service is distributed as a standard component of the YA
381. orkitems listed each one the first workitem of a separate case see Figure 8 39 Go to the Case Met page to see that the BobOne BobTwo and BobThree specifications have been uploaded and launched by the Worklet Service as separate cases Figure 8 40 note the case numbers Go back to the Work Queues page and check out all three workitems Edit each of the Get_Bob workitems 8 6 WALKTHROUGH USING THE WORKLET SERVICE 219 Starting an Instance of wListMaker Jul 02 2009 13 14 32 0 00 00 01 Figure 8 39 Workitems from each of the three Launched Worklet Cases and modify the values as you wish for this walkthrough we ll change the values to one five two six and three seven respectively As you edit and complete each Get_Bob workitem the corresponding Verify List workitem from the parent instance is automatically checked in to the Engine by the Worklet Service Since the Bob worklets contains 220 CHAPTER 8 THE WORKLET SERVICE only one task editing and completing this workitem also completes the worklet case Loaded Specifications Worklet to enact when bob is one Worklet to enact when bob is three Worklet to enact when bob is two A process to demonstrate how worklets handle a multiple task Running Cases 3 wListMaker 0 1 4 BobOne 0 1 5 BobThree 0 1 6 BobTwo 0 1 Figure 8 40 Bob Specifications Loaded and Launched by the Worklet Service After the third workitem h
382. ormative both graphs f iR Sender MDM 05 02 i Receivers visit Sue 10 02 visit Anne 12 02 Interaction identifiers Sue 6 Anne 6 visit Anne 26 01 visit Anne 12 02 ee gt initi re AN intel f ecei decid _ broch g af LDA D gt prepar P yo e ures E ans LE ations NYS a The Proclet instances that need to be performed for Sue and Anne For both the desired interactions are shown MDM MDM D 05 02 Sue 5 05 02 register executed_both send report SF r 3 w S g A u Ss 20 e visit is Sue 25 01 visit decide Sue 7 Sue 10 02 consumed visit Sue 10 02 create receive J MDM MDM 05 02 Anne 5 05 02 register executed_both send report SF E A v ay lt lt e visit Ts Anne 26 01 visit decide Anne 7 Anne 12 02 consumed visit Anne 12 02 create receive 7 b Updated interaction graphs for Sue and Anne As a result of executing the send reports task the state of the outgoing interaction arc of the MDM 05 02 send reports node in both graphs is simultaneously updated to sent Moreover in both graphs the state of the incoming interaction arc of the MDM 05 02 send reports node is simultaneously updated to executed both Figure 9 13 The send reports task of the multidisciplinary meeting is performed As a result one performative is mult
383. ormed via a worktray are indicated by a single person icon For both the initial preparations and decide task the corresponding task decomposition details are shown It is important to note that the Inter Workflow Service has been implemented as a YAWL Cus tom Service This means that the execution of a workitem for a task can be delegated to a service if needed The YAWL Registered Service Detail field of the decomposition details for the decide task shows that the execution of the workitem is delegated to the Inter Workflow Service For the initial preparations task it is defined that it can be performed via the Workflow Client Application Moreover it can be seen that for both tasks an entities data variable has been defined which is a complex data type The reason for defining the variable is as follows In order to create an interaction graph a user needs to provide at run time the names of the entities for which such a graph needs to be created Then the graphs can be created if a workitem for a configuration interaction point is performed i e in this case if a workitem for the decide task is performed As the Inter Workflow Service has been implemented as a YAWL Custom Service this has the consequence that at run time the names of the entities can only be passed on to the service via a workitem whose execution is delegated to the service More precisely this can only be achieved via a data variable
384. ose the Default Engine Worklist actually the worklist handler built in to the Resource Service as the type of decomposition This tells YAWL that when the task is ready to be executed it should be displayed in the default worklist Every instance of the task will then appear in the worklist of human participants so they may receive data relative to the task instance work 32 CHAPTER 3 GETTING STARTED WITH YAWL Name Symbol Split Types The XOR Split is used to trigger only one outgoing flow It is best used for automatically choosing between a number of possible XOR Split exclusive alternatives once a task completes The AND Split is used to start a number of task instances simul taneously It can be viewed as a specialisation of the OR Split AND Split where work will be triggered to start on all outgoing flows The OR Split is used to trigger some but not necessarily all outgo ing flows to other tasks It is best used when we won t know until OR Split run time exactly what concurrent resultant work can lead from the completion of a task Join Types A task with an AND Join will wait to receive completed work from all of its incoming flows before beginning It is typically used AND Join to synchronise pre requisite activities that must be completed be fore some new piece of work may begin Once any work has completed on an incoming flow a task with an XOR Join will be capable of beginning work It is ty
385. ote that a task instance may be completed if for all interaction nodes that belong to the task instance all the incoming arcs have the state sent However an exception to the latter is possible when an exception is handled This will be discussed in more detail in Section 9 1 2 For arcs referring to internal interactions the state transitions from executed none to executed source to executed both The general meaning of each state for an arc is as follows executed none if an arc has the state executed none both the source and destination interaction nodes have not been executed That is for a source interaction node which is linked to an input condition of a Proclet class this means that no instance of that Proclet class has been created yet For a source interaction node which is linked to a task instance the task instance has not been executed yet For the destination interaction point which is always linked with a task instance this also means that the task instance has not been completed yet executed source For a source interaction node which is linked to an input condition of a Proclet class this means that an instance of the Proclet class has been created For a source interaction node which is linked to a task instance this means that the task instance has been executed executed both As an extension to the previous state the task instance which is linked to the destination interaction point has n
386. other languages such as Petri Nets 1 or EPCs 3 can also be used With regard to the choice of a graphical language some limitations apply First of all Proclet instances need to have a state and they need to support the notion of a task Second a Proclet class needs to be sound i e it must satisfy basic correctness requirements such as absence of deadlocks proper termination etc 4 In order to have interactions and collaboration among Proclets interaction points channels ports and perfor matives are important The meaning of these will be discussed below In addition we describe how a Proclet 9 1 INTER WORKFLOW SUPPORT 239 class and instances of it are defined e A Proclet class has a unique name In the same way an instance of a Proclet class has an unique identifier e Proclet instances interact with each other via channels A channel can be used to send a performative to an individual Proclet instance or to a group of Proclet instances e A performative is a specific kind of message with several attributes which is exchanged between one or more Proclets Two important attributes are the sender and set of receivers attributes The sender attribute contains the identifier of the Proclet instance creating the performative The set of receivers attribute contains the identifiers of the Proclet instances receiving the performative i e a list of recipients Additional attributes will be discussed in more detail
387. ously started work items have not yet completed When denied the default a work item on the participant s allocated queue may not be started while there is a previously started work item on their start queue i e one that has not yet completed Reorder Work Items When granted the participant may choose a work item to start from anywhere in the list of allocated work items When denied only the first listed work item may be chosen In the YAWL environment there is essentially no difference between this privilege and Choose Which Work Item to Start View All Work Items of Team When granted this privilege gives a participant access to the Team Queues form and displays on that form a consolidated list of all work items on all work queues of all participants subordinate to the participant who has been granted the privilege that is participants holding positions that report to a position held by the granted participant either directly or through a hierarchy of positions When denied the default the Team Queues form is not available to the participant View All Work Items of Org Group When granted this privilege gives a participant access to the Team Queues form and displays on that form a consolidated list of all work items on all work queues of all participants in the same Org Group as the granted participant When denied the default the Team Queues form is not available to the participant Chain Work Item Execution When grant
388. ow been executed With regard to the state of an arc it should be noted that the same interaction arc may be found in multiple interaction graphs when abstracting from the interaction identifier So for these arcs their tails refer to the same interaction node and their heads refer to the same interaction node Consequently the state of these arcs will always change simultaneously For example for the second scenario we have seen in Figure 9 13 that the state of the arc from the register task to the send report task changed simultaneously from executed source to executed both in the interaction graphs of both Sue and Anne Exception Handling The interactions that are defined in the interaction graphs are nominated by a human actor Therefore these interactions need to occur However several kinds of exceptions may occur in which they cannot take place In this section we discuss the different situations in which an exception may occur and how they can be handled First in Section 9 1 2 exceptions that occur in the context of executing a task are discussed Next in Section 9 1 2 exceptions in the context of Proclet instances that are canceled or completed are elaborated upon Note that the exceptions that may occur are discussed by referring to the two scenarios that have been presented earlier Execution of a Task In order to illustrate an exception that may occur in the context of executing a task we
389. p label Number of digits to show after the decimal point Hide the field from view if true Hide the field from view if the XQuery value evaluates to true URL for an image to show above the field Alignment for image above the field URL for an image to show below the field Alignment for image below the field Justify text in the field Text for the field label Exact number of characters required Draw a horizontal line above the field if true Draw a horizontal line below the field if true One less than the upper range of valid values accepted Upper range of the valid values accepted Maximum number of characters required One more than the lower range of the valid values accepted Lower range of the valid values accepted Minimum number of characters required Field does not require a value if true Field value must match the value pattern Field value can t be modified if true Don t validate value against schema if true Insert given text above the field Insert given text below the field Render a text area instead of a text field text fields only A tip to show when the mouse hovers over the field Total number of digits expected numeric values only Normalise whitespace in the given value auto generated message yellow mandatory white optional false browser default 12 plain black none false false none left none left left variable name undefined false false undefined undefined und
390. ped in from the parent case Once the worklet has completed the parent case is continued Item level external exceptions can be raised from the Work Queue page by selecting the relevant workitem from the list then clicking the Raise Exception button at the top right toolbar the green forked arrow within the tabbed area see Figure 8 49 You will be taken to the Raise Item Level Exception screen where the pro cedure is identical to that described for case level exceptions except that the item level external exception triggers if any will be displayed External exceptions can be raised at any time during the execution of a case the way they are handled may depend on how far the process has progressed via the defining of appropriate rule tree or trees E Exception Timeout Example When a workitem has an associated timer that times out expires the Engine notifies the Exception Service and informs it of all the workitems running in parallel with the timed out item Thus rule trees can be defined to handle timeout events for all affected workitems including the timed out item itself The specification TimeoutTest3 gives an simple example of how a timeout exception may be handled Fig ure 8 50 Upload the specification via the Case Mgt screen and then launch the case The first workitem Fill Order simulates a basic purchase order for a bike Check out the Fill Order workitem 226 CHAPTER 8 THE WORKLET SERVICE Keks Wo
391. pically used to XOR Join allow new work to start so long as one of several different pieces of earlier work have been completed The OR Join ensures that a task waits until all incoming flows have either finished or will never finish OR Joins are smart OR Join they will only wait for something if it is necessary to wait How ever understanding models with OR joins can be tricky and therefore OR joins should be used sparingly Figure 3 3 Supported Splits and Joins in YAWL on that data and finally return work results to YAWL Another type of decomposition which we won t illustrate in this tutorial is to associate tasks with a Custom Service that can for example send notifications and receive replies via SMS or send an email or interact with a scheduling calendar or call an external Web Service and so on The one task in our example that does not need a decomposition is the one labelled Choose Approval Process This task does not need any participant interaction because the decision on whether to choose either Large Credit Approval or Small Credit Approval can be automatically determined with data made available to the workflow instance Congratulations you now have an executable YAWL workflow specification However more effort is needed with respect to data and resourcing to achieve real utility All YAWL can currently do with this specification is walk an unspecified user through a default path of the workflow 3
392. plexType gt lt xs complexType name tripRegisterType gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs element name startDate type dateType gt lt xs element name endDate type dateType gt lt xs element name want_flight type xs boolean gt lt xs element name want_hotel type xs boolean gt lt xs element name want_car type xs boolean gt lt xs element name payAccNumber type xs string gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs schema gt lt lt lt _ Figure 5 13 Data type definitions Figure 5 14 shows the net level variable definitions for the process All are local variables of string type except that registrInfo is an output only variable of tripRegistrationType Also the variable customer has an initial value of Type name of customer as a prompt for the customer to enter his her name 136 809 Data Variables for Net Make_Trip_Process CHAPTER 5 HOW TO MANIPULATE DATA IN YAWL Name Type Initial Value gt customer gt registerinfo gt flightDetails gt hotelDetails gt carDetails string tripRegisterType string string string Please type name Figure 5 14 Net variable definitions Figure 5 15 shows the parameter definition for the registerInfo variable of task register The variable re quests registration information from the customer and then passes the dat
393. pload will proceed only if there are no validation errors If the specification is valid and you chose to launch a new case a message will appear with the case id of the launched case if successful or an error if there were any problems NOTE The Engine requires that all specification layout information i e element locations colours fonts icons etc be removed from a specification when it is uploaded Because of this the Editor will save the layout information to repository when the specification is uploaded If the specification is later downloaded its layout information will be automatically reattached by the Editor If you download a specification from the Engine to a computer other than that which it was uploaded from the layout information will not be available to the Editor and so a default layout will be calculated 4 4 The Control Flow Perspective A workflow specification can be broadly divided into three aspects or perspectives control flow how and when execution of a specification progresses through its various elements data how and when data values are passed and populated and resource what human and non human resources are required to perform the work defined within the specification This section presents a hands on walk through that covers the basic control flow components of the YAWL language and how to use those components to develop a YAWL specification for a simple business scenario from beginning to end the
394. ply OK Figure 5 28 Parameter definition for task prepare pay 146 CHAPTER 5 HOW TO MANIPULATE DATA IN YAWL Chapter 6 The Runtime Environment This chapter provides an overview of the runtime environment from a user perspective When a YAWL workflow specification has been completed in the Editor it can be saved to a file the con tents of which are in an XML format that can be interpreted by the YAWL Engine The specification file contains descriptions of each of the three perspectives of a process control flow task sequences splits joins etc data variables parameters predicates etc and resourcing participants roles allocators filters etc However the Engine is responsible only for the control flow and data perspectives it essentially ignores the descriptors for resourcing contained in a specification file instead passing responsibility for the resource perspective to a dedicated custom service In the core YAWL environment a custom service called the Resource Service is supplied to provide comprehensive support for the resource perspective The resource perspective of Business Process Management BPM is concerned with the way work is dis tributed to resources It is here that the link between the process model and the organisational model is formalised This is a very important perspective in BPM and one that has not had as much attention as the control flow perspective In fact the state of the art i
395. port Org Data to File button the third button refreshes the form in a similar way to the refresh button on other pages as mentioned previously To export your current set of org data click on the Export button a file called YAWLOrgDataBackup ybkp will be created and downloaded via your browser The file will contain your entire org database including participants and non human resources in XML format passwords are encrypted 6 4 ADMINISTRATION 161 At any time backed up org data can be re imported by clicking on the Import button You will be prompted for the file to import via an Import File panel that will appear on the bottom of the form Browse to the file then click the Import button Existing data is not removed importing data will append new data and update existing data A message describing the effects of the import will be displayed on completion 6 4 6 Managing Users Though the User Mgt Screen see Figure 6 12 an administrator can add participants and change details and privileges for existing participants Admin Queues Cases Org Data Assets Calendar Services Client Apps Logout Participant Corleone Don Vito Privileges O Choose Which Work Item to Start First Name Don Vito g Last Name Corleone Start Work Items Concurrently User ID dve M Administrator CO Reorder Work Items Description C View All Work Items of Team View All Work items of Org Group
396. ports task both for Sue and Anne an internal interaction is defined for which the MDM 05 02 send reports interaction node is the destination node As we have seen earlier the register task which is the source of the two internal interactions has already been executed i e the state of the interaction arcs is executed source So it is permissible to execute the task Consequently the state of both arcs is simultaneously updated to executed both Note that if the task which belongs to the source node of an internal interaction has not yet been executed it is not possible to execute the task which belongs to the destination node of the internal interaction This 250 CHAPTER 9 THE PROCLET SERVICE visit Sue 25 01 visit T1 r oath ti ani la aN initial a X ni re deci broch aX N recei decid broch ga ial Aig T de ures m Li Oi prepar Y ye J gt e Pl urs gt a at ns z5 ations i ae L rat Gy wy Sue decide task is MDM 05 02 f executed qresessseeessseensneeeernns Anne decide task is performatives sent _ initial executed state interaction arc P gt Dreper g regi D bh aa L m performatives sent oouo P dA eae visit Anne 26 01 A A visitala ha
397. possible to recursively define worklet substitutions that is a worklet may contain a task that while certain conditions hold true is substituted by another instance of the same worklet specification that contains the task Any number of worklets can be created for a particular task For the Casualty Treatment example there are initially five worklets in the repertoire for the Treat task one for each of the five primary conditions that a patient may present with in the Triage task Fever Rash Fracture Wound and Abdominal Pain Which worklet is chosen for the Treat task depends on which of the five is given a value of True in the Triage task How the Worklet Service uses case data to determine the appropriate worklet to execute is described in Section 8 5 2 192 CHAPTER 8 THE WORKLET SERVICE 8 4 Using the Worklet Exception Service In the previous Section we saw how the Worklet Service adds dynamic flexibility to a usually static YAWL specification by substituting tasks with contextually chosen worklets at runtime The Worklet Exception Service leverages off the worklet framework to also provide support for the myriad exceptions that may occur during the execution of any process instance Every process instance no matter how rigidly structured will experience some kind of exception during its execution While the word exception conjures up ideas of errors or problems occurring within the executing process instance the meaning i
398. pped in 88 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR e090 Data Variables for Decomposition Get_Quotes Task Get_Quotes Net Variables Name Type Scope Initial Value gt PONumber string Local gt item string Local gt RequestedBy string Local gt TotalCost positivelnteger Local 0 gt suppliers Suppliers Local rDecomposition Variables Name Type Scope Default Value gt PONumber string Input Hitt gt Suppliers_Item Supplier InputOutput Het PISTA VAP OO Figure 4 39 Update Parameters dialog Get Quotes task MI Splitting Query for s in Suppliers return lt Suppliers_Item gt s lt Suppliers_Item gt MI Joining Query for j in Get_Quotes supplier return j Figure 4 40 Instance Detail dialog for the Get Quotes MI task from a net level variable the marked MI variable maps to a single supplier one for each task to be created The MI queries for the task can be seen in Figure 4 40 and are very similar to those generated in our first example When the instance creation type is set to dynamic then new instances of the MI task may be created at runtime after the task execution has begun and split into its instances There is a button on the default worklist handler to accommodate this see Chapter 6 which will be enabled for dynamic MI tasks until such time as the maximum instances bound has been met A more compl
399. processes of patients Sue and Anne OB send archi ga no Taai report IB aial iB amp _4cp broch E oO Bee g recei deci Y ures 7 EE S ations E o Corner Fa E a gt MDM 7 ata IB A__OB A initia regi deci send m gt gt prepar RL ster de P reports j lil ations K O ee ak A 4 Exception 1 A A b Associated Proclet classes for the patient processes of Sue and Anne Figure 9 27 The inter workflow support features of the YAWL4Healthcare WfMS will be presented using the running example shown 9 1 INTER WORKFLOW SUPPORT Specification Net Edit Elements Tools View Help elal e e a mE 277 lol x lajs C Task Icon No Icon gt Manual o 4 Automated FA update Task Decomposition initial_prepm Standard Extended Attributes g 6 Routing a ob a p Plugin gt gt a xm initial receive decide b ochures y ee anae preparations xj P pdate Task Decomposition decide Standard Extended Attributes Task Decomposition Label linitial _preparations Task Decomposition Variables LAT AS h Create entities entities Type Input Output m Update YAWL Registered Default Engine Worklist YAWL Ser External Interacti
400. provide the required data bindings for those variables Select the Stu dentNumber variable from the list of existing decomposition variables then click the Input Bindings dialog button gt l on the lower toolbar Hint To select the whole row click on the arrowhead to the row s left The Input Bindings dialog will appear The dialog consists of 4 main parts top to bottom e The Input To panel contains a dropdown list of all task variables defined for the selected task allowing you to choose which variable to provide an input binding for The variable that was selected on the Data Variable dialog when the Input Binding Dialog button was clicked will be selected initially in the Input To list The Generate Binding From panel allows you to select a source variable to use as the basis for an automatically generated binding Two lists are available Net Variables and External Data Gateways more on these a little later If there is a net variable of the same name and data type as the selected task variable it will be initially selected in this list If you intend to enter your own XQuery expression manually for the binding you can ignore the contents of this panel TAn examination of the XQuery language is beyond the scope of this chapter good XQuery learning resources can be found at www w3schools com xquery default asp and www xquery com developers 4 7 THE DATA PERSPECTIVE 73 8 0 0 Input Data Bindings for Task Enr
401. pty value as the first in an enumerated list list the enumeration like this example i e with no first value mode enumeration normal final pending 4 18 EXTENDED ATTRIBUTES 115 Adding Attributes via the Dialog As an alternative to creating user defined attributes via a text editor they can also be added or removed directly via the Extended Attributes dialog The tool bar of that dialog has two sets of buttons the first of which are buttons for adding and removing user defined attributes cf Figure 4 59 To add a user defined attribute click the add button 3 and in the dialog that appears add a name and data type for the new attribute For enumeration types a field will appear for you to define the enumeration s list of possible values Figure 4 61 Click OK to save To remove a user defined attribute select it then click the remove button 2 Note that only user defined attributes may be removed Add a User Defined Extended Attribute Name Mode Type enumeration v Values normal final pending Cancel OK Figure 4 61 Add User Defined Extended Attribute dialog The Extended Attribute Repository The second set of buttons on the Extended Attributes dialog tool bar allow you to save attribute values to the repository and later retrieve them for other decompositions and variables To add attributes and their values to the repository click the Add to Repositor
402. quired serviceRequired P hotelDetails string gt carDetails string gt subTotal double nN t AV Decomposition Variables Name legs_item LegType Input Ht gt startDate date Output gt endDate date Output gt serviceRequired ServiceType Output avahbAaj oos Figure 5 26 Parameter definition for task register itinerary Task Variable do_itinerary_segment legs_Item legs_Item do_itinerary_segment startDate text0 startDate ooo do_itinerary_segment endDate text endDate yNet Vi a ie stome s rOutput Bindings Net Variable gt startDate gt endDate gt flightDetails P hotelDetails gt carDetails gt subTotal la EAN Decomposition Variables P legs_Iitem gt startDate gt endDate gt flightDetails avahba oosm Figure 5 27 Parameter definition for task book flight 5 5 ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES 145 Task Variable do_itinerary_segment flightDetails text0 flightDetails do_itinerary_segment hotelDetails text0 hotelDetails Data Variab do_itinerary_segment carDetails text carDetails gt flightDetails gt hotelDetails string gt carDetails gt subTotal gt flightDetails P hotelDetails string Input gt carDetails string Input tt gt subTotal t avuiabkhiQhoeese Cancel Ap
403. r indicating a failure has occurred when passing the data extracted by the XQuery to the task variable As a result the executed credit rating process is halted 800 Syaw3 0worklist Tom x localhost 8080 resourceService faces userWorkQueues jsp _ i _ Ea Edit Profile Logout D Admin Queues Team Queues Cases Users Org Data Assets Calendar Services Client Apps Offered 0 Allocated 0 Suspended 0 BAD PROCESS DEFINITION Data extraction failed schema validation at task completion Task ReceiveSSN Validation error message Error 4 9 cvc type 3 1 2 Element ssn is a simple type so it must have no element information item children YAWL version 3 0 Engine build 3 0 1268 2014 07 03 22 35 Resource Service build 3 0 3812 2014 07 03 22 35 Figure 5 11 An error indicating invalid semantics of an XQuery used in the specification 5 5 2 Example 2 Simple Make Trip Process This process revisits the example from Chapter 3 a trip booking service When running this process the user is first asked to register for the trip The registration information includes customer name trip start date trip end date whether to include booking a flight hotel and or car and customer s payment account number After the registration the booking tasks requested by the user are executed in parallel and the booking details are also provided to each task After all the booking tasks
404. r all future instances of the process containing the task until such time as piling is turned off for that task by the participant or an administrator More details on resource allocation and authorisation can be found in Chapter 6 That completes the review of the three perspectives control flow data and resource and how they are supported in the Editor The following sections provide details of other Editor features 4 9 The Preferences Dialog The Preferences dialog co locates the default settings for a number of system wide properties The dialog can be accessed by clicking on the File Menu and choosing Preferences and is shown in Figure 4 48 Tip You can also open the Preferences dialog by clicking on either of the connection indicators on the left of the status bar 860 0 YAWL Editor Preferences R Connections Default Element Background Colour aE B Analysis Default Net Background Colour Default Font Verdana Plain 14 Show Description panel in Properties pane Check for Updates when Editor starts File Paths im Save Options EE Figure 4 48 The Preferences Dialog Defaults pane shown The dialog is divided into five panes which can be selected from the list on the left e Connections The Connections pane is used to set parameters for connecting to a running YAWL 4 10 CONNECTIONS 97 Engine and Resource Service see Section 4 10
405. r the third exception for the second visit visit c Current state of the interaction graph for Sue result of the lab test is now sent to the receive task of the third visit S S u e J Figure 9 17 An exception interaction point may be defined for a Proclet class Figure a As for Sue an exception occurred for the visit Sue 10 02 Proclet instance the exception interaction point has been used for creating the next instance of the visit Proclet class which represents the third visit Figures b and c Also the result of the send report task is used as input for the third visit 9 1 INTER WORKFLOW SUPPORT 261 Option 1 not all performatives wait longer time out have been received for task instance Bi Interaction Graph A Interaction Graph B unproduced Yi Bi Da gnprod8ee Zi Option 2 force complete the task instance Interaction Graph A nteraction Graph B Figure 9 18 For the general case it is illustrated how an exception is handled in the interaction graphs if for a task instance not all required performatives have yet been received 262 CHAPTER 9 THE PROCLET SERVICE context of the first scenario Then the exception caused by case cancelation completion and its handling is explained for the general case Outbox Interaction Point One kind of exception that may occur in the context of canceling a Proclet instan
406. r to from Engine and Validation amp Analysis toolbar actions Additionally this menu also contains e Open Recent shows a list of the eight most recent specifications loaded or saved in the Editor so that one can be selected to be opened saving the trouble of navigating to it via the file open dialog If you hover the mouse over a listed file for a moment a tip will appear showing the file s full path e Print prints the entire loaded specification graphically e Delete Orphaned Decompositions allows you to permanently remove decompositions that are no longer attached to any task see Section 4 7 2 for details of task decompositions e Preferences shows a dialog which allows for the setting of a number of preference items Edit In addition to the toolbar s Edit actions this menu also contains items to Cut Copy and Paste objects to from the canvas Net In addition to the Add Remove Sub Net toolbar actions this menu also contains these items Set Net Background Colour set the background colour of the selected net Set Net Background Image set a background image for the selected net Images that are smaller than the current net canvas are tiled to fit Export to PNG Image saves a graphical image of the current net to a png file Print Net prints the currently selected net graphically Store in Repository Stores a copy of the current net in the Repository from where it can be later added to other specifica
407. rallel with the timed out item Therefore timeout rules may be defined for each of the workitems affected by the timeout including the actual time expired workitem itself ResourceUnavailable This event occurs when an attempt has been made to allocate a workitem to a resource and the Resource Service reports that the resource is unavailable to accept the allocation ItemA bort An ItemAbort event occurs when a workitem being handled by an external program as opposed to a human user reports that the program has aborted before completion This event is not supported by this version of Exception Service 194 CHAPTER 8 THE WORKLET SERVICE ConstraintViolation This event occurs when a data constraint has been violated for a workitem during execution as opposed to pre or post execution This event is not currently supported by the Exception Service 8 4 2 Exception Handling Primitives For any exception event that occurs a handling process may be invoked Each handling process called an exlet contains a number of steps or primitives in sequence and is defined graphically using the Worklet Rules Editor see Section 8 5 2 Each of the handling primitives is introduced below i Suspend WorkItem suspends or pauses execution of a workitem until it is continued restarted cancelled failed or completed or its parent case is cancelled or completed M Suspend Case suspends all live workitems in the current case instance a
408. rameters defined for the workitem with columns name data type data schema complex type definitions are listed here when used the parameter s usage type inputOnly inputOutput outputOnly input and output mapping expressions as applicable and the input de fault and last values Note that the current version of the monitor service does not support data persistence That is any infor mation stored about completed items is lost if the Engine is restarted This represents the initial release of the monitor service and it is envisaged that its functionality will grow in future versions 182 CHAPTER 7 THE MONITOR SERVICE O Parameters of Selected Work Item o Engine Log Events Resource Log Events Tom 22715 28 21 563 1000 003te Hagen 2010 06 tat Tom 227 15 28 22 261 1000 Hagen 2010 06 i complete Tom Orig Det Namev DataType DataSchema Usage Input Pred Output Pred Value Value Value Age long long inputOutput number Casualty_Treatment Age text number Admit Age text 21 DiastolicBP long long inputOutput number Casualty_Treatment DiastolicBP text number Admit DiastolicBP text 80 HeartRate long long inputOutput number Casualty_Treatment HeartRate text number Admit HeartRate text 72 Height double double inputOutput number Casualty_Treatment Height text number Admit Height text 1 8 Name string string inputOnly Casualty_Treatment Name text smith J Pati
409. ranches in a specification when it is first defined the Worklet Service allows you to define a much simpler specification that will evolve dynamically as more worklets are added to the repertoire for a particular task as different contexts arise The first thing you need to do to make use of the service is to create a number of YAWL specifications one which will act as the top level or manager or parent specification and one or more worklets which will be dynamically substituted for particular top level tasks at runtime The YAWL Editor is used to create both top level and worklet specifications A knowledge of creating and editing YAWL specifications and the definition of data variables and parameters for tasks and specifications is assumed For more information on how to use the YAWL Editor see Chapter 4 8 3 USING THE WORKLET SELECTION SERVICE 189 Before opening the YAWL Editor make sure that the Worklet Service is correctly installed and that Tomcat is running see Section 8 2 of this chapter and or Chapter 2 for more information First a top level specification needs to be defined 8 3 1 Top level or Parent Specifications To define a top level specification open the YAWL Editor and create a process specification in the usual manner Choose one or more tasks in the specification that you want to have replaced with a worklet at runtime Each of those tasks needs to be associated via the YAWL Editor with the Worklet Service
410. rating an application amount for that application Figure 3 11 shows how the default worklist displays an instance of this task for a participant to work with Attaining an application amount may be as trivial as reading the number from the relevant form or as involved as considering the business s current risk exposure running calculations and adjusting the figure to something the insurance company is more willing to accept The exact nature of the work to be done is left to the participant and the business rules of the organisation and only that data relevant to progressing the workflow needs to be passed back into the system once they are done Because we can t transfer data directly between tasks we need a number of local variables for our starting net Specifically we ll need matching ApplicationID and ApplicationAmount local parameters at the net level and another called CreditReportRef that will be used by a couple of other tasks in the workflow With these local net variables in place we need to specify how data is passed between the net and tasks with XPath expressions The XPath expressions needed are fairly straightforward in fact the Editor creates them automatically For a task input variable we need the expression to fetch and populate the value of this variable with that of its corresponding net variable For a task output variable the matching net variable needs an expression to retrieve the value of the task variable F
411. ration parameters that may be set in its web xml file which is located in the folder webapps yawl WEB INF Below is the list of available parameters that are specific to the Engine what they are used for and what values may be assigned to them EnablePersistence When set to true default allows the engine to persist backup current process data to a database so that in the event of the Engine being restarted the work in progress can be restored There is rarely any need to disable persistence and in any case this setting should always match the EnablePersistence settings of the Resource Service and the Worklet Service DefaultWorklist Each and every task that is enabled by the Engine during process execution is passed to a YAWL custom service for processing Each task that is not explicitly mapped to a custom service at design time is dispatched to the Default Worklist Handler That is the default worklist handler is the fall through service that handles all tasks that aren t explicitly associated with a chosen service Therefore the Engine requires a service to be nominated for this purpose By default the Resource Service with its built in worklist handler serves this role but any other service may be nominated as the default worklist by configuring this parameter The value of the parameter is the URL of the worklist and its password separated by a hash character The password must match the one the service will use
412. rdana 1 _Gained _ Label 4 Synch ID amp La v Figure 4 16 Selecting Multiple Objects You can select more than one object at a time and edit their common properties in one action by using the Marquee Selection tool See Figure 4 16 1 Select the Marquee Selection tool amp from the Palette 2 Click on the first object that you want to edit then hold down the Shift key and then click on the other objects that you want to include Alternately click and drag the Marquee tool to include multiple items in the drag rectangle To select all the elements in the net you may also use Ctrl A 3 Now choose Edit from the menu bar to select Cut Copy or Delete options or choose Elements from the menu bar then select Alignment Set Colour Increase Size Decrease Size and options to change the appearance of the selected objects The resizing options can also be accessed via the relevant tool bar buttons Depending on the types of elements selected the Properties Pane also changes to display only those prop erties common to the selections from which a property change will be applied to each selected element for example label fonts can be set for multiple elements in this way Note also that whenever you have selected a number of net elements pressing one of the arrow keys will move the selected elements a small distance in the direction of the arrow key 4 5 CHANGING THE APPEARANCE
413. re form without saving anything see below 210 CHAPTER 8 THE WORKLET SERVICE ADA Tree Rule 0 Al Rule 1 BW Rule 2 New True Rule El Rule 3 C Hew True Aule a Rule 4 El Rule 5 New True Aule Hew False Aule New False Aule 0 New False Rule Figure 8 26 Creating a New Rule Tree When you are done adding nodes click the Add Tree button to add the tree you have just created to the tree set selected via the selected Rule Type and Task Name lists IMPORTANT Once you have added the newly created tree to the selected tree set using the Add Tree button you will no longer be able to add nodes to the tree via the New Rule Set form This is to protect the integrity of the rule set Since each subsequent rule will be added because of an exceptional case or where the selected worklet does not fit the context of a case the preferred method is to create the base rule set and then add rules as they become necessary via the Add Rule form as described earlier In this way added rules are based on real case data and so are guaranteed to be valid In a similar vein there is no option to modify or delete a rule node within a tree once the tree has been added to the rule set since to allow it would destroy the integrity of the rule set because the validity of child rule nodes depend on the conditions of their parents When a tree is added to the tree set e If it is a case level tree the rule type that the tree represents
414. real or dummy data A parameter value of between 1 and 100 will generate that number of randomised participants with associated membership of roles etc a value greater than 100 is treated as 100 A value of 1 the default turns off random org data generation If you do make use of this feature don t forget to reset the value to 1 after the generation is done ExternalPluginsDir The Resource Service supports the ability to extend its functionality through a number of pluggable interfaces These interfaces allow developers to provide their own plug gable classes i e codelets allocators filters constraints and so on By default these classes are inserted into the internal YAWL class packages which becomes problematic whenever YAWL has a version upgrade The ExternalPluginsDir parameter sets an external base directory for third party plug in classes The base directory must refer to a location on the local disk for example C yawlplugins Several base directories can be provided separated by semi colons for example C yawlplugins C some other place The service will expect to find classes to be located in sub directories of the specified external directories matching their own package structure and ending in the type of the plugin i e codelets allocators constraints or filters For example if the Exter nalPluginsDir is set C yawlplugins and there is a code
415. ree you are adding the new rule to is of Selection type or one of the exception types Adding a conclusion for a Selection rule is explained below Refer to the Creating a New Rule Set and or Tree Set section below for details on adding a conclusion for the exception types 8 5 5 Adding a Conclusion Selection Rule Type For a Selection rule tree when the New button is clicked a dialog is displayed that comprises a drop down list containing the names of all the worklets in the worklets folder of the worklet repository refer Figure 8 19 An appropriate worklet for this rule may be chosen from the list or if none of the existing worklets are suitable a new worklet specification may be created Clicking the New button on this dialog will open the YAWL Editor so that a new worklet specification can be created When defining the new worklet bear in mind that to pass data from the original work item to the worklet the names and data types of the variables to be passed must match those of the work item and be created as net level variables in the worklet specification Also all new worklets must be saved to the worklets folder of the repository so that the Worklet Service can access it TIP You may choose more than one worklet in this dialog simultaneously by holding down the Ctrl or Alt keys while clicking the mouse in the usual Windows way If you choose several worklets when this rule is invoked for a process at runtime all of the work
416. res as the Superuser name and enter yawl as the password eee pgAdmin III lt Cal ay ZIENI wE Object browse bj d Properties Statistics Dependencies Dependents v B Servers 1 PostgreSQL 8 3 localhost 5432 Bope Description PostgreSQL 8 3 Hostname localhost Port 5432 Maintenance database postgres Username postgres Store password No F Restore environment No Connected No _____________ Jar SQL pane yarr Retrieving Server details Done 0 06 secs Figure 2 9 The pgAdmin tool Object Browser panel on the left e YAWL _LibraryJars_3 0 zip Two library jars that contain the YAWL class files only i e without any third party libraries and so can be used to embed references to the YAWL classes when developing applications The file yawl lib 3 0 jar contains every Engine and Service class file in the YAWL envi ronment while the file YResourceServiceClient jar contains the minimum set of YAWL classes required when developing applications using the Resource Service s APIs or when developing custom forms 22 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION for your processes see Chapter 4 Section 4 15 e YAWL Standalone_3 0 jar A basic standalone desktop version of the Engine e YAWL_SourceAndTestCode_3 0 zip The source code for the environment Download the CoreWebServices file and if any of the optional services are required the Optional WebServices file Un
417. res of the New Rule form for adding a new rule set and describe how the process differs for existing rule sets as necessary To create a new rule set click the File menu then select New or click the New Rule toolbar button To add a new rule set make sure there is no rule set file currently open in the Editor If you are creating a new rule set a dialog will display asking for the path and file name of the specification for which the rule set is being created Figure 8 24 208 CHAPTER 8 THE WORKLET SERVICE E Specification Location Please select or enter the path to the specification file that the new rule set will describe Specification File Ic Worklets repository worklets T reatFever xml ey OK Cancel Figure 8 24 The Specification Location Dialog oe Worklet Rules Editor Create New Rule Set M Process Identifiers New Rule Node Specification Name TreatFever SS Node ID E Parent Node ID fo Rule Type Condition PT New CasePreConstraint Conclusion Task Name CRDA Tree Rule 0 amp New True Rule Description Cornerstone Case Data Attribute Value Add gt Effective Composite Rule Add Rule Cancel Figure 8 25 The Create New Rule Set Screen Figure 8 25 shows the Create New Rule Set form The form allows you create a rule set one rule tree at a time for the selected specification rule type
418. rformBooking and its data representation lt Decide gt lt Custinfo gt lt CustName gt M Twain lt CustName gt lt TargetStartD ate gt 2005 12 07 lt T argetStantDate gt lt Custinfo gt lt Decide gt Custl nfo WantCar F J WantFlight i i WantHotel lt schema xmins http Ammw wG org 200 1 XMLS chema gt lt element name Decide gt lt complexType gt lt sequence gt lt element name Custinfo gt lt complexType gt lt sequence gt lt element name CustName type string gt lt element name T argetStartD ate type date gt lt sequence gt lt complexType gt lt element gt lt sequence gt lt complexType gt lt element gt lt ischema gt Decide Figure 5 2 XML Schema of a user defined data type for CustInfo Note In Chapter 4 Sections 4 7 1 to 4 7 2 illustrate how to define net and task variables in the YAWL Editor 5 3 Data Transfer 5 3 1 Internal and External Data Transfers YAWL supports data passing between variables which can be considered internal data transfer and data interaction between a process and its operating environment i e workflow engine users and web services 5 3 DATA TRANSFER 127 which can be considered external data transfer Internal data transfer is always conducted between nets and their tasks which themselves may or may not be composite using XQueries Note that YAWL does not support direct data passing between tasks Th
419. rklet Service Raise Case Level External Exception O ERA EE TA ie http localhost 8080 workletService caseException caseID 22 es eg Google OVS Awe uO Raise Case Level Exception Case ID Specification ID 22 OrganiseConcert Select the type of exception that has occurred O Support Act Breakup O Singer Tired and Emotional Guitarist Refused Visa Band Broken Up Ticket Sales Better than Expected Band Requests Backstage Refreshments 0O0O00 O New External Exception YAWL is distributed under the LGPL Figure 8 48 Raise Case Level Exception Screen Organise Concert example Offered 2 Specification m_5 OrganiseConcert BookStadium 23 Buy_M_and_Ms_5 Accept amp Start Chain Jul 10 2009 12 51 04 0 00 03 21 Figure 8 49 Available Work Items after External Exception Raised accept the default values and submit it Once the order has been filled the process waits for payment to be received for the order before it is archived The Receive Payment task has an associated timer and so waits for some specified time to receive payment For the purposes of this example the wait time is set to 5 seconds Figure 8 51 While the deadline is reached the Engine notifies the Exception Service of the timeout event The timeout tree set is queried for the Receive Payment workitem There is a tree defined for the Receive Payment task with a single rule see Figure 8 52 8 6 WALKTHROUGH US
420. rnate hibernate hibernate hibernate hibernate hibernate hibernate nicSQL connection connection connection connection SQL dialect org connection connection connection connection connection connection connection connection connection connection dialect org hibernate dialect HSOQLDialect driver_class org hsqldb jdbcDriver username sa password url jdboc hsqldb file webapps yawl yawl hibernate dialect PostgreSQLDialect driver_class org postgresql Driver url jdbc postgresql yawl username postgres password yawl hibernate query substitutions yes y no N dialect org hibernate dialect DB2Dialect connection connection connection driver_class COM ibm db2 jdbc app DB2Driver url jdbc db2 test username db2 password db2 hibernate connection driver_class org gjt mm mysql Driver dialect org hibernate dialect MySQLDialect connection connection connection driver_class com mysql jdbc Driver url jdbc mysql yawl username root password dialect org hibernate dialect Oracle9Dialect dialect org hibernate dialect OracleDialect driver_class oracle jdbc driver OracleDriver username ora password ora url jdbc oracle thin localhost 1521 test Listing 2 1 hibernate properties file excerpt with PostgreSQL enabled 1 Ina text editor create a new file and enter the line set JAVA_OPTS server Xmx256m 2 Save the file as your_tomcat_dir bin sete
421. rnately the Resource Service provides a number of interfaces that expose the full functionality of the service which developers may exploit to override service components For example other types of worklist services may be developed that leverage the resource management capabilities of the Resource Service but present work to users in different or novel ways external organisational data sources may be used in place of the default internal data model supported by the Resource Service Custom Forms may be defined to display work item data rather than using the default dynamically generated forms and so on Also the Resource Service is extendible in many ways for example developers may add new 1For a discussion of how the workflow resource patterns have been realised in newYAWL see appendix A 3 starting on page 373 of 28 147 148 CHAPTER 6 THE RUNTIME ENVIRONMENT allocation strategies filters constraints codelets etc at any time which immediately become available for use in the service and the Editor For more information please consult the YAWL Technical Manual Since the Resource Service provides the default set of tools for user interaction with the YAWL system this chapter describes the runtime environment by describing the use of the service Configuration and Administration functionality is described first followed by the various user interactions 6 1 Engine Configuration Settings The Engine has several configu
422. ro cessing effort and should be removed or replaced with other join types if they are not actually needed A configuration dialog for specification analysis is available in the Preferences Dialog via the File Preferences see Figure 4 50 Note that many of the options are disabled by default since they are resource intensive and may take some time to complete for large and or complex workflows It is recommended that analy sis of such specifications not be done incrementally but rather at planned checkpoints during specification development Because analysis make take a long time and is very resource intensive it may appear that the Editor has frozen during an analysis although it is very unlikely that this will actually be the case To provide some feedback about the progress of the analysis a dialog will appear which shows updates and messages see Figure 4 51 At any time you may click the Stop button in the dialog to abort the analysis The dialog also includes a checkbox that when checked will keep the dialog open after the analysis completes so that messages may be noted This functionality can also be controlled via a setting in the Analysis preferences see Figure 4 50 If the optional YAWL specification analysis utility wofyawl exe is supplied in the same directory as the Editor an extra set of options will be enabled in this dialog allowing more analysis options than those supplied by default The utility must be compi
423. rs Proceedings of the 24th International Conference on Conceptual Modeling ER 2005 volume 3716 of Lecture Notes in Computer Science pages 353 368 Klagenfurt Austria 2005 Springer Verlag Berlin 27 N Russell A H M ter Hofstede D Edmond and W M P van der Aalst new YAWL achieving compre hensive patterns support in workflow for the control flow data and resource perspectives Technical Report BPM 07 05 BPM Center 2007 http www BPMcenter org 28 N C Russell Foundations of Process Aware Information Systems PhD Thesis Queensland University of Technology Brisbane Australia 2007 Available through http yawlfoundation org 29 J R Searle Speech Acts Cambridge University Press Cambridge 1969 30 H M W Verbeek Wil M P van der Aalst and Arthur H M ter Hofstede Verifying Workflows with Can cellation Regions and OR joins An Approach Based on Relaxed Soundness and Invariants Computer Journal 50 3 294 314 2007 31 M Weske Business Process Management Concepts Languages Architectures Springer Verlag Berlin 2007 32 T Winograd and F Flores Understanding Computers and Cognition A New Foundation for Design Ablex Norwood 1986 33 M T Wynn Semantics Verification and Implementation of Workflows with Cancellation Regions and OR joins PhD Thesis Queensland University of Technology Brisbane Australia 2006 Available through http yawlfoundation org 34 M T Wynn D Edmond
424. rst be installed and should be supported by your desktop environment GNOME and KDE do support xdg utils in order to visualise YAWL Editor menu entries YAWL 3 0 has been successfully run on the following operating systems e Windows XP Vista Windows 7 Server Windows 8 e Linux Ubuntu 9 10 sidux Debian Etch e Mac OSX 10 4 and later 13 14 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION 2 2 Installing YAWL The release package provides an installer for each of the operating systems Windows Linux and Mac OSX Their filenames are similar to those shown in Table 2 1 a Windows YAWL windows 3 0 installer exe Linux YAWL linux 3 0 installer bin MacOSX YAWL osx 3 0 installer app zip Table 2 1 YAWL has automated installers for three different operating systems Preparation YAWL can be installed from an ordinary user account without administration rights as long as Java version 1 6 or greater is installed on the system AX To start the installation simply double click on the installation file 4 The installation file needs to have read and executable permissions Those can be assigned by right clicking the file selecting Properties and setting the appropriate permissions Alternatively the following shell command can be applied user host tmp chmod 755 YAWL 3 0 linux installer bin Afterwards start the installation by double clicking on the downloaded file or by invoking it from the command line user host tmp YAWL 3
425. rted time completed time timer status if any and timer expiry time if applicable wW Work Items of Selected Case D Case Start Case Data 2010 06 22 15 27 32 lt Casualty_Treatment gt Starting Service lt Notes gt x lt Pharmacy gt DefaultWorklist lt Treatment gt Started By lt PatientID gt 23435 lt PatientID gt lt Name gt smith j lt Name gt Tom Hagan lt Weight gt 85 lt Weight gt CaselD v TaskiD Status Service Started Completed Timer Expires r 2010 06 22 2010 06 22 1151 1 5_Admit Complete DefaultWorklist 15 28 21 15 28 30 Nil 2010 06 22 2010 06 22 1151 2 2_Triage Complete DefaultWorklist 15 28 34 15 28 45 Nil 2010 06 22 15 28 45 as 1151 3 3_Treat Executing workletService Figure 7 3 The Monitor Service Work Items of Selected Case form Note that all work items for the case are listed both currently active and those that have already completed Also notice in this example that the first two tasks were started by the Resource Service but the third by the Worklet Service since that task is mapped to the worklet service at design time A single click on a table row will show the associated parameters for that workitem 7 4 Parameters Figure 7 4 shows an example of the Parameters od Selected Work Item form e the information bar contains a list of logged events associated with this workitem from both the engine and the resource service where applicable e the table shows all the pa
426. running Updates Click the Updates button to check for updates to existing components or to install uninstall components see the Updates section below Output Log Click this button to show real time output of the YAWL execution log It may be opened and closed at any time e Preferences Click the Preferences button to display the Preferences dialog Figure 2 5 The Control Panel can be closed at any time by simply closing its window Closing the Control Panel will not affect the current YAWL execution status unless the Stop Engine when Control Panel exits option is selected in the Preferences dialog 2 3 1 Updates The Updates dialog Figure 2 6 allows you to update install and uninstall YAWL components It is dis played when the Updates button is clicked or when you have selected the Check for Updates when Con trol Panel starts option in the Preferences dialog and there are updates available when you start the Control Panel 2 3 YAWL CONTROL PANEL 17 YAWL Control Panel Options When Control Panel Starts Start Engine if not already running Check for updates Open Output Log window When Engine Starts Go to Logon page in browser When Control Panel Exits Stop Engine if running Cancel OK Figure 2 5 Control Panel Preferences dialog The dialog lists all available YAWL components and for each displays a short description its current build version as installed and the latest
427. rvice Proclet classes have been defined as an extension of YAWL nets e g interac tion points ports cardinality and multiplicity These extensions are stored at the Inter Workflow Service side In particular for a YAWL net these extensions can be defined via the Interaction Definition Editor Moreover they can be accessed by both the Interaction Definition Editor and the Interaction Service Note that the interaction graphs are also stored at the Inter Workflow Service side Chapter 10 Other Services Because of the open design of the YAWL interfaces it is possible to design a YAWL Custom Service that will perform the work of a task instance using a wide variety of techniques to meet particular needs Previous chapters have described the Resource Worklet and Proclet Services which while quite complex are exam ples of the sorts of things that can be achieved using Custom Services This chapter briefly describes a few other custom services in the deployed YAWL set their varied purposes and their use Please consult the YAWL Technical Manual for detailed information on the development of YAWL Custom Services 10 1 Document Store The Document Store service maintains uploaded files passed as data in process instances That is a task may contain a variable of YDocumentType that is used to store a reference to an uploaded data file e g documents spreadsheets in fact any type of file cf Section 4 14 That file can then be accessed do
428. rvice allows you to define exception handlers for all exception events and even to add new handlers at runtime all exception events are able to be captured on system so that the handlers are available to all future occurrences of a particular event for the same context And since the handlers are worklets the original parent process model only needs to contain the actual business logic for the process while the repertoire of handlers grows as new exceptions arise or different ways of handling exceptions are formulated IMPORTANT While the Selection Service is linked explicitly to tasks as defined in the YAWL Editor and thus available whenever a worklet enabled task is executed the Exception Service is either enabled or dis abled on or off when it is enabled it manages exception handling for all process instances executed by the engine explicitly linking a task or process to the service is not required Also the Selection and Excep tion Services can be used in combination within particular case instances to achieve dynamic flexibility and exception handling simultaneously 8 4 1 Exception Types This section introduces the ten different types of exception that have been identified eight of which are supported by this version of the Worklet Service Some are related while others are more distinct Later sections will show examples of each of these When the Exception Service is enabled it is notified whenever any of these except
429. rvices or to a worklist handler Case Also known as Workflow Instance A specific instantiation of a workflow model as a result of an event For example an order management workflow is instantiated every time a new order arrives Each of these orders leads to a different case Task Also known as Activity A description of a unit of work that may need to be performed as part of a workflow Workflow models are composed of tasks Generally a task may be either manually carried out by a person or automatically by a software application 2nttp yawlfoundation org 3 3 BUILDING A SIMPLE WORKFLOW EXAMPLE 29 Work item Also known as Task Instance A particular instance of a task that needs to be performed as part of a given workflow instance Worklist A list of work items Worklist Handler Also known as a Task Management Service A software component that manages work items issued by a workflow engine and that assigns prioritises and presents these work items to human participants according to policies that may be configured in the workflow model and or at runtime 3 3 Building a Simple Workflow Example Designing a workflow typically begins with a process modelling exercise A process modelling expert sits down with a domain expert and picks their brains on how things are done The knowledge gained on the sequencing and nature of the work done is then transformed into an executable workflow Let s take a look at an example
430. s 1 20 Aarhus Denmark August 2002 University of Aarhus W M P van der Aalst and A H M ter Hofstede YAWL Yet another workflow language Information Systems 30 4 245 275 2005 305 306 BIBLIOGRAPHY 12 M Adams Facilitating Dynamic Flexibility and Exception Handling for Workflows PhD Thesis Queensland University of Technology Brisbane Australia 2007 Available through http yawlfoundation org 13 M Adams A H M ter Hofstede W M P van der Aalst and D Edmond Dynamic Extensible and Context Aware Exception Handling for Workflows In Robert Meersman and Zahir Tari editors On the Move to Meaningful Internet Systems 2007 CoopIS DOA ODBASE GADA and IS OTM Confederated International Conferences CoopIS DOA ODBASE GADA and IS 2007 Vilamoura Portugal November 25 30 2007 Proceedings Part I volume 4803 of Lecture Notes in Computer Science pages 95 112 Springer Verlag Berlin 2007 14 M Adams A H M ter Hofstede D Edmond and W M P van der Aalst Worklets A service oriented implementation of dynamic flexibility in workflows In R Meersman and Z Tari et al editors Pro ceedings of the 14th International Conference on Cooperative Information Systems CoopIS 06 volume 4275 of Lecture Notes in Computer Science pages 291 308 Montpellier France November 2006 Springer Verlag Berlin 15 M de Leoni W M P van der Aalst and A H M ter Hofstede Visual Support for Work Assignment
431. s Title Version Num 0 1 Pane E Net Background 1 Data Gateway None Data Variables Locali2 Fil Colour R 255 G Receive and Name Net Validate Application J Task Custom Form Smali Credit Credit Report Approval Canvas ay Notes Determine Creda Requiremems Validation Results 16 17 No problems reported Connection o o Use the palette toolbar to edit the selected net Status Indicators nl Li Status Bar Notes amp info Pane Figure 4 2 The YAWL Editor Workspace 4 2 1 The Toolbar The Tool Bar contains ten groups of buttons that mirror most of the available menu items Each button will be enabled or disabled at various times depending on what you are currently doing in the Editor The purpose of each button is briefly described below Further information can be found in later sections when required 4 2 THE YAWL EDITOR WORKSPACE 43 File Actions D B La This group of buttons provides the standard file options left to right e Create a new specification Section 4 4 1 e Open an existing specification file Specification files will have a yawl extension e Save the currently loaded specification to file Section 4 3 3 For newly created specifications this behaves the same as Save As e Save the currently loaded specification As a new file name e Close the loaded specification If there are any unsaved changes you will be prompted whether to save the file first before closing Transfer
432. s for the addition of new rules to existing rule sets of specifications and the creation of new rule sets It is a NET based application so has the following requirements e Operating System Windows 98SE or later e The Microsoft NET framework any version If you dont have the framework installed it can be downloaded free from Microsoft When the Rules Editor is run for the first time the following dialog shown in Figure 8 13 is displayed Clicking OK shows the Configuration dialog Figure 8 14 where the paths to resources the Rules Editor uses are to be specified Some default paths are shown but can be modified directly or by using the browse buttons where available he following paths must be specified 8 5 WORKLET RULE SETS AND THE RULES EDITOR 199 Rules Editor First Time Configure e X Welcome to the Worklet Rules Editor Please enter the file paths to the resources listed in the next dialog Figure 8 13 Rules Editor First Time Use Message Worklet Service URI the URI to the Worklet Service The default URI assumes it is installed locally If it is remote to the computer running the Rules Editor then that URI should be entered ensuring it ends with workletService Worklet Repository the path where the worklet repository was installed The default path shown assumes the Rules Editor was started from the rulesEditor folder of the repository If it was started from another location specify
433. s interaction identifier the task may be completed Subsequently the interaction graphs for both are updated created which is multicast to the different receivers So as can be seen in Figure 9 13 there is a performative which has MDM 05 02 as sender visit Sue 10 02 and visit Anne 12 02 as receivers and contains Sue 6 and Anne 6 as interaction identifiers Note that the corresponding interaction arcs are updated accordingly i e the state is set to sent Step 4 9 1 INTER WORKFLOW SUPPORT 255 Finally as the last step for both Sue and Anne the receive task of their second visit is executed Figure 9 14 As a performative exists which contains the interaction identifiers for both of them the receive tasks for the two may be executed Subsequently the interaction state of the corresponding arc in the two graphs are updated to consumed However note that for both of them the execution of the receive task and the subsequent update of the interaction graph occurs completely independently from each other Proclets Framework So Far In Figure 9 15 the concepts that have been introduced so far for the Proclets framework are visualized For an interaction point we have indicated that it represents a specific point in a Proclet class at which interactions with other Proclets may take place However based on internal interactions that can be defined and interaction graphs
434. s look for the file in the last folder filename set or the default path filename if never set In the Extended Attribute dialogs the default attribute set is listed alphabetically in black text while any user defined attributes are listed alphabetically in blue text case sensitive The property files can be edited in any text editor the YAWL Editor will need to be restarted to pick up any changes Attributes are defined as key value pairs the key represents the name of the attribute and the value its type The available attribute types are e boolean may be given a value of true or false Rendered as a checkbox in the Extended Attributes dialog string a simple text string Rendered as a text field color a colour value Renders as a text field which shows a hex colour value font a valid font name Renders as a text field which shows the font details e integer a valid integer value Renders as a text field Invalid entries are ignored e double a valid double value Renders as a text field Invalid entries are ignored 114 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR e enumeration a set of string or numeric values Renders as a dropdown dialog e xquery a valid XQuery expression e text a long text value When the field of an attribute with color font xquery or text type is selected a small Open Dialog button appears on the right hand side of the field When clicked a dialog appropriate to the type will be dis played Enter or
435. s modified the status of a work item The Synchronise icon to the left of the refresh icon allows administrators to re synchronise the local cache with that of the Engine The results of any changes brought about by re synchronisation can be noted in the Tomcat log files There are some system overheads involved with re synchronisation and it is rarely necessary but may occasionally be of some benefit to long running instances Figure 6 5 Admin Queue Tool Buttons detail Synch left Refresh right Secondary Resources Administration The Secondary button on the Admin Queues form provides administrators with the ability to dynamically alter the set of secondary resources allocated to a work item if the work item has not yet been started This becomes especially important if the service has been configured to block the starting of work items on unavailable secondary resources cf Section 6 2 It is also possible to add secondary resources to a work item at runtime before it starts even if none were allocated to it at design time ATW hO Selected Secondary Resources for Workitem 3103 f_3 gt Participants Adams Kay Andersson Anna ari m Van Arsdale Billy Barone Momo Barzini Emilio Bj rk Anne Lie Black Bill Black Diane Brown Alex Brown Diane Brown Frank Carelius Michael Clemenza Peter Clemenza Stefano Corleone Don Vito LCarlanne Eradan Assets COP 1 COP 2 COP 3 iPad1 Laptopi
436. s sent to the receive task of the visit Proclet instance for the second visit As a consequence the interaction graph is updated created for this internal interaction the source interaction point has been executed For the instance of the visit Proclet class that has been created similar remarks can be made As can be seen in the graph the interaction state of the associated arc has been changed to consumed too Moreover instead of the instance identifier T2 the instance of the visit Proclet class has now instance identifier Sue 10 02 Step 3 As the next step in the scenario the blood test task of the lab Proclet instance is completed As a result the send report task may be performed The result of performing the task can be seen in Figure 9 6 For the arc in the interaction graph leading from the lab 25 01 send report node to the visit Sue 10 02 receive node a performative is sent to the receive task of the visit Proclet instance with the instance identifier Sue 10 02 As a result the interaction state of the arc has been updated to sent Moreover the performative that is sent is visualized in the figure That is the sender and receiver of the performative match with the sender lab Sue 25 01 and receiver visit Sue 10 02 of the associated interaction arc in the graph Also the performative contains the interaction identif
437. s the participant in the set who has not been allocated a task instance for the longest time e Round Robin by least frequency chooses the participant in the set who has been allocated an instance of this task the least number of times in the past e Round Robin by experience chooses the participant in the set who has been allocated an instance of this task the most number of times in the past e Fastest to Allocate chooses the participant in the set who on average has recorded the shortest time from being offered an instance of this task to allocating it to themselves e Fastest to Start chooses the participant in the set who on average has recorded the shortest time from being allocated an instance of this task to starting it themselves e Fastest to Complete chooses the participant in the set who on average has recorded the shortest time from starting an instance of this task to completing it e Fastest Resource chooses the participant in the set who on average has recorded the shortest time from being offered an instance of this task to completing it e Random Choice randomly chooses a participant from the set the default and e Shortest Queue chooses the participant in the set who has the least number of task instances currently in their work queue Developers can plug in new allocators and make them available both at design time and at runtime see the YAWL Technical Manual for details 94 CHAPTER 4 THE
438. se platform comment out the currently enabled platform then uncomment the platform of choice ensuring the username and password values match the target database authorisations Remember to change the hibernate properties file for each of the webapps mentioned above 2 4 5 Troubleshooting Memory Problems By default Tomcat is configured to use the default memory parameters of the installed Java Virtual Machine JVM While this is sufficient for individual users or even small groups when larger numbers of users access YAWL concurrently you may experience an OutOfMemoryException and Tomcat will freeze If you do experience this problem the solution is to configure Tomcat to have a larger amount of memory allocated to it when it starts The default memory allocation is 64 megabytes Depending on the RAM you have available a setting of between 256 and 512 megabytes is usually sufficient in the majority of cases To set the Tomcat memory allocation in a Windows environment Please pass on your experiences using YAWL with database platforms other than those listed on the YAWL forum 24 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION Hyperso Postgre hibernate hibernate hibernate hibernate hibernate DB2 MySQL Oracle hibernate hibernate hibernate hibernate hibernate hibernate hibernate hibernate hibernate hibernate hibernate hibernate hibernate hibernate hibe
439. select an appropriate value from the dialog then click OK to save the value to the attribute Figure 4 60 shows the dialog that appears for attributes of type font Attributes for Variable b Ed od D o Background Colour C FFFFFF Blackout 7 Font MMM Dialog 14 aali Fraction Digt 60 0 Font Picker Hide fi Family Style mage Above lt face Above Align left Copperplate Gothic Bold Regular Image Below Copperplate Gothic Light Bold Image Below Align left Corbel Ez Italic Bold Italic Instifv Corsiva Hebrew Courier Font FER Set the default font for labels and tex Courier New aenerated field Cracked 36 X Curlz MT Gaiman Damascus E Preview Cracked 36 Regular Cancel OK Figure 4 60 Extended attributes font dialog The following is an example of a property file that defines the attributes description help mode refresh and showDetails comments are indicated by a line starting with Decomposition Attributes Wed May 14 17 35 42 AET 2014 description xquery help string mode enumeration normal final pending refresh xquery showDetails boolean Only those values that are changed from their defaults will be saved to the specification file For all types ex cept enumeration the default value is considered to be an empty field For enumerations the first listed value is considered the default To denote an em
440. sentially log files that capture the results of each selection process either via the Selection Service or through the selection of a compen sating worklet via the Exception Service These files have an xws extension XML Worklet Selection These files are used by the Rules Editor to enable the addition of new rules for a specification The worklets folder contains the worklet specification files These files are YAWL specifications that are run as required by the service Several of the folders contain examples 8 2 2 Configuring the Worklet Service Manual Installs Only The workletService war file should be located in the webapps directory of your Tomcat installation if necessary refer to Chapter 2 Section 2 4 for more information Then the file needs to be extracted to its own directory under webapps The easiest way to achieve this is to simply start Tomcat it will automatically extract install and start the Worklet Service Once the service is fully extracted and installed there are a couple of minor configuration tasks to complete 186 CHAPTER 8 THE WORKLET SERVICE Open the Worklet Service s web xml file in folder webapps workletService WEB INF in any text editor By default the worklet repository is located within the service s own file structures However you may change the location of the repository if you wish Locate the parameter named Repository and change its param value to the path where you have reloca
441. ses 0 0 preceding follows N _ b class diagram containing the three Proclet classes MDM T ae Interaction graph send report port influencing the behavior of existing and future Proclet a instances 3 BEE G 2o interaction graph 4 for Sue visit Sue 10 02 Sue 7 receive consumed visit Sue 10 02 create c Illustration of an interaction graph for entity Sue interaction states of interaction arcs different states of external interaction interaction arcs unproduced gt sent gt consumed v y internal interaction executed none gt executed source gt executed both d Subsequent interaction states for arcs representing an external or internal interaction Figure 9 15 Illustration of the concepts that have been introduced for the Proclets framework so far Additionally for interaction points a distinction has been made between configuration CP inbox IB and outbox OB interaction points 9 1 INTER WORKFLOW SUPPORT 257 consumed Where the head of the arc refers to an input condition of a Proclet class the consumed state occurs when the corresponding performative has been consumed in order to create an instance of a particular Proclet class Where the head of the arc refers to a task instance state consumed is obtained when the corresponding performative has been consumed in order to complete the task instance N
442. shown in Figure 9 11 As a consequence of receiving the required performatives an instance of the visit Proclet class with instance identifier Sue 10 02 has been initiated for Sue and an instance has been created for Anne with instance identifier Anne 12 02 Note that in the interaction graphs the related interaction nodes and the related interaction arcs for them are updated accordingly i e they have the state consumed However for the register task the performatives have not been consumed yet as the preceding initial preparations task is still not complete Therefore the interaction arcs corresponding to these performatives still have the state sent Step 3 Subsequently for the MDM Proclet instance we perform the initial preparations task Afterwards the register task may be executed The result can be see in Figure 9 12 For the register task of the MDM Proclet with the instance identifier 05 02 we find in the interaction graph of both Sue and Anne an arc leading to the MDM 05 02 register node In order to complete the task for entity Sue a perfor mative should be received with Sue 4 as the interaction identifier and for entity Anne a performative should be received with Anne 4 as the interaction identifier As can be checked in Figure 9 11 these performatives have been sent So the task may be executed F
443. sist with the alignment of objects within your specification when multiple objects have been selected Left to right they allow you to align selected objects based on top edges centres horizontally bottom edges left sides centres vertically and right sides The first selected object is used as the reference to align the other objects to Resize Element Actions a These buttons can be used to increase or decrease the size of selected canvas objects Zoom Actions 4 4 These buttons allow you to zoom in or out on the currently selected net The buttons are from left to right reset the net view to actual size zoom out of the entire net zoom in on the entire net and zoom into the currently selected net elements Alternately you may zoom in and out on the currently selected net by holding down the Shift key and using the mouse wheel Holding down the Shift Ctrl keys and using the mouse wheel will scroll the net s view left and right View Options The button on the left will toggle on or off a canvas grid to assist in aligning objects The button on the right will toggle on or off the tool tips for all items in the Editor 4 2 2 The Menubar File Edit Net Elements Plugins Help This section provides a brief overview of the YAWL Menus located along the top of the YAWL Editor The majority of menu choices are also available via the toolbar 4 2 THE YAWL EDITOR WORKSPACE 45 File The File menu incorporates the File Transfe
444. sk All except startDate endDate and serviceRequired are input amp output variables conveying data between root net and the subnet The variable serviceRequired contains information only used within the subnet and is therefore defined as a local variable The startDate and endDate variables are output variables reporting the user input back to the corresponding net variables Also the input parameter definition for variable legs_item and the output parameter definition for variable itinerary are both determined by the task instance queries see below Figure 5 25 shows the Input and Output binding dialogs for the multiple instance variable specific to in dividual execution instances of task do itinerary segment for each leg within one itinerary i e a single process instance There are two input and two output queries Firstly an accessor query manipulates the overall data carried by root net variable legs before the data is split out to each individual legs_item variables This query determines the input parameter definition for variable legs_item Secondly a splitter query sepa rates the unique values from the overall data carried by variable legs and passes a unique value to variable legs_item associated with each instance The data returned on completion of an instance is an XML docu ment Thirdly an instance query transforms such an XML document to a form that is suitable for aggregation of data to the higher level i e the root net
445. sk instances via mobile phones and other SMS capable devices The service is pre configured in its web xml file with four values a userid and password for an SMS account known to the specified SMS Gateway web service and its send and receive URI s These values will be particular to each SMS Gateway service provider Like the WSInvoker Service when a task is associated with SMS Service via its Custom Service property in the Editor and choosing the SMS Service from the list of available services the service will supply three variables required for the successful operation of the service e SMSMessage The message text to send to the mobile device e SMSPhoneNumber The phone number of the mobile device to call and e SMSReplyMessage The message text that is returned from the mobile device When invoked at runtime the SMS Service will logon to the SMS Gateway provider using the userid and password supplied via the web xml file then if successful will pass the SMSMessage and SMSPhoneNumber values to to the service s Send URI The SMS Gateway provider will send the text message to the mobile device identified by the phone number It will then wait for a reply message from the device which it will pass back through the SMSReplyMessage variable which can then be mapped back to a corresponding net level variable in the process for display in a subsequent task 10 4 Mail Service The Mail Service was introduced in YAWL 2 2 as a replac
446. so there is no record of them or the way they were handled kept for future executions of the process specification The Worklet Exception Service allows for such events to be handled on system by providing a means for exceptions to be raised by users externally to the process itself The Organise Concert specification will again be used to illustrate how external triggers work Go to the Case Mgt page and launch another instance of the Organise Concert specification Execute and submit the first workitem If the Worklet Exception Service has been correctly enabled in the Resource Service two extra buttons will appear on the Case Mgt page Raise Exception and Reject Worklet To raise a case level external exception go to the Case Mgt screen and select the Organise Concert case from the list of running cases then click the Raise Exception button Figure 8 47 The Raise Case Level Exception screen is now displayed This screen is a member of a set of Worklet Service add in screens for the worklist Before this screen is displayed the Exception Service retrieves from the rule set for the selected case the list of existing external exception triggers if any for the cases specification See Figure 8 48 for the list of case level external triggers defined for the Organise Concert specification This list contains all of the external triggers either conceived when the specification was first designed or added later as new kinds of exceptional even
447. splits and joins in place we can now connect the remaining tasks as depicted in figure 3 4 Now that we have finished specifying the control flow perspective of our process we need to say how infor mation passes from YAWL to its participants e g workers and external applications and how information comes back into YAWL once they re finished This is done by attaching a decomposition to each task Every atomic task that requires work to be performed needs to have a decomposition A decomposition may be described as a contract between the task and its environment describing the data that will be assigned and updated when the task is performed and the so called YAWL Custom Service a web service designed for the YAWL environment that will be responsible for the task s execution Note that the YAWL Engine does not directly perform the work of the task responsibility is always deferred to the designated YAWL Service It is possible to define an atomic task without assigning it a decomposition they represent so called empty steps and are generally used to capture a point in the specification where there is a need to synchronise certain tasks and start a new set of tasks In our working example all tasks except one require a decomposition It is enough at this stage to simply create a decomposition per task To do this you need to right click on each task and select the Set Task Decomposition option For this example we ll cho
448. ssets Calendar Services Client Apps Logout Registered Client Application Accounts generic admin user the editor logon monitorService the monitor service Add Client Application Account Name Password ma Figure 6 8 Client Application Management 6 4 5 Managing Organisational Data Roles capabilities positions and organisational groupings can be defined through the Org Data Mgt Screen see Figure 6 9 Oika w aO om Admin Queues Cases Users Org Data Assets Calendar Services Client Apps Logout Roles Capabilities Positions OrgGroups 2a Description Belongs To nil APO Cardiologist A Carrier Admin Officer Notes Client Liaison 4 Save New mas a orm rme Anesthesiologist Figure 6 9 Organisational Data Management e Role Generally a role is a duty or set of duties that are performed by one or more participants For ex 6 4 ADMINISTRATION 159 ample bank teller police constable credit officer auditor properties manager and junior programmer are all examples of roles that may be carried out by one or more participants within an organisation There may be several participants performing the same role for example a bank may have a number of tellers so a typical role in an organisational model may contain a number of participants Con versely a certain participant may perform multiple roles Further a rol
449. stances of the task may be started dynamically at runtime i e after task execution has begun up to the value entered in Maximum Instances In either mode the number of task instances created at runtime for the task will be between the values given for Minimum Instances and Maximum Instances Leave the Allow dynamic instance creation checkbox unselected i e in static mode 60 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR b Set the Minimum Instances value This is the minimum number of instances of this task that will be started when the task is activated Set the Minimum Instances to 5 c Set the Maximum Instances value This is the maximum number of instances of this task that can be created from this task Set the Maximum Instances to 100 d wa Set the Threshold value The moment all task instances have completed or if the number of instances created exceeds the Threshold the number specified for the Threshold have completed the multiple instance task itself will be considered complete and will trigger relevant outgoing flows from this task RY Set the Continuation Threshold to 50 e Click OK to save your M I attributes With the values set in this scenario we have specified that the Do Private Study task can have a maximum of 100 instances created a minimum of five instances will be created and once 50 instances or all those started if less than 50 have completed the outgoing flow relation to Get A Jo
450. status bar will turn green the left icon represents the Engine connection the right icon the Resource Service connection If unsuccessful perhaps because the Engine is not running or the connection parameters are incorrect the connection icon s will show red After the Editor has started an connection parameters may be updated via the Preferences Dialog To establish a connection with a running YAWL Engine or Resource Service or to change the connection parameters 1 Click the File Menu and choose Preferences 2 On the Preferences Dialog choose Connections from the list on the left Figure 4 49 Here you can specify the host name default localhost and port default 8080 that represent the locations of the 98 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR Engine and Resource Service Most times the defaults are sufficient but may be changed if the Engine or Resource Service are installed remotely or if the port needs to be changed because the default port was already in use You may also specify an alternate user name and or password to use for the connection Note that the user must have administrator privileges A default user editor with password yEditor are pre installed for use 800 YAWL Editor Preferences Engine f Host localhost Connections Resource Service Host localhost File Paths E editor Password eeeeese im Save Options 5 Test Connections D
451. stems Engineering CAiSE 04 pages 142 159 Riga Latvia 2004 Springer Verlag Berlin W M _P van der Aalst P Barthelmess C A Ellis and J Wainer Workflow Modeling using Proclets In O Etzion and P Scheuermann editors 7th International Conference on Cooperative Information Systems CoopIS 2000 volume 1901 of Lecture Notes in Computer Science pages 198 209 Springer Verlag Berlin 2000 W M P van der Aalst P Barthelmess C A Ellis and J Wainer Proclets A Framework for Lightweight Interacting Workflow Processes International Journal of Cooperative Information Systems 10 4 443 482 2001 W M P van der Aalst B F van Dongen C W G nther R S Mans A K Alves de Medeiros A Rozinat V Rubin M Song H M W Verbeek and A J M M Weijters ProM 4 0 Comprehensive Support for Real Process Analysis In J Kleijn and A Yakovlev editors Application and Theory of Petri Nets and Other Models of Concurrency ICATPN 2007 volume 4546 of Lecture Notes in Computer Science pages 484 494 Springer Verlag Berlin 2007 W M P van der Aalst and K M van Hee Workflow Management Models Methods and Systems MIT Press Cambridge MA USA 2002 W M P van der Aalst and A H M ter Hofstede Workflow Patterns On the Expressive Power of Petri net based Workflow Languages In Kurt Jensen editor Proceedings of the Fourth International Workshop on Practical Use of Coloured Petri Nets and the CPN Tools volume 560 of DAIMI page
452. step is to create an empty Key Store PKCS12 locked with your password Save the empty key store in a chosen location Figure 10 6 Then use this key Store to generate the key pair and the X 509 certificate by filling in the owner information Figure 10 7 When the key pair is created you can review the certificate information produced Figure 10 8 When the key pair is ready you can export the certificate via Export gt Private Key s first signing certificate file as simple certificate file Figure 10 9 10 6 5 Using the Digital Signature Service First please make sure that you have copied the DigitalSignature war in your tomcat webapps folder In the simplest case of using the Digital signature service you will need at least three tasks Figure 10 10 The first task Fulfil Document is a user task that can contain any complex type of document i e a variable you want to be signed You can define your complex type in the Data Type Definition dialog of the Editor as the example in Figure 10 11 The second task Sign Document redirects the user to a custom form which is located inside the DigitalSig nature war deployment We use a custom form to directly deal with the user instead of a standard custom service because private data like the key store password needs to be hidden from YAWL as the data is passed from one task to another as a net variable which is accessible by any other task You can define the Cust
453. subTotal bi H av rDecomposition Variables Name gt customer gt legs gt payAccNumber t AvARQOOB Cancel Apply OK Figure 5 22 Parameter definition for task register Here is the complete instance query cf Figure 5 25 lt itinerarySegment gt do_itinerary_segment legs_Item departure_location do_itinerary_segment legs_Item destination do_itinerary_segment startDate do_itinerary_segment endDate do_itinerary_segment flightDetails do_itinerary_segment hotelDetails 141 142 CHAPTER 5 HOW TO MANIPULATE DATA IN YAWL eoo Binding Summary for Decomposition pay Task pay Input Bindings Binding Task Variable make_trip customer text0 customer make_trip itinerary itinerary sum make_trip itinerary itinerarySegment subTotal total Net Variables make_trip payAccNumber text payAccNumber Name a gt customer str gt itinerary Output Bindings P legs LegsT Binding Net Variable gt startDate date gt endDate date P flightDetails string gt hotelDetails string gt carDetails string z a v Decomposition Variables Name gt customer string T gt itinerary ItineraryType Input itt gt total double Input gt payAccNumber string Input att t AVAKOOB Cancel
454. syntax Multiple Instance Composite Tasks Select this button to create a Multiple Instance Composite Task which allows you to execute multiple in stances of a composite task i e a sub net concurrently Marquee Selection Select this button to activate the Marquee Selector which will allow you to select individual or multiple objects by clicking and dragging the left mouse button Note you cannot create flows arrows between tasks while the Marquee Selector is selected 4 2 4 The Properties Pane The properties pane provides easy access to view and modify all of the properties of the selected specifica tion net decomposition and net element task condition or flow Sections can be rolled up or expanded as desired and a brief description of each property is shown in the box at the bottom of the Properties pane Some of the more interesting properties of each section are described below Specification All of the specification level properties are set here authors data type definition specification name title used when printing a specification and version number Note that a new specification is provided with a default name of New_Specification which should usually be changed to something more meaningful If it is unchanged the first time the specification is saved it will be set to the user provided name for the file in the File Save As dialog Net Individual net values are set here A Fill Colour set here will overrid
455. t test report 7 ve lab test SS Se aaa EEE EEE J visit T2 visit Sue 25 01 A ie recei decid broch gay initial l prepar py m recei deci broch A ve e ures l P prepar gt ve de ia ures ac l gt gt a tions e SS SS SS SS SS SS eS SS ations current state instance that needs current state decision about the next steps that need to be taken to be created for the second visit instance that is currently running Figure 9 1 The first scenario In this scenario for patient Sue it is decided during the first visit that a lab test and a second visit are required 9 1 2 The Proclet Framework In this section we discuss how Proclets provide a framework for modeling and executing workflows First the most important concepts of the framework will be introduced in Section 9 1 2 Then in subsequent sections particular aspects of the framework will be addressed Concepts In this section we discuss the main concepts of the Proclet framework This will be done using two sce narios One scenario is rather simple while the other one is more complex These scenarios introduce the mechanisms that relate to the various concepts that are employed First Scenario Before introducing the framework we first present the scenario which is shown in Figure 9 1 In this scenario we schematically depict the process that needs to be followed by patient Sue Cur rently Sue is in the process o
456. t Yariables m Output Variables m Input Output Variables entities STRING enti et aes entity identifier lt name gt age lt name gt lt value gt 65 lt jvalue gt lt name_value_pair gt age name _value_pair gt additional data for the lt name gt length lt name gt entity Complete Deallocate a form shown in the Outlook client YAWL 2 0 Edit Work Item Mozilla Firefox _ 5 x File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help e a x A u http localhost 8080 resourceService faces c y ad Google A YAWL 2 0 Edit Work Item Edit Work Item 64 1 entity identifier additional data for the entity name value pair value name value pair name length value l 175l Cancel Save Complete Done b form shown in the workflow client application of the YAWL WfMS Figure 9 31 Form in which the identifier for an entity can be filled in Moreover some additional data can be filled in If later the workitem for the decide task is executed the information can be used for creating an interaction graph 282 CHAPTER 9 THE PROCLET SERVICE FJ interaction Definition Editor Model Interaction Point Window Procletinstance Extra Help E Configuration interaction Point Commit Selection of Sue a Selection of Sue as entity Interaction Definition Editor Model Interaction Point Window Procletinstan
457. t have to belong to arcane masters of lore it s also not something to trivialise If a workflow application is not aligned with the business it s been deployed in it can be worse than a manual paper based bureaucracy It is therefore important that both business and IT stakeholders follow a sound BPM methodology before attempting to deploy a workflow application But assuming you ve decided on a workflow solution it s time to make a choice You can still choose to pay for a workflow system or you can get one for free If you re for the latter maybe YAWL is for you YAWL which stands for Yet Another Workflow Language is a fully open sourced workflow system or 1The term business process management system BPMS is often used to refer to something similar to a workflow management system The difference is that a BPMS supposedly offers richer functionality for analysing business processes while workflow systems traditionally focused on the co ordination of tasks However the gap between these two is narrowing and it is difficult to differentiate modern workflow management systems and BPMSs 27 28 CHAPTER 3 GETTING STARTED WITH YAWL business process management system if you prefer Its tongue in cheek name belies the fact that YAWL is rather unique It s based on a very rich workflow definition language capable of capturing all sorts of flow dependencies between tasks It has open interfaces based on Web standards which e
458. t screen but instead click the Raise Exception button On the Raise Case Level Exception screen discussed in Walkthrough D select New External Exception from the list and submit the form You will be redirected to the Define New Case Level Exception screen Enter a proposed title a description of the scenario what has happened to cause the exception and a optionally a proposal or description of how the new worklet will handle the exception in plain text and then submit the form See Figure 8 55 for an example using the Organise Concert specification Raising an item level exception is identical except that the Raise Exception button is clicked on the Work Queue screen rather than the Case Mgt screen The information entered on the form is sent to a Worklet Service Administrator who will action the rejection or new exception by adding a new rule to the rule set and optionally having the Rules Editor notify the service to reselect the new worklet using the updated rule set see Section 8 5 2 on the Rules Editor for more detail The process requires a user with administrator privileges to action the rejection request rather than allow all users access to update rule sets 230 CHAPTER 8 THE WORKLET SERVICE Note Rejecting a worklet selection or raising a new unexpected exception will automatically suspend the parent case until such time as the rejection or unexpected exception is actioned by an administrator e088 Worklet Service Defi
459. t the status update if connection was successful and put Twitter s response text in the result variable Note the Twitter API requires a set of four authorised OAUTH tokens to log on which are stored in the ser vice s twitter4j properties file twitter4j is the name of the third party library the service uses to communicate with Twitter Two OAUTH tokens oauth consumerKey and oauth consumerSecret identify the YAWL Twit terService and should not be changed The other two tokens oauth accessToken and oauth accessTokenSecret de fine the username and password of the Twitter account being used to logon to Twitter those in the proper ties file are for the default twitter user YAWLProc To use the service with a different Twitter user account re place the oauth accessToken and oauth accessTokenSecret values with those generated from the other account A simple guide to generating tokens for another twitter account can be found here http goo gl1 cyHaR ltwitter4j org 10 6 DIGITAL SIGNATURE SERVICE 295 10 6 Digital Signature Service The purpose of the digital signature is not to hide the data on the form captured as an XML ComplexType but to ensure the authenticity of the information This custom service is composed of two functions the first one is to sign the XML form and the second one is to check the validity of the signature created by the first one Extract key from PKCS 12 2 Certificate Certificate p12 X50
460. ta during process execution Log Predicates may be defined for each process that will be logged at the start and completion of each net at the start and completion of each work item and when data values are assigned to and from each net and task variable A log predicate can contain any text and may also contain embedded values describing current values for certain aspects of the process Embedded values take the form keyword and different sets of values are available depending on whether the log predicate refers to a net task or variable The available embedded values for a net level log predicate can be seen in Table 4 2 while those at the task level are listed in Table 4 3 and those at the variable level are listed in Table 4 4 now Current date and time date Current date time Current time decomp name Name of the net decomp spec name Name of the specification that contains the net decomp inputs Names of any input parameters for the net decomp outputs Names of any output parameters for the net decomp doco Documentation supplied for the net decomp attribute attribute_name The value of the named extended attribute Table 4 2 Available embedded values for net level log predicates If the resource service is handling the task some extra embedded values become available for use within workitem level log predicates The resource service will pre parse the log predicate replacing the e
461. task is performed for her The resultant graph for Sue is shown in Figure 9 34a Via rectangles it is indicated which nodes are related For example for the multidisciplinary meeting for which Sue is registered the result will serve as input for the next visit visit 40 receive node Note that the graph is in line with the example shown in Figure 9 27a Also at the top the resultant interaction graph for Sue is shown Via dotted arcs corresponding interaction nodes and interaction arcs are connected For example the MDM 05 02 register interaction node is connected with the mdo_meeting 65 register interaction node of the scenario that is executed in the YAWL4Healthcare system Moreover as a result of the interactions that are specified one new workitem needs to be performed This is shown in the worklist presented in Figure 9 34b Here the 66 initial_preparations_8 workitem relates to the second visit that is required In a similar fashion as for Sue an interaction graph is defined for Anne which is shown in Figure 9 35 Also here via rectangles it is indicated which nodes are related Moreover at the top the resultant interaction graph for Anne is shown Also here via dotted arcs corresponding interaction nodes and interaction arcs are connected Note the graph is in line with the example shown in Figure 9 27 Exception Handling In the previous section we have illustrated
462. te failed illustrated at the bottom of Figure 9 21b 9 1 3 Extending an Interaction Graph In previous sections we have discussed different aspects of the Proclets framework When elaborating on the two presented scenarios interaction graphs were given that were already defined In this section we elaborate upon how an interaction graph is extended for an entity The extension of an interaction graph is based on the current interaction graph of an entity Also it is based on the interaction points that exist for Proclet classes and how they are connected i e internal and external interactions that exist between these interaction points First we illustrate the extension of an interaction graph in the context of the second scenario Then it is explained for the general case Scenario As shown in Figure 9 22a for the second scenario we assume that for the first visit the decide task is currently executing Moreover we assume that an instance of the MDM Proclet class is running The decide task is linked with a configuration interaction point which means that the interaction graphs of multiple entities may be extended For patient Sue we want to achieve the outcome that a second visit is created for her and that she is discussed during the multidisciplinary meeting Also the result of the discussion for her during the multidisciplinary meeting needs to be used as input for the second visit In order to achieve t
463. te optional of S parameter name has the value parameter attribute optional On Completion Variable parameter nom was completed now Cancel OK Figure 4 58 Entering variable level log predicates 4 18 Extended Attributes The Editor offers a means for defining extended attributes to be associated with task decompositions and variables There are a default set of attributes supplied for task decompositions and a default set for task variables the values of which may be set at design time at runtime the values for the most part will effect the display parameters of the dynamic form generated by the Resource Service s default worklist handler for the work item Additionally designers may add their own extended attribute definitions to the Editor at design time for runtime interpretation via custom classes and services That is the Engine and or Resource Service will interpret and act on any values set for the default extended attributes while the effects of values set for user defined extended attributes are defined by developers of custom services See Section 4 18 2 for information on defining your own extended attributes 4 18 1 The Default Extended Attributes Table 4 6 lists the default extended attributes for decompositions For the most part the attributes affect the work item level of the dynamic form displayed i e the form itself Note that where an variable level attribute of the same n
464. ted using the YAWL Editor with the Worklet Service The Treat task simulates that part of the process that follows the collection of patient data and actually treats the patient s problem Of course there are many medical problems a patient may present with and so there are just as many treatments and some treatment methods are vastly different to others In a typical workflow process this is the part of the process where things could get very complicated particularly if we tried to build every possible treatment as a conditional branch into the process model The Worklet Service greatly simplifies this problem by providing an extensible repertoire of discrete work flow processes worklets which in this example each handle the treatment of a particular medical problem By examining the case data collected in the earlier tasks the Worklet Service can launch as a separate case the particular treatment process for each case This method allows for a simple expression of the task in the parent process i e a single atomic Treat task ee ee 214 CHAPTER 8 THE WORKLET SERVICE Edit Work Item 1 1 Figure 8 30 Editing the Admit Workitem detail signifies the treatment of a patient whatever the eventual treatment process may be as well as the ability to add to the repertoire of worklets at any time as new treatments become available without having to modify the original process When the Triage workitem is submitted
465. ted group or resource will be displayed on the bottom panel for example see Figure 6 18 e Add the Start Time and End Time that the group or resource will be unavailable for Times are entered in 24 hour format h mm for example 9 00 or 16 45 If a time has zero minutes the minutes part can 168 CHAPTER 6 THE RUNTIME ENVIRONMENT Filter Unfiltered 29 07 2011 Resource 16 00 Irene Lewis unavailable 100 16 00 COP 1 unavailable 100 17 30 31 07 Frank Davies unavailable 100 Remove Resource COP 1 Start Time 9 99 End Time 75 00 Until 9 07 2011 Workload 799 Comments Save Clear Figure 6 18 Resource Calendar Management Editing an entry be omitted e g 9 00 can be entered as 9 Note that the start and end time fields are the only fields that are mandatory Optional In the Until field add the end date that the group or resource will be unavailable for An entry in this field denotes that the group or resource will be unavailable from the date selected on the top left of the form until the date selected in the Until field Entries spanning more than a single day will show the start and end date in addition to the start and end time If this field is left blank the entry will apply only for the selected date Optional Check the Repeat checkbox to denote a certain block of time each day across a range of dates If it is unchecked the entry will span a
466. ted the worklet repository The value should include the folder repository and end with a slash as shown in Figure 8 2 lt context param gt lt param name gt Repository lt param name gt lt param value gt S catalina base webapps workletService repository lt param value gt lt description gt The path where the worklet repository is installed lt description gt lt context param gt lt context param gt lt param name gt EnablePersistence lt param name gt lt param value gt false lt param value gt lt description gt true to enable persistence and logging false to disable lt description gt lt context param gt Figure 8 2 The Worklet Service s web xml file detail If you have enabled database persistence for the YAWL Engine if necessary see Chapter 2 Section 2 4 for details about enabling persistence for the YAWL Engine then persistence should also be enabled for the Worklet Service so that case data for running processes can be persisted across Tomcat sessions To enable persistence change the param value to true for the EnablePersistence parameter Save and close web xml Worklet Service configuration is now complete However by default the Selection Service is enabled within the YAWL Engine but the Exception Service is not If you wish to enable the Exception Service proceed to Step 3 below Enabling the Worklet Exception Service When YAWL 2 2 is installed the
467. that has been defined for the task of the workitem Consequently the names of the entities need to be provided if the workitem for the initial preparations task is performed As the workitem is performed via the Workflow Client Application the names of the entities can easily be filled in via the form that is automatically generated Afterwards these names are passed on the service via the entities variable if the workitem for the decide task is performed 276 CHAPTER 9 THE PROCLET SERVICE visit Sue 25 01 visit Sue 10 02 initial NB initial ANB recel we recei decid broch aa gt prepar gt 10 gt p gt prepar jb H ra gt ations e Ve ations ve e ures W ai S MDM 05 02 uy ara e B OB gt gt initial regi p deci f send a PP prepar Lster J de reports 0E ations 2 A n n visit Anne 26 01 visit Anne 12 02 gt e a IB tial initial P i recei recei decid _ broch a gt prepar gt prepar t L gt E A ations ve ations Ye e ures S J a Patient
468. that when an instance of a task is executed for such an interaction point it is allowed to extend the interaction graph for multiple entities In case for an entity such a graph does not yet exist it will be created otherwise it will be extended For each entity for which the interaction graph is extended a human actor can nominate interactions that need to take place between existing and future Proclet instances In Section 9 1 3 more details are provided about the extension of an interaction graph and the entities for which this may occur In Figure 9 15a configuration interaction points are marked with the abbreviation CP For example the decide task of the visit Proclet class is a configuration interaction point as for an entity multiple performatives may be sent and the associated interaction graph may be extended For an internal interaction this means that its source interaction point is always an inbox interaction point and its destination interaction point is always an outbox interaction point For example for the MDM Proclet class an internal interaction is defined which leads from the register inbox interaction point to the send reports outbox interaction point As indicated in Figure 9 15 interaction graphs that exist for entities influence the behavior and interactions between existing and future Proclet instances To this end the interaction state of interaction arcs in these graphs are important
469. the Decomposition section of the Properties Pane or by entering a new name in that property you are identifying which task decomposition will be associated with the task A task decomposition describes the variables handled by the task Like nets tasks have decompositions where you can specify variables and a name to associate with the task Unlike nets which cannot share decompositions within a specification there is a 1 N relationship between task decompositions scoped to the entire specification and their tasks scoped to nets meaning that a number of tasks within a specification may share the same decomposition Besides variables and a name task decompositions also allow the workflow designer to identify which web service the decomposition should invoke in a running workflow engine when the task is initiated and whether the decomposition will create manual i e human actioned or automated non human actioned tasks When two tasks share the same decomposition we are saying that the same activity is required in two different places in the workflow the two tasks may be named the same or differently but they will share the same underlying definition of work From the Decomposition Name property you can use the dropdown list to select an existing decomposi tion or alternately you can select New to create a new one that will become the task s decomposition Figure 4 23 Decomposition Name Name
470. the New button will display the graphical Draw Conclusion dialog allowing you to build a sequence of tasks or primitives in an exception handling process explained in detail below When the conclusion sequence has been defined and the dialog closed a text based version of it will display in the Conclusion panel Once the new rule node has a valid condition and conclusion and optionally some cornerstone data and a description click the Add Rule button to add the rule to the tree The new node will be displayed at the selected position on the tree with the relevant coloured node icon indicating whether it is a true or false node of its parent New potential node add points will also be displayed See Figure 8 26 for an example of a newly created tree that has several nodes added Repeat the add rule procedure for however many rule nodes you wish to add by clicking on the appropriate yellow node note that when you click on a node other than yellow its stored details are displayed in the various form inputs TIPS e If the number of nodes starts to get a little confusing you can check which node is the parent of the selected node by looking at its id in the Selected Node panel e If you start to add details for a new node then change your mind about adding it simply click on any other node rather than clicking on the Add Rule button doing that will immediately discard any input data values Don t click Cancel that closes the enti
471. the actual path to the repository by editing the path or browsing to the correct location Specification Paths the path or paths to locations on the local computer where YAWL specification files may be found The rules editor will search each of the paths provided for specifications for which rule sets may be created Multiple paths can be provided separated by semicolons YAWL Editor the path and filename for the YAWL Editor SE ConfiguePatts OOOOOOOO Worklet Service URI http localhost 8080 workletService 00 Worklet Repository C worklets epositoy 000 En Specification Paths C yawhSpecsD bin 0000 EA YAWIL Editor CXpawNedtonvAWLEdtol iar OK Cancel OK Figure 8 14 The Rules Editor Configuration Dialog Some checks will take place to make sure the paths are valid and you will be asked to correct any that are not Once the configuration is complete the main screen will appear This screen allows you to view each node of each rule tree defined for a particular specification From this screen you can also add new rules to the current rule set create new tree sets for an existing rule set and create entirely new rule sets for new specifications 200 CHAPTER 8 THE WORKLET SERVICE 8 5 3 Browsing an Existing Rule Set To load a rule set into the Rules Editor click on the File menu then select Open or click on the Open toolbar button The File Open Dialog will open with the rules folder
472. the value of the Read Only attribute so the attribute will only apply to variables of usage types Input amp Output or Output Only For attributes that require a URL value absolute URLs must be used A simple solution is to create a subdirectory in the tomcat webapps directory called for example images and place the images within it Then the absolute URL would be for example http localhost 8080 images my Image png assuming tomcat is installed locally To avoid confusion care should be taken when overriding the background colour of a field that the colour used for validation errors HFFCCCC or colours close to it are not used A mechanism exists for extended attribute values to be set and or modified at runtime please see the Technical Manual for more information 112 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR Attribute Sets Default Alert Background Colour Blackout Font Fraction Digits Hide Hide If Image Above Image Above Align Image Below Image Below Align Justify Label Length Line Above Line Below Max Exclusive Max Inclusive max Length Min Exclusive Min Inclusive Min Length Optional Pattern Read Only Skip Validation Text Above Text Below Text Area Tool Tip Total Digits Whitespace A tailored validation error message The background colour of the field Show field blacked out unviewable if true The font family size style amp colour for the field am
473. ti 1 1 N prepar p gt Ha Hb P F a a i 4 E gt i S ations Ne e ures Ne XQ awns current state instance of visit Proclet has been created decide task is finished a The Proclet instances that need to be performed for Sue together with the desired interactions lab Sue 25 01 Sue 2 lab Sue 25 01 D executed_source send report state has been changed graph is updated with W S instance identifier of S u the lab Proclet Oo e instance b visi visit Sue 25 01 Sue 7 Sue 10 02 decide consumed visit Sue 10 02 create receive J graph is updated with instance identifier of the second visit Proclet instance b Updated interaction graph for Sue As a result of creating instances for the visit and lab Proclet classes the state of the incoming arc of the visit Sue 10 02 create and lab Sue 25 01 create nodes is changed into consumed Moreover the graph is updated with the instance identifiers of the created instances for the visit and lab Proclet classes Figure 9 5 As a result of receiving the two performatives instances for the lab and visit Proclet classes are created As a consequence the interaction graph is updated As a result in the interaction graph for entity Sue we see that the interaction state of the arc leading from the visit Sue 25 01 decide
474. tics validation of XQueries is performed at run time by the YAWL engine A semantic error may result in a Schema Validation Problem and the execution of the process may fail 5 4 Data related Issues 5 4 1 Data based Conditional Routing When tasks have XOR or OR splits which branch to choose is determined by conditional expressions asso ciated with flows These conditions are boolean expressions that involve data within the process The data may determine the evaluation results of the conditions and therefore influence the operation of the process In YAWL the branching conditions are specified as XPath boolean expressions in the split predicates for tasks with XOR or OR splits The branches flows whose conditions predicates evaluate to true will be executed by the YAWL engine all true branches for an OR split the first true branch from an XOR split Also for each task with an XOR or OR split there is always a default flow that will be taken if none of the other flow predicates evaluate to true We consider separately below tasks with XOR splits and the tasks with OR splits As an example Figure 5 4 shows the XPath expression which is specified for task Decide for choosing the branch of Book Car in the PerformBooking process depicted in Figure 5 1 For a task with an XOR split all conditional flows are specified in a list and their predicates are evaluated in the same order as they are presented in the list Sin
475. tingProcess ReceiveSSN 130854 1 Create_Book_List_3 0 3 Case Status 130853 1 Executing Created Age Jul 19 2011 15 55 56 10 03 12 42 Documentation Figure 6 24 The Suspended Work Queue 6 8 User Profiles The Edit Profile screen consists of four panels Figure 6 25 e A Personal Information panel where a participant can see their name userid lists of their roles po sitions and capabilities and whether he she has administrator privileges All of this information is read only e A Change Password panel where the participant may change their password Passwords must be at least 4 characters in length and the New and Confirm entries must match e A Piled Tasks panel where all of the tasks that are currently piled to the participant are listed The participant may choose to cease the piling of a task to them by selecting it from the list and clicking the Unpile button e A Chained Cases panel where all of the cases currently chained to the participant are listed The partic ipant may choose to cease the chaining of a case to them by selecting it from the list and clicking the Unchain button 6 9 Team Queues The Team Queues screen shows groups of active work items in a single list There are two types of groupings possible e A participant who has been granted the user privilege View All Work Items of Team may view a list of all the active work items that appear on the work queues of all t
476. tion of the new rule The New Rule Node panel is where the details of the new rule may be added Notice that the ids of the parent node and the new node are shown as read only the Rules Editor takes care of where in the rule tree the new rule node is to be placed and whether it is to be added as a true child or false child node IMPORTANT Since we have the case data for the original rule and the case data for the new rule to define a condition for the new rule it is only necessary to determine what it is about the current case that makes it require the new rule to be added That is it is only where the case data items differ that distinguish one case from the other and further only a subset of that differing data is relevant to the reason why the original selection was inappropriate For example there are many data items that differ between the two case data sets shown in Figure 8 17 such as PatientID Name Sex Blood Pressure readings Height Weight and Age However the only differing data item of relevance here is HeartRate that is the only data item that in this case makes the selection of the TreatRash worklet inappropriate 8 5 WORKLET RULE SETS AND THE RULES EDITOR 203 Add New Rule 12_CasualtyTreatment_Selection_Treat Rule Type Selection Task Name Treat Cornerstone Case Current Case PatientID 3457687 PatientID 98769067 Sex F DiastolicBP 110 Height 1 57 HeartRate 190 SystolicBP 1
477. tion point of node n2 in its Proclet class it can be seen that via an external interaction it is connected with task T of Proclet class X Now for Proclet class X an instance already exists which has the instance identifier i So an interaction with task T of Proclet class X with instance identifier i is possible Consequently for node n2 an interaction with node X i T may be nominated for extension in the graph If selected an interaction arc is added leading from node n2 to the new node X i T Also the inserted arc has the interaction state unproduced and it has a unique interaction identifier 272 CHAPTER 9 THE PROCLET SERVICE active extended Interaction graph Input condition of Proclet class X human actor selects y instances av X T1 create o D X Ty create external human actor selects interaction the interaction nproduced n2 Q LOTSA X i 7 internal human actor selects interaction the interaction tes n3 _Te X i T finish Figure 9 25 Schematic representation of the procedure for extending an interaction graph for an entity Each dot represents an interaction point Note that for Proclet class X a future Proclet instance may also be found in the interaction graph That is there is an interaction node referring to Proclet class X which has the temporary instance identif
478. tions see Section 4 4 8 Load from Repository Adds a previously stored net to the current specification Remove from Repository Removes a previously stored net from the Repository Elements This menu contains the Alignment Resize Elements and Cancellation Set toolbar actions In addition there is an item to set the fill colour for all selected objects There is also a sub menu titled Decomposition that contains the following items e Store in Repository Stores a copy of the decomposition of the currently selected task in the Repository from where it can be later added to other specifications see Section 4 7 2 e Load from Repository Adds a previously stored decomposition to the current specification e Remove from Repository Removes a previously stored decomposition from the Repository 46 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR Plugins The Editor allows developers to create plugin components that can be used within the Editor Currently two plugins ship with the Editor one that supports Process Configuration Section 4 19 and another that provides a toolbar for the setting of task decorators splits and joins see Section 4 4 3 as an alternative to accessing those settings via the Properties Pane Help The Help Menu provides e An About dialog showing the version and build date of the Editor in use The dialog also provides web links to the YAWL online forum and the YAWL issues list to report any bugs or problems you may find
479. to University Get A Job Career Started Draw flows between them and finally between the Career Started task and the Output Condition the symbol which signifies the concluding point of your process You should end up with a completed net like the one in Figure 4 8 4 4 THE CONTROL FLOW PERSPECTIVE 55 My_Career _ e _i_ _a__ Begin My Go to Get a Job Career Career University Started Figure 4 8 The My Career Net 5 Finally check the validity of specification by clicking on the Validate Specification button Y in the Menu Toolbar or click on Specification in the Menu and choose Validate If all things are going to plan then you will receive a confirmation message in the Notes Pane at the bottom of the Editor reporting no problems were found 4 4 3 Task Decorators By default each task may have exactly one incoming flow and exactly one outgoing flow which allows only for simple sequential control flow arrangements However there are usually points in a net where it is desirable to split the flow into a number of flow paths and others where it is necessary to join a number of paths into one path Decorating a task is the process of adding a split and or join to the task By adding a split decorator to a task you are specifying that when the task completes it will be succeeded by one or more tasks Here are the choices for a task s split decorator e No split The tas
480. to from Engine a The button on the left allows you to download a specification directly from the YAWL Engine and have it opened in the Editor for editing Any specification currently loaded in the Engine can be opened in the Editor in this way The button on the right allows you to upload the specification currently opened in the Editor directly to the YAWL Engine without having to save the file to disk Edit Actions aca This group of buttons provides the standard Undo and Redo options as well as the option to delete the currently selected object s Validation amp Analysis v The first of these two buttons allows you to validate your specification against YAWL syntax and semantics Section 4 3 3 while the second allows you to deeply analyse your specification for deadlocks and other issues Section 4 11 Add Remove Sub Net iG Each YAWL specification consists of one or more nets You can use these buttons to add a new sub net to or remove an existing sub net from your specification Section 4 4 4 44 CHAPTER 4 THE EDITOR Cancellation Set Actions E E These buttons allow you to left to right e Toggle on or off the management of the cancellation set of the selected task e Add the selected object s to a task s cancellation set e Remove the selected object s from a task s cancellation set See Section 4 6 for more details Alignment Actions Y il em wl These buttons can be used to as
481. to log onto the Engine EnableLogging The Engine records extensive data about running processes to its process log for later analysis and to keep an historical archive Process logging is enabled by default when persistence is enabled If persistence is enabled setting this parameter to false will disable process logging If persistence is disabled the value of this parameter has no effect AllowGenericAdminID This parameter allows for the generic admin user account to be disabled If the parameter s value is true services and applications may connect to the YAWL engine using the generic administrator account admin password YAWL or some other password if the password has been changed see Section 6 4 4 If the parameter s value is false each connecting service and application must connect using a unique account previously registered with the engine EnableHibernateStatisticsGathering When set to true the hibernate database layer will collect statistics of all operations for later perusal When set to false the default hibernate statistics col lection is disabled There is a slight performance overhead associated with statistics gathering InitialisationAnnouncementTimeout When the Engine completes its initialisation and is running it sends an event announcement to all registered custom services to notify them that it is ready to execute processes and receive requests This parameter al
482. to the task s designated YAWL Service The default worklist is an example of an external service but there are many others and advanced users are able to define and add virtually any type of service that meets their need The external service eventually finishes its execution resulting in values being supplied to the output For more advanced workflows XPath expressions may prove too limiting Accordingly YAWL allows developers to also incorpo rate XQuery expressions for data transfer 3 4 ADVANCED WORKFLOW CONCEPTS 37 variables of the task instance The output mappings for this task instance are then evaluated resulting in a number of variables in the task s containing net instance being updated with values from the task instance s output variables Now we have a basic understanding of data transfer in YAWL let s start specifying the data transfer require ments of our workflow specification Since all data are passed as XML documents all data types are defined using XML Schema Language there are over 40 in built XML Schema data types and YAWL allows de signers to also define their own For our example will limit our variables to be of either XML Schema string or double simple types We ll go through our atomic task decompositions now and add variables to each task decomposition first before we review the necessary data transfer mappings for moving data between tasks and their containing net Imagine that we have finish
483. to the previous arc This time an instance of the visit Proclet class needs to be created which represents the second visit Note that also for the second visit a temporary instance identifier is used i e T2 e lab T1 create lab T1 send report the creation of an instance for the lab Proclet class needs to result in a subsequent interaction This is represented by an internal interaction for which no perfor matives will be sent Note that the subsequent interaction is the sending of a performative starting from the send report task of the same instance to the receive task of the second visit e lab T1 send report visit T2 receive from the send report task of the lab Proclet instance a performative needs to be sent which is received by the receive task of the future visit Proclet instance for the second visit which has the temporary instance identifier T2 Obviously the interaction graph of entity Sue captures all the interactions that need to take place between future and existing Proclet instances In other words the entity Sue is the linking pin between the three Proclet instances As indicated before in an interaction graph we also save the state of the interactions for an entity Therefore every arc in the interaction graph has an interaction identifier and an interaction state The interaction identifier is an identifier in which the first value rel
484. to transfer responsibility for the execution of a work item from themselves to another participant with the data parameters of the work item having their current values maintained Allow work item deallocation When granted allows a participant to reject or rollback the allocation of a work item to their allocated queue The work item is redistributed using the original resourcing specification but with the participant removed from the distribution set Allow work item delegation When granted allows a participant to delegate the responsibility for the execution of a work item to a subordinate member of their work team as defined by the organisational model Allow work item to be skipped When granted allows a participant to have the execution of a work item skipped that is immediately completed without performing its work Allow work item to be piled When granted allows a participant to demand that all future instances of work items derived from this task in all future instances of the specification of which the task is a member are immediately directly routed to the participant and started All task privileges are denied by default and so must be set explicitly for each task as required Each privilege may be set to allow all participants and roles or restricted to allow only those participants and or roles explicitly specified 6 5 Managing Non Human Resources Similarly to the Org Data Management form the Asset Management
485. tput gt senderAddress string Input gt recipientName string Input P recipientaddress string Input gt subject string Input gt content string Input P host string Input gt port int Input P user string Input gt password string Input t AVAKQOOEG Figure 10 1 Task level variables for a Mail Service associated task Note that any all or none of the parameters listed above may be given default values in the service s web xml Each one without a default value will be requested from the user at runtime Note also that you may include parameters that already have default values in the task decomposition so that at runtime values are requested from the user when the user supplies a value for which a default value already exists the runtime user supplied value will take precedence Figure 10 1 shows the Editor s Data Variable dialog for a task that has been associated with the Mail Service Notice that the list of task variables has been populated by the service For each of the default parameters supplied via web xml you may simply remove the matching task variable from the list for all those param eters you don t want the user to override at runtime e g Figure 10 2 has removed the variables for all the default values The output only variable result is used by the service to return the outcome of the send i e either a success or error message Decomposition Variables Name Type Scope Default Value gt r
486. ts occurred and were added to the rule set Notice that at the bottom of the list the option to add a New External Exception is provided that option is explained in detail in Walkthrough F For this example lets assume the band has requested some refreshments for backstage Select that exception trigger and submit the form When that exception is selected the conclusion for that trigger s rule is invoked by the service as an exception handling process for the current case Go to the Work Queues form where it can be seen that the parent case has been suspended and the first workitem of the compensatory worklet Organise Refreshments has been enabled Figure 8 49 Organise Refreshments informs the staff member responsible to buy a certain number of bags of M amp Ms first If the two buttons don t appear the exception service has not been correctly enabled for the Resource Service review the installation section at the beginning of this chapter for details on how to enable the service 8 6 WALKTHROUGH USING THE WORKLET SERVICE 225 Loaded Specifications Change ToMidVenue Action taken if ticket sales less than expected Example used to test workletService Exception Handling Running Cases 8 OrganiseConcert 0 1 9 ChangeToMidVenue 0 1 Figure 8 47 Case Mgt Screen OrganiseConcert case running workitem then to remove all the candies except those of a specified colour before delivering them to the venue map
487. ty 2007 22 J L Peterson Petri net theory and the modeling of systems Prentice Hall Englewood Cliffs USA 1981 23 A Rozinat M Wynn W M P van der Aalst A H M ter Hofstede and C Fidge Workflow Simulation for Operational Decision Support Using Design Historic and State Information In M Dumas M Re ichert and M C Shan editors BPM 2008 volume 5240 of Lecture Notes in Computer Science pages 196 211 Springer Verlag Berlin 2008 24 N Russell W M P van der Aalst and A H M ter Hofstede Workflow exception patterns In E Dubois and K Pohl editors Proceedings of the 18th International Conference on Advanced Information Systems Engineering CAiSE 06 volume 4001 of Lecture Notes in Computer Science pages 288 302 Luxembourg Luxembourg 2006 Springer Verlag Berlin 25 N Russell W M P van der Aalst A H M ter Hofstede and D Edmond Workflow resource patterns Identification representation and tool support In O Pastor and J Falc o e Cunha editors Proceedings of the 17th Conference on Advanced Information Systems Engineering CAiSE 05 volume 3520 of Lecture Notes in Computer Science pages 216 232 Porto Portugal 2005 Springer Verlag Berlin BIBLIOGRAPHY 307 26 N Russell A H M ter Hofstede D Edmond and W M P van der Aalst Workflow data patterns Identification representation and tool support In L Delcambre C Kop H C Mayr J Mylopoulos and O Pastor edito
488. ualty Treatment case presents with a rash and a heart rate of 190 while the current rule set correctly returns the TreatRash worklet it may be desirable to treat the racing heart rate before the rash is attended to In such a case as the Worklet Service begins execution of an instance of the TreatRash process it is obvious that a new rule needs to be added to the rule set so that cases that have such data both now and in the future will be handled correctly To add a new rule to a particular tree of a rule set it is first necessary to open the rule set in the Rules Editor as described above Then click Rules on the top menu then Add or click the Add Rule toolbar button to open the initially blank Add Rule form Notice that the name of the opened rule set is shown in the title bar of the form and the rule type and task name that are currently selected on the main form have been transferred to the Add Rule form Thus to add anew rule to a rule tree that rule tree must first be selected on the main Rules Editor form before the Add Rule form is opened Every time the Worklet Service selects a worklet to execute for a specification instance a log file is created that contains certain descriptive data about the worklet selection process These files are stored in the selected folder of the worklet repository The data stored in these files are again in XML format and the files are named according to the following format CaseID_Specif
489. ugh the use of XML Schema XPath and XQuery YAWL offers comprehensive support for the resource patterns It is the most powerful process speci fication language for capturing resourcing requirements e YAWL has a proper formal foundation This makes its specifications unambiguous and automated verification becomes possible YAWL offers two distinct approaches to verification one based on Reset nets the other based on transition invariants through the WofYAWL editor plug in YAWL has been developed independent from any commercial interests It simply aims to be the most powerful language for process specification For its expressiveness YAWL offers relatively few constructs compare this e g to BPMN YAWL offers unique support for exceptional handling both those that were and those that were not anticipated at design time YAWL offers unique support for dynamic workflow through the Worklets approach Workflows can thus evolve over time to meet new and changing requirements e YAWL aims to be straightforward to deploy It offers a number of automatic installers and an intuitive graphical design environment 10 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION Through the BPMN2YAWL component BPMN models can be mapped to the YAWL environment for execution The Declare component released through declare sf net provides unique support for specifying workflows in terms of constraints This approach can be combined with the Worklet approach thus providing v
490. umed in order to complete the task Note that if the performative had not been available it would not be possible to complete the task So although it is possible to complete the task according to the process definition it is still necessary to wait till all required performatives are received However an exception to this rule is possible This will be discussed later in Section 9 1 2 Second Scenario Previously we have considered a simple scenario for which we have shown some of the mechanisms of an interaction graph In this we only considered steps that are done for an individual patient Now as a follow up we consider a more complex scenario in which we demonstrate that the framework can also deal with Proclet classes that operate at different levels of granularity Therefore for the second scenario we deal with one Proclet class in which an individual patient is taken as the basis for case Additionally we deal with another Proclet class in which a group of patients is taken as the basis for a case 9 1 INTER WORKFLOW SUPPORT 247 penscese stassassecsuecesy visit ey nl Ee GANIGA lab g DE kf broch as TDN initial frecei ma deci Mg ures E 0 0 gt rg Cece L ve_ _de follows preceding g o j Teal eal ri MDM 0 f
491. urce and a task can have exactly one primary resource while secondary resources for the task may include an operating theatre a recovery room sets of surgical instruments a number of surgeons and surgical nurses participants can be secondary resources too and so on e Categories A category is a grouping of non human resources that relate to each other in some way For example a category called Rooms may include all of the usable rooms of an organisation that can be used in some way to perform an activity A category may be further split into a number of sub categories for example the Rooms category in a hospital setting may include sub categories such as Meeting Rooms Operating Theatres Recovery Rooms Lunch Rooms and so on A resource that is placed in a particular sub category is also considered to be a member of its parent category a room called M 123 in sub category Meeting Rooms is also a member of category Rooms Each resource therefore belongs to a single category and optionally a single sub category within that category Each category contains a special sub category called None which implicitly contains all the resources of the category that have not been explicitly placed into one of its sub categories for example if the organisation has a single Conference room there is little benefit creating a Conference Rooms sub category for that one room j I Admin Queues Cases Users l Org Data l Cale
492. urrent process instance this is referred to as the separation of duties or four eyes pattern To do so select Do not choose completer s of task then choose the previously completed task from the dropdown list The dropdown list will contain all tasks that precede the current task i e the one we are setting resources for in the specification s control flow including those in any previous sub nets that were handled by the Resource Service the Default Worklist Of course if you choose to specify both constraints for a task the choices are mutually exclusive and you will be prevented from choosing the same task for both constraints Allocate Interaction If we choose that work items are to be Allocated by the System by selecting the Enable System Allocation check box in the Allocate section of the tab we can specify how work items will be allocated to a particular participant that is we can select the allocation strategy from the dropdown list that will be used to choose a single participant to be allocated a work item from the set of participants offered the work item If the check box is not selected a user initiated allocation at runtime any participant who has been offered the work item can manually choose whether to commit to being responsible for the performance of the work item i e to allocate the work item to themselves The available allocation strategies are e Round Robin by time choose
493. using these buttons e If the current resource status is Offered the work item may be Reoffered to one or more participants e If the current resource status is Allocated the work item may be Reoffered to one or more participants or Reallocated to a single participant e If the current resource status is Started the work item may be Reoffered to one or more participants Reallocated to a single participant or Restarted to a single participant While the queues are refreshed whenever the page is loaded you may also refresh the queue contents by clicking on the refresh icon located at the top right of the work queues panel If the Directly to me checkbox is unchecked when one of these buttons is clicked a list of all participants will be displayed from which selections can be made If the checkbox is checked the action triggered by the button click will occur as if the currently logged on participant had selected themselves from the list thus bypassing the list display The Directly to me checkbox is available only to participants with administrator privileges but not to the generic admin userid since admin is not a participant it cannot have work items assigned to it The Resource Service maintains a local cache of active work items On rare occasions this cache may be come out of synch with the list of active work items maintained by the Engine for example where another 6 4 ADMINISTRATION 155 custom service ha
494. utgoing port is connected with an interaction point which is in turn linked with the input con dition of the visit Proclet class As a result multiple instances of the visit Proclet class may be created e An outgoing port is connected with an inbox interaction point which is then linked with the register task of the MDM Proclet class As currently an instance of the MDM Proclet class exists which has the instance identifier 05 02 it is possible to have an interaction with the register task of that Proclet instance Note that we abstract from the current state of the MDM 05 02 Proclet instance In Figure 9 22c the interactions that may be nominated starting from the visit Sue 25 01 decide node are indicated by dotted arcs For each of them a human actor decides to create one instance of the visit 9 1 INTER WORKFLOW SUPPORT 267 visit Sue 25 01 MDM 05 02 B OB initial regi deci send m P prepar ster de reports ations current state decide task is executed a The Proclet instances that currently exist e aa R broch aa initial recei deci ures PE prepar ations A initial IB j send o Ja prepar ster de P reports m
495. utput port New_Net_4 J P1 tau Approve Prepare Travel Form Travel Form Admin Employer Arrange Submit Travel Travel Form Insurance for Approval a Prepare Check and T ieee Travel Form Update ravel Form Secretary Travel Form Request for change L Figure 4 65 A C YAWL model for travel requisition To make a task configurable select it then from the Plugins menu select Process Configuration gt Task gt Set Task Configurable or click the 1 toolbar button on the Process Configuration toolbar Tip to make the toolbar visible from the Plugins menu select Toolbars gt Process Configuration For example let s make task Submit Travel Form for Approval configurable Now we are ready to con figure this task All ports are activated by default You can configure them by either blocking or hiding them e Input ports can be hidden or blocked Hiding an input port corresponds to making the task silent i e the task will still be executed but its decomposition will be removed and thus the task won t have any observable behavior Blocking an input port corresponds to inhibiting control to the task via that port i e it will no longer be possible to execute the task via that port e Output ports can only be blocked This means that the outgoing paths from that task via that port will be disabled 4 19 CONFIGURABLE YAWL 119 Moreover you can b
496. values Any modified values are stored so that this action can be repeated for a particular work item a number of times before completion allowing the 6 7 WORK QUEUES 173 Edit Work Item 53 1 register Please type name Cancel Save Complete Figure 6 23 An Example of a Dynamically Generated Form work item to be processed by the participant in a progressive manner if required This action is disabled if the work item has no data parameters to display or gather values for e Suspend This action suspends the selected work item The work item is removed from the started queue and placed on the participant s suspended queue A participant must have the task privilege Can Suspend to successfully suspend a work item e Reallocate Stateless This action allows a participant to reallocate a work item to another participant The receiving participant must be subordinate to the reallocating participant by Position The work item s data values are reset to the values that existed when the work item was first started i e stateless reallocation and it is moved from the started queue of the reallocator to the started queue of the receiver A participant must have the task privilege Can Reallocate Stateless and have subordinate staff to successfully reallocate a work item e Reallocate Stateful Similar to Reallocate Stateless except that any modified data values are main tained when the work item is reallocated A
497. variable from the list of existing task level variables then click the Output Bindings dialog button F on the lower toolbar The dialog will appear Like the Input Bindings dialog the Output Bindings dialog consists of 4 main parts top to bottom e The Output To panel allows you to select a target variable to provide an output binding for Two lists are available Net Variables and External Data Gateways If there is a net variable of the same name and data type as the selected task variable it will be initially selected in this list e The Generate Binding From panel contains a dropdown list of all task variables defined for the selected task to use as the basis for an automatically generated binding The variable that was selected on the Data Variable dialog when the Output Binding Dialog button was clicked will be 4 7 THE DATA PERSPECTIVE 75 selected initially in this panel If you intend to enter your own XQuery expression manually for the binding you can ignore the contents of this panel e The Binding panel where the XQuery expression for the binding is entered There are three toolbar buttons in this panel The Auto Binding button click this button to generate and insert a valid binding from the selected Generate Binding From source The Reset button click this button to revert back to the XQuery that existed when the dialog was opened if any The Auto Format button to reformat the layout and indentations of large
498. veral times as in the example of Figure 6 6 where the role Surgical Nurse has been chosen twice because two nurses are required for the work item ASIDE Every non human resource or asset belongs to a category For example a photocopier a printer a portable computer and a camera may all belong to the category office machines Categories may be further divided into a set of sub categories so for example a photocopier may belong to the copiers sub category and a camera may belong to the cameras sub category of the office machines category Each category has a default sub category called None into which all of the assets of the category that have not been explicitly sub categorised are placed There are four buttons on the Secondary Resource Administration dialog e Check This button will check the availability of each resource listed as a selected resource A popup message dialog will list those resources that are currently unavailable or a success message if all the selected resources are currently available e Remove This button will remove the currently selected resource from the list of selected resources e Save This button will save any changes made e Done Will close the dialog See Section 6 5 for more information about the management of non human resources 6 4 3 Service Management The Service Management Screen can be used to add and to remove registered custom services In th
499. vice assigned to the decomposition by default i e unless you change it If there is currently no Engine connection only the Default Worklist of the Resource Service will be available 4 11 SPECIFICATION ANALYSIS 99 When you select a YAWL Service the Editor will query the running engine for the mandatory input and out put variables required by the service if any and will populate the decomposition variables of the selected task with those variables Core custom services that are supplied with the engine include one for RPC Style Web Service Invocation WSInvoker Service and one for supporting flexibility and exception handling for YAWL processes Worklet Service Optional services include an SMS handler a digital signature service and a email sender service 4 11 Specification Analysis Verification of specifications for the engine only determines whether the engine will be able to successfully load and begin execution of the specification In contrast the analysis tool can be used to test for deeper issues in the specification The analysis toolbar button Fat or the matching Analyse menu item under the File menu allows work flow designers to analyse their specifications A number of potential problems with a workflow can be automatically spotted with analysis Examples include spotting potential deadlock situations unnecessary cancellation set members and unnecessary or join decorators at run time or joins require significant p
500. viceType specifies whether to book a flight hotel and or car as alternative to the previous example we group these needs together this time Figure 5 21 shows the net level variable definitions for the make trip net There are three new variables itinerary legs and subTotal as compared to the previous simple Make Trip Process net in Section 5 5 2 Figure 5 22 shows the parameter definition of task register There are three task variables customer legs and payAccNumber with appropriate input or output parameter definition Figure 5 23 shows the parameter definition of task pay There are four variables which are all input only 5 5 ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES 139 Make_Trip Do_Itinerary Segment gt Ea _ O register do itinerary pay segment Make_Trip LJ Do_ttinerary_Segment book flight 4 book hotel register itinerary book car Figure 5 19 The make trip net with a multiple instance composite task do itinerary segment and the corresponding subnet variables Note the input parameter definition of the mapping from variable subTotal to variable total The XQuery function sum calculates a total sum of subTotals from each itinerary segment Figure 5 24 shows the parameter definition of the multiple instance composite task do itinerary segment There are nine task variables which are also the net variables of the subnet of this ta
501. wir toXML The Signature will be checked with the certificate loaded in the jsp page and it will provide the document 298 CHAPTER 10 OTHER SERVICES Genes Di ieioea gt ee ee SS res ed j age ie a pts iy ee ee te 3 ene ee pee ie i Deore ep at A ayp h airy ES eet S ie ermin me x eiyan pren vuam esem tern p ales S i a Common Gr tomem came D S Figure 10 7 Generating the Key Pair which has been signed Note that the Document variable is an anyType type to be able to check back any complex type you may have signed 10 6 DIGITAL SIGNATURE SERVICE a pa par a a Enirione Crair EGA BEG Eee CEATCATE LA Tara ieee Celli Ohiak Amira Taan Hendi chl Fi ba Frapi 17 p De TH SBOE eA A D THAL POPE PCR ROE I N EM AIEEE oe O EHD b CEST ATE pn p SS Pu eg ee ere we cae Com i be O hiin Gis te O Ferais imya ed pe a m pian D t etom prae soe ee Figure 10 9 Exporting the Certificate 299 300 CHAPTER 10 OTHER SERVICES Fulfil Sign Document Document Signature Figure 10 10 Example YAWL Process e090 Update Data Type Definitions D e 1 lt xs schema xmins xs http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema gt lt xs complexType name Document gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs element name FamilyName type xs string gt lt xs
502. wnloaded and updated uploaded during the life of the process instance To minimise the amount of data actually passed to and from the YAWL Engine uploaded files are stored directly in the Document Store and only a reference to the file is passed to from the Engine To enable this file storage feature the Document Store must first be installed cf Section 2 4 3 and registered with the Engine as a client application cf Section 6 4 4 The Document Store has a configuration setting in its web xml file labelled RetainStoredDocsOnCaseCompletion that determines whether an uploaded filed is archived or removed from the Document Store when a case completes or is cancelled cf Section 6 1 The setting defaults to a false value 10 2 Web Service Invoker Service The Web Service Invoker Service WSInvoker provides a mediation layer between the Engine and external SOAP web services In this way a task can be associated with an operation of a SOAP web service at design time and at runtime task instances are routed to the specified SOAP web service through the WSInvoker Without this layer a Custom Service would have to be developed between each and every SOAP web service and the Engine on an individual web service basis A task is associated with WSInvoker by selecting it from the dropdown list of the Custom Service property in the Decomposition section of the Property Pane in the Editor and choosing the WSInvoker from the list of available
503. y e Enrol e Do Subjects e Pass All Subjects e Get Degree The resulting nets are shown in Figures 4 10 and 4 11 My_Career Attend_University mE d D m Enrol Do Subjects Pass All Get Degree Subjects Figure 4 11 The Attend University sub net 4 4 5 Multiple Instance Atomic Tasks Multiple Instance Atomic Tasks MI Tasks allow you to execute multiple instances of a task concurrently That is from a single MI Task added to a net at design time a number of instances of that task are instanti ated at runtime based on parameters set for the task and the data available to it To create a Multiple Instance Atomic Task 1 Click on the Multiple Instance Atomic Task button E in the Palette or right click in an empty part of the canvas and choose Multiple Atomic Task Rey Go back to the My Career Net We are going to replace our existing Do Private Study Atomic Task with a Multiple Instance Atomic task so click on the Do Private Study Atomic Task and delete it We will add in the new Multiple Instance Atomic task next 4 4 THE CONTROL FLOW PERSPECTIVE 59 2 Place anew Multiple Instance Atomic Task in your Net 62 Set the name of this task by selecting the Decomposition s Name property and choosing the same de composition as before Do Private Study from the drop down list Reconnect the flow relations from Begin My Career to Do Private
504. y button 6 add a label and description of the values to the dialog that appears then click OK to save All of the attributes in the dialog that have non default values will be saved to the repository under the label provided To retrieve previously saved values for attributes from the repository click the Load from Repository but ton select the label for the desired values from the list then click OK All of the values previously saved to the repository under the selected label will be added to the dialog and will overwrite any existing values set for those attributes Finally existing attribute value sets can be removed from the repository at any time by clicking the Remove from Repository button 6 selecting the label for the set to remove then clicking OK 4 18 3 Extended Attribute Example To show a small sample of what can be done with extended attributes a simple specification called Eter nalQuestion will be used The specification consists of two atomic tasks the first requests an answer to the eternal question from a user while the second shows the answer provided in an Input Only variable Fig ure 4 62 shows the process model while Figure 4 63 shows how the dynamic form for the Answer task is displayed by default We would like to change the look of the form for the Answer task from the generic default to something more appropriate for this process so values are provided for external attributes as fo
505. y checking the checkbox of the respective interaction Note that future Proclet instances have a negative case identifier In the Internal Interaction panel internal interactions can be selected by checking the checkbox of the re spective internal interaction For example for Sue one instance of the visit Proclet class will be created Moreover for the multidisciplinary meeting an instance exists which has 65 as the instance identifier As a result she is also registered for this meeting After selection of the interactions the panel is shown again which allows for the selection of a node for which interactions can be selected So the process can be repeated until no more interactions are required An example of this can be seen in Figure 9 33 which is a follow up to Figure 9 32 In particular in Figure 9 33a a node is shown for the future instance of the visit Proclet class Note that this node has a temporary instance identifier which is a negative number Moreover via the mdo_meeting 65 register node the patient is registered for the multidisciplinary meeting For the mdo_meeting 65 register node that has been selected the next screen is shown in Figure 9 33b As can be seen on the right side of this figure there is only an internal interaction that can be selected By selecting this interaction it will be assumed that after registering Sue for the multidisciplinary meeting the send report
506. y or as part of a cycle back to itself for example if role A belongs to role B which in turn belongs to role C you will not be allowed to have role C belonging to role A or B An org group can belong to another org group similarly to a role You may also set an Group Type for an org group via a dropdown select the type of group from the list then click the Save button A position may report to another position allowing a lines of reporting hierarchy of positions to be created Again this is done in a similar fashion to setting a role belongs to hierarchy and the same cyclical constraints apply A position may also belong to an Org Group which can be chosen via the Org Group dropdown on the Positions tab page Figure 6 10 Admin Queves Cases Users Assets Calendar Services Client Apps Logout p Z A Roles Capabilities Positions OrgGroups D Description Reports To Head of CD Org Group Carrier Department Notes Save New Name Members 6 Reset Remove CD clerk Johnny Fontaine Figure 6 10 The Positions tab page To enable easy backup and recovery of organisational data two tool buttons are provided on the top right of the tab panel They may be seen in detail in Figure 6 11 Si G Gy Figure 6 11 Org Data Form Tool Buttons The button on the left is the Import Org Data from File button and the button in the centre is the Ex
507. yawl as the database name leave all other fields as they are and click OK That completes the installation of PostgreSQL and the admin tool pgAdmin and the creation of the YAWL database When YAWL is started it will automatically create the required database tables as part of its startup process 2 4 3 Installing YAWL Services All the necessary YAWL files can be downloaded from the YAWL Engine download page on SourceForge http sourceforge net projects yawl files YAWL 20Engine The latest release folder will contain these files e YAWL_CoreWebServices_3 0 zip The core set of YAWL services comprising the core Engine and the Resource Worklet Web Service Invoker Mail DocumentStore and Monitor Services e YAWL_OptionalWebServices_3 0 zip Extra services that you may find useful for particular purposes http www yawlfoundation org pages resources latestbuilds html Swww pgadmin org 2 4 MANUAL INSTALLATION YAWL ENTERPRISE 21 j PostereSQL ele 1x J Nea Initialise database cluster IV Initialize database cluster Port number 5432 Addresses Accept connections on all addreses not just localhost Locale eo f Encoding Server jures x Client fuss Superuser name Postere This is the internal database username and not the service account For security reasons Password eree the password should NOT be the same as the service account Password again p Figure 2 8 Keep postg
508. ype gt lt xs complexType name Book gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs element name Title type xs string gt lt xs element name Author type xs string gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs complexType name Booklist gt lt xs sequence maxOccurs 5 gt lt xs element name Book type Book gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs schema gt Figure 4 31 Adding the Geek Book and Booklist complex data types As you enter your schema it is continuously validated Remember to check the messages pane at the bottom of the dialog for helpful messages about current errors in the schema including the line and column numbers where the error occurs An example of this is shown in Figure 4 32 When the schema passes validation the pane will show a green OK message and the Done button will be enabled The schema may now be used to define Net or Task data variables in your specification Open the Data Type Definitions dialog and type in the XML text that appears in Figure 4 31 The Data Type Definition dialog comes with its own toolbar Figure 4 33 From left to right the buttons are Cut Copy Paste text Undo Redo changes Toggle the viewing of line numbers on and off Format text fix indentation etc Store Load and Remove selected definitions to and from the Repository this allows data definitions to be reused in other specificat
509. zip the contents of the file to lt your_tomcat_dir gt webapps directory When Tomcat is re started it will automatically unpack each war file into its own directory under webapps cf Figure 2 10 There are six core web services 1 yawl war the core workflow engine 2 resourceService war handles the allocation of tasks to resources contains the default worklist han dler generates dynamic forms manages codelets manages organisational data 3 workletService war handles dynamic flexibility and exception handling 4 yawlWSInvoker war allocates tasks to synchronous web services 5 mailService war sends emails base on task data to specified recipients 6 documentStore war manages binary files passed as data values between nets and tasks during the execution of a case 7 monitorService war provides basic monitoring capabilities for active processes The Resource Service is described in detail in Chapter 6 The Worklet Service is described in detail in Chapter 8 The WS Invoker DocumentStore and Mail Services are described in Chapter 10 The Monitor Service is described in Chapter 7 There are six optional web services 1 digitalSignature war authenticates the information provided on a form using a digital signature via X 509 certificates and private keys 2 mailSender war Deprecated provides a custom form for a task from which an email can be sent 3 yawlSMSInvoker war allows tasks to be read and modified via S

YAWL User Manual 3.0 version

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents